JP2022121686A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing control loads.

SOLUTION: Display data is read from storage means and is set by setting means as display data to be displayed on display means by display control means. The storage means stores initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed in the case that a game's initial setting is performed. The setting means reads the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and sets it as the display data to be displayed on the display means, and in performance executed after the initial setting is over, uses the initial display data read in the initial setting as display data to be displayed on the display means.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in game machines, display devices such as liquid crystal display devices display various effects images to enhance the interest of games.

JP-A-2006-223598

However, the gaming machine described above is required to further reduce the control load.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of reducing the control load.

To achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and display by the display control means. and setting means for reading out the display data from the storage means and setting the display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means. wherein the storage means stores initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed when initial settings of the game are executed, and the setting means stores the initial display data in the initial settings. display data read out from means and set as display data to be displayed on said display means, and in an effect executed after completion of said initial setting, said initial display data read out by said initial setting is displayed on said display means. It is used as data.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means comprises a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means, and the display control means displays the display mode on the first display means or the second display means, and the setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting, and displays the data on the first display means. and the second display means, and in an effect executed after the initial setting, the initial display data read out in the initial setting is displayed on the first display means and the second display means. It is set as display data to be displayed on either one of means.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the initial display data is set such that the display areas of the first display means and the second display means are set as one display area. is.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the acquisition means for acquiring information and the information acquired by the acquisition means are determined based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating a result of discrimination determined by the determination means, wherein the identification information is the initial identification information displayed in the initial image. and normal identification information that is displayed dynamically after the completion of the initial setting.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the initial image is a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a display image containing the initial identification information displayed on the second display means. and a display image including a game information image showing game contents to be displayed.

The gaming machine according to claim 6 is the gaming machine according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the initial identification information displayed on the first display means during the initial setting is composed of a smaller amount of data than the normal identification information. It is what is done.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there are provided display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and the display mode displayed by the display control means. storage means for storing corresponding display data; and setting means for reading the display data from the storage means and setting the display data as display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, wherein the storage means The means stores initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed when initial settings of the game are executed, and the setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial settings, It is set as display data to be displayed on the display means, and the initial display data read out in the initial setting is used as display data to be displayed on the display means in an effect executed after the completion of the initial setting. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed.

According to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine according to claim 1, the display means is composed of first display means and second display means different from the first display means, and the display The control means causes the first display means or the second display means to display the display mode, and the setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting to display the first display data. It is set as display data to be displayed on the display means and the second display means. Since the data is set as display data to be displayed on either one of the two display means, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed even when displaying on the first display means and the second display means.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 2, the initial display data can combine the display areas of the first display means and the second display means into one display area. , there is an effect that the display data can be reduced.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition means and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating a result of discrimination determined by the determination means, wherein the identification information is the initial image. Since it is composed of the initial identification information displayed and the normal identification information displayed dynamically after the completion of the initial setting, the initial setting can be recognized by the initial identification information. be.

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 4, the initial image includes the display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and the first identification information. Since it is composed of at least a display image including a game information image showing the game content displayed on the two display means, there is an effect that the game content can be notified at the time of initial setting.

According to the gaming machine of claim 6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 4 or 5, the initial identification information displayed during the initialization on the first display means is the normal identification information. Since it is configured with a smaller amount of data, there is an effect that the control load at the time of initial setting can be suppressed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface lower unit. (a) is a front view of a base member, a first outlet, a second outlet, a lower left plate member, and a lower right plate member, and (b) is a base member taken along line XVb-XVb in FIG. 15(a). and a cross-sectional view of the left lower plate member. It is a front perspective view of a vertical movement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical movement unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a vertical movement unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the up-and-down motion unit; It is a front view of a vertical motion unit. It is a front view of a vertical movement unit. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the compound action unit; Fig. 2 is a front exploded perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the compound action unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of the expansion and contraction effect device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion and contraction effect device. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a front view of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a graph showing the distance from a standard horizontal line of a projection part. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a tilting motion unit and a sliding motion unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a sliding operation unit; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting motion unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a production|presentation member and a 2nd drive device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the rocking|swiveling angle of the production|presentation member with respect to the rocking|swiveling angle of a transmission member. 4 is a front view of a tilting motion unit and a sliding motion unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of a tilting motion unit and a sliding motion unit; FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring in a second embodiment. 4 is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring; FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring in a third embodiment. (a) is a back perspective view of a transmission member in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a back perspective view of a moving contact member. (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member, and (c) and (d) are top views of the transmission member. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the main-body member of the production|presentation member typically. 4 is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of a compound action unit according to the fifth embodiment; It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. (a) is a partial front view of a rotating arm member in a sixth embodiment, (b) is a partial top view of the rotating arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXb in FIG. ) is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a switching device. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a tilting motion unit according to a seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters in a 1st control example, a special design reservation ball storage area, a special design reservation ball execution area, and a normal design reservation ball storage area. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a first winning random number table set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first control example, and (b) is in the ROM of the main controller 110 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing a set first winning type selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram showing a second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller 110 in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is set in the variation pattern selection table, It is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for big hits, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a (normal) variation pattern table for loss, and (d) is a variation pattern for loss (probable variation) It is the figure which showed the table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example, and (b) is the content of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing contents of a ball-entering effect selection table in the first control example; 2 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a work RAM of a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a correction information table in the first control example. be. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing set coordinates of a display area in the first control example; (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the power is turned on in the first control example. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a display data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. It is an example of a timing chart of the variable display mode during the time saving game in the first control example. (a) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device during time saving in the first control example. (a) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device during time saving in the first control example. It is a timing chart in which the time production in the first control example is set. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 8 is a flow chart showing stop setting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing time setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing an advance notice selection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production|presentation management process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the extension production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 9 is a flow chart showing specific time effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing a ball-entering effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing special effect correction processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing advance notice command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing a ball entry effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a specific time effect command process to be executed. (a) is a flowchart showing an effect mode change command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by . 8 is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect information correction processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) to (b) are explanatory diagrams of control of the stepping motor in the first control example.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are connected to the game board. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 .

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below. The first variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the lower board unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 16R probability variable jackpot, a 16R short time jackpot, and a 2R probability variable with short time jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “16R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds and becomes a time-saving state. It is a jackpot where the number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds, but no time-saving game is awarded. In addition, "16R time-saving jackpot" shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment). It's about.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows some of the balls launched to the game board that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes. On the other hand, an electric accessory 640a is provided in the second winning hole 640, and it is difficult to open the electric accessory 640a normally (when it is not during time saving), so that the game ball can enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加is in a difficult state.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning a prize in the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a first specific prize winning port 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the variable display device 80, and a second variable winning device 650 having a circular shape of about the same size as the other winning ports 63, 64, 640 is placed substantially in the center. A specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the normally closed specific winning holes 65a and 650a are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific prize winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b ( See FIG. 15, only the outline is shown). The first specific prize winning port 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted to the front side by driving the large opening solenoid 65b to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the first specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal state are formed. The closed state and the state of the closed state are alternately repeated.

Specifically, the second variable prize winning device 650 has a triangular opening and closing plate in front view disposed on the left side of the second specific prize winning opening 650a, and is driven to open and close to the left with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. and a large open solenoid (not shown). The second specific prize winning port 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big hit, the opening/closing plate is tilted to the left by driving the small opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the open state and the normal state are formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to win the ball in the second variable winning device 650 by hitting left, thus eliminating the trouble of switching between hitting left and hitting right each time the game state changes. can do.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area. Triggered by a ball entering the specific winning openings 65a and 650a while the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are open, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is opened for a predetermined time. A game state in which the game is opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a and 650a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. It is not limited to the left side of the variable display device 80, and may be, for example, below the first prize winning opening 64.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 314 and a second outlet 315 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out hole 314 or the second out hole 315 (not shown). guided to the road. The first out port 314 is arranged on the lower left side of the first prize winning port 64 , while the second out port 315 is arranged on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64 . That is, the second out port 315 is arranged on the opposite side of the first out port 314 with the first winning port 64 interposed therebetween.

Therefore, the ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end of the game area (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) on the right side of the first winning hole 64 (the right side in FIG. 2) is the inner rail 61 Or it flows down along the slope of the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 315, while the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area is located on the left side of the first winning port 64 in front view. The ball that has reached it flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return destination addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 102) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 100) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include a vertical driving motor 431 , an opening/closing driving motor 466 , and other driving motors 531 , 561 , 631 , 661 , and 751 .

Various drive motors (the vertical drive motor 431, the open/close drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, and 751) will now be described. These various drive motors are composed of, for example, known stepping motors, and are provided in plurality in association with the respective roles installed in the pachinko machine 10 in order to operate the respective roles. These various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, a command including at least the number of steps of rotation, the direction of rotation (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed is sent from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). to output A control IC (motor driver) drives various corresponding drive motors based on the output command. As the motor control IC (motor driver), a single IC that can set operations for a plurality of drive motors may be adopted, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. may be configured to operate the drive motors corresponding to different accessories respectively. When using a motor control IC (motor driver) that can set the operation for multiple drive motors, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps, etc., includes information for specifying the type of drive motor. and output it.

Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described using the vertical drive motor 431 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the up/down drive motor 431 based on the set command, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is operated each time one step of operation is executed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the execution has been executed is output. This execution signal allows the MPU 221 to grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has moved from the origin (retreat) position. That is, with the origin (retraction) position as the position of step 0, the value is updated by 1 each time an execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, the value is incremented by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (retreat) position to the end point (projection) position. Also, the value is decremented by 1 each time one step is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (projection) position to the origin (retraction) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the action position of each role based on the value of the step counter.

Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and is the position to which the character moves when returning to the origin when the power is turned on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is at the origin position. If the origin sensor is not turned on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor turns on. The accessory is varied until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position is the reference position for the action of each accessory. The step counter described above is reset to 0 when the accessory returns to the origin position (that is, when the origin sensor detects that it is on). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

Next, an example of control of various drive motors (vertical drive motor 431 in this case) by a motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one turn in four steps) will be described as an example. It is configured so that the rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once per step.

First, FIG. 135(a) is a diagram showing an overview of the up-and-down drive motor 431 which is a stepping motor. The up-and-down drive motor 431 is configured such that when excitation control data is sent from the sound lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC, the portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited. Specifically, excitation is performed by the motor control IC according to excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to "A, B, C, D" shown in FIG. 135(a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any of A, B, C, and D) of the vertical drive motor 431 is "1", it is excited, and the excitation control data is "0". is not excited. For example, if the excitation control data is "1100", A and B are excited and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 135(b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The sound lamp control device 113 also includes an excitation counter that is used to select and set one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 135(b)). is provided. This excitation counter can be updated by 1 in the positive direction starting from "0". It's becoming Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, each part is immediately excited based on the excitation control data (that is, the vertical drive motor 431 operates without time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Additionally, the excitation counter can be updated in the negative direction as well. That is, the value can be updated in the order of "0"→"3"→"2"→"1"→"0" starting from "0". When updating in the negative direction, the direction of rotation of the up/down drive motor 431 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (positive direction or negative direction) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of character whose action is to be set. Note that the maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once per step (that is, it takes 360 steps for the motor to rotate once), the excitation counter is updated in the range of "0" to "359". A loop counter.

Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the vertical drive motor 431 will be described with reference to FIG. 135(b). FIG. 135(b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an excitation table defining excitation control data and the state of the vertical drive motor 431 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 135(b), the excitation control data is defined for each value of the excitation counter in the excitation table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(b), as the sequence data corresponding to the up/down drive motor 431, excitation control of "1100, 0110, 0011, 1001" in the order of excitation counters "0" to "3" is performed. Data are specified for each. When the sequence data "1100" corresponding to the excitation counter value "0" is set, the vertical drive motor 431 is excited at positions A and B. When "0110", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "1", is set, the positions B and C of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "0". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of . Further, when the sequence data "0011" corresponding to the excitation counter value "2" is set, the positions C and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, and the excitation counter value is "1". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from Further, when the sequence data "1001" corresponding to the excitation counter value "3" is set, the positions A and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "2". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of . Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 135, the up/down drive motor 431 rotates clockwise by 90 degrees each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 in the positive direction. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the up/down drive motor 431 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

As described above, the control of the vertical drive motor 431 has been described using a simplified operation model. It can be rotated by 1 degree each time it is updated). That is, when varying each accessory, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 by the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be varied, and by setting the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter each time the excitation counter is updated, Each role can be changed accurately.

Thus, in this embodiment, by setting a command to the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotational speed, rotational direction, and number of rotational steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize various performance actions using the role item.

In addition, a unique action pattern is set for each role object according to the production. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time.

Further, in this embodiment, whether or not the various drive motors have completed their operation based on the command set for the motor driver is determined based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors have operated. That is, based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times of reception of the execution signal output from the motor driver each time one step of operation is set by the motor driver, it is determined whether the operation set for each drive motor has been completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to measure the elapsed time after setting a command for operating various drive motors, and determine whether or not the operation of the various drive motors is completed based on the elapsed time. .

Here, the control of the up/down driving motor 431 and the opening/closing driving motor 466 that are cooperatively controlled in this embodiment will be described. Details will be described in the first control example described later, but in this embodiment, the vertical motion unit device (falling role) 400 is used as an effect (falling role scenario) in which the vertical motion unit device (falling role) 400 moves. An effect is provided in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the falling direction by driving the vertical drive motor 431 . In the production (falling accessory scenario), after the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the falling direction, the door member 470 is opened by the opening/closing driving motor 466, and the production is provided in which the door member 470 is not opened. ing.

The sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment controls the opening/closing drive motor 466 for opening and closing the door member 470 when the effect of opening the door member 470 is executed in the effect (falling accessory scenario). On the other hand, control (energization stop control) is performed so that excitation is turned off for all positions A to D (see S1706 in FIG. 108). When the excitation for all positions is off, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening/closing drive motor 466, that is, the torque for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized. In this case, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is moved in the falling direction, an inertial force is generated in the door member 470 .

Here, in the present embodiment, the above-described torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is configured to be smaller than the inertial force generated in the door member 470 . Thus, when the slide member 450 is moved in the falling direction without driving the opening/closing drive motor 466 to open the door member 470, the inertial force generated in the door member 470 causes the door member 470 to be closed. can be released from to the open state. Therefore, power consumption for driving the opening/closing motor 466 can be reduced.

If the inertial force generated in the door member 470 due to the movement of the slide member 450 is insufficient to open the door member 470, the open/close drive motor 466 may be driven to open the door member 470. In this case, by using the inertial force generated in the door member 470 along with the movement of the slide member 450, the drive torque of the opening/closing drive motor 466 can be reduced. 466 can be made smaller.

In addition, switching between opening the door member 470 by driving the opening/closing motor 466 and opening the door member 470 without driving the opening/closing motor 466 may be performed according to the effect pattern. For example, when a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation is executed, the opening/closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to reliably open the door member 470. On the other hand, when a performance pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, the door member 470 is opened and closed. The door member 470 is opened without driving the opening motor 466 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the door member 470 is not opened in spite of the performance pattern with a high degree of expectation.

Further, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is not moved in the falling direction, that is, when the inertial force does not act on the door member 470, torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state ) is configured to provide sufficient torque to keep the door member 470 closed. Therefore, even during a period in which the falling accessory scenario is not executed, there is no need to excite the opening/closing drive motor 466 to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state, and power consumption can be reduced. If the torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is insufficient for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state, for example, a magnet may be attached to the tip of the door member 470. Such provision may be configured to reduce the torque required to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state.

On the other hand, when an effect (falling accessory scenario) in which the door member 470 is not opened is executed, excitation control is performed so that the opening/closing driving motor 466 for opening and closing the door member does not rotate. Specifically, by continuing to energize the corresponding portion (A to D) based on the current excitation counter in the excitation table (FIG. 135(b)) for a certain period of time, the opening/closing drive motor 466 is stopped. A torque to maintain the position (so-called holding torque) is generated to maintain the closed state of the door member 470. As a result, the sliding member 450 is not opened even though the door member 470 is not opened. It is possible to reliably prevent the door member 470 from being opened due to momentum (inertial force) when the door member 470 is moved in the falling direction.

If the above-described opening/closing control of the door member 470 and the opening/closing state of the door member 470 controlled by the opening/closing control do not match, the effect to be executed thereafter may be changed.

Specifically, when an effect based on a falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened is being executed, the opening/closing drive motor 466 is controlled to be energized and stopped, and then the door member 470 is opened. The lens member 460 located on the back side of the door member 470 becomes visible. Then, the player can visually recognize the characters "Super Hot" displayed on the third pattern display device 81 through the lens member 460. - 特許庁By visually recognizing the display of the third pattern display device 81 through the lens member 460, the display is enlarged and displayed, and the display can be made more impressive to the player.

On the other hand, when the door member 470 is not opened even though the opening/closing drive motor 466 is controlled to be deenergized, even though the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "hot". In this case, the door member 470 is opened and the lens member 460 can be visually recognized, but the door member 470 is not opened. Therefore, in this effect, the fact that the door member 470 has not been opened although the opening/closing drive motor 466 has been controlled to stop being energized is detected by an origin sensor or the like capable of detecting the state of the door member 470. In this case, After that, the effect is changed so that the third pattern display device 81 does not display the characters "Extremely Hot". As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened, the characters "Extremely Hot" are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be made to recognize that the effect of not opening the door member 470 has been executed. , it is possible to avoid giving an impression that the above-described problem has occurred. In this case, the occurrence of the problem may be notified to the employee by lighting a specific LED or notifying the hall computer through an external output terminal.

In addition, as a scenario for dropping the lens member 460 and the door member 470 of the vertical motion unit device (dropping accessory) 400, a scenario in which it moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position in one motion, and a scenario in which a plurality of motions (for example, two degrees) from the retracted position to the extended position. As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened after that, even if the door member 470 is opened by the second operation, two It is possible to make the player feel that the door member 470 is moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position by the action, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, the driving speed of the vertical driving motor 431 is changed to change the inertial force acting on the door member 470 depending on the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened and the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is not opened. It may be configured as Specifically, in a falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is increased so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is increased, while the door member 470 is opened. In the falling accessory scenario, the driving speed of the vertical driving motor 431 is slowed down so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is reduced. Thereby, the opening and closing of the door member 470 can be controlled with high accuracy. It is not limited to changing the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 according to the scenario of the falling accessory. The drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 may be changed by and.

In addition, switching between opening the door member 470 by driving the opening/closing motor 466 and opening the door member 470 without driving the opening/closing motor 466 may be performed according to the effect pattern. For example, when a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation is executed, the opening/closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to reliably open the door member 470. On the other hand, when a performance pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, the door member 470 is opened and closed. The door member 470 is opened without driving the opening motor 466 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the door member 470 is not opened in spite of the performance pattern with a high degree of expectation.

Next, in this embodiment, an RTC (real time clock) 292 is connected to the input/output port 225 . This RTC 292 is a timekeeping means for measuring time, and since it is provided with a dedicated internal power supply (battery in this embodiment), it continues timekeeping even when power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10. can do. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, by setting the same time (for example, the current time) in the clock means and manufacturing it, it is possible to obtain the same time information in the plurality of pachinko machines 10. . By configuring in this way, the time production can be executed synchronously among the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加Details of this time presentation will be specifically described in a first control example described later. In order to improve the accuracy of time keeping by the time keeping means (RTC), correction means (GPS, radio clock, etc.) for correcting the time information from the outside may be provided.

In addition, the time information is corrected each time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) by correction means (for example, GPS or radio clock) for correcting the time information from the outside. good too. As a result, even without providing a dedicated internal power supply (battery in this embodiment), every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started), the time information by the clock means can be updated. , the manufacturing cost and maintenance cost of the clocking means (exchange cost due to deterioration of the internal power source, etc.) can be reduced. The correction of the time information by the correcting means is not limited to each time the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time the pachinko machine 10 is started), but may be performed periodically (for example, every hour).

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

Here, display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 will be described. The third pattern is composed of main patterns of numerals "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "jackpot A" or "jackpot C", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are stopped and displayed. will be In addition, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which even-numbered "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" main symbols are aligned.

The display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. It is a sub-display area Ds for displaying characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. Approximately the center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and the third symbols stop on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 during each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning hole 64, and the small area Ds2 , and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of pending balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that entered the second winning hole 640. is.

On the actual display screen, a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are stop-displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, when the variable display is performed, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are also displayed so that a maximum of 9 main symbols are displayed. In some cases. In the secondary display area Ds, one "●" symbol is displayed for one reserved ball, and reserved symbols are displayed corresponding to up to four reserved balls for each of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2. Is displayed. That is, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this embodiment, the same reserved design (design) is used for the special design 1 and the special design 2, but this is not the only option. Symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed as a “□” symbol).

Thereby, the reserved balls of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be easily identified and displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the held ball entering the second winning hole 640 is displayed differently depending on the winning type of the normal symbol, the player can easily discriminate that the held ball is generated after winning for a long time. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-described main symbols, reserved symbols, etc., a notice effect display such as character display and characters, etc. Display of the number of fluctuations, etc. are displayed as appropriate. Further, when the reserved pattern is not displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or Ds3, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the number of reserved balls may be displayed in four divided areas. It may be displayed in a manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) that differs by the amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

A sub-display device 690 is also connected to the display control device 114 . The sub-display device 690 is a display device (for example, a liquid crystal panel) having a resolution different from that of the third pattern display device 81 . Specifically, the resolution of the third pattern display device 81 is (horizontal 800×vertical 600), and the resolution of the sub-display device 690 is (horizontal 400×vertical 300) (see FIG. 82). The resolutions of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be different from those described above. Alternatively, the resolution of the sub-display device 690 may be higher than that of the third pattern display device 81 .

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. Display control is performed using one image data (in this embodiment, image data with a resolution of 1200 horizontal×600 vertical) including images to be displayed respectively. Of the one image data, the image data corresponding to the resolution of the third pattern display device 81 (area of 800 horizontal x 600 vertical) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the remaining part is displayed on the sub display device 690. is displayed on the sub-display device 690 (400 horizontal×300 vertical area). The rest of the data (area of 400 horizontal pixels by 300 vertical pixels) is unused.

This makes it easy to synchronize the display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, and the display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are out of sync. It is possible to suppress the problem that occurs.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the structure for accommodating the units 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described.

5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the action unit 200 viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which the compound action unit 500 is attached to the rear case 210 .

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and one side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 6) is open. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, so that the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The motion unit 200 includes a vertical motion unit 400, a compound motion unit 500, a tilting motion unit 600, and a sliding motion unit 700, which are accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 210, and configured as one unit.

Specifically, the compound action unit 500 is arranged in the upper right portion of the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7). In the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged below the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 . In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the up-and-down motion unit 400 is arranged in a stacked state on the front side of the compound motion unit 500 and accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in this embodiment, a predetermined action unit (for example, the combined action unit 500) is arranged in a layered state in which another action unit (for example, the vertical action unit 400) is superimposed on the front side. Therefore, when viewed from the front, a given action unit can be shielded by another action unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light-transmissive material and the player can visually recognize the action units arranged on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined action unit The player can see only the required part of the screen, and the other parts can be shielded from the player by another action unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other motion units on the assumption that the entirety of the effect member will be visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in designing can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, outlines of the operation modes of the vertical movement unit 400, the compound movement unit 500, the tilting movement unit 600, and the sliding movement unit 700 will be described. 8 to 10, FIG. 5 to FIG. 7 will be referred to as needed.

8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200. FIG. 8 shows the state in which the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical motion unit 400 is arranged in the extended position, and FIG. The formed state is shown in FIG. 10, in which the tilting unit 600 is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction.

As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical motion unit 400 moves the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is positioned at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2). ).

As shown in FIG. 9, the compound action unit 500 is arranged in the projecting position where the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) projects downward, and the front plate member 546 is positioned at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, 2), and the retracted position where the rotating arm member 550 is retracted upward, and the front plate member 546 is positioned in the opening 211a of the rear case 210. and a retracted state (see FIG. 5). In the contracted state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 10, the tilting motion unit 600 moves to the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. It is movable between positions. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting motion unit 600 is retracted to the right outside of the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and is visually recognized by the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2).

10 shows a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened so that the internal liquid crystal device can be seen. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) viewed through the opening 211a and the liquid crystal device inside the tilting operation unit 600 are displayed. It is possible to make the player visually recognize both the effect displayed on the .

These operation units 400 to 700 are formed to be independently operable, and are arranged in a superimposed (stacked) state as described above. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inwardly of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. As shown in FIG. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, each of the motion units 400 to 700 can be operated individually, and these motions can be combined, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. 11, the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the compound action unit 500 is in the extended state, the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the vertical action unit 400 are arranged in the extended position, and the door member 470 is arranged. form an open state.

As shown in FIG. 11 , the front plate member 546 of the compound motion unit 500 is visible through the lens member 460 of the vertical motion unit 400 . As will be described later, the lens member 460 is formed with a magnifying lens processing, so that the front plate member 546 is enlarged.

11, the rotary plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the compound motion unit 500 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved to the vertical motion unit 400. 39), the front plate member 546 can be seen in its normal size. As a result, it is possible to switch between a state in which the front plate member 546 is viewed in a normal size and a state in which the front plate member 546 is viewed in an enlarged manner (see FIG. 11), thereby improving the presentation effect.

FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. 12, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the compound action unit 500 is in an extended state, the tilting action unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position and is in a tilted state, and the tilting action unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are in a state of being tilted. A state immediately before the abutment is shown. By further tilting the tilting motion unit 600, the tilting motion unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the compound action unit 500 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to produce an effect as if the tilting action unit 600 is applying force to the compound action unit 500. (By associating the actions of the units, more complex production can be performed). Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

Next, the board surface lower unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface 13 and the board surface lower unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, in the lower part of the game board 13, a receiving opening 13a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and through which the board surface lower unit 300 is inserted.

FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the board lower unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the board surface lower unit 300 includes a base member 310 that is internally fitted and fixed in the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13, and a first out port that is disposed on the lower left side of the base member 310 when viewed from the front. 314, a lower right plate member 330 disposed on the lower right side of the base member 310 in front view and guiding the ball to the second outlet 315, and a lower left plate fastened and fixed to the base member 310 from the front. A front cover member 340 in which the member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 are pivotally supported by an insertion shaft 343 is mainly provided.

The base member 310 includes a plate-like main body portion 311 having a shape substantially equivalent to the shape of the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and having a slightly smaller cross-sectional shape than the receiving opening 13a, and a front side of the main body portion 311. A decorative front plate portion 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, a movable effect member 313 attached to the substantially central portion of the decorative front plate portion 312 in the width direction, and a movable effect member 313 formed on the left side of the movable effect member 313 when viewed from the front. and a second outlet 315 which is a rectangular hole formed on the right side of the movable effect member 313 in front view.

The movable effect member 313 includes a rotating effect member 313a which is arranged at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13 and rotated by a driving device (not shown). Here, when the outlet is provided at the lower edge of the widthwise center of the game board 13 , the movable effect member 313 cannot be arranged at the lower edge of the widthwise center of the game board 13 . In this embodiment, the first outlet 314 and the second outlet 315 are provided at positions spaced apart from the center of the game board 13 to the left and right, without providing the outlet at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13. Thus, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the movable effect member 313 at the center lower edge in the width direction of the game board 13 .

The shapes of the first outlet 314, the second outlet 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a) is a front view of the base member 310, the first outlet 314, the second outlet 315, the lower left plate member 320 and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. ) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 310 and the left lower plate member 320 along line XVb-XVb of FIG. Note that FIG. 15( a ) shows the outer shape of the front cover member 340 fastened and fixed to the base member 310 and the nails formed above the first outlet 314 and the second outlet 315 .

The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. As compared with the first out port 314, the second out port 315 has a shorter length in the width direction. The reason for this will be described later. Further, a guide rib 315 a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner side surface of the second outlet 315 . The guide ribs 315 a can suppress the resistance applied to the ball when the ball flowing into the second out port 315 bounces high and collides with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315 . In addition, the flow of the balls discharged from the second outlet 315 can be arranged in the front-rear direction, and variations in the direction of the discharged balls can be suppressed.

A buffer rib 322 of the left lower plate member 320, which will be described later, is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) (see FIG. 15(a)). As a result, even in this embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area increases toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the effect of suppressing the rebound of the ball falling on the left lower plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the higher the drop height of the ball. On the other hand, since the buffer rib 322 is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the more the buffer rib 322 bends, thereby improving the cushion effect of softening the impact of falling. You can increase the degree.

Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling ball will be described. For example, if a ball that lands on the buffer ribs 322, 332 falls to a high height, but the frequency of the ball reaching that position is extremely low, even if the bounce of the ball is not intentionally suppressed, other balls may be prevented from being ejected. may not be If the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, 332 is increased even in this case, the space in the game area is unnecessarily suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is set not only based on the drop height of the ball, but also in relation to the drop height and the frequency with which the ball lands at that position.

As shown in FIG. 15, the ball flowing down above the buffer ribs 322, 332 starts to flow down paths c1, c2, then passes through a plurality of branches b1 to b10 and reaches the landing areas z0 to z4. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the probability of the sphere flowing down the paths c1 and c2 is equal (1/2), and the probability of branching to the left and right at the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). explain. It is assumed that the sphere never flows down from the upper right.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z0 will be explained. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 and reach the route c11. The path to the branch b5 can be reached from the path c1 via the branch b1 or from the path c2. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the path c11 and the ball reaches the landing area z0 is 1/8 (=1/2×(1/2)^2) of the ball flowing down from the path c1, Since it is represented by the sum of the probability 1/4 (=1/2.times.1/2) of the ball flowing down from the path c2, it is 3/8 ("^" means exponentiation). That is, each probability is the product of the probability 1/2 that the ball flows down the paths c1 and c2 and the number obtained by multiplying 1/2 by the number of branches b1 to b10 that the ball passes through until it reaches the landing area z0. is represented by

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z1 will be explained. In order to reach the landing area z1, flow down the left side at branch b3 to reach path c15, flow down the left side at branch b4 to reach path c16, or flow down the right side at branch b6 to path c14. or flow down the right side at the branch b7 to reach the route c13.

Up to the branch b3, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c15, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c15 is 1/16 (= 1/2*(1*2)^3). Up to the branch b4, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is conceivable, and since there are four branches before the sphere reaches the path c16, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c16 is 1/32. (=1/2*(1*2)^4). Also, up to branch b6, only the case where the sphere flows down from path c1 is considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches path c14, the probability of the sphere reaching path c14 is 1/16. (=1/2*(1*2)^3).

Up to the branch b7, both the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 and the path c2 are conceivable. May exist. There are two branches before the sphere flowing down from the path c2 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability of the sphere reaching the path c13 is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1 being 3/32 (=1/2*(1/2)^4+1/2*(1/2)^3), It is 7/32 because it is represented by the sum of the probability 1/8 (=1/2×(1/2)̂2) of the ball flowing down from the route c2.

Here, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z1 is the total sum of the probability that the ball reaches the paths c13 to c16 described above, so it is 12/32.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the ball reaches the landing area z2 can be represented by the probability that the ball reaches the path c12, which is equal to the probability that the ball that reaches the branch b7 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z2 is 7/32.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the path c17, or flow down the left side at the branch b10 to reach the path c18.

Up to the branch b9, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered, and since there are 6 branches before the sphere reaches the path c17, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c17 is 1/128 (= 1/2*(1*2)^6). Also, up to the branch b10, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered, and since there are seven branches before the sphere reaches the path c18, the probability of the sphere reaching the path c18 is 1/256. (=1/2*(1*2)^7).

The probability that the ball reaches the landing area z3 is 3/256 because it is the sum of the probabilities that the ball reaches the paths c17 and c18 described above.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 and reach the path c19. It is assumed that all the balls flowing down the right side of the branch b10 flow down along the route c19. The probability that the ball reaches the path c19 is equal to the probability that the ball that reaches the branch b10 reaches the path c18. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z4 is 1/256 (=1/2×(1×2)̂7).

From these facts, the ratio of the balls reaching the landing areas z0 to z4 is (z0:z1:z2:z3:z4)=(96:96:56:3:1). This ratio correlates with the damping ribs 322,332.

For example, when the landing area z1 and the landing area z3 are compared, although the heights of the balls falling on the landing areas z1 and z3 are the same, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is higher in the landing area z3. less than z1. This is because the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z3 is 1/32 of the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z1. That is, even if the bounce of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as in the landing area z1, there is little possibility that the ejection of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing area z3, by making the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 smaller than in the landing area z1, the arrangement position of the second outlet 315 can be lowered.

For example, when the landing area z2 and the landing area z4 are compared, although the ball falling distance to the landing area z4 is longer than the ball falling distance to the landing area z2, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z4 is 1/56 of the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z2. That is, even if the bounce of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as in the landing area z2, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing area z4, the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 is made smaller than in the landing area z2, so that the position of the second outlet 315 can be lowered.

In the above description, the probability of branching of the spheres b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by making the interval between the nails in the flow path through which the arrow on the left side of the branch b1 passes as small as the diameter of the sphere, the probability that the sphere flows down along the arrow on the right side at the branch b1 is greater than 1/2. can do. In the other branches b2 to b10, the branch probabilities of the sphere can be similarly adjusted.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the frequency with which the balls reach the paths c11 to c19, and the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

Further, the buffer rib 322 is formed such that the upper surface is inclined downward toward the rear (see FIG. 15(b)). Thereby, the ball flow to the first out port 314 can be made faster.

Returning to FIG. 14, description will be made. The left lower plate member 320 includes a long plate-like main body portion 321, buffer ribs 322 each having a thin plate extending in the front-rear direction, and buffer ribs 322 that are continuously arranged in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321, and the buffer ribs. A connecting front plate 323 formed in a manner to connect the front surfaces of 322, a stepped portion 324 formed so as to protrude upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front, and extending from the stepped portion 324 to the left when viewed from the front. and a shaft support hole 326 drilled in the front-rear direction at the right end of the main body 321 when viewed from the front.

The cushioning rib 322 is a portion through which the ball heading for the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses the rebound of the vertically falling ball in the vertical direction. That is, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed of a thin plate continuously arranged in the left-right direction, when it collides with a falling ball, it bends in the thickness direction, so that the impact of the collision can be softened. Also, when the ball moves in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the buffer ribs 322, the ball gets stuck between the buffer ribs 322 and is braked. In addition, the buffer rib 322 has a height and an aspect ratio that increase toward the right in front view (inward in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2)).

The connecting front plate 323 improves the strength of the buffer ribs 322 by connecting the buffer ribs 322 .

The stepped portion 324 is a raised portion for vertically dropping the ball that has flowed down from the ball flow rail portion 325 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the load in the left-right direction from being applied to the cushioning rib 322 from the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 325 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the buffer rib 322 from bending in the left-right direction due to the load in the left-right direction.

That is, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed of a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, there is a risk that it will break when a load is applied in the left-right direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325 , which has a lateral velocity and may apply a lateral load to the buffer rib 322 , moves up and down from the stepped portion 324 to the buffer rib 322 . It is formed in a manner of falling in the direction. As a result, the position at which the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be shifted to the right in the width direction as the speed of the ball in the left-right direction increases.

Therefore, the load applied to the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction when the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be reduced toward the left (outer side) in the width direction. Therefore, the more to the left in the width direction of the buffer rib 322, the less likely it is that the ball will be bent due to the load in the left-right direction. . In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer ribs 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer ribs 322 are arranged in comparison with the case where the buffer ribs 322 have the same length in the width direction. You can lower the position.

Here, while the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 is kept constant in the left and right positions in the width direction (in a state where the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 is It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface formed in the . However, in this case, the arrangement position of the stepped portion 324 becomes higher, and the arrangement position of the ball flow rail portion 325 which is inclined downward toward the stepped portion 324 also becomes higher. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) is increased, and the game area is restricted.

On the other hand, the greater the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, the greater the effect of reducing the momentum of the ball (deceleration effect). Therefore, the cushioning rib 322 is formed in a manner that increases the aspect ratio from the vicinity of the stepped portion 324 toward the center of the game area.

In addition, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 up to this side of the step portion 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step portion 324 (there is a curve halfway in the left-right direction of the buffer rib 322). maximum height) is also conceivable. However, in this case, the ball that has reached the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling leftward. As a result, the ball tends to stay in the landing area z1, making it difficult to discharge the ball smoothly.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 in the width direction of the buffer rib 322 varies little, the ball that reaches the landing area z1 easily rolls left (toward the landing area z2). move. Therefore, since the ball can be flowed to the landing area z2 before it stays in the landing area z1, the ball can be discharged smoothly.

In addition, the step portion 324 has a function of damming the ball flowing down above the buffer rib 322 and flowing leftward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from rebounding beyond the lateral width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front cover member 340 (see FIG. 13).

The shaft support hole 326 is a portion through which the insertion shaft 343 of the front cover member 340 is inserted and supported.

The lower right plate member 330 includes a long plate-shaped main body portion 331, a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 331, and thin wall portions extending in the left-right direction. A connecting front plate 333 formed to connect the front surfaces of the buffer ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 recessed downward at the right end of the main body portion 331 in front view, and a right side from the recessed portion 324 in front view. It mainly includes a ball flow rail portion 335 extending from the main body portion 331 and a pivot hole 336 drilled in the front-rear direction at the left end portion of the main body portion 331 when viewed from the front.

The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body portion 331 is connected to the main body portion 321, the buffer rib 332 is connected to the buffer rib 322, the connection front plate 333 is connected to the connection front plate 323, the ball flow rail portion 335 is connected to the ball flow rail portion 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is connected to the shaft. Since the technical idea is common to each of the support holes 326, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted.

The cushioning ribs 332 are formed to have shorter left and right widths than the cushioning ribs 322 . As a result, the lateral width of the second outlet 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second outlet 315 can be lowered relative to the first outlet 314. It is possible to secure the installation space for the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 (the installation position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered).

Here, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 because the flow path of the ball to the second out port 315 is regulated. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, the first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the second out port 315 in the front view, so that when the opening/closing plate is opened, the balls flow into the first specific prize winning port 65a, When the opening/closing plate is closed, the ball falls vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second out port 315 from the upper right in the front view. In other words, a non-flow region is formed in the upper right portion of the second out port 315 where the ball is restricted from flowing down.

Therefore, the direction in which the ball flows down to the lower right plate member 330 is limited to falling in the vertical direction and flowing down from the width direction (from the ball flow rail portion 335) (flowing down from the oblique upper right direction is restricted). . Therefore, since there is no inflow of the ball obliquely from the upper right, the direction in which the ball bounces can be restricted, and the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be narrowed, and the formation width of the second out port 315 can be narrowed. As a result, the installation space for the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

The concave portion 334 is a depression for causing the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 335 to bounce. Therefore, the formation width of the concave portion 334 is set to a width that allows the ball to be placed without coming into contact with the adjacent buffer ribs 332 .

The ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 is dropped into the recessed portion 334 , bounces off when it contacts the upper surface of the recessed portion 334 , and falls onto the buffer ribs 332 . This prevents a load from being applied to the buffer rib 332 from the width direction, thereby preventing the buffer rib 332 from breaking.

The concave portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 are inserted. This makes it easier to use a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing a fastening screw into the fastening hole B to fasten and fix the lower board unit 300 to the game board 13 . That is, the recessed portion 334 has both the effect of preventing the buffer rib 332 from breaking and the effect of facilitating fastening and fixing of the base member 310 .

The front lid member 340 includes a plate-like main body portion 341 having a first winning port 64 formed at the top, an opening 342 formed at the center of the main body portion 341 and allowing the rotation effect member 313a to be visually recognized, and a pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336 .

The body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the side wall portion limits the direction in which the ball flows down. That is, a ball that collides with the main body portion 341 from the right side cannot penetrate leftward, while a ball that collides with the main body portion 341 from the left side cannot penetrate rightward.

The insertion shaft 343 is a portion that is inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336 . Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is slightly smaller than that of the shaft support holes 326 and 336 .

Next, the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical motion unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical motion unit 400. FIG. 16 and 17 illustrate a state in which the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position.

18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical movement unit 400 includes a base member 410 having a vertical groove portion 414 which is recessed from the back side to the front side on the right side in rear view and which is vertically extended. , a rotating crank member 420 that rotates around a connecting hole 413 of the base member 410 , a driving device 430 that generates driving force for the rotating crank member 420 , and a base member 410 to which the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 420 . and an arm member 440 that swings around a shaft portion 412, and an arm member 440 that is disposed on the opposite side of the vertical groove portion 414 of the base member 410 and is formed to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swinging motion of the arm member 440. A slide member 450, a lens member 460 suspended from a slide hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440 and slidably movable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440, and the lens member 460 and a pair of door members 470 pivotally supported respectively.

The base member 410 includes a main body portion 411 formed in a plate-like shape elongated in the left and right direction, and a cylindrical support hole 442 of an arm member 440 protruding from the right end of the main body portion 411 toward the front side. A shaft portion 412 to be supported, a connecting hole 413 drilled circularly in the front-rear direction to connect the rotating crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and formed on the right side of the main body portion 411 in rear view from the rear side to the front side. An upper and lower groove portion 414 in which a depression extends in the vertical direction, and recessed portions 415 which are depressed from the front to the back side on both left and right outer sides of the upper and lower groove portion 414 are mainly provided.

The vertical groove portion 414 is a portion in which the expansion and contraction effect device 540 of the compound action unit 500 is accommodated on the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, the compound action unit 500 suppresses the swinging angle of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 as the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves toward the reduced state. Collision with the left and right inner surfaces is prevented. The recessed portion 415 is a portion in which the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

The rotary crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 421 and a sliding projection portion 422 that projects from one end of the main body portion 421 toward the front side in a columnar shape and is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 . , and an engaging portion 423 that engages with the fitting portion 432 a of the transmission gear 432 to disable relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 .

The driving force of the driving device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440 by inserting the sliding protrusion 422 into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotating it, and the arm member 440 swings about the shaft portion 412 . .

The driving device 430 includes a vertical driving motor 431 fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a driving gear 431a rotationally driven by the vertical driving motor 431, a transmission gear 432 meshing with the driving gear 431a, A fitting portion 432 a formed on the front side of the transmission gear 432 with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting hole 413 and having an inner side surface fitted with the engaging portion 423 of the rotating crank member 420 is mainly provided. .

The fitting portion 432a is a portion having recesses having a cross-sectional shape in which circular shapes are arranged at each vertex of a triangle. are engaged so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the body portion 411 of the base member 410 is sandwiched between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420, and as described above, relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 is disabled. , the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 rotate synchronously. That is, the driving force of the vertical drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432 .

The arm member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in the shape of an elongated bar, a shaft support hole 442 drilled in the base end side (right side in front view) and pivotably supported by the shaft portion 412, and a base end side. A sliding hole 443 is drilled as an elongated hole on the rocking end side, which is the opposite end of the lens member 443, into which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the sliding protrusion 422 of the rotating crank member 420 is inserted. and a hole-like insertion portion 444 with a bottom.

The shape of the inserting portion 444 is set so that the rotating crank member 420 can rotate once while the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted through the inserting portion 444 . Therefore, the arm member 440 can swing regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 420 .

The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-like body portion 451, a slide guide portion 452 extending rearward from both left and right ends of the body portion 451 and guided by the concave portion 415 so as to be vertically slidable, and a body portion. 451 , a central guide concave portion 453 which is a vertically extending depression formed in the front at the center portion in the width direction of the lens member 451 and into which the sliding projection portion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted; 454, which is a depression formed on the front surface of the lens member 460 and extends in the vertical direction, in which the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460 is guided.

The lens member 460 includes a plate-like main body portion 461 having a circular opening formed in the center, a magnifying lens 462 formed with a magnifying lens processing to be fitted into the opening of the main body portion 461, and a central portion of the main body portion 461 in the width direction. Sliding protrusions 463 protruded from the upper end to the back side and are inserted into the slide holes 443 of the arm member 440 so as to be vertically slidable, and both ends in the width direction of the main body 461 are protruded to the back side and slidable. A stable slide portion 464 that is vertically slidably inserted into the both end guide recessed portions 454 of the member 450, and a lower shaft portion 473 and an upper side shaft portion 473 of the door member 470 that are axially rotatably disposed on the lower left side of the main body portion 461 in front view. It mainly includes a pair of rotating cylinders 465 through which the shaft portion 474 is inserted, and an opening/closing driving motor 466 that rotates the pair of rotating cylinders 465 in opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown).

The movement operation of the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 . FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. 20 illustrates the closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical motion unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

When the arm member 440 swings from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the extended position (see FIG. 20), the lens member 460 pivotally supported in the slide hole 443 on the swing end side of the arm member 440 slides. A moving protrusion 463 (see FIG. 18) is slidably moved in the central guide recess 453 of the slide member 450 . The lens member 460 is vertically guided by the both end guide recesses 454 of the slide member 450, and the slide member 450 is vertically guided by the recesses 415 of the base member 410. The member 460 is slid vertically.

Returning to FIGS. 18 and 19, description will be made. The door member 470 is configured by dividing a circular plate into two upper and lower parts. A lower shaft portion 473 that protrudes rearward from the lower end of the main body portion 471 and is inserted into the rotary cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relatively; It mainly includes an upper shaft portion 474 that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relative to the lens member 460 .

The lower body portion 471 includes a guide protrusion 471a protruding from the side surface of the upper body portion 472 that contacts the upper body portion 472, and the upper body portion 472 has the side surface that contacts the lower body portion 471. It has a receiving recess 472a recessed into it. By fitting the guide protrusion 471a and the receiving recess 472a, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be positioned relative to each other in the closed state. In addition, in this embodiment, since the guide protrusion 471a protrudes in a tapered shape, the guide protrusion 471a can be reliably fitted into the receiving recess 472a.

The operation of door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. Note that FIG. 21 illustrates an open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by rotation of the rotating cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. As shown in FIG. The pair of rotary cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the opening/closing drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), so that the door member 470 is moved from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). , the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung outward (opposite directions). Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung inward relative to each other.

As a result, compared to the case where the front side of the lens member 460 is covered by swinging a single cover member, the time for swinging the lower body portion 471 and the upper body portion 472 can be halved.

Next, the compound action unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 45. FIG. The compound action unit 500 swings the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 9) to arrange the expansion and contraction effect device 540 on the front side of the third pattern display device 81. is a unit. Further, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is formed so as to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510 .

22 is a front perspective view of compound action unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of compound action unit 500. FIG. 22 and 23 illustrate a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, which is the end position formed outside the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

24 is a front exploded perspective view of compound action unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of compound action unit 500. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the compound action unit 500 is a unit that performs an effect by causing a telescopic effect device 540 to slide and swing. a rotating plate 520 formed to be rotatable around a first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510; An expansion and contraction effect device 540 which is fixed and formed so as to be able to expand and contract in the radial direction of the rotating plate 520 , and one end is connected to the expansion and contraction effect device 540 and the other end on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510 . A rotating arm member 550 that forms the telescopic motion of the telescopic effect device 540 by a swinging motion together with a second driving device 560 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 to generate a driving force of the rotating arm member 550, and the second A rotating crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 560 to the rotating arm member 550, and a mechanical portion on the rotating shaft side such as the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 that are fastened and fixed from the front of the base member 510. and a front cover 580 for blindfolding.

The base member 510 includes a rectangular plate-shaped body portion 511, a columnar first shaft portion 512 protruding forward from the lower center in the width direction of the body portion 511, and the first shaft portion 512. Three rows of arcuate holes 513 drilled along the center arc, and first through holes 514 drilled adjacent to the second arcuate holes 513b of the three rows of arcuate holes 513. and a columnar second shaft portion 515 projecting forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511, and a second shaft portion 515 adjacent to the second shaft portion 515. A second through-hole 516 to be drilled, a cylindrical third shaft portion 517 projecting forward from the lower right end portion of the main body portion 511 in a front view, and an edge of the main body portion 511 to be bent forward. and a folded wall portion 518 that is formed.

The first shaft portion 512 is inserted through the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520 and serves as the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 520 . Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotary plate 520 .

The arcuate hole 513 includes a first arcuate hole 513a, a second arcuate hole 513b, and a third arcuate hole 513c from the side near the first shaft portion 512 .

The first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c are long holes through which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotary plate 520 is inserted and guides the rotation of the rotary plate 520. As shown in FIG. As a result, the load applied to the first shaft portion 512 when the rotating plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. 24 and 25 show a state in which the collar is fastened to the tip of the insertion shaft 525, the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are provided for connecting the collar and the body portion 521. placed in between (passed through before fastening of the collar);

The second arcuate hole 513b is a long hole in which the arcuate rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 is arranged and moved. The upper side of the substantially central portion is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first driving device 530 is arranged in the opened portion. As a result, the meshing portion between the driving motor 531 of the first driving device 530 and the circular arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 can be arranged in the plate thickness portion of the main body portion 511, so that the thickness of the compound action unit 500 can be reduced. The lengthwise dimension (the dimension in the front-rear direction in FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes through which the driving gear 532 of the first driving device 530 and the driving gear 562 of the second driving device 560 are inserted, respectively.

The second shaft portion 515 is a columnar portion to which the lid portion 575 of the turning crank member 570 is fastened and fixed on the front side thereof, and which serves as the central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571 . Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 571 of the turning crank member 570 .

The third shaft portion 517 is inserted through the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 and serves as the central axis of rotation of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 . A torsion spring 517a is wound around the third shaft portion 517 to generate an urging force to move the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position.

The torsion spring 517 a is formed in such a manner that arm portions extend from both ends of a coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517 . One arm is fixed to the lower right portion of the bent wall portion 518 (near the first stopper portion 518a) in front view, and the other arm on the opposite side of the one arm is engaged with the rotating arm member 550. It is locked to the stop portion 555 .

The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed on the right side of the first shaft portion 512, and a second stopper portion 518b formed on the left side of the first shaft portion 512. and a third stopper portion 518c formed in the .

The first stopper portion 518 a is a portion that restricts the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 . That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the extended position (see FIG. 9), it abuts against the first stopper portion 518a and stops descending.

As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is arranged below the third stopper portion 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotating plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotating plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the direction of rotation toward the second stopper portion 512b. can be done. That is, the expansion and contraction effect device 540 described later is formed such that the maximum angle of the clockwise swing when viewed from the front is larger than the swing of the counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

The rotary plate 520 includes a fan-shaped body portion 521, a shaft support hole 522 circularly drilled in the thickness direction at the root portion of the body portion 521, and a width slightly larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 linearly recessed in the front surface of the portion 521; a plurality of (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 525, and an arc-shaped rack protruding from the rear surface of the main body 521 in an arc centering on the shaft support hole 522 and having gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral portion. 526 and .

The first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is inserted through the shaft support hole 522 . Therefore, the rotating plate 520 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 .

The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion to which the slide rail 545 of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is fastened and fixed. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is changed depending on the posture of the rotating plate 520 .

The expansion/contraction stopper 524 is a portion that abuts against the inner surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction and regulates the movement width of the slide plate 544 . Formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523, and by contacting the inner side surfaces of the slide plate 544 on both sides, the slide rail 545 is prevented from receiving a load in the direction perpendicular to the expansion/contraction direction, and durability is improved. can be achieved.

The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted through the first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c of the base member 510 and guides the rotation of the rotary plate 520. It is formed slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 513c. Further, a collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c is fastened and fixed to the tip, so that the rotating plate 520 is connected to the base member 510 so as not to be pulled out.

The arc-shaped rack 526 is inserted through the second arc-shaped hole 513 b of the base member 510 and meshed with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 . Since the meshing portion between arc-shaped rack 526 and first driving device 530 is formed in a region including the thickness portion of base member 510, the dimension in the thickness direction of compound action unit 500 can be suppressed.

The first driving device 530 mainly includes a driving motor 531 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and a driving gear 532 inserted through the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and rotated by the driving motor 531 .

Next, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the expansion/contraction effect device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion/contraction effect device 540. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the expansion and contraction effect device 540 includes a main body member 541 forming a skeleton, and a pair of rotating arm members 550 which are fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the main body member 541. A first guide member 542 and a second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted, and the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are arranged so as to be axially slidable along the extending direction. and a slide plate 544 connected to the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520, one end of which is fitted in the rail receiving groove 523 and fastened and fixed; A front plate member 546 fastened and fixed to the front plate member 546; and a decorative member 548 whose 548b is movably formed in front of the main body member 541 .

The main body member 541 includes a plate-like main body portion 541a forming a skeleton, a columnar protrusion 541b protruding toward the back side from the central portion in the width direction of the main body portion 541a, and the back of the protrusion 541b. A first raised fastening portion 541c protruding on the left side of the view, a second raised fastening portion 541d protruding on the right side of the protrusion 541b in the rear view, and a top left portion of the main body portion 541a in the rear view. It mainly includes a protruding guide fastening portion 541e and fastening holes 541f formed in plurality (three locations in this embodiment) on the front side of the main body portion 541a and in which the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

The projecting portion 541 b is a portion that is inserted through the circular arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the diameter of the protruding portion 541b is slightly smaller than the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554. As shown in FIG. Further, since the projecting portion 541b is inserted through the arcuate hole 554, the main body member 541 can be interlocked with the rotating arm member 550 by swinging.

The first raised fastening portion 541c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. As shown in FIG. The reason why the second raising fastening portion 541d is separated in the vertical direction by a longer distance than the first raising fastening portion 541c is that it is arranged at a position that does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550 . Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation locus of the rotation arm member does not pass through the lower left portion of the main body member 541 in front view (see FIGS. 37, 40 and 44). Therefore, it is possible to widen the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541d compared to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and it is possible to improve the rigidity of the second raised fastening portions 541d.

The guide fastening portion 541e is a portion to which the auxiliary fastening portion 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and a portion to which the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in an extended state. That is, even if the projecting portion 541b is not guided by the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guiding fastening portion 541e is guided by the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion/contraction effect member 540 are operated in conjunction with each other.

The fastening hole 541f is a through hole in which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a that is fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a back surface regulation portion that extends upward from a position on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a that is one step higher toward the back side. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c protruding from both left and right sides of the rear surface regulating portion 542b to the rear surface in a wall shape, and a portion of the upper end portion of the rear surface regulating portion 542b protruding toward the rear surface. and an auxiliary fastening portion 542e that extends from the rear restriction portion 542b and is fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541e.

The rear restricting portion 542b is a portion disposed on the rear surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the protrusion 541b from falling out of the arc-shaped hole 554 when the rotating arm member 550 moves to the rear surface. be.

The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 and suppresses the deviation of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542 when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is expanded and contracted.

The insertion hole 542d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is slidably formed with respect to the first guide member 542. As shown in FIG.

The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raising fastening portion 541d, and a rear restriction portion that extends upward from a position on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a, which is one step toward the rear side. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c protruding from the left and right sides of the rear surface regulating portion 543b toward the rear surface in a wall shape, and a portion of the upper end portion of the rear surface regulating portion 543b projecting toward the rear surface. and an insertion hole 543d.

The rear restricting portion 543b is a portion disposed on the rear surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the protrusion 541b from falling out of the arc-shaped hole 554 when the rotating arm member 550 moves to the rear surface. be.

The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 and suppresses the deviation of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543 when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is expanded and contracted.

The insertion hole 543d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is slidably formed with respect to the first guide member 543. As shown in FIG.

The slide plate 544 includes a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed portion 544b formed with a wide recess extending vertically on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and a recessed portion 544b. Both end recessed portions 544c formed with recesses extending in the vertical direction on the left and right front surfaces, and rail receivers protruding in a semicircular shape toward the front side at the upper and lower ends of the both end recessed portions 544c. portion 544d, a cylindrical slide rod 544e extending vertically inside the recessed portions 544c at both ends, an effect assisting wall 544f projecting toward the front in the vertical center of the main body portion 544a, Stopper portions 544g projecting toward the rear surface are mainly provided at both left and right ends of the recessed portion 544b.

The recessed portion 544 b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the expansion stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 . Therefore, the width of the inner side surface of the concave portion 544b is formed slightly larger than the width dimension of the elastic stopper 524. As shown in FIG.

The recessed portions 544c on both ends are portions for accommodating protrusions into which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. As a result, the protrusions in which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed can be guided from the outside.

The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion that is accommodated in the guide rail portions 542c and 543c of the guide members 542 and 543, respectively. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 can be prevented from wobbling with respect to the slide plate 544 .

The slide rod 544e is a cylindrical rod inserted through the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. As shown in FIG. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 are slidably formed in the direction in which the slide rod 544e extends (vertical direction in FIG. 26).

The effect assisting portion 544f is a portion that is brought into contact with the rear hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 to move the decorative member 548 when the telescopic effect device 540 is in the extended state. Thereby, the appearance of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be changed.

The stopper portion 544g is a portion that abuts against the extension stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 and defines the vertical movement end of the slide plate 544. As shown in FIG.

Slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini-rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotating plate 520 , and the other end opposite to the one end is fastened and fixed to the concave portion 544 b of the slide plate 544 .

The front plate member 546 is a presentation part that can be visually recognized by the player, and includes a plate-shaped main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 when viewed from the front, and It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b that protrudes in accordance with the formation position of the fastening hole 541f, and a pair of shaft support portions 546c that protrude from the upper end portion of the main body portion 546a toward the rear side.

The fastening portion 546b is a portion for fixing the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

The shaft support portion 546c is a portion that slidably supports the connecting slide member 547. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support portion 546c is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the long sliding hole 547b of the connecting sliding member 547. As shown in FIG.

The connecting sliding member 547 has a main body portion 547a formed in a plate shape, a pair of sliding elongated holes 547b formed in an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction and bored in the front-rear direction, and bored in the vertical direction. A pair of insertion holes 547c are mainly provided.

The sliding elongated hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is formed slightly larger than that of the pivot portion 546c. A collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is fastened and fixed to the tip of the shaft supporting portion 546c, so that the connecting sliding member 547 is pivotally supported by the front plate member 546 so that it cannot be pulled out. be. The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

The decorative member 548 includes a main body portion 548a which is formed in a plate shape and to which the connecting sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front hanging portion 548b which is formed to hang downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a. and a rear hanging portion 548c formed by hanging downward on the rear side of the .

When the connecting sliding member 547 moves with respect to the front plate member 546, the front hanging portion 548b covers the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and is visually recognized apart from the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43). 37) can be formed. As a result, the appearance of the stretchable effect member 540 can be changed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The rear hanging portion 548c is a portion that abuts against the production auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 due to the expansion and contraction operation of the expansion and contraction production device 540. is moved relative to the front plate member 546 .

Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, description will be made. The rotating arm member 550 includes a main body portion 551 formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 drilled in one end of the main body portion 551 in the front-rear direction, and the shaft support hole 552 being adjacent to the shaft support hole 552 . An irregularly-shaped long hole 553, which is a special-shaped bottomed long hole, is formed on the back side of the main body 551, and the other end opposite to the one end is formed on the front side. An arc-shaped hole 554, which is an arc-shaped elongated hole with a bottom, is protruded toward the rear side in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 552 of the body portion 551, and the tip thereof is bent into a hook shape, and the other arm portion of the torsion spring 517a is engaged. It mainly includes a locking portion 555 that is engaged.

The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole through which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 , so that the rotating arm member 550 can rotate around the third shaft portion 517 .

The deformed long hole 553 is a portion through which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed long hole 553 will be described later.

The arcuate hole 554 is a long hole through which the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 554 is formed slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 541b. Also, the arc formed by the arc-shaped hole 554 matches the arc formed by the projecting portion 541b when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 in the expanded state (FIGS. 37 to 39). ).

In addition, the arc-shaped hole 554 is open at the tip of the other end of the rotating arm member 550 and has a tip portion 554a that widens at the tip.

The second driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force to rotate the rotating crank member 570 , and is inserted through a driving motor 561 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510 . and a drive gear 562 that is axially rotated by a drive motor 561 .

The drive gear 562 meshes with transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotating crank member 570 . Accordingly, when the driving gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

The rotating crank member 570 is a member that transmits a driving force to the rotating arm member 550. The rotating crank member 570 has a ring-shaped body portion 571 pivotally supported by the second shaft portion 515, and the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 571 is engraved. A transmission gear tooth 572 provided, a regulating head portion 573 formed in a manner to cover the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572, and the center of the main body portion 571 are located eccentrically and protrude toward the front side. It mainly includes a projecting portion 574 and a lid portion 575 formed with a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the main body portion 571 and fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft portion 515 .

The transmission gear tooth 572 meshes with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 . Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor 561 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 570 .

The restriction head portion 573 prevents the drive gear 532 from being displaced toward the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572 . As a result, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear teeth 572 can be optimized.

The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion that is inserted through the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 . That is, the relationship between the sliding projection 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550 determines whether or not the driving force is transmitted.

The lid portion 575 is a portion for arranging the main body portion 571 on the base member 510 so that it cannot be pulled out.

28 to 31, the relationship between the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. First, referring to FIGS. 28(a) and 29(a), the shape of the deformed long hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described.

28(a) and 29(a) are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. FIG. Note that FIG. 28(a) illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 29(a) illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position. 28(a) and 29(a), the deformed long hole 553 and the sliding protrusion 574 are shown by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 are shown by imaginary lines. be done.

As shown in FIG. 28( a ), when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and the straight line of the rotating crank member 570 An upward perpendicular state is formed in which the straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the shaft support hole 552 is perpendicular to each other.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the extended position, the straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574 and the rotating crank member 570 and a straight line connecting the rotation axis of and the shaft support hole 552 are perpendicular to each other. Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise in a front view from the downward orthogonal state described above.

The deformed elongated hole 553 includes a transmission groove portion 553a to which the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 by the movement of the sliding projection portion 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. 553b and a second non-transmission wall portion 553c connected from the lower end of the transmission groove portion 553a, and a selection wall portion 553d connecting the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Prepare.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the transmission groove portion 553a is a concave groove extending linearly to the left from the sliding projection portion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove portion 553a is formed with a length that allows the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 to move from an upward perpendicular state to a downward perpendicular state, and the formation width of the inner peripheral surface thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. formed large. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550 while the sliding protrusion 574 moves in the transmission groove 553a.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding projection about the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in the upward orthogonal state. It is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574 . That is, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in front view from the upward orthogonal state, the rotary crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotary arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotary crank member 570 is transferred to the rotary arm. Not transmitted to member 550 .

Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 28(a)), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b moves. The direction is toward the axis of rotation of the pivot crank member 570 . Therefore, when the sliding projection 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b, the load applied to the sliding projection 574 due to the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is reduced by the rotation of the rotating crank member 570. directed to the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the second non-transmission wall portion 553c extends from the lower wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position. It is a wall formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding protrusion 574 centering on the rotation axis of the member 570 . That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the downward perpendicular state (the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 29A), The rotating crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550 .

It should be noted that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. be done. Therefore, when the sliding projection 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 29(b)), the load applied to the sliding projection 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550 is directed toward the axis of rotation of the pivot crank member 570 . Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

The selection wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed of a smooth curved surface that connects the right end portion of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b in front view and the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c in front view. It is formed above the curve extending from the transmission wall portion 553b.

The selection wall portion 553d is arranged to face the right portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed in such a manner that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c increases toward the left end portion of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), the sliding protrusion 574 crosses the first non-transmission wall portion 553b to the second non-transmission wall portion 553b. In the margin D (see FIG. 32(b)) before reaching the wall portion 553c, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and rotation is not restricted. In other words, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is not restricted by the sliding protrusion 574 either.

The right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is It is formed to intersect the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the forming angle between the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the amount of swinging of the rotating arm member 550 necessary to correspond to the amount of change changes. That is, when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other and the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is , the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding projection 574 and the right end of the second non-transmitting wall 553c are in contact with each other. Therefore, depending on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall portion 553c or along the selection wall portion 553d, the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 550 with respect to the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is determined. You can change the speed.

Returning to FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, description will be made. 28 to 31 are front views of the pivoting arm member 550 and the pivoting crank member 570 illustrating the swinging of the pivoting arm member 550 and the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 in chronological order. In FIG. 28(a), the upward orthogonal state described above is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), and in FIGS. Rotating states are shown in order, the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the turning crank member 570 are shown with hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 are shown with imaginary lines. .

In FIGS. 28 to 31, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is detected by a position detection sensor (not shown) in its vertical expansion/contraction posture, and stops swinging in that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, the swinging of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is prevented by the resistance between it and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25).

In the state shown in FIG. 28(a), the rotating crank member 570 is perpendicular to the upward direction. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position vertically downward by a distance h1 from the protrusion 541b. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state, the projection 541b is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 28(a) (rotated counterclockwise by angle T1 from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a))), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2<h1) (FIG. 28(b)). ) see). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) to the counterclockwise angle T2 (T2≈180 degrees>T1 )), the sliding projection 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553 (transmission area), enters the area facing the second non-transmission wall 553c, and the projection 541 moves to the reference position. It reaches a state where it is arranged at a position vertically above the horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3<h2) (see FIG. 29(a)). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28(c), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (rotated counterclockwise from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) by an angle T3 (T3>T2). 29(b), the sliding projection 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 29(b) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

29(a) and 29(b), when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the sliding projection 574 is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 to move toward the second position. It is pushed by the non-transmitting wall portion 553c. In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, thereby restricting the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b).

Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. However, if the performance speed of the rotating arm member 550 is set to a high speed just before reaching the extended position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is reduced. If it is slowed down, the performance effect cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated to the state of FIG. 29(b) without being stopped in the state of FIG. The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state of FIG. 29(a) (the protrusion 541 can be stopped at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3). As a result, the speed of the rotary crank member 570 is maintained until the rotary arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotary crank member 570 changes from the state shown in FIG. 29(a) to the state shown in FIG. 29(b). 570 can be slowed down. Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, it is possible to improve both the performance effect of the rotating arm member 550 and the durability of the second driving device 560 .

From the state of FIG. 29(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) to the counterclockwise angle T4 (T4≈270 degrees>T3 )), the sliding protrusion 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed long hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 30(a) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

That is, while the rotary crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. maintained. In this embodiment, the length for which the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protrusion 541b is maintained in the same position is set to the period during which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn. It need not be limited to that. The length over which the front plate member 546 remains in the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553. FIG. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than in the present embodiment, the length of the front plate member 546 that continues to be arranged in the lower position can be made longer than in the present embodiment.

From the state of FIG. 30(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (rotated counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)) by an angle T5 (T5>T4). ), the sliding projection 574 pushes up the selection wall portion 553d of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the projection 541 is arranged at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2>h3). (See FIG. 30(b)). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ).

That is, when the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the selection wall portion 553d and the sliding projection portion 574 are brought into contact with each other, so that the rotating arm member Driving force is transmitted to 550 (transmission area).

From the state of FIG. 30(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (rotated counterclockwise from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) by an angle T6 (T6>T5). ), the sliding protrusion 574 enters the region facing the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b of the deformed long hole 553, and the protrusion 541 moves vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1>h2). A spaced position is reached (see FIG. 31). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ).

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. The state of 28(a) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region).

When rotating the rotating arm member 550 counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. . In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, thereby restricting the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG.

Here, as a method for stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 31, stopping the rotating crank member 570 is conceivable. However, if the performance speed of the rotating arm member 550 is made high until just before reaching the retracted position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 slows down. If you set it to , you will not be able to improve the performance effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotating crank member 570 to the state of FIG. can be done. As a result, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member 570 is decelerated from the state shown in FIG. 31 to the state shown in FIG. 28(a). can be made Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, it is possible to achieve both an improvement in the effect of the telescopic effect device 540 interlocked with the rotating arm member 550 and an improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560 .

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotary crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotary arm member 550 can be reciprocated from the retracted position to the extended position.

28 to 31, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b is aligned with the reference horizontal line in half the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position separated by a distance h1 vertically above O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3<h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained vertically above the reference horizontal line O for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation period, and the protrusion 541b is maintained at the position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 during the subsequent 1/4 period of the rotation period. is vertically moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1>h3). As a result, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction) can be doubled.

Here, in the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), and the rotating arm member 550 extends. In the position, the pivot arm member 550 and the pivot crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal state (see FIG. 29(a)). From the state of FIG. 29(a), the downward orthogonal state can be formed by rotating the turning crank member 570 clockwise by a predetermined amount.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by half (180 degrees) in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotary arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the extended position (from FIG. 28(a) to FIG. 29(a) ) can be made equivalent to the time required for swinging from the extended position to the retracted position (see FIG. 29(a) through FIG. 31 to FIG. 28(a)).

32 to 35, the relationship between the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 illustrating the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in chronological order. 32 to 35 illustrate a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines and extend and contract. The front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the effect device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In FIG. 32(a), the upward orthogonal state described above is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), and in FIGS. The states in which the member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount are illustrated in chronological order.

In the state shown in FIG. 32(a), the rotating crank member 570 is perpendicular to the upward direction. In this case, the projecting portion 541b is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 32(a) (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a))), the sliding The projecting portion 574 moves through the area facing the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 32(b). During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When rotating the rotating arm member 550 counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 32(b), the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, so that the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. be. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 32(b).

From the state of FIG. 32(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12>T11). 33(a), the sliding projection 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the deformed long hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, in the margin D between the state of FIG. driving force is not transmitted to (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h4 (h4<h1).

From the state of FIG. 33(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13>T12). ), and as shown in FIG. 33(b), the sliding protrusion 574 abuts against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 which swings downward under the action of gravity. be. That is, from the state of FIG. 33(b) to the state of FIG. 34(a), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). In the state of FIG. 33(b), the projecting portion 541 is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h5 (h5<h4).

From the state of FIG. 33(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 32(a)) clockwise by an angle T14 (T14≈90 degrees>T13). is rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is housed in the right end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3. The state (see FIG. 34(a)) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is brought into contact with the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area).

Here, the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32(b) to 34(a) and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. Although the rotating direction of the moving crank member 570 is different, the rotating region (phase) of the rotating crank member 570 is the same.

In this case, in the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. While the surfaces are not in contact, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (non-transmitting region). , the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

Therefore, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed depending on the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 . As a result, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, it is possible to form two effects of the rotating arm member 550. FIG.

That is, in this embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIG. 32(a) and FIG. When rotated, the rotating arm member 550 swings in a free fall dependent on gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 (non-transmission region). On the other hand, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the rotary arm member 550 is swung at a speed dependent on the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 (transmission area).

As a result, even when the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 is constant, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, the rotary crank member 570 can be rotated in the same phase. Variations in the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

Further, since the variation in the swing speed of the rotating arm member 550 is increased by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (formation of the clearance portion D), the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed. It is possible to eliminate the need for other members such as a changeover switch for changing, and reduce the member cost.

In this embodiment, the allowance D is formed on the pivot hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, compared to the case where the clearance portion D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotating shaft of the turning crank member 570, the sliding protrusion 574 can move through the clearance portion D for a predetermined distance. The downward movement distance of the protrusion 541b can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to conspicuously change the operation of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed while suppressing the formation range of the allowance portion D of the rotating crank member 570 .

From the state of FIG. 34(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15>T14). ), the sliding protrusion 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 34(b) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. pushed. In this case, since the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 34(b).

From the state of FIG. 34(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 32(a)) clockwise by an angle T16 (T16≈180 degrees>T15). 35(a), the sliding protrusion 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 35(a) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

From the state of FIG. 35(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17>T16). ), the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2>h3) (FIG. 35 (b)) is reached. That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

Here, when the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 and the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 are always interlocked, it is difficult to shift the start timings of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 . . Therefore, when starting the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550, it is necessary to generate a large force corresponding to the rigidity of the force that overcomes the inertia of each member. Therefore, a driving device with a large driving force is required, and there is a risk that the driving device will become large.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the start timings of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 34(b) to the state shown in FIG. 35(a), only the rotary crank member 570 is rotated until the state shown in FIG. 35(a) reaches the state shown in FIG. 35(b). By interlocking with the rotating crank member 570, the rotating arm member 550 can be started.

As a result, since the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used to start the rotating arm member 550, the driving force required for the second driving device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the size of the second driving device 560 can be reduced.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35(b), the sliding projection 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a to reach the state shown in FIG. 32(a). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From these facts, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. It is moved downward from a position separated by a distance h1 vertically above the horizontal line O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3<h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained vertically above the reference horizontal line O for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation period by a distance h3. It is moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1>h3). As a result, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction) can be doubled.

Further, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially accelerated by gravitational acceleration when moving downward, while the speed always follows the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570 when moving upward. be done. As a result, the mode of speed change of the protrusion 541b (extension effect device 540) can be changed according to the moving direction of the protrusion 541b (extension effect device 540).

With reference to FIG. 36, the change in the distance of the protrusion 541b (extension effect device 540) from the reference horizontal line O when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise will be described.

FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28(a)). In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the horizontal axis indicates the swing angle increasing rightward from the upper orthogonal state of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) as the left end, and the vertical axis indicates the swing angle. shows the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b.

In FIG. 36, the curve CC1 indicates the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise, and the distance when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise is indicated by the curve CC1. A curve CW1 indicates the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the projection 541b. Curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusion 541b shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, respectively. A curve CC2, which is obtained by horizontally reversing the curve CC1, is illustrated by an imaginary line. By comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, as described above, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the upward and downward speeds of the protrusion 541b moved vertically by the rotating arm member 550 can be changed. can be done.

As a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise, the sliding protrusion 574 does not rotate until it contacts the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)). A dashed line indicates the case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) is arranged at the retracted position as a curved line CW2. Note that this corresponds to the case where the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) for swinging the rotating arm member 550 upward is set to be large. In this case, the period during which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position can be made longer.

In the curves CC1 and CW1, in the angular range N1 in which the distance of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) from the horizontal reference line O remains unchanged, the turning crank member 570 and the turning arm member 550 ( (see FIG. 28(a)), a non-transmission region is formed in which the driving force is not transmitted. The width of the angular range N1 can be adjusted by adjusting the width of the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)).

In addition, on the curve CW1, the angle until the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) abuts on the deformed long hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) In the range N2, a non-transmission region is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 where the driving force is not transmitted. In addition, the width of this angular range N2 can be adjusted by the formation width of the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28(a)).

As shown in FIG. 36, between the angle T11 and the angle T14 and the angle T4 and the angle T6 where the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) is arranged in the same phase, the curve The shapes of CW1 and the curve CC1 are different (the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 obtained by horizontally reversing the curve CC1 do not overlap).

That is, when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) rotates between the angle T4 and the angle T6 so as to lift the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)), the angle 11 to angle T14, the curve is gentler than that in the case where the rotating crank member 570 rotates in such a manner that the rotating arm member 550 is pushed down.

This is because the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28(a)) abuts the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553 on the curve CW1 and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) 28(a)) is rotated, and at curve CC1, the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the selection wall portion 553d (see FIG. 28(a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. It depends.

Returning to FIG. 28(a), description will be made. As described above, in the deformed elongated hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small). The right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is formed to intersect the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the forming angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1. be.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the amount of swinging of the rotating arm member 550 necessary to correspond to the amount of change changes. That is, when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other and the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is , the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding projection 574 and the right end of the second non-transmitting wall 553c are in contact with each other.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, depending on the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, the rotary crank member 570 may be arranged in the same phase. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

Although FIGS. 28 to 35 illustrate the case where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in one direction, it is also possible to reverse the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 halfway. The timing for reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is the state in which the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b (for example, FIG. 28(a), FIG. 31, FIG. 32(a)). and FIG. 32(b), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), or a state where the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (for example, FIG. 29(a), 29(b), 34(b) and 35(a), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position).

In this case, since the rotating arm member 550 is not in contact with the rotating crank member 570 in the rotating direction, the resistance applied from the rotating arm member 550 to the rotating crank member 570 when the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed is reduced. can be suppressed. Further, in this embodiment, a position detection sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position and the state in which it is arranged in the extended position. It is possible to facilitate the control of reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 when the moving arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position or the extended position.

By reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the variation of the reciprocating motion of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction can be increased.

For example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 28(a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated half a turn counterclockwise (see FIG. 29(a)), and then rotated. A case in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position is exemplified by reversing the direction of rotation of the moving crank member 570 and rotating it clockwise by half a turn (see FIG. 28(a)). That is, this is the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 .

In this case, the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 moves from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 during half the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570 to a distance h3 (h3<h1) from the reference horizontal line O. ) moves down to a position separated by ). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) from 0 degrees to 180 degrees on the horizontal axis. Next, the projecting portion 541b extends from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1>h3) from the reference horizontal line O in half the rotation period of the rotary crank member 570. move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis extending from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

As a result, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 moves downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and moves upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). can be the same as the period of

Further, for example, from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 32(a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise by 1/4 turn (see FIG. 34(a)). Next, the direction of rotation of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, and the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position by rotating the rotating crank member 570 counterclockwise by 1/4 turn (FIG. 32). (a)). That is, this is the case where the sliding protrusion 574 moves on the side where it approaches the shaft support hole 552 .

In this case, the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 moves from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 during a quarter of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570 to a distance h3 (h3) from the reference horizontal line O. It moves downward to a position spaced apart by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along a curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) from 0 degrees to 90 degrees on the horizontal axis. Next, the projecting portion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1>h3) from a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a period of 1/4 of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up to position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis extending from 270 degrees to 360 degrees.

Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3), and is moved upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The moving period can be the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened compared to the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 .

Further, when the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves downward, it can be partially free-falled (from the angle T11 to the angle T13), while the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves upward. In that case, it is always moved at a speed along the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, even when the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the telescopic effect device 540 ( degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from angle T11 to angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

Next, the difference in swing angle due to the difference in the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state will be described.

37-39 are front views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 37 to 39 illustrate the case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the expanded position). 37 shows a state in which the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and FIG. A state in which the projection 541 is moved counterclockwise is illustrated, and FIG. 39 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. 29(a). Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position spaced upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the locus of swinging of the protrusion 541b when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the stretched state is formed in an arc around the first shaft portion 512 and rotates. Along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554 of the arm member 550 . In other words, the arcuate hole 554 extends along the swing locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 is not arranged to face the swing direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arc-shaped hole 554 does not work as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the swinging of the rotating plate 520 is regulated. That is, the rotating plate 520 can swing until it abuts against the third stopper portion 518c. The protrusion 541b can swing until it abuts against the stopper portion 518b, and the protrusion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ2 when viewed from the front.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39 , when the protrusion 541b is swung leftward in front view at the swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 . In this case, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is moved in the expansion/contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550, and the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arc-shaped hole 554, which may cause malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the protrusion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the first lifting fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 are connected to the rotating arm member. By disposing so as to be able to engage with 550, the projection 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned. That is, it is possible to prevent the expansion/contraction effect device 540 from moving in the expansion/contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550 .

As a result, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the problem that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. FIG. As a result, the arrangement area of the rotating arm member 550 can be suppressed, and the arrangement area of other movable members can be secured accordingly. Moreover, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

Further, when the rotating arm member 550 swings in a state in which the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 shifts, and the protrusion 541b becomes circular. It becomes difficult to return to the arcuate hole 554, and malfunction may occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding protrusion 574 abuts against the deformed elongated hole 553, thereby preventing the pivoting arm member 550 from swinging (see FIG. 39).

In addition, the movement trajectory of the point farthest from the rotation axis of the sliding projection 574 (the point farthest from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 that contacts the sliding projection 574. (see FIG. 39), the rotating crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the attitude of the rotating arm member 550.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 29(a)). )), the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554 before the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the state shown in FIG. think of. After the projecting portion 541b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554, even if the rotating crank member 570 is further rotated and the rotating arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. However, there is no malfunction such that the magnetic tape cannot be returned to the arcuate hole 554 .

In this case, when swinging the rotating arm member 550 and the telescopic effect device 540 respectively, the rotating crank member 570 is controlled to stop or start according to the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554. It is not necessary and rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 can continue. In other words, it is only the timing of swinging of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 that needs to be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the control burden of the complicated operation of swinging the telescopic effect device 540 and the rotating arm member 550 at different timings.

In addition, in this embodiment, a proboscis portion 554a that widens the width of the arc-shaped hole 554 toward the opening end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 39) of the arc-shaped hole 554 is formed. As a result, positional deviation (positional deviation in the direction of expansion and contraction of the expansion and contraction effect device 540) when the protrusion 541b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554 can be largely tolerated, and the first raising fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be ensured.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state between the expanded state and the contracted state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in the extended state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arc-shaped hole 554, and the expansion/contraction effect Device 540 forms an intermediate state.

40-42 are front views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 40 to 42 illustrate a case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (a case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged between the extended position and the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the locus of swinging of the protrusion 541b changes depending on the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction.

40 shows a state in which the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and FIG. 42 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state in FIG. 40 .

The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the upward movement of the arc-shaped hole 554 due to the pivoting arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arc-shaped hole 554 has both the function of changing the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b and the function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546, as will be described later. As a result, it is possible to consolidate functions.

As shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state have a radius of curvature are the same on the upper side, but the radii of curvature and postures are different from each other. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 intersect at the forming angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arcuate hole 554 acts as a stopper to stop the swinging of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). .

As shown in FIG. 41 , when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the protrusion 541 b does not contact the circular arc hole 554 . That is, since the rotating plate 520 is allowed to swing until it abuts against the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b is allowed to swing up to a swing angle θ3 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (angle θ3= angle θ1).

As shown in FIG. 42 , when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise in front view, the projection 541b is brought into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554 . In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e abuts against the upper side surface of the rotating arm member 550, and the state change of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction is prevented. movement is stopped.

That is, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it abuts against the third stopper portion 518c, and the projection 541b is swung clockwise up to a swing angle θ4 (angle θ4<angle θ2). . Therefore, the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction. Thus, by varying the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540, the variation of the swing angle of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be increased. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e abuts on the body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550. As shown in FIG.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arc-shaped hole 554, and the expansion/contraction effect Device 540 creates a contracted state.

43-45 are front views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 43 to 45 illustrate the case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing trajectory of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the locus of swinging of the protrusion 541b changes depending on the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction.

43 shows a state in which the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and FIG. A state in which the projection 541 is moved counterclockwise is illustrated, and FIG. 45 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 28(a). Therefore, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the upward movement of the arc-shaped hole 554 due to the pivoting arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both the function of changing the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b and the function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546 together. As a result, it is possible to consolidate functions.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 are different from each other. The central axis of the radius of curvature is reversed. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is below the protrusion 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arcuate hole 554 is arranged above the arcuate hole 554. FIG. In this case, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 intersect at a forming angle α2 (angle α2>angle α1), and the arcuate hole 554 acts as a stopper to stop the swinging of the protrusion 541b ( 44 and 45).

As shown in FIG. 44 , when the rotary plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the second stopper surface 554c of the arcuate hole 554 . In this case, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the projecting portion 541b can swing counterclockwise up to a swing angle θ5 when viewed from the front. (angle θ5<angle θ1=angle θ3).

As shown in FIG. 45 , when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise in front view, the projection 541b is brought into contact with the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554 . In this case, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ6 when viewed from the front (angle θ6<angle θ4 <Angle θ2). Therefore, the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction. Thereby, the variation of the swing width of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be increased.

Here, the formation angle α2 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 in the reduced state is formed to be larger than the formation angle α1 between the movement locus of the projection 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 in the intermediate state. be.

In the relationship between the swing locus of the projection 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the projection 541b is swung across the arc-shaped hole 554. is minimized. On the other hand, regarding the relationship between the swing locus of the projection 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 0 degrees (see FIGS. , and the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is maximized. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1<formation angle α2 ).

As described above, the expansion and contraction state of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is changed, so that the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b is changed. The stopper surface 554 c and the third stopper surface 554 d) function as stoppers that regulate the swing angle of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 . As a result, the inner circumferential surface of the arcuate hole 554 can also be used as a portion for regulating the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is different. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the space for arranging the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b.

Further, the stopper that regulates the swinging angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by arranging the rotating arm member 550 at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where a fixed stopper is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81, the stopper remains on the front surface of the third pattern display device 81 even when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position. can be prevented. As a result, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, other members can be arranged on the front surface of the third pattern display device 81. The overhang space of the support member 720) can be secured.

In addition, the circular arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 functions as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 540, and the second drive of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 by swinging the rotation arm member 550. and a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion and contraction effect device 540 to perform an expansion and contraction operation. As a result, functions can be consolidated and the number of parts can be reduced.

The tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. FIG. The tilting operation unit 600 is a unit that swings (tilts) the effect member 620 (see FIG. 12), and the sliding operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilting operation unit 600 in the horizontal direction. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700. FIG. 46 and 47 illustrate a state in which the support members 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700 are arranged at the retracted position.

48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. FIG. 48 and 49, the tilting unit 600 is not disassembled for easy understanding.

The slide operation unit 700 has a base member 710 formed in the shape of a plate elongated in the left-right direction, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 with one end fastened and fixed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. a support member 720, a slide rail 730 having one end fastened and fixed to the support member 720 and the other end to which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed so as to be vertically extendable; A connecting member 740 formed slidably on the rear rail portion 716 of the main body portion 710 and pivotally supported by the pivotal support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a driving force for moving the support member 720 in the left-right direction are generated. It mainly includes a driving device 750 and a rear cover member 760 formed on the rear side of the driving device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710 .

The base member 710 is a member that forms the skeleton of the slide operation unit 700, and includes a slide plate 711 formed to be slidable in the left-right direction and to which the support member 720 is fastened and fixed from the rear side, and a rear view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 having a circular cross-section and being recessed in the lower left portion for supporting the fixed shaft portion 753a, and a shaft support hole having an elongated recess shape extending in the left-right direction at the lower right portion of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear. 712 and a slide shaft support hole 713 in which a moving shaft portion 754a is slidably supported, and a locking portion 725 of a support member 720 formed to be vertically swingable by a solenoid. a lever member 714 for restricting the movement of the base member 710; a front rail portion 715 protruding from the upper end portion of the base member 710 toward the front side in a downward arc shape in cross section and on which the upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740 rolls; A rear rail portion 716 is mainly provided in the rail portion 715 so as to be recessed from the rear side so as to have an arcuate cross section and through which the insertion plate portion 741b of the connecting member 740 is inserted.

Since the lever member 714 restricts the lateral sliding movement of the strut member 720 fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711, the driving force of the driving device 750 when maintaining the tilting operation unit 600 at the retracted position is not required. can be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting motion unit 600 is moved along the forming direction (arc track) of the front rail portion 715 and the rear rail portion 716, the support member 720 connected to the tilting motion unit 600 can move left and right. Sliding movement in the direction can occur under the action of gravity loaded on the tilting motion unit 600 . For example, when the tilting motion unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting motion unit 600 is oriented obliquely downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715 . Therefore, even if the movement direction of the support member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the lateral direction along the movement direction of the slide plate 711, the support member 720 may be moved by gravity. In this embodiment, when the lever member 714 is swung downward, it engages with the engaging portion 725 of the support member 720, and the lateral movement of the support member 720 is restricted. is unnecessary, the strut member 720 can be maintained at the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

The strut member 720 includes a main body portion 721 formed in a plate shape elongated in the vertical direction, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 which is continuously connected to the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 in the left-right direction and drilled in the front-rear direction. A first fastening portion 722 through which a screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted, and a second fastening portion that is vertically connected to the left end portion of the main body portion 721 in the front view and drilled in the front-rear direction to fasten and fix the slide rail 730. 723 and a slide hole 724 which is an elongated hole extending in a direction parallel to the continuous direction of the second fastening portion 723 and which is formed on the right side of the main body portion 721 when viewed from the front; A hook-shaped engaging portion 725 that protrudes upward from the lower end portion and engages with the lever member 714, and a lower cover portion that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main body portion 721 and in which the belt 755 of the driving device 750 is sandwiched between the main body portion 721 and the main body portion 721. 726, a rolling portion 727 protruding from the back side of the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 and formed to roll on the inner peripheral surface of the slide concave portion 764 of the back cover member 760; and a coil spring 728 that hangs downward and forward and is connected to the hooked portion 617 of the base member 610 at its lower end.

The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support member 720 so as to extend and contract in the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723 .

The slide hole 724 is an elongated hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723, and is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can prevent the vertical movement of the tilting operation unit 600 from shifting in the horizontal direction (relative rotation of the tilting operation unit 600 with respect to the support member 720).

The lower lid portion 726 has a tooth profile extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile has a shape that meshes with the tooth profile formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 of the driving device 750 . Thereby, it is possible to suppress the strut member 720 from slipping on the belt 755 of the driving device 750 .

The rolling portion 727 is inserted into the slide concave portion 764 of the back cover 760 so as to be able to roll, thereby suppressing frictional resistance and suppressing tilting in the front-rear direction around the lower end portion of the support member 720 . be able to.

The coil spring 728 is a biasing force that moves the tilting motion unit 600 upward. Since the biasing force from the coil spring 728 is constantly applied to the tilting motion unit 600, the tilting motion unit 600 is prevented from falling downward due to gravity.

The connecting member 740 is pivotally supported by a triangular plate-like main body member 741 rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and by a rolling shaft 741c projecting from the main body member 741. A pair of cylindrical upper rolling members 742 rolling on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. a front cover member 743 arranged in a manner such as a front rail portion 715; and a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 that is moved.

The main body member 741 is a member formed in a triangular plate shape, and has a circular recess formed in the upper end portion from the rear surface, and a shaft rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 . A support portion 741a, an insertion plate portion 741b which is a plate-like member protruding from the lower end portion toward the front side and is slidably inserted through the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710, and an insertion plate portion extending from the shaft support portion 741a. It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c projecting in a columnar shape toward the front side from positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular drawn to 741b, and on which the upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported.

Since the insertion plate portion 741 b is inserted through the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710 , the connecting member 740 is formed to be movable along the rear rail portion 716 . Therefore, the tilting unit 600 pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 741 a is also formed to be movable along the rear rail portion 716 .

The rolling shafts 741c are formed as a pair at positions symmetrical with respect to a vertical line drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c are brought into contact with the arc-shaped front rail portion 715 via the upper rolling portion 742, the load ( A force normal to the arc) passes through the pivot 741a. Therefore, the connecting member 740 can stably hold the pivotal support protrusion 612 of the tilting unit 600 .

The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 741 a and contacts the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 . That is, when the connecting member 740 slides along the front rail portion 715 , the upper rolling portion 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 . As a result, the frictional resistance generated when the connecting member 740 is slid can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slidable movement can be suppressed.

The lower rolling member 744 has its lower half rotatably fitted around the lower portion of the front cover member 743 and its upper end abuts against the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 . That is, when the connecting member 740 slides along the front rail portion 715 , the lower rolling portion 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 . As a result, the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 during the sliding movement can be reduced, and the driving force required for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

Thus, in this embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 , and the lower rolling member 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 . As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744 of the connecting member 740 while suppressing frictional resistance.

Here, the tilting motion unit 600 may tilt in the front-rear direction because the center of gravity is formed upward as described later. In this case, the connecting member 740 sandwiches the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744. , can generate resistance. This makes it easier to maintain the posture of the tilting motion unit 600 .

The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740 so that the upper rolling member 742 cannot be pulled out.

The driving device 750 includes a driving motor 751 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and generates a driving force for sliding the support member 720, a driving gear 752 pivotally supported by the driving motor 751, and A shaft fixed gear 753 meshed with a belt 755 wound thereon, and a shaft moving gear 754 spaced apart from the shaft fixed gear 753 and around which the belt 755 is wound and a rotary shaft 754a slidably formed. , a belt 755 wound around the fixed shaft gear 753 and the fixed shaft gear 754 and moved by the rotation of the fixed shaft gear 753, and a coil that generates an urging force to move the fixed shaft gear 754 away from the fixed shaft gear 753. and a spring 756 .

The fixed shaft gear 753 includes a fixed shaft portion 753a which is a cylindrical member serving as a rotating shaft and is inserted through the shaft support hole 712 of the base member 710 . In addition, the shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754 a which is a cylindrical member serving as a rotation shaft and is inserted through the slide shaft support hole 713 of the base member 710 .

The fixed shaft gear 753 and the movable shaft gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. The inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 is formed with a tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 . As a result, slippage between the belt 755 and the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the amount of rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755 .

One end of the coil spring 756 is fixed to a hook-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear, and the other end is fixed to a case that covers the axial movement gear 754. . As a result, an urging force can be generated to move the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft support hole 712 , and an appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755 , so that the belt 755 can move between the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 753 . Dropping off from the gear 754 can be prevented.

The rear cover member 760 is a member that covers the driving device 750 on the rear surface of the base member 710, and includes a main body portion 761 formed in a box shape with an open front side, and a fixed shaft portion 753a on the bottom surface of the main body portion 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a receiving recess, a moving recessed portion 763 that is a recess that extends in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and receives the moving shaft portion 754a, and a laterally extending portion that receives the rolling portion 727. and a slide recessed portion 764 which is a recess.

The slide recessed portion 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 rolls on its upper and lower inner surfaces. It suppresses the frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the support member 720 and suppresses the tilt of the support member 720 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the strut member 720 tilts in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 abuts against either the upper inner side surface or the lower inner side surface of the slide concave portion 764 . As a result, tilting of the strut member 720 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Next, the tilting motion unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600. FIG.

The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-shaped base member 610 fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, a box-shaped effect member 620 whose lower end is pivotably supported by the base member 610, A first driving device 630 that generates a driving force for swinging the effect member 620, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first driving device 630 to the effect member 620, and a contact with the transmission member 640 for transmission. It mainly includes a torsion spring 650 that generates a biasing force to move the member 640, and a second driving device 660 that generates driving force to open and close the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the effect member 620. .

The base member 610 includes a body portion 611 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape to which the slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed, and a columnar support portion of the connecting member 740 protruding from the front side of the body portion 611 . A shaft support projection 612 on which 741a is supported, and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the shaft support projection 612. and a first shaft support hole 613 formed vertically above the first shaft support hole 613, and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the first shaft support hole 613. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body 611 and inserted vertically slidably through the slide hole 724 of the support member 720, and an insertion hole through which the drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted. 616 and a hook-shaped hook-shaped portion 617 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 611 toward the back side.

The second shaft support hole 614 is provided with a lower receiving plate portion 614a projecting from the lower edge toward the front side with an arcuate cross section. The rotation of the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is guided by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. In addition, the lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed with a lateral width having a length substantially equal to the outer diameter of the tubular portion 642 (see FIG. 53(a)).

By inserting the auxiliary member 615 into the slide hole 724 , tilting of the base member 610 in the horizontal direction can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid in the vertical direction.

The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion on which one end of the coil spring 728 is hooked and a biasing force is applied.

The effect member 620 and the second driving device 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 52 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 620 and the second driving device 660. FIG. Note that the liquid crystal device arranged inside the effect member 620 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS.

The effect member 620 is a box-shaped member in which a liquid crystal device is arranged, and includes a rectangular plate-shaped body member 621 and a body member 621 extending forward from the top and bottom of the body member 621 so as to cover the body member 621. a bendable upper and lower cover member 622; left and right cover members 623, which are plate-shaped members attached from both sides of the upper and lower cover member 622 and form a rectangular box shape with an open front side together with the upper and lower cover member 622; A first curtain member 624 which is a member for opening and closing the opening and is connected to the fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 and moved, and a member for opening and closing the front opening together with the first curtain member 624 and being a member for opening and closing the front opening. It mainly includes a second curtain member 625 that is moved by being pulled by the curtain member 624, and a cylindrical swing shaft portion 626 that protrudes from the lower back surface of the main body member 621. ) is formed above (at a higher position) than the swing shaft portion 626 . The center of gravity position G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

The main body member 621 includes a columnar sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that is vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 and protrudes toward the rear side. The slide shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted through the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that accommodate the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the driving device 660. .

The left and right cover members 623 are provided with slide grooves 623a which are formed in the shape of grooves on the inner side surfaces and in which the slide projections 625c of the second curtain member 625 are slidable.

The slide groove 623a is connected to curved grooves formed in an arc shape at the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. As a result, the second curtain member 625 is slid along the shape of the slide groove 623a such that linear movement and curvilinear movement occur in sequence.

The first curtain member 624 is a member that swings vertically about the opening/closing shaft 664 of the second driving device 660. A fitting portion 624b that protrudes in the left-right direction from an end portion of the 624a and is fitted into a fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 so as not to rotate relative to the fitting portion 624b, and one end near the fitting portion 624b is a main body portion. A connecting member 624 c pivotally supported by 624 so as to be able to swing and having the other end connected to the connecting protrusion 625 b of the second curtain member 625 .

The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and moved in the vertical direction. A connecting protrusion 625b projecting in the left-right direction from an end portion and connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left-right cover member 623 projecting outward in the left-right direction from near the bent portion of the main body portion 625a. and a slide protrusion 625c inserted through the 623a.

The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 fastened and fixed to the back side of the production member 620, a drive gear 662 pivotally supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear meshed with the drive gear 662 to A pair of transmission gears 663 that rotate in opposite directions, and an opening/closing shaft that is inserted through the transmission gears 663 so as not to rotate relative to each other and is rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by a shaft support mechanism (not shown). 664 and transmission members 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of opening/closing shafts 664 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

The transmission member 665 has a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the first curtain member 624 swings up and down around the opening/closing shaft 664 .

Returning to FIGS. 50 and 51, description will be made. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 having a drive shaft inserted through an insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631 . , and a helical gear-shaped worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 .

The worm 632 is formed with a double thread. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, so the worm wheel 633 makes one rotation while the worm 632 makes ten rotations. As a result, the rotation angles of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be significantly reduced when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution.

The worm wheel 633 has a locking projection 633a that protrudes from the center of the rotation shaft, is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610, and is locked to the tubular portion 643 of the transmission member 640 so as not to rotate relative to it. Prepare. Structurally, the transmission of driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 actively rotates, the force 632). As a result, the load applied to the drive motor 631 when the worm wheel 633 is stopped can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped while the power of the drive motor 631 is turned off, so that the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53(a) and 53(b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 53(a) and 53(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and for the description of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650, refer to FIGS. 50 and 51 as appropriate. do. FIG. 53(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642. In this state, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 exerts a Balanced in the swinging direction. FIG. 53(b) shows a state in which the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise in a front view from the inverted state of FIG. 53(a) by a predetermined amount, and the effect member 620 is swung by a predetermined amount.

The transmission member 640 is a member that is swung by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50), and has a main body portion 641 that is formed in the shape of an elongated rectangular rod, and one end of the main body portion 641 that moves forward and backward. A cylindrical portion 642 extending in the axial direction and engaging the locking projection 633a of the first driving device 630, and a length extending in the axial radial direction of the cylindrical portion 642 at the other end of the body portion 641. Sliding holes 643 drilled as holes, contact portions 644 spaced apart on both sides of the body portion 641 in the swinging direction, and the contact portions 644 and the front side surface of the body portion 641 are connected. and a wide arcuate rear arcuate plate portion 646 connecting the abutting portion 644 and the back side surface of the body portion 641.

As shown in FIG. 53 , the abutting portion 644 , the front arcuate plate portion 645 and the rear arcuate plate portion 646 are arranged in a manner surrounding the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the torsion spring 650 from dropping (separating) from the transmission member 640 .

The cylindrical portion 642 is pivotally supported in the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked to the locking projection 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first driving device 630 so as not to rotate relatively. be.

The sliding shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is inserted through the sliding hole 643 . Accordingly, when the transmission member 640 is swung about the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is moved. is slid through the slide hole 643 (slid in the axial radial direction), the effect member 620 is swung about the first shaft support hole 613 .

By swinging the effect member 620 in this way, it is possible to suppress the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the driving motor 631 is rotated in the minimum unit of the control resolution of the driving device. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method of directly connecting a gear to the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor to the gear is also conceivable. However, in this case, the angle P0 (see FIG. 53(a)), which is the minimum unit of control resolution, is shown larger than the actual angle P0 for ease of understanding. The movement amount X1 by which the center of gravity of the effect member 620 shifts in the left-right direction from the inverted state increases as the center of gravity of the effect member 620 moves away from the swing shaft portion 626 when rotated in the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the more the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is separated from the swing shaft portion 626 , the more difficult it becomes to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the effect member 620 . It becomes difficult to stop the effect member 620 in the state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the production member 620 is connected to the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620 . The length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the cylindrical portion 642, which is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640, is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626, which is the swing shaft of the effect member 620. formed short compared to .

Therefore, even if the effect member 620 is elongated in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the minimum unit angle P0 (see FIG. In order to do so, it is possible to suppress the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity of the effect member 620 when the driving device is operated at an angle several times larger than the actual angle P0. Therefore, the movable member can be easily stopped in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the first axis.

In addition, as a method for swinging the production member 620, gear teeth are formed on the production member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear meshing with the gear teeth is rotated by a drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 is conceivable. However, in this case, the greater the swing range of the effect member 620, the larger the range in which the gear teeth on the arc are formed in the horizontal direction of the effect member 620 is required. Therefore, when the effect member 620 is formed in a narrow shape in the swinging direction, the gear teeth on the circular arc protrude from the effect member 620, which interferes with the effect of the effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 has a cylindrical portion 642 that is a swing shaft and a swing shaft portion 626 that is a swing shaft of the effect member 620 . , and is connected to the swing shaft portion 621a at the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Since the production member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 with respect to the swing range of the production member 620 can be suppressed near the center of the production member 620 in the left-right direction. As a result, even if the effect member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 640 from protruding from the effect member 620, and the design flexibility of the effect member 620 can be improved.

The lower surface of the sliding shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 . As a result, the weight of the effect member 620 is applied not only to the swing shaft portion 626 but also to the transmission member 640 . That is, the force opposing the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the swing shaft portion 626 but also from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 . Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported at two points, the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, and the radial force applied to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be suppressed. .

Here, since the inverted state shown in FIG. 53(a) is the normal state for the effect member 620, the transmission member 640 is swung and after the predetermined amount of swinging from the inverted state, it can quickly return to the inverted state. is desirable.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53(b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. is rocked at a rocking angle φ2 (φ2<φ1).

That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is made smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 that swings by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53(a)).

Further, in the present embodiment, an elongated slide hole 643 is formed in the axial radial direction of the transmission member 640, and the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted through the slide hole 643. As shown in FIG. The transmission member 640 and the production member 620 have different swing axes, and the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620. Therefore, the transmission member 640 As is oscillated, the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the oscillating shaft of the transmission member 640. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53(a)) is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state ( The arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in FIG. 54(b) is shortened.

That is, the arm length of the transmission member 640 is shortened as it approaches the inverted state. can be made smaller as it approaches the inverted state compared to the case of . Therefore, without changing the rotational speed of the drive motor 631, the operation speed of the production member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position, while the operation speed of the production member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the production member 620 is turned upside down. (It is possible to easily control the stop of the effect member 620 in a state in which the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is arranged vertically above the first shaft support hole 613).

Referring to FIG. 55, by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640, the effect member 620 swings with respect to the swing angle of the transfer member 640. A change in angle will be described.

FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53(a)). 55, the rotation axis M1 corresponds to the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53(a)) that is the rotation shaft of the effect member 620, and the rotation shaft M2 is the tubular portion 642 that is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53(a)). Straight lines a1 to a4 schematically represent the arrangement of transmission member 640, and are straight lines drawn radially from rotation axis M2. Straight line a1 passes through rotation axis M1, and straight lines a2 to a4 are straight lines a1 and is formed in such a manner that the formation angle of is sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angles formed by the adjacent straight lines a1 to a4 are 15 degrees each.

An arc drawn with a radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53(a)) centered on the rotation axis M2 is illustrated by arc SR1, and the arm length R2 centered on the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54(b)). A circular arc drawn with a radius equal to is illustrated by arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn centering on the rotation axis M1, and has a radius of the arm length R1 plus the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2.

These arcs assume loci of connecting positions between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53(a)). In the present embodiment, a sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53(a)) as a connecting position protrudes from the effect member 620, and the connecting position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. . In addition, when the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, a long hole is formed in the effect member 620 in the axial radial direction, and the transmission member 640 is connected to the hole. A case is assumed in which the shaft inserted through the long hole protrudes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P10, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P11, and the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P12. is illustrated.

Similarly, the intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P20, the intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P21, and the intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P22. The intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P30, the intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P31, and the intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P32. The intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P40, the intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P41, and the intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P42. The intersection point P10 and the intersection point P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection point P40 and the intersection point P42 are arranged at the same position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, an angle A10 forms an angle between a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P10 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21 is indicated by the angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P12 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 is indicated by the angle A12. be done.

Similarly, an angle A20 forms between a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30. The angle A21 forms the angle between the straight line passing through the axis of rotation M1 and the intersection point P22, and the angle A22 forms the angle between the straight line passing the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32. An angle A30 forms an angle between a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P40. and the angle A31 forms an angle A31, and the angle A32 forms an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P42. Note that these angles correspond to the swing angles of the effect member 620 .

Here, the ratio of (distance between rotation axis M1 and rotation axis M2:arm length R1:arm length R2) is (1:2.32:2.54) in this embodiment. When the angles are actually measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 swings between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the production member 640 is the largest when the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected along the arc SR0. , the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR2 (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

Angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is It is less than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between angles A22 and A20 is smaller than the difference between angles A20 and A21 (angle A20 is closer to angle A22 than to angle A21).

Angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung from the straight line a2 to the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is It surpasses the case where the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between angles A12 and A10 is greater than the difference between angles A10 and A11 (angle A10 is closer to angle A11 than angle A12).

From these, by setting the trajectory of the connection position of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) to the arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 is swung at a constant speed, the effect member It can be seen that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. That is, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 is close to the angular velocity (high speed side) when the trajectory of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a1. The angular velocity at the time of arrangement can approach the angular velocity (low speed side) when the trajectory of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the circular arc SR1.

Also, when calculating the ratio of each angle, the ratio of angle A22/angle A32 is 0.98, and the ratio of angle A12/angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21/angle A31 is 0.98 and the angle A11/angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the trajectories of the connecting positions of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) are the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at a constant speed. In this case, the deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

On the other hand, the angle A20/angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10/angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the trajectory of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) is an arc SR0 (an arc centered on the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant speed. The deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when swung toward the state can be set to 3 to 5%. That is, compared to the case where the trajectories of the connecting positions are circular arcs SR1 and SR2 (circular arcs centered on the rotation axis M2), the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 contacts the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so the force of the gravity G of the effect member 620 acts as the swing axis. It is applied vertically downward to the portion 626 and the cylindrical portion 642 . Therefore, since the gravity of the effect member 620 does not generate a force component in the direction of swinging the effect member 620, even if the power of the first driving device 630 is cut off, the attitude of the effect member 620 can be maintained in an inverted state. can be done. Thereby, durability improvement of the 1st drive device 630 can be aimed at.

In addition, since the force due to the gravity G of the effect member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, the rotational resistance of the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be increased. , the attitude of the production member 620 in the inverted state can be easily maintained.

The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring that generates an urging force in the direction of unwinding the coil portion 651 (the direction of pushing back the transmission member 640) as the transmission member 640 swings. A coil portion 651 wound around, an urging arm portion 652 extending along both side surfaces of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 in the swinging direction, an end portion of the coil portion 651 and an end portion of the urging arm portion 652. and a connecting arm portion 653 that connects between the tubular portion 642 and the swing shaft portion 626 .

The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter approximately three times as large as the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 . Therefore, when the urging arm portion 652 is swung and a load that causes the coil portion 651 to shrink in diameter is generated, the amount of deformation of the coil portion 651 can be secured, and the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 are deformed. can be suppressed from concentrating on

The urging arm portion 652 is surrounded by the body portion 641 , the contact portion 644 , the front arc plate portion 645 and the rear arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the biasing arm portion 652 from dropping (separating) from the transmission member 640 .

In addition, the biasing arm portion 652 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the plane on which the transmission member 640 swings. Therefore, a biasing force pushing back the transmission member 640 is generated from the biasing arm portion 652 arranged in the swinging direction of the transmission member 640, and the biasing arm portion arranged on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640 is generated. 652 is prevented from moving by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. Thereby, the torsion spring 650 is formed to be able to generate a biasing force in the direction of pushing back the transmission member 640 regardless of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640 .

A bent portion 653 a bent to the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed at the connecting portion of the biasing arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 . In this case, as will be described later, the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650, thereby extending the bent portion 653a (see FIG. 54(b)). As a result, the contact position between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes farther from the cylindrical portion 642, and the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 is increased. can be done.

Referring to FIG. 54, changes in the urging force generated by torsion spring 650 to push back transmission member 640 will be described. 54(a) and 54(b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 54(a) and 54(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIG. refer.

54A, the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 54(b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 54(a), and the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled. An extended state is illustrated.

In the state of FIG. 54( a ), a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated in the biasing arm 652 on the left side of the torsion spring 650 when viewed from the front. This biasing force is the sum of the biasing force originating from the coil portion 651 and the biasing force originating from the bent portion 653a.

That is, in the state of FIG. 53B, the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the left bent portion 653a in the front view of the pair of bent portions 653a. At the portion 652 , only the biasing force originating from the coil portion 651 is generated as the biasing force for pushing back the transmission member 640 .

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54(a), in addition to the biasing force originating from the coil portion 651, the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 originating from the bent portion 653a also generates a biasing force. Therefore, the spring constant of the biasing arm portion 652 can be increased. The deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a is shorter than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so that the unit deformation amount of the transmission member 640 is reduced. The urging force generated by hitting can be made larger.

In the state of FIG. 54(b), the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pushed by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640, so that the angle formed by the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 is widened. As a result, the contact position length L1, which is the distance between the contact position of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 and the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the cylindrical portion 642 in the state of FIG. 54(b), the contact position length L2 is separated from the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640, as compared with FIG. That is, the contact position length is extended. As a result, the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is lengthened, so that the moment loaded from the torsion spring 650 to the transmission member 640 can be increased.

Therefore, for example, when the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially the same between the state of FIG. 54(a) and the state of FIG. the moment applied can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to push back the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 .

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 pushing back the transmission member 640 is small as long as the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (effect member 620) from the retracted position is small, and is large when the swing angle is large. Indeed, it is elastically increased, and is increased more than the elastic increment from the state of FIG. 54(a). Therefore, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 required when the effect member 620 is set to the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54(b)) is determined, the torsion spring only elastically increases , the biasing force can be set smaller when the swing angle is small (a soft spring can be used).

As a result, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the operating speed of the production member 620 at the start of swinging is decelerated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 650, and it is possible to speed up the operating speed of the production member 620 at the start of the operation. .

54(a) as a boundary, the biasing force is increased by an amount equal to or more than the elastic increment. The deceleration acceleration of the production member 620 can be increased. As a result, the timing to start decelerating the production member 620 can be delayed between the swinging motions of the production member 620 . Therefore, it is possible to increase the swing angle at which the production member 620 is swung in a high-speed state, and the production effect of the tilting motion unit 600 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 56, the sliding motions of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700 will be described. 56 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. FIG. In FIG. 56, the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position is illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 56, a connecting member 740 connecting the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700, which are formed to be slidable in the vertical direction, is formed to be movable in the extension direction of the front rail portion 715. . Here, since the weight of the tilting motion unit 600 is applied to the connecting member 740, when the tilting motion unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position, the tilting motion unit 600 moves along the front rail portion 715 due to the force of gravity. urged in the direction of Therefore, it is conceivable to fix the driving device 750 in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 at the retracted position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be vertically swingable, and when the lever member 714 is swung downward, it engages with the locking portion 725 of the support member 720 to move the support member 720 left and right. Sliding movement in the direction is restricted.

As a result, it is possible to mechanically maintain the tilting motion unit 600 at the retracted position. It can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

By swinging the lever member 714 upward and operating the driving device 750 from the state in which the tilting motion unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position, the support member 720 can be moved, and the tilting motion unit 600 can move in the left-right direction. can be slid to

As shown in FIG. 56 , when the tilting motion unit 600 is placed at the retracted position in an inverted state, the shaft support portion 741 a of the connecting member 740 is placed vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting motion unit 600 .

Here, since the direction of sliding movement of the tilting motion unit 600 is along the front rail portion 715, in FIG. always has a vertical component.

Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting motion unit 600 and the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 are misaligned in the vertical direction, a load may be applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting motion unit 600 . This is the same when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid in the opposite direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the pivot 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied from the connecting member 740 to the tilting motion unit 600 and the center of gravity G Formed on the same line. As a result, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the coupling member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting motion unit 600 , and stabilize the posture of the tilting motion unit 600 .

Next, referring to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of tilting motion unit 600 on the sliding motion of sliding motion unit 700 will be described. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. FIG. Note that FIG. 57 illustrates a state in which the effect member 620 of the tilting motion unit 600 is swung to the state of FIG. 54(b).

As shown in FIG. 57 , when the effect member 620 is swung counterclockwise in front view, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged on the left side of the connecting member 740 in front view. Therefore, the leftward acceleration in the front view applied to the connecting member 740 is increased.

In this case, the drive force required to slide the tilting unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, so the drive motor 751 of the drive device 750 can be downsized.

Next, a tilting motion unit 2600 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the contact surface of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface. 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641a that abuts against the tip portion of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

58(a), 58(b) and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. 58(a), 58(b) and 59, the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 58(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 58(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 58(a). 59 shows a state in which the transmission member 2640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front, and the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip portion of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. In FIG. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise in front view from the state in FIG. 58(b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58(a)), the body portion 2641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, causing the body portion 2641 to move. A torsion spring 650 generates an urging force for swinging in the direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 swings and the urging arm portion 652 is deformed, the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced and deformed by the connecting arm portion 653 connected to the urging arm portion 652 on the deformed side. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the biasing force for swinging the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the contact position ( The tip position of the urging arm portion 652 ) is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 2640 . That is, the more the transmission member 2640 is oscillated, the more the distal end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 is moved toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641 (the side closer to the slide hole 643).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the distal end portion of the biasing arm portion 642, when the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise in the front view. , the urging arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the distal end side of the body portion 2641 by the abutting portion 2641a.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung in a state where the movement of the transfer arm portion 642 is restricted by the contact portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, the base side (bending portion 653a side) of the biasing arm portion 642 is moved downward by the amount that the biasing arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the tip side of the body portion 2641 . As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction of reducing the diameter of the coil portion 651 (the direction in which the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 increases).

That is, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state of FIG. 59 can be increased compared to the case without the abutting portion 2641a. As a result, the degree of change in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (increase rate of the biasing force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) can be increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 compared to the state shown in FIG. can be done. Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased. By increasing the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 non-linearly (more than the elastic change), it is possible to obtain a sufficient biasing force to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state.

Next, a tilting operation unit 3600 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In the first embodiment, the contact surface of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width. 3641 has an inclined side surface 3641a on the side surface that contacts the tip of the torsion spring 650 in such a manner that it becomes wider toward the tip side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

60(a) and 60(b) are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. 60(a) and 60(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 60(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 60(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 60(a). A state in which the transmission member 3640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)), the main body portion 3641 is pressed against the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is pushed. A torsion spring 650 generates an urging force for swinging in the direction of returning to the inverted state.

When the transmission member 3640 swings from the state shown in FIG. 60(a) to the state shown in FIG. , the contact position between the body portion 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the biasing arm portion 652 (the tip position of the biasing arm portion 652) is changed by the swinging motion of the transmission member 3640. FIG. That is, as the swinging angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)) increases, the tip of the biasing arm 652 moves toward the tip of the main body 3641 (the side closer to the slide hole 643). ).

Therefore, the tip portion of the biasing arm portion 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641 a of the main body portion 3641 . That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 undergoes deformation due to the width of the transmission member 3640 being expanded by the inclined side surface 3641a in addition to the deformation caused by the swing angle of the transmission member 3640. . In this case, since the width of the transmission member 3640 increases toward the distal end of the transmission member 3640, the greater the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)), the more the inclined side surface 3641a. The deformation of the torsion spring 650 due to the expansion of the width of the transmission member 3640 is increased. Therefore, as the swing angle of transmission member 3640 increases, the rate of increase in the biasing force generated by torsion spring 650 (change in biasing force of torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of transmission member 3640) can be increased.

Next, a tilting operation unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described. A moving abutment member 4647 having a width shorter than that of the portion 644 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 61(a) is a rear perspective view of a transmission member 4640 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61(b) is a rear perspective view of a moving contact member 4647. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 61(a), illustration of the moving contact member 4647 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the front circular arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645a which are arranged symmetrically at intervals shorter than the intervals at which the contact portions 644 are arranged and which are drilled in the front-rear direction. Prepare. The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of rear projections 4647b of the movable contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), the moving contact member 4647 includes a main body portion 4647a formed in a long plate shape, and a pair of rear projections protruding from both ends of the main body portion 4647a to the rear side. It mainly includes a portion 4647b and a front projection portion 4647c projecting from approximately the center of the main body portion 4647 toward the front side in a hemispherical shape.

One end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front protrusion 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (FIGS. 62(c) and 641b). See FIG. 62(d)). In order to facilitate understanding, illustration of the coil spring 4648 is omitted in FIGS. 61(a), 61(b), 62(a) and 62(b).

The rear protrusion 4647b is a portion that is inserted through the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640 from the front side. possible length) is projected. In addition, the rear protrusion 4647b is formed to be inclined at an angle that makes contact with the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 in a plane (line) (see FIG. 64(b)). As a result, the load applied to the biasing arm 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) compared to the case where the biasing arm 652 and the rear protrusion 4647b are in contact with each other at a point, and the biasing arm 652 durability can be improved.

The front protrusion 4647c is a portion of the production member 4620 that contacts the body member 4621 (see FIG. 63). It is moved away from the front circular arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62(c)), or the moving contact member 4647 approaches the front circular arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62(d)). Since the tip of the front protrusion 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, the front protrusion 4647c can be easily lifted onto the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

62(a) and 62(b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62(c) and 62(d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. FIG. 62(a) and 62(c), the state in which the moving contact member 4647 is separated from the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is shown in FIGS. 62(b) and 62(d). 4647 is shown in close proximity to the front arc plate portion 4645, respectively.

FIG. 63 is a schematic front view of the main body member 4621 of the production member 4620. FIG. The transmission member 4640 that forms an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is in a center state 4640C, and the state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in a front view is a counterclockwise swing state 4640L. The clockwise rocking state 4640R as seen from the front is illustrated by imaginary lines. Also, in the center state 4640C, the counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and the clockwise swing state 4640R, the illustration of the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 4645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 is omitted for easy understanding. .

The body member 4621 has a clearance opening 4621a drilled in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the escape opening 4621a is a region where the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in a front view (center state 4640C and counterclockwise swing). 4640L).

When the front protrusion 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps the relief opening 4621a in a front view, the front protrusion 4647c is inserted into the relief opening 4621a, and the moving contact member 4647 is moved by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648 to move the transmission member 4640. body portion 641 (see FIG. 62(c)). On the other hand, when the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap with the escape opening 4621a (overlaps with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c contacts the side surface of the main body member 4621 of the production member 4620 on the back side, and the moving contact member 4647 is brought close to the body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62(d)).

That is, the rear protrusion 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the urging arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise in front view from the inverted state. be Therefore, when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the inverted state as viewed from the front, the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated more than when it is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It is possible to increase the rate of increase in the biasing force applied (the degree of increase in the biasing force with respect to the swing angle).

64(a) and 64(b) are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 64(a) and 64(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and for ease of understanding, the main body portion 4647a of the moving contact member 4647 is shown. Illustration is omitted. 64(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 64(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 64(a). A state is illustrated in which the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise by a predetermined amount from the front view, and the biasing arm 652 on the left side in the front view is in contact with the rear protrusion 4647b.

As shown in FIG. 64B, while the swinging angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, it is possible to contact the biasing arm portion 652 from the side opposite to the body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640 (contact portion 644 side). By doing so, it is possible to increase the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in front view.

As a result, the biasing force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front is improved while the starting speed when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front is increased. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect member 4620 from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210 .

That is, when the tilting operation unit 4600 is arranged at the retracted position and the effect member 4620 is turned upside down, the inner surface of the rear case 210 is brought close to the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, if the production member 4620 is vigorously swung from the counterclockwise swung state (see FIG. 57) toward the inverted state, the production member 4620 cannot be decelerated, and the back case 210 There is a risk that the effect member 4620 will collide with the inner surface of the.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear protrusion 4647b projects (see FIG. 62(d)) at the timing when the production member 4620 swings clockwise from the inverted state, and the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is released. can be increased. As a result, the effect member 4620 is fully moved when the effect member 4620 is tilted clockwise in the front view from the inverted state while maintaining a high operating speed when the effect member 4620 is tilted in the counterclockwise direction in the front view from the inverted state. can be slowed down to

In addition, the rear projection 4647b is pushed back at the point of contact between the rear projection 4647b arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 4640 in the swinging direction and the biasing arm 652 (counterclockwise in FIG. 64(b) when viewed from the front). ) exerts a biasing force. As a result, compared to the case where the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 (the right side in FIG. 64(b)), the transmission member 4640 is pushed back with a greater biasing force. can be pushed back. On the other hand, it is also possible to improve the biasing force generated by the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the contact portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652, which are arranged on the side opposite to the side close to the transmission member 4640, abuts to the lower receiving plate portion 614a. , the distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is short. In this case, it is easy to move the bent portion 653a by the force from the contact portion 644 with the lower receiving plate portion 614 as the fulcrum, but the reverse is difficult (there is a difference in the distance from the fulcrum to the point of action). because there is).

Therefore, the biasing force generated by the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side in the front view caused by the contact between the contact portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652 is generated by the deformation of the torsion spring 650 as a whole. That is, when the urging arm portion 652 on the left side in front view and the rear projection portion 4647b are brought into contact with each other, the bending portion 653a on the left side in front view is bent to the left side in front view (the inner diameter of the coil portion 651) with the lower receiving plate portion 641a as a fulcrum. ) causes deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the biasing arm portion 652 on the right side in front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 is deformed to reduce the inner diameter, a biasing force is generated in the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 toward the side of increasing the inner diameter of the coil portion 651. The biasing force of the biasing arm portion 652 on the rocking direction side of 4640 to push back the transmission member 640 can be improved.

Next, a compound action unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. FIG.

In the first embodiment, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position, the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. However, in the rotating arm member 5550 of the fifth embodiment, the non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is provided with a recessed portion 5556 that is recessed in the direction away from the rotating crank member 570 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

65 to 68 are front views of a compound action unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. 65, the state in which the rotating arm member 5550 is arranged at the extended position and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged near the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is shown in FIG. 65, the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the first concave portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c. However, in FIG. 67, the state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state in FIG. A state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the two recessed portions 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is illustrated. be.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68 , the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c of the compound action unit 5550 has a recessed portion 5556 recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570. As shown in FIGS.

The recessed portion 5556 has an arc-shaped first wall portion 5556a (approximately 1/4 of the circular shape) formed on the left side when viewed from the front, and an arc-shaped (approximately 1/4 of the circular shape) formed on the right side when viewed from the front. and a second wall portion 5556b having a shape that allows the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 to slide. That is, the recessed depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is made equal to or less than the radius of the sliding protrusion 574, and the connecting portion between the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is smooth. Formed from a curved surface.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the turning crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the recessed portion 5556 that is the first from the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding projection portion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not rocked. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a. Crank member 570 creates a non-transmitting state.

66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved to the first recess from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c. It is pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the installation portion 5556, and the rotating arm member 5550 is again swung (pushed down) to the extended position. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the second wall portion 5556b is pushed and moved by the sliding projection portion 574, thereby swinging the rotating arm member 5550. The driving force of the second driving device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570 .

Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 Crank member 570 forms the transmission.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the turning crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the recessed portion 5556 second from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding projection portion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not rocked. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a. Crank member 570 creates a non-transmitting state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the sliding projection 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a in a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise. A non-transmitting state is formed between the moving crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550, and when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member are arranged. 5550 and a communication state is formed.

Note that if the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 are arranged to face each other. A non-transmitting state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b. be.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in this embodiment, the rotating arm member 5550 is moved between the retracted position (see FIG. 22) and the extended position without switching the swinging direction of the rotating crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion in which the swing arm member 5550 is swung between the two positions, the width of the swing arm member 5550 is small in the vicinity of the extended position (the lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between the position U1 and the position U2). A rocking rocking motion can be formed.

This makes it possible to cause the rotating arm member 5550 to swing, which is difficult to achieve by switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 . That is, it is also possible to cause the rotating arm member 5550 to perform a swing motion with a small width near the extended position by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the rocking motion depends on the switching speed of the driving direction of the driving device 560 . In addition, even if the driving direction of the driving device 560 is switched while the speed of the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the driving device 560 and the rotating arm member 5550 is large, and the driving direction cannot be switched instantaneously. , there is a possibility that the time required for switching the driving direction becomes long.

On the other hand, in the swinging operation of the rotating arm member 5550 in the vicinity of the protruded position in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, so the time required for switching the driving direction is unnecessary. can do.

Further, the operating speed of the clockwise swinging motion (upward swinging motion) of the rotating arm member 5550 depends on the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. The operating speed of the clockwise swinging motion (downward swinging motion) depends on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, by increasing the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570, the swinging speed of the rotating arm member 5550 near the extended position can be increased.

As a result, it is possible to achieve both an increase in the speed of the swing motion near the overhanging position of the swing arm member 5550 and a reduction in the switching time of the swing direction.

Next, a compound action unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the rotating arm member 550 of the compound action unit 500 is integrally molded, but the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting two members. . By relatively rocking the two members, the attitude of the arcuate hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

69(a) and 69(c) are partial front views of the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 6550 is a partial top view of arm member 6550. FIG. In addition, FIG. 69(a) illustrates a state in which the tip of the tip end swinging member 6556 is directed upward in the first posture, and FIG. The state in which the second orientation is formed is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to a main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end of the main body portion 6551. It mainly includes a tip end swinging member 6556 and a switching device 6590 that is fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the body portion 6551 and that switches the attitude of the tip end swinging member 6556 . An arc-shaped hole 6554 is formed in the tip end swinging member 6556 .

The main body portion 6551 has a pivot hole 6551 a drilled in the front-rear direction at the other end thereof and serving as the center of swing of the tip swing member 6556 .

The tip end swinging member 6556 is formed in such a manner that the end on the side connected to the main body portion 6551 sandwiches the main body portion 6551 in the front and rear, and a shaft support hole 6556a is drilled as the swing center of the tip end swinging member 6556. , a shaft support rod 6556b which is a bar material inserted through the shaft support hole 6556a thereof and the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip end swing member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arc-shaped hole 6554. and a sliding shaft 6556c that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the end of the part and is connected to the guide elongated hole 6591d of the switching device 6590.

The arcuate hole 6554 has a return portion 6554a projecting from the upper inner surface. The return portion 6554a is a portion that slides on the projection portion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect member 6540, and when sliding from the tip side of the arc-shaped hole 6554, resistance is suppressed, while sliding in the opposite direction. It is a left-right asymmetrical protrusion that increases the sliding resistance when it is moved.

70(a) and 70(b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. FIG. 70(a) shows a pushed-up state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70(b) shows a pushed-down state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down with respect to the switch member 6592. is illustrated. The pushed-up state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69(c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69(a).

The C-shaped member 6591 includes a long plate-shaped body portion 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which the moving columnar portion 6592a can be inserted is drilled in the center, and an inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the hole drilled in the body portion 6591a. A cylindrical guide portion 6591b, which protrudes in a cylindrical shape and has grooves formed on the inner peripheral surface thereof, extends downward from both ends of the main body portion 6591a in the longitudinal direction and is arranged to face the main body portion 6551 in the front-rear direction. and a guide elongated hole 6591d which is an elongated hole through which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip end swinging member 6556 is guided.

The grooving formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591b is for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the moving cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592. As shown in FIG. The C-shaped member 6591 is switched between a pushed-up state and a pushed-down state each time it is pushed in the direction of being pressed against the switch member 6592 by this groove processing. It should be noted that other members such as a spring member that forms the biasing force necessary to form the knock mechanism are not shown. 71).

The switch member 6592 includes a moving cylindrical portion 6592a having a protrusion protruding from the outer peripheral surface that is inserted into the cylindrical guiding portion 6591a and can move in a groove on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guiding portion 6591a. and a fixed plate portion 6592 b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 .

Here, in the knock mechanism, the relative positions in the axial direction are switched while the tubular member and the columnar member guided on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member rotate relative to each other. That is, if the cylindrical member and the columnar member do not rotate relative to each other, it becomes difficult to switch the relative positions in the axial direction.

On the other hand, the moving columnar portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is rotatably connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved toward the switch member 6592 (when pushed downward in FIG. 70(a)), the moving cylindrical portion 6592a can rotate relative to the cylindrical guide portion 6591b. and the knock mechanism works.

Therefore, the fixed plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591 can be switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state without relatively rotating. Therefore, it is possible to switch the state of the switching device 6590 between the push-up state and the push-down state while maintaining the state in which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip end swinging member 6556 is inserted through the guide elongated hole 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591. can.

71(a) and 71(b) are front views of the compound action unit 6500. FIG. FIG. 71(a) shows a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the extended position and the switching device 6590 is pushed up, and FIG. The device 6590 is shown depressed. In addition, in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is arranged at a position swung to the left end of the swingable range.

As shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), by switching the state of the switching device 6590 in a state where the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the extended position, the front view clock of the telescopic effect device 540 is changed. The maximum rotation angle can be switched.

That is, when the switching device 6590 forms the push-up state (see FIG. 71(a)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect member 6540 is brought into contact with the upper inner surface of the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 Swing angle is limited.

At this position, the inner side surface of the arc-shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as a stopper, and even when the swing speed of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be operated in the arrangement shown in FIG. 71(a). It can be stopped suddenly (the moving locus RI of the projecting portion 541b is brought into contact with the return portion 6554a).

On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms the depressed state (see FIG. 71(b)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arc-shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (the protrusion 541b The movement trajectory RI is not in contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the protrusion 541b is released from the tip 554a of the arc-shaped hole 6554 to the outside.

Therefore, the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 swings clockwise in front view until the rotary plate 520 contacts the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71(b)). At this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and even when the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 swings at a high speed, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be suddenly stopped.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) for effecting a sudden stop of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 by swinging the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 clockwise in a front view. variations can be increased. The state of the switching device 6590 is switched by swinging the expansion/contraction effect member 6540 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the tubular guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 moves from the upper right portion of the main body member 6541a to the right when viewed from the front. It is generated by being pushed by the push-in portion 6541a extending in the direction. Therefore, since the second driving device 560 that causes the expansion and contraction effect member 6540 to swing is also used as the driving device that swings the tip swinging member 6556, the number of driving devices to be provided can be reduced.

Further, in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the swinging range of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swinging member 6556. FIG. In this case, since the swing angle is slight, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change.

Here, when the rotating arm member 6550 can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 71), assuming that the swinging angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the rotating arm member 6550, Expectations for the operation of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 are diminished, and attention to the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the tip swing member 6556 swings at a small angle to change the swing angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540, making it difficult for the player to notice the change. can. As a result, expectations for the operation of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be enhanced, and the attention degree of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, an elongated slide hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640, and the effect member 620 is supported in the slide hole 643 so as to be guided. The tilting operation unit 7600 in the form has a shaft support hole 7643 formed at the end of the transmission member 7600 , and the effect member 620 is supported in the shaft support hole 7643 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

72(a) and 72(b) are front views of the tilting motion unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. 72(a) shows an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7643 of the transmission member 7640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. A state in which the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is illustrated. In FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the production member 620 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the rear side thereof are visible. , and the illustration of the torsion spring 650 and the pivotal support projection 612 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 72( a ), the base member 7610 has a slide hole 7613 drilled in the front-back direction vertically below the second pivot hole 614 of the main body 611 . The sliding hole 7613 is an elongated hole through which the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole is formed along the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is slidably supported in the slide hole 7613 .

The transmission member 7640 has a shaft support hole 7643 formed in the end opposite to the end of the main body 641 where the tubular portion 642 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a portion that swingably supports the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is drilled with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the slide shaft portion 621a.

The oscillating motion of the effect member 620 is caused by the transmission member 7640 oscillating about the second shaft support hole 614 due to the rotation of the driving motor 631 of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 51).

In this embodiment, the sliding shaft portion 621a is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 7643, so that when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 moves along the swing locus of the transmission member 7640. (the sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted through the slide hole 7613 , the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610 when the transmission member 7640 swings.

Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72(b), when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72<transmission swing angle φ72). dynamic angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is oscillated in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 , the oscillating angle of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than the oscillating angle of the transmission member 7640 . Thereby, the accuracy of adjustment of the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. explain.

A connecting line J1 illustrated in FIG. The imaginary connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and the swing shaft portion 626 is arranged above the slide hole 7613 from a line drawn in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641 through the cylindrical portion 642. This line is drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 72(a)). Note that the virtual angle φ73, which is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2, is the same as that of the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the slide hole 7613. This corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), the effect swing angle φ72 is smaller than the virtual angle φ73. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the amount of swinging of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be adjusted. can improve the accuracy of

<First control example>
Next, control examples in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 134. FIG. In the first control example, control processing (processing related to game control such as display effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described. In this control example, the display image that is used when the power is turned on is controlled so as to be corrected and used during normal presentation. As a result, since a common display image can be used when the power is turned on and when the normal presentation is performed, the capacity of the ROM can be saved.

In addition, in this control example, the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are used in the effect in which a specific role object (the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) and the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is moved. It is controlled to correct the contents of the production displayed in. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 becomes difficult to see, for example, the display content displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed on the sub-display device 690 in an effect in which a specific accessory moves. By doing so, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to visually recognize the display contents.

Furthermore, when the vertical movement unit 400 is moved and the door member 470 is opened, the opening/closing drive motor 466 that keeps the door member 470 closed is not excited when the door member 470 is dropped. It is controlled (energization stop control). Specifically, when excitation of all positions (A to D) of the opening/closing drive motor 466 is off (energization is stopped) (see FIG. 135(a)), the static torque of the opening/closing drive motor 466 (so-called , detent torque), that is, the torque for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized. In this case, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is moved in the falling direction, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force generated in the door member 470 . As a result, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force acting on the door member 470 when the door member 470 is dropped without driving the opening/closing drive motor, so power consumption can be reduced.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when a specific advance notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the winning hole during the time effect period which is periodically executed, the effect to be executed during the time effect period is restricted. controlled to do so. Thereby, when the countdown effect which is the specific advance notice effect is executed, the countdown effect executed during the time effect period can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is puzzled by the repeated countdown effect during the time effect period.

Further, the ball-entering effect displayed based on the ball entering the winning hole is displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the intervals at which game balls enter a winning hole are short, the period for displaying the ball-entering performance can be lengthened, and the player can easily visually recognize the ball-entering performance. be able to.

It should be noted that this control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of the above-described embodiments, or by combining the above-described embodiments. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example>
First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 73, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 102). Then, the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203 as appropriate. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In each of these areas, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is displayed in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. are stored respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 102).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and the RAM 203 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 75(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 If the value coincides with the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special It is divided into two types, one for the period when the pattern is in a high probability state. That is, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 75(a)) is composed of a first winning random number table for low probability and a first winning random number table for high probability. The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table 202a for special symbol low probability and the first winning random number table 202a for special symbol high probability are provided in ROM 202 of main controller 110. FIG.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there is one random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random number "0" is the first winning random number table 202a for when the probability is low. (See FIG. 75(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/400". In addition, since the total number of random numbers that become a small hit is 2, the probability that the first special symbol will become a small win is "2/400".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 10 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot. )). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 10 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/40". In addition, since the total number of random numbers that result in a small win is 1, the probability that the first special symbol will result in a small win is "1/400".

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the value provided in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75(b)). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39", the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) is selected, and when it is "40 to 79", the jackpot B (16R Time-saving jackpot) is selected, and when it is "80 to 99", jackpot C (2R probability variable with time-saving no jackpot) is selected.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot types set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75(b)) are set to three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, but not limited thereto, four types. The above jackpot types may be selected, or two types or less, for example, only one jackpot type may be selected. In addition, the types and ratios of the jackpot types selected for the special symbol 1 jackpot and the special symbol 2 jackpot may be set differently.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of reach, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. ” (for example, the range of 90-99) and “Completely out of reach” (for example, the range of 0-89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is used by the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is narrow, 0 to 79, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64. table is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 102), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 76) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. there is

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a large winning variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 76(b)) and a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 76(c)). and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 76(d)) are set at least. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a variation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

First, with reference to FIG. 76(b), the variation pattern table for big win 202d1 will be described. FIG. 76(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning is set. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as variation patterns of the jackpot. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value.

Specifically, for the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", for the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds ), “180 to 198” are set as determination values of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set is selected as a big hit. Select from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 76(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is loss is set. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", failure reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long failure (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, "0 to 149" for different normal reach (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for different super reach (60 seconds), and special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and obtains it from the lost (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 76(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be a deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description is continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. , is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 75(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is , If it matches the value of the random number set as the hit set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 75(d)), it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for when the probability of normal patterns is low (period in which normal patterns are normal), and when the probability of winning normal patterns is high than that of low probability (normal patterns) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 75(d), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and the opening period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the first winning hole 64 . A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 102).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, contents of ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 205c, and the variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

74, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. At least a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a variable probability flag 203g, a time saving medium counter 203h, a jackpot flag 203i, a counter buffer 203y, and other memory areas 203z. is doing.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is obtained in accordance with the starting winning, a jackpot lottery with original special symbols is started. Separately, from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3, various information obtained when the original lottery is conducted is predicted (estimated). In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) Prediction is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success/failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information to store the special symbols 1 or 1 in the RAM 233. Of the special symbols 2, the corresponding special symbols are stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. , predict various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize. It should be noted that this prediction (prefetch) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the game state (normal game state or probability variable game state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . As a result, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbols corresponding to the starting prize.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a memory area dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), and the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1 ) is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203d reaches a maximum value of 4. are added (see S504 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 93).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number N1 of holding variable display in special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 93 and S505 in FIG. 96). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the process of S510 in FIG. 96, and is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 93). In addition, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of holding variable display in special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 93, S511 in FIG. 96 reference).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See S804 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 98).

When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 99). S803: No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the variable probability flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The variable probability flag 203g has an initial value set to off, and in the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variable variable time short no jackpot) When it is determined that it is the end timing), it is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, it is referred to determine whether the game state is a definite variable state in the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 95) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 94) (S403 in FIG. 95, FIG. 94, S303), and is set to OFF when the next jackpot game is started (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 94, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 94, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the value is on, the second for high probability time Based on the per random number table 202a, while the special design lottery is performed, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, based on the first per random number table 202a for low probability time, the special design lottery is performed. will be

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern time saving state, and when the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols. This time-saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) is executed at the start timing of the ending production (that is, the end timing of the jackpot game) by the jackpot control processing (of FIG. 103). S1215 reference). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is during the time saving in the normal symbol variation process (see S708 in FIG. 98), and in the special symbol variation process, it is decremented by one each time the variation time elapses. (See S222 in FIG. 93). In addition, when the value of the counter 203h during time saving is larger than 0 and the variable probability flag 203g is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state and time saving state of special symbols.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is turned on, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state by the jackpot control processing (Fig. 103, S1206) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The small hit flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit has occurred. When the small winning flag 203j is turned on, a small winning game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened by the big winning control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.例文帳に追加

The time saving flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state (ordinary symbol high probability state), and if the value of the time saving flag 203k is ON, the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol. If the value of the time saving flag 203k is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of normal symbols). The time saving flag 203g has an initial value set to OFF, and in the jackpot control process, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending production based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) (the end timing of the jackpot game) , is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, it is referred to determine whether the game state is a definite variable state in the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 95) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 94) (S403 in FIG. 95, FIG. 94, S303), and is set to OFF when the next jackpot game is started (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), both the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are set to ON, and the time saving game is given along with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the jackpot C (2R probability variable with short time no jackpot), although the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON, the time reduction flag 203k remains OFF, and only the probability variable game is given.

Here, in the probability variable game (variable probability state of special symbols), the probability that the lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 will be a big win is set to a high probability. Unless it is suggested that it is a probability variation game by changing the, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a probability variation game. On the other hand, in the time-saving game, since the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 are changed, it is easy to determine whether it is a normal game or a time-saving game. .

Therefore, if the player is given a time-saving game along with a probability-variable game based on the jackpot A (16R probability-variable big hit), it can easily recognize that it is a probability-variable game, but the player can easily recognize that it is a probability-variable game. Jackpot) when only the probability variation game is given based on, it becomes difficult to recognize that it is a probability variation game (so-called latent probability variation state). As a result, the player needs to guess whether the game state is normal game or variable probability game, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 102) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 100) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). The ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a ball-entering effect selection table 222b.

Since the variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, it will be briefly described. Based on the content (variation time, variation type (reach, loss, etc.)), more detailed variation contents are determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The ball-entering effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the effect contents of the ball-entering effect executed based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 during the time-saving game. This ball-entering effect selection table 222b defines the effect contents of the ball-entering effect to be executed based on the number of fluctuations until a big win is achieved. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the winning effect is selected based on the winning information and the winning effect selection table (see S2403 in FIG. 115).

As the types of ball entry effects, there are six types of ball entry effects from level 0 ball entry effects to level 5 ball entry effects. A performance is selected. As a result, the player can recognize the number of times until the big win (the degree of expectation of the big win) by determining the level of the ball-entering effect, and the player's interest can be improved.

The display image of the ball-entering effect in this control example includes a comment part (“Hurry up”, “Chance?”, etc.) and a level suggesting part (“star”) displayed corresponding to the level of the ball-entering effect. consists of In this comment section, a plurality of comments are defined corresponding to the level of the ball-entering effect, and are selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i. On the other hand, the level suggesting portion has a fixed number of "stars" corresponding to the level of the entering performance. For example, there are 0 "stars" in the level 0 notice effect (see FIG. 89(a)), 1 "star" in the level 1 notice effect, and 2 "stars" in the level 2 notice effect. is displayed (see FIG. 89(b)). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which it is easy to determine the level of the ball-entering effect being executed for the player. On the other hand, in the comment portion, comments selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i are displayed, so that the variation of the display image of the ball-entering effect can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. . It should be noted that the level suggesting portion may not be provided, whereby the player needs to guess the level of the ball-entering effect from the display of the comment portion, so it is possible to make the player interested in the ball-entering effect. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 78, detailed contents of the entering effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the entering effect selection table 222b. As described above, the entering effect selection table 222b defines the effect contents of the entering effect to be executed based on the number of fluctuations until a big win is achieved.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations to the big hit based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is greater than 4, that is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the level It is stipulated that the 0 ball entry effect is selected. In addition, when the number of fluctuations up to the big win based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is four times, that is, the lottery result of the big win of the second special symbol is stored in the fourth reserve of the winning information storage area 223a. In this case, it is stipulated that the level 1 ball-entering effect is selected.

Similarly, if the number of fluctuations up to the big win based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is 3 times, the level 2 ball entry effect is performed, and if it is 2 times, the level 3 ball entry effect is performed once. If , the level 4 ball entry effect is selected, and if it is 0 times (the variation results in a big win), the level 5 ball entry effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description is continued. FIG. 77(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a display area counter 223f, an effect At least a time storage area 223g, an effect mode storage area 233h, an avoidance flag 233i, an effect counter 223j, a power-off flag 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1, first area to fourth area for special symbol 2), Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is the area number in the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 or the special pattern 2. The (first to fourth) areas are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 1 that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of 4 times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 107). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 2 reserved in the main controller 110 is up to 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. With the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the number of reserved balls is added by entering the second winning hole 640, and the special symbol 1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The only difference is that it is used to display the reserved ball number pattern of the pattern 2, and the other is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number counter 223 c in the small area Ds 1 of the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c synchronizes with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. , its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. It can be changed while Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on in the fluctuation pattern reception process executed when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 108), and the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 It is turned off when the setting is made (see S1802 in FIG. 109). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 107), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S1807 in FIG. 109). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Also, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is performed so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. is controlled.

The display area counter 223f selects a display area ( This is a counter used to determine the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d (see FIG. 89 or 90). This display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 when the sound lamp control device 113 is activated, and is repeatedly updated within the range of 1 to 4 in the ball-entering effect setting process (see FIG. 115), which will be described later. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, but a ball-entering effect is displayed in the area of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the display area counter 223f. Specifically, when the display area counter 223f is 1, it is in the first area 81a of the third pattern display device 81, and when it is 2, it is 3 in the second area 81b of the third pattern display device 81. In the case of 4, in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and in the case of 4, in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81, the ball-entering effect is displayed.

The presentation time storage area 223g is an area for storing the timing for performing a time presentation, and based on the presentation time stored in the presentation time storage area 223g, a time presentation or a specific time during execution of the time presentation is executed. A specific time production is executed. This effect time storage area 223g is set in the time setting process (see FIG. 105) of the start-up process executed when the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on. It is set for 24 hours.

The presentation mode storage area 223h is information for determining whether the current game state is a normal presentation period (presentation mode A), a time presentation period (presentation mode B), or an extended time presentation period (presentation mode C). is stored. If the current presentation mode is the normal game period (outside the time presentation period), presentation mode A (normal presentation period) is stored, and if the current presentation mode is the time presentation period, presentation mode B (time presentation period) is stored. , if it is an extension time performance period, the performance mode C is stored.

The avoidance flag 223i is a flag used for determining whether or not the countdown time notice effect is executed in the time effect period (effect mode B), and when the avoidance flag 223i is on, the time effect period (Production mode B) shows that the countdown notice production is executed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, and if it is off, the countdown time notice production is executed during the time production period (production mode B). is not executed. When the avoidance flag 223i is ON, the countdown notice effect is executed in the time effect period (effect mode B), so that the countdown effect of the specific time effect is controlled not to be executed. As a result, the countdown notice effect related to the second winning hole 640 and the countdown effect related to the specific time effect are not executed in duplicate, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

This avoidance flag 223i is set to ON when the advance notice effect is selected in the effect mode B (time effect period) in the advance notice selection process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109). (See S2007 in FIG. 111). And it is set to OFF when the variable production|presentation which performed the said announcement production|presentation is complete|finished.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selection of various effects (fluctuation patterns, advance notice effects, etc.), various lotteries, etc., in the sound lamp control device 113. to 198 (not shown).

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, a power cutoff command is sent to audio lamp control device 113, and when audio lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is turned on. The setting is made, and power-off processing is executed (S1519 in FIG. 106). In the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 104), if the power-off flag 223y is on, the RAM work area is cleared and data is read, and the power-off flag 223y is set off. (S1310 in FIG. 104). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process at the time of power interruption can be reused by the data reading process in the start-up process at the time of power restoration, and the game information before the power interruption can be used again, and the game can be continued. can be done.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 107) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 116) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Furthermore, the NAND flash memory 234a is provided with a correction information table 234a3 (see FIG. 79). This correction information table 234a3 stores data for correcting the display coordinates of the main image, the variation image, and the title image when the power is turned on (see FIG. 80(b)). Although the details will be described later, at each effect timing of the game, the display position and display magnification (enlargement rate) of the main image, the variable image, the title image, etc. at the time of power-on are corrected based on the information of the correction information table 234a3. will be displayed. As a result, it is possible to correct and use the main image, the variable image, the title image, etc. at the time of turning on the power at each effect timing. Therefore, the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

Here, the contents of the correction information table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the correction information table 234a3. The correction information table 234a3 is a table that stores correction information (display permission/inhibition, correction coordinates, enlargement ratio) of the power-on image in each effect.

Although the details will be described later, when the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example displays the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display image 81 and the sub-display device 690 as power-on images, respectively. , and the title image are displayed when the power is turned on. Display coordinates to be displayed when the power is turned on are determined for each of these various power-on images. 690 (see FIG. 82).

Various power-on images displayed here are configured to be used (displayed) even in a normal game after the power is turned on. The display coordinates and the like are set to be corrected and displayed based on the above. As for the information of the correction information table 234a3, when each effect is executed, the data of the correction information table 234a3 corresponding to the effect to be executed is stored in the correction information storage area 233m. The display control device 114 displays various power-on images based on the data stored in the correction information storage area 233m.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(b), various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) in each effect can be displayed (on or off). ), correction coordinates, and magnification information.

The correction information table 234a3 for normal effect is data stored in the correction information storage area 233m when the normal variable effect is executed. In this normal effect correction information table 234a3, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are set to OFF, and the power-on variation image is set to ON. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (-600, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to ×1 (same magnification). As a result, when the normal effect is executed, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed at the same size with the coordinates (0, 0) moved (-600, -450) from the initial position (600, 450) as the origin. The size is displayed (see FIGS. 82 and 83(a)). Note that the power-on main image and the power-on title image are not displayed because they are set to off.

The correction information table 234a3 for demonstration effect is data stored in the correction information storage area 233m when the demonstration effect is executed. In this demonstration effect correction information table 234a3, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are set to off, and the power-on title image is set to on. The amount of correction of the coordinates of the title image at power-on is set to (-700, 0), and the enlargement ratio is set to x2 (two times). As a result, when the demonstration effect is executed, the title image at power-on is doubled with the coordinates (200, 100) moved (-700, 0) from the initial position (900, 100) as the origin. (See FIGS. 82 and 83(b)). Note that the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are not displayed because they are set to off.

The correction information table 234a3 for moving the elastic role object is data stored in the correction information storage area 233m when the effect (expansion role object scenario) in which the expansion/contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves is executed. . In the correction information table 234a3 for moving the telescopic accessory, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are set to OFF, and the variation image at power-on is set to ON. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (200, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to ×1 (same magnification). As a result, when an effect in which the stretchable accessory is movable is executed, the power-on variation image moves from the initial position (600, 450) by (200, -450), and the coordinate (800, 0) is set as the origin. , are displayed in the same size (see FIG. 82). As a result, the power-on variation image is displayed on the sub-display device 690 . Note that the power-on main image and the power-on title image are not displayed because they are set to off.

The correction information table 234a3 for moving the tilting role object is data stored in the correction information storage area 233m when the effect (tilting role object scenario) in which the tilting effect device 540 is moved is executed. In the correction information table 234a3 for tilting accessory movement, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are set to OFF, and the power-on variation image is set to ON. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (-600, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to ×1 (same magnification). As a result, when an effect in which the telescopic accessory is movable is executed, the power-on variation image moves from the initial position (600, 450) to (-600, -450), and the coordinate (0, 0) is the origin. 82 and 83(a)). Note that the power-on main image and the power-on title image are not displayed because they are set to off.

In this way, it is possible to correct various power-on images and display them on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 according to the data of the correction information table 234a3 in accordance with various effects to be executed. As a result, it is possible to display a variable image or the like according to various effects without providing image data for displaying with various effects, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

It should be noted that correction may be made such that the positions where various power-on images are displayed are moved in conjunction with the actions of the characters that are moved in each presentation. Specifically, the elapsed time in one presentation and the correction information for various power-on images are defined. As a result, for example, when an effect is executed in which the accessory moves from right to left, the moving image can be displayed while moving from left to right.

Also, when moving various power-on images, they may be moved back and forth between the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 . In this case, when an image is displayed across the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, the resolutions of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are different. is adjusted (converted) using a scaler (for example, a video scaler). As a result, the range in which various power-on images can be moved can be expanded.

Further, correction information may be set so that various power-on images can be moved when the power is turned on. In this case, the correction information to be used when the power is turned on should be read together with the program in the first program storage area which is read first when the power is turned on. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on, an origin return operation is executed for moving various accessories to the origin position. Therefore, there is a timing when the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 become difficult to see because various accessories are moved by the return-to-origin operation. Therefore, by correcting the display area of each power-on image according to the movable state of each character, the game machine can be made such that the various power-on images can be easily visually recognized even during the return-to-origin operation of each character. can be done.

Next, the image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 87) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 118(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b, a third pattern area 235d, and a power-on title image area 235f.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by a player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image, and the power-on title image area 235f from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area. 235a, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 (see FIG. 116).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, the display areas of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 and the power-on image displayed in the display areas will be described. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display areas of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example includes a third symbol display device 81 and a sub-display device 690, and the display control device 114 performs control for displaying image data on these display devices.

Specifically, the display control device 114 handles image data having an area of 1200 horizontal pixels by 600 vertical pixels. Here, in the image data, the position of the upper left corner is (0, 0) and the position of the lower right corner is (1200, 600). In this case, the image data of the area from (0,0) to (800,600) is the area for the third pattern display device, and the image data of this area will be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Also, the image data in the area from (800, 0) to (1200, 300) is the sub-display device area, and the image data in this area will be displayed on the sub-display device 690. FIG. Furthermore, the image data of the remaining area from (800, 300) to (1200, 600) is an unused area, and the image data of this area is not used for display.

Thus, the display control device 114 in this control example treats the image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 as one image data, and according to the coordinates, the third pattern display device 81 It is changed whether to display on the sub-display device 690 or on the sub-display device 690 . This makes it easy to synchronize the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, and the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690. ) can be prevented from being misaligned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 may be provided respectively.

Next, referring to FIG. 82, a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 by the display control device 114 when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on title image from the character 234 to the power-on title image area 235f. Next, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b, and then stored in the resident video RAM 235. The remaining image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . As a result, the display control device 114 first displays the power-on title image (see FIG. 82) on the sub display screen 690 using the image data stored in the power-on title image area 235g. Next, the third pattern display device 81 is caused to display the main image (see FIG. 82) when the power is turned on. While these displays are being performed, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Here, since the sub-display device 690 has a lower resolution than the third pattern display device 81, the data amount of the image displayed on the sub-display device 690 is the same as that of the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. less than the amount of data. Therefore, in the display control device 114, an image to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 with a small amount of image data (power-on title image) is first stored in the resident video RAM. to the image display can be shortened.

After that, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 receives the third symbol display device 81 The power-on fluctuation image with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen and the power-on fluctuation image with an "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are alternately repeated during the fluctuation period. is displayed (see FIGS. 82(b) and (c)). Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, and if it is ``a big hit with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is ``no special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed to stop the variable performance. It will be displayed for a certain period of time later.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Furthermore, by immediately displaying this power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display device 81, even if the power supply is once cut off due to a power failure or the like during execution of the game and then restored, the game that was being executed before the power failure can be restored. Since the fluctuation or the result of the fluctuation can be immediately confirmed by a simple fluctuation performance, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

A simple character image or the like may be provided as the image displayed when the power is turned on, and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the performance even in the simple variable performance displayed when the power is turned on, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, the simple character image used here may be the character image used in the sub-display device 690 during normal rendering. As a result, character images with a small data capacity displayed on the sub-display device 690 can be shared and used without newly providing a simple character image. The transfer time of the image to the video RAM 235 for use can be shortened.

Furthermore, the images transferred to the resident video RAM 235 may be sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 . As a result, even in the simple performance executed from when the power is turned on until the normal game can be started, the variation of the performance can be sequentially increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved. can be done.

Also, when transferring an image to the resident video RAM 235, the image is transferred so that the resolution is lowered by a known image compression technique, and then the image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is decompressed. may Then, when the compressed image is stored in the resident video RAM, the image may be displayed on the sub-display device 690 . As a result, even if the image is compressed to a low resolution, the sub-display device 690 with a low resolution can display the image without discomfort. can be shortened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, display screens during the normal effect and during the demonstration effect will be described. FIG. 83(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during a normal effect, and FIG. 83(b) is a display of the third symbol display device 81 during a demonstration effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed the screen typically.

During normal presentation, the display coordinates of the power-on fluctuation image are displayed with (-600, -450) based on a correction information table 234a3, which will be described later. Since the display coordinates of the power-on fluctuation image when the power is turned on are (600, 450), the power-on fluctuation image is displayed at the position (0, 0) during the normal effect (Fig. 83(a)). )reference). This power-on fluctuation image is used as an image showing the fluctuation result of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) during normal production.

Also, during the demonstration effect, the display coordinates of the title image at power-on are displayed with (-700, 0) based on a correction information table 234a3, which will be described later. Since the display position of the title image at power-on is (900, 100) when the power is turned on, the title image at power-on is displayed at the position (200, 100) during the demonstration effect (Fig. 83(b)). )reference).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device 81 changes. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by storing data corresponding to these characters in the character design area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of image in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing object buffer flag 233j, a correction information storage area 233m, a special effect correction flag 233n, a background image change flag 233p, and a effect mode flag 233r.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Or if it is one of the jackpot C, the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first prize winning port 64 is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is generated, and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second prize winning port. If it becomes easier to enter 640, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 85) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 87), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 86). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 86).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

As in the case of the display data table, "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 86, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image). This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2505 in FIG. 116). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4805 in FIG. 132(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2801 in FIG. 118B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2809 in FIG. 118(b) S2810) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4701 in FIG. 132(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 132(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 133) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 87), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 87), which will be described later and describes the contents of image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing of V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 118(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 130) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 87), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, . . . , error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, display setting processing ( Each time step S2803 in FIG. 118B) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4307 in FIG. 128). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4913 in FIG. 133). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S4914 in FIG. 133). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 118B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The correction information storage area 233m is an area in which the information of the correction information table 234a3 described above is stored. The position information of the title image) is corrected and displayed. The value of the correction information storage area 233m is set to an initial value (no correction, each image type is ON) when the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on, and each power-on image is displayed at the initial position. Then, the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 is set according to the game state (displayed effect). For example, if the normal effect is being executed, the correction information table 234a3 for normal effect is set (see S4604 in FIG. 131).

The special effect correction flag 233n is a flag for determining whether or not it is time to execute the effect in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) and the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) are movable. When an effect in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) and the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is executed (when there is a telescopic role object scenario or a tilting object scenario), the corresponding role object The movable correction information (correction information for telescopic accessory movement, correction information for tilting accessory movement) is stored in the correction information storage area 233m and set to ON. Then, it is set to OFF when the effect in which the character object is movable is stopped. Here, since the front member 546 of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is moved to the front of the third pattern display device 81 when the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is moved, It becomes difficult to visually recognize the three-symbol display device 81 . In this case, by storing the stretchable accessory movable correction information in the correction information storage area 233m, the variation image can be displayed on the sub display device 690, so the above-described problem can be suppressed.

The back image change flag 233p is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. This back image change flag 233p is set to ON when a back image change command or an effect mode change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S4001 in FIG. 126(a)), and a normal image is transferred. It is referenced in the setting process (see S4909 in FIG. 133), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S4910 in FIG. 133). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The effect mode flag 233r is a flag that is set and referred to for determining the effect mode, and the rear image is changed based on the effect mode set in the effect mode flag 233r. This effect mode flag 233r is set based on the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4002 in FIG. 126(a)), based on the value of the set effect mode flag 233r, described later Back image data is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4911 in FIG. 133). Thereby, the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub display device 690 can be changed according to the effect mode set by the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90, the ball-entering effect executed during the time-saving game of this control example will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the ball-entering effect is executed. In the time-saving game in this control example, the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to 0.125 seconds, and the symbol is stopped and displayed 0.475 seconds after the variation time has elapsed. That is, in the time-saving game in this control example, one variable effect executed based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole ends in 0.6 seconds. In this case, if the degree of expectation for the big win is displayed in one display area based on the execution of the variable performance, the variable performance will end in 0.6 seconds (that is, the degree of expectation for the big win will be displayed for 0.6 seconds). ), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win.

Therefore, in this control example, the ball-entering effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed in order in the four areas from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. While displaying the ball-entering effect in the area 81a, the next ball-entering effect can be displayed in the second area 81b. This makes it possible to lengthen the display period of the ball-entering effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big win, and to provide a game machine that makes it easy for a player to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win, that is, to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

In addition, the ball-entering effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big win is also performed when the game ball enters the second winning hole 640 even when the holding of the second winning hole 640 is the upper limit (4 in this control example). (So-called, the ball-entering effect is displayed even at the time of overflow). As a result, even if the holding of the second winning hole 640 is the upper limit (4), it is possible to make the player want to continuously enter the game ball into the second winning hole 640, thereby playing the game. It can improve the interest of the person.

In addition, the ball entry performance that indicates the degree of expectation for a big hit is a performance corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit. Specifically, as will be described later, based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until a big win is achieved, control is performed so that a ball-entering effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win (a high-level ball-entering effect) is achieved. As a result, the level of the ball-entering effect gradually increases, so that the player can gradually have a premonition of the arrival of a big win, and the player's interest can be improved.

A specific description will be given with reference to FIG. First, after the jackpot game is over, the game state shifts to the time-saving game state, and if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4 during the jackpot game, the fluctuation is based on the oldest winning ball among the reserved balls. A variation 1 is initiated. Here, if the winning information of each reserved ball does not include the winning information of the jackpot, the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is greater than 4 (undecided). When there is a ball entry (lottery result is lost), a ball entry performance of level 0 is displayed in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4. (see FIG. 89(a)).

Then, when the variation 1 ends, the variation 2 based on the held balls is started, and the number of held balls of the second special symbol becomes 3. When the second ball enters the second winning hole 640 (lottery result is a big hit) during execution of this variation 2, the number of remaining variations until the big win becomes 4, and the level 1 ball entry effect is the third. While being displayed in the second area 81b of the symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol changes to four.

Then, when the variation 2 is completed and the variation 3 based on the retained balls is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining variations until the big hit is reduced to 3. When the third ball enters the second winning hole 640 (the lottery result is lost) during execution of variation 3, the level 2 ball entering effect is displayed in the third area 81c of the third pattern display device 81. (Refer to FIG. 89(b)), and the reserved design of the second special design changes to 4. Further, when the fourth ball enters (overflows) into the second winning hole 640 during the execution of the variation 3, the level 2 ball entering effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d of the third display device 81. be.

Next, when the variation 3 ends and the variation 4 based on the retained balls is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining variations until the big hit decreases to 2. If no ball is entered into the second winning hole 640 during the execution of this variation 4, the variation 4 is finished as it is without newly displaying the ball entry effect.

When the variation 4 ends, the variation 5 based on the held balls is started, the number of held balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit is reduced to 1. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 during execution of this variation 5, a level 4 ball entering effect is displayed in the first area 81a of the third display device 81 (see FIG. 90(a)). , The number of held balls of the second special symbol increases to 3.

Then, when variation 5 ends, variation 6 based on the reserved balls of the winning prize information of the big win is started, the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is reduced to 2, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the big win is reduced to 0. do. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 during execution of this variation 6, a level 5 ball entry effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 90(b)). At the same time, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3. After that, when the fluctuation of the fluctuation 6 is completed, the jackpot game is executed.

Thus, in this control example, the type of the ball-entering effect is changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations up to the big win. It is possible to recognize in advance that it will be, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, since the level of the ball-entering performance gradually increases based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until the big win, the player can gradually get a sense of the arrival of the big win, and the player's interest is enhanced. can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, since the production period of one fluctuation production in the time saving game is set to 0.6 seconds (variation time 0.125 seconds, stop time 0.475 seconds), continuously to the second winning opening 640 If the game ball is not entered, the variable presentation ends immediately, and the game becomes boring. On the other hand, based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, it is configured to display the degree of expectation for a big win. As a result, the player can be made to want the game ball to enter the second prize winning port 640, and can be played so that the game ball continuously enters the second prize winning port 640, so that the variable effect can be achieved. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming boring due to an immediate end.

In this control example, the ball-entering effect is performed according to the number of remaining fluctuations up to the big win, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be executed, or the above-described ball-entering effect may be executed regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations up to the big win. As a result, it is possible to provide a case where a big win is achieved without foreseeing the arrival of the big win, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the above-described ball-entering effects are displayed in order from the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d of the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the ball-entering effect based on one ball-entering is continuously displayed until four game balls newly enter the second prize-winning hole 640, and the game balls enter the second prize-winning hole 640. Even if the ball-entering interval is very short, the time for displaying the ball-entering effect can be secured, and the problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the ball-entering effect can be suppressed. Incidentally, it is also possible to determine an area where the ball-entering effect is not displayed, and preferentially use and display the area where the ball-entering effect is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to secure a longer time during which the ball-entering effect is displayed.

Furthermore, in this control example, the second winning port 640 is held as the upper limit, and furthermore, even when a game ball enters the second winning port 640 (so-called overflow), it is configured to perform a ball entry effect. ing. As a result, even if the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit, the ball entering effect is displayed based on the entry of the ball, so that the holding of the second winning opening 640 becomes the upper limit for the player. Even if the game is held, the player can be made to want to continuously enter the game ball into the second winning hole 640, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, since the ball-entering effect is displayed more than the number of time-saving games provided, it is possible to make the player feel that many time-saving games are being provided.

In this control example, the ball-entering effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. They may be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or variation is executed, or when there is prize winning information for a big win. As a result, the order of displayed ball-entering effects can be changed, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the player can be prevented from becoming bored early.

Also, the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big win. For example, when the expectation of a big win is low, the ball entry effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d. should be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation based on the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area). Since it is no longer necessary to see the details of the ball-entering effect displayed in , the burden on the player can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the time production executed in this control example and the specific time production executed during execution of the time production will be described. The time production executed in this control example is, as described above, a production executed synchronously among a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the time set by the RTC 292 (clock means) provided in the pachinko machine 10. be.

FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time presentation period. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the current time information is acquired from the RTC 292 by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) in the start-up process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later. be. Based on the acquired time information, a time production period (production mode B) is set when 55 minutes have passed. It should be noted that the normal game machine period (production mode A) is set until the time production period is set. The time presentation period is usually set to 5 minutes, and when this 5 minutes elapse, the normal game period is set. Since the normal game period (55 minutes) and the time production period (5 minutes) are repeatedly set, the time production period (production mode B) is set every hour.

Here, when 5 minutes of the time performance period elapses, it is determined whether or not the reserved memory stored at that point in time or the changing special pattern is set to give a big win as a result of winning or not determination, and the big win is made. When one is set, a time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set with the time until the change ends.

Here, when the remaining time of the time effect period becomes 3 seconds or less (S2107 in FIG. 112: Yes), the actual third pattern is reduced and moved to the lower right of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. Is displayed. Then, a performance symbol similar to the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. In this case, the effect pattern is displayed with a slight sway to inform that the effect symbol is not completely stopped and displayed. In this way, by switching to the production pattern and displaying it as if the third pattern were stopped and displayed, other pachinko machines 10 also seemed to stop and display the third pattern at the same timing. can let In addition, when the stop timing of the third symbol coincides with the time effect period, the effect symbol is also displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the display mode from becoming constant at the end of the time presentation period and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the performance pattern is stopped and displayed 3 seconds before the remaining period, an omen display mode is displayed in which the performance pattern is slightly trembling and displayed for the remaining 3 seconds. Then, after the characters "super school of fish time" indicating that it is the time rendering period, a notification mode of "End?" After that, when the time presentation extension period is set, the characters "Super school of fish time extension!!" are displayed to notify that the time presentation period has been extended, and the background image of the school of fish is displayed again. In this case, at the same time as the start of the extension, the performance symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner, and the player is notified as if a new special symbol has started to be varied. In addition, since the extended period is a period until the variable display for the big win ends, the remaining time (for example, 115 seconds) of the period is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the time production period is extended, the time production is extended because the reservation memory that becomes a big hit is set or the fluctuation has already started (during fluctuation). As a result, the player is notified of a big win. Here, in the time performance period, the same performance is executed synchronously between the same pachinko machines 10, and the performance whether or not the extension period is set is displayed at the same timing. As a result, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 to which the extended period is set will also win big from other players, and the gambling spirit of the other players can be aroused.

On the other hand, when the extension effect is not set, the text "Super Fish School Time End!!" is displayed to notify that the time effect period has ended. After that, when the third pattern is fluctuating, the performance pattern is stop-displayed after being fluctuated for the same time as the remaining fluctuation time of the third pattern. From the next variation, the reduced display of the third pattern is canceled and the third pattern is displayed in the normal size. By configuring in this way, even when the time presentation period ends, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the timing of the stop display of the third pattern coincides with the end timing of the time effect period, the reduced display of the third pattern is canceled and displayed from the start of the next variation. In addition, when the fluctuation has already ended at the end timing of the time effect period and the pending memory is not stored, the extension effect is not executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a condition for setting the extension, it was supposed to be a big hit, but not limited to that, it may be the case that a pending memory is set in which a variation pattern that becomes a super reach is selected, It may be configured to be set when a lottery is executed and a win is won.

Here, in the time presentation period (presentation mode B), time information is stored in the presentation time storage area 223g so that the specific time presentation of the countdown is performed periodically (every one minute). As a result, during the time performance period, the same pachinko machines 10 installed (for example, next to each other) can perform the same countdown performance in synchronization with each other, and the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can perform a performance with a sense of unity. It is possible to further enhance the effect of time production aimed at providing

In addition, the particular time effect of this countdown is such that the content of the effect changes based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a variable probability state and is not a time-saving state (so-called variable latency state), the countdown characters displayed in the countdown effect (" 3, 2, 1...") will be displayed in red. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the game state is the variable probability state and not the time saving state (so-called latent variable probability state). Therefore, the player can be interested in the performance contents of the specific time performance, and the player's interest can be improved. Here, as a notification mode for notifying that the latent probability has changed, the information read into the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a when the power is turned on, and the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. It may be configured to use a part of the read initial image.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the countdown effect based on the specific time effect described above, the countdown effect is executed as one aspect of the time advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect based on the variable display of the time effect period (effect mode B). is configured as follows. Here, a countdown is performed, a specific character is displayed, and the countdown is used for effects such as starting repeated hitting of the frame button 22 . As a result, the countdown effect may be executed at a timing different from the countdown effect that is periodically executed, and the countdown effect is executed at a timing different from that of the same pachinko machine 10 installed elsewhere (for example, next to it). By doing so, the game can be given unexpectedness, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In this control example, it is conceivable that the performance timing of the specific time performance occurs during the execution of the countdown performance based on the time advance notice performance. In this case, there is a risk that the game machine will be difficult for the player to understand, for example, the countdown effect will be displayed redundantly, or the countdown effect that has been executed will be erased and the countdown effect will start again. In addition, if it is a countdown that is a signal to start repeated hits in the notice effect, there is a problem that the start timing is misunderstood as a countdown of the specific time effect, and the player misses it. Therefore, in this control example, during execution of the countdown effect based on the time notice effect, the avoidance flag 223i described above is set to ON (see S2007 in FIG. 111), and when the avoidance flag 223i is ON, It is configured so that the countdown effect based on the specific time effect is not executed (see S2306 in FIG. 114). As a result, the occurrence of the above-described problems can be suppressed, and the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player.

In this control example, in the time effect, it is arranged to avoid overlapping display of the countdown effect, but it is not limited to this. It may be possible to avoid it.

Also, if the countdown effect or button operation effect overlaps, instead of not executing one of the effects, you can adjust (extend or shorten) the effect time or shift the start timing. good.

Further, in the specific time effect to be avoided, only image display and audio output may be stopped, and pointer update processing may be executed as control processing. Thus, when the avoidance of the specific time performance is finished, the specific time performance can be resumed at the same timing as the other pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 92 to 103. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 299, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is opened as the ball passes through. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 2203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display in the special symbol (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (that is, whether there is a reserved memory for the special symbol 2) (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 2) (S204: No), the special It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (that is, the reserved ball of special symbol 1 is stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved ball of special symbol 1 is not stored) (S209: No), special symbol 1, special symbol 2 Since there is no ball on hold, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203e are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

In the process of S208, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S213). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has passed (S213: Yes), the stop setting process is executed (S215), and this process ends. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). Lottery ( It is a process for determining the performance pattern (variation performance pattern) of the variation performance performed by the first design display devices 37A, 37B and the third design display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , stop type selection counter C3, and stop type counter CN1 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability is changing (S302).

If it is in the probability variation (S302: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. is obtained from the first winning random number table (see FIG. 75(a)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers set in the first winning random number table (see FIG. 75(a)). As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit, but they are not limited to this, and different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player is allowed to win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is not during the probability change (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability game state) with special symbols, so the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75(a)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one "0" is set, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random number value for the special symbol match, the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a big win indicating a big win is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (one of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). Also, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined from the first winning type selection table (see FIG. 75(b)) (S307). Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table. In this first win type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random value is any of "0 to 39" is the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and the value is one of "40 to 79". The jackpot type in this case is the jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot), and the jackpot type in the case of any one of "80 to 99" is the jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode when the special symbol is out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined based on the current number of held balls (S309). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

In the processing of S310, set a variation pattern command for notifying the determined variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 (S310), set a stop type command (S311), and then end this processing special symbol Return to change processing.

Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92).

In the stop setting process (S215), first, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) of FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a big win A, a big win B, a big win C, a small win, or a loss.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LEDs are lighted in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lighted, resulting in the jackpot C. If so, turn on the yellow LED. In addition, when it is a small hit, the purple LED is lit, and when it is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped. It should be noted that the display color and lighting mode of the LEDs described above are not limited, and other lighting modes may be used as long as the types of each big win and small win and the variation state can be identified.

After the process of S261 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process. is a special symbol jackpot (S262). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S263), the start of the jackpot is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the lottery result of this time is not a big win (S262: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a small win (S266). If the current lottery result is a small win (S266: Yes), the small win flag 203j is set to ON (S267), the start of the small win is set (S268), and then the process proceeds to S265.

In the processing of S266, if the lottery result of this time is out (S266: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 1 or more (S269). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S269: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265.

In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process ends.

Next, the starting prize winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a process of holding the values when there is a

When the starting winning process (FIG. 96, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, there is no winning to the first winning hole 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning hole 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first winning hole 64 (S501: Yes) and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball 1 is added to the value (N1) of the number counter 203d (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (5405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S505, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S506) among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a. In the processing of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, in the processing from S507 to S512, the same processing as in the processing from S501 to S506 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 as well. The only difference is that the pending process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning hole 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 (S507: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S513).

In this look-ahead processing (FIG. 97, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601; No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of start of variation is definite change (S602), and the game state is variable (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 75(a)) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the game state is not probability change (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first per random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75 (a)) (S604), and S605 proceed to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the result of the big hit determination executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process ends. In addition, in this look-ahead processing (S513), not only this embodiment, but also the type of variation pattern to be selected (outlier reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated, and the winning information command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to notify

Next, referring to FIG. 98, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and includes the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the motorized role associated with the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 98, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S701). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. Including during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S701: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S702), and the second symbol display device is displayed. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbols are currently hitting the jackpot (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 75(c)).

In the process of S708, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 and the low Based on the second winning random number table for the time of probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S711). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 75(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711 is the normal symbol win (S712), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S712: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols (S714), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols (S714: Yes), the special symbols are currently hitting the jackpot. (S715). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible, even if the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the processing of S715, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, so the second winning port 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is set to 0. 2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S712: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S719, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S719), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S719: Yes), the fluctuation display on the second design display device. is set to 3 seconds (S720), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the release period of the second prize winning port 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the processing of S702, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has elapsed ( S722). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S722, if the variable time has not passed (S722: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set as When stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 102) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 98, S106) is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S725), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S725, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1105) of the main processing (see FIG. 102) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 99, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S805), and the process ends. In the processing of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1012.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (FIG. 102), the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Here, if the special symbol that is changing is stored, the display control device 114 for the sound lamp control device 113 displays the power-on fluctuation image (see FIGS. 82(b) to (C)). instructed to do so. Note that this variation instruction may be executed, for example, in the initial setting (S1001) in the start-up process, or may be executed in another process. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the main processing described later is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 102), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) or the start winning process (see FIG. 96). Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 103) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). Details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S725 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S716 or S717 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Starting at devices 37A and 37B. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) has ended, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B ends the variation display being executed, in the display mode set by the processing of S306, S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B are stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device End the display, in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 98), stop design (second design) on the second design display device stop display (lighting display )do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main processing, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1108, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 100 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1112 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1112), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1113). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S1001). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 103, S1104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1201, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1201: Yes), the variable probability flag 203g is turned off (S1202), the opening command is set (S1203), and the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1204). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1204: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1205). In the process of S1205, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206), A round number command indicating the number of rounds to be started is set (S1207), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1205, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is established. It is determined (S1208). If the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1208, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is when 15 rounds are completed, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and the standby time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, elapses. Determined as When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and an ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the processing of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set to the time saving counter (S1217), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is A or C (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the time saving flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 115. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 104, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1514 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (S1516 in FIG. 106: Yes), it executes power-off processing in S1519. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1519 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1514. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), it will transfer to S1304 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1519 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1519 is executed (see S1519 in FIG. 106). In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing of S1519 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and after the execution of the power-off process in S1519 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), and after the power off flag 223y is set to off (S1310). , the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S1311). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 . Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S1312), time setting processing is executed (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Details of the time setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1311, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1312), interrupt permission is set. (S1311), the time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process of S1308 is reached from S1304 via the process of S1306, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the time setting process (S1313) executed in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 described above will be described. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the time setting process (S1313). This time production setting process (S1313) is a process for calculating and setting a period (time production period) during which the time production (production mode B and production mode C) is executed.

In the time setting process (S1313), time information is first obtained from the RTC 292 (S1401). As for the time information acquired here, the value of "hour, minute" is acquired. The RTC 292 is a clock means having an internal battery, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set to the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. In addition, the RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to distinguish "year, month and day". Therefore, for example, on Christmas Day, the background image can be changed to a Christmas-only background image, or a special character such as Santa can be displayed.

Then, based on the time information acquired in the process of S1401, the time presentation period and the specific time presentation timing are calculated and set in the presentation time storage area 223g (S1402). In this control example, a 24-hour preparation period and a time production period are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the production time storage area 223g. However, not limited to this, first, 55 minutes for normal execution of the game is set, the period is counted down or counted up, etc., and based on the lapse of 55 minutes, the time presentation period is set. It may be configured to set In addition to this, it is also possible to set the time after 55 minutes, determine whether or not the time has come, and set the time presentation period. By configuring in this way, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be constructed at a lower cost.

Furthermore, in this control example, the time presentation period is provided when a predetermined time has elapsed from the current time (at the time of execution of start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113), but this is not the only option. A time presentation period may be set by discriminating when it becomes (for example, 00 minutes every hour). As a result, each pachinko machine 10 executes the time performance at a specific time, so that even if the power-on timings of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are shifted, the time performance can be synchronously executed. .

Next, referring to FIG. 106, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S1501 was executed (S1501). If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1511, and S1512. By executing the process of S1511 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1512 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be

Also, at the time of recovery from a power failure due to a power failure or the like, an effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of the power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101). . In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the reception of the effect permission command including that the special symbol is being changed, the power-on notification processing (S1504) creates a display variation pattern command, and the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, the variation start command for the power-on varying image is determined by the simple command determination process (see FIG. 118(b)), and based on the variation pattern based on the received command, the power-on varying image is displayed. Performs variable display (see FIG. 82(b) or (c)). As described above, the display variation pattern command created here is for executing the variation display using the power-on variation image, which is a simple image. ) is simpler than the one selected by As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the power-on variation image can be displayed with good response when recovering from power failure.

Furthermore, after the effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 to stop the variable display. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a stop command for display to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. In the display control device 114, the reception of the display stop command is determined by the simple command determination process (see 118(b)), and the power-on fluctuation image (FIG. 82(b) or (c)) is stopped.

Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set for the display control device 114 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1509, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1509 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the variable display setting process (S1512) is finished, next, a synchronous effect management process for executing an effect based on the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 is executed (S1513), and a specific time is displayed in the time effect period (effect mode B). Specific time production processing for executing production is executed (S1514). Then, a ball-entering effect setting process for executing a ball-entering effect based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 is executed (S1515), and the process proceeds to S1516. For details of the synchronous effect management process (S1513), the specific time effect process (S1514), and the execution of the entering ball effect setting process (S1515), see FIGS. will be described later.

When the ball-entering effect setting process (S1515) ends, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1516). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1516 (S1516: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1518), and the power-off processing is executed (S1519). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1520), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1517), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1517: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1517: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S1511), first, from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read, analyzed, and the variation pattern from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation pattern reception process (S1602) is executed and the process returns to the main process.

Details of the variation pattern reception process (S1602) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern reception process (S1602). This variation pattern reception process (S1602) extracts a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and based on the extracted variation pattern scenario, various accessories (falling accessories, stretching This is a process for setting the operation of a character, a tilting character, etc.).

In the variation pattern reception process, first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1702). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a falling accessory scenario in the extracted variation pattern type (S1703). In the process of S1703, if it is determined that there is a falling accessory scenario (S1703: Yes), since it is a case where the vertical motion unit device (falling accessory) 400 is executed to move, the vertical motion unit device A falling role scenario for moving the (falling role) 400 is set (S1704). The falling role scenario set in the process of S1704 defines the operation of the vertical movement unit device (falling role) 400 for the same time as the variation time of the variation effect set based on the variation pattern type. be. By driving the vertical drive motor 431 based on this falling role scenario, the vertical movement unit device (falling role) 400 and the variable performance can be moved in synchronization (interlocking).

When the processing of S1704 is finished, it is then determined whether or not there is an opening setting for the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 (S1705). In the process of S1705, if it is determined that the door member 470 is set to be opened (S1705: Yes), the opening/closing drive motor 466 is not excited (turned off) so that the door member 470 is opened. set. As a result, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening/closing drive motor 466 for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized, and the inertial force that moves the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 in the falling direction. , the door member 470 is opened. Although not shown, when the door member 470 is not set to be opened, that is, when the door member 470 is kept closed, the excitation of the opening drive motor 466 is controlled so that the opening/closing drive motor 466 stops. . As a result, when the door member 470 is not set to open, even if the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 moves in the falling direction, the static torque of the opening drive motor 466, that is, the door member 470 is closed. The door member 470 is kept closed and is not opened because it is excited so that the torque for maintaining the state (so-called holding torque) is maximized. It should be noted that the torque (holding torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state does not have to be maximized. It is sufficient that the torque is such that the door member 470 is not opened by the inertial force generated in the opening. In this case, the current that excites the drive motor 466 for opening and closing can be made weak, so power consumption can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1705 that there is no setting for opening the falling accessory (S1705: No), the process of S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1707, and it is determined that there is no falling accessory scenario. If so (S1703: No), the process from S1704 to S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1707.

When the processing of S1703, S1705 or S1706 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is an expandable role scenario (S1707). In the processing of S1707, when it is determined that there is an expansion and contraction accessory scenario (S1707: Yes), the drive motor 561 is operated so that the front plate member 546 of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position. is set, and the process proceeds to S1709. On the other hand, in the process of S1707, if it is determined that there is no stretchable role scenario (S1707: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1709.

In the processing of S1709, it is determined whether or not there is a leaning accessory scenario (S1709). In the processing of S1709, if it is determined that there is a tilting accessory scenario (S1709: Yes), the drive motor 631 is controlled to be excited so that the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) moves to the extended position. A leaning accessory scenario is set (S1710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if it is determined that there is no leaning accessory scenario (S1709: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 107, the description continues. In the processing of S1601, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1603). When the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1606). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is the special figure 1 pending ball number command or the special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (number N2 of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1607). In addition, in the processing of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1607 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or when a special pattern lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1607. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol lottery is selected. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the processing of S1607 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S1606, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1606: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1608). In the process of S1608, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1608: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command (lottery results of special symbols, etc.) is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1609), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the winning information command has not been received (S1608: No), it is determined whether or not a command regarding a big win has been received (S1610). In the process of S1610, when a command related to the big win is received (S1610: Yes), the process corresponding to the received command related to the big win is executed (S1611), and this process ends. Commands related to big wins include, for example, an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. Further, processing corresponding to the received command related to the big win includes, for example, processing of setting an opening command for display, a command for the number of rounds for display, and an ending command for display.

In the process of S1610, when it is determined that the command regarding the big win has not been received (S1610: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S1612). In the process of S1612, if it is determined that the stop command has been received (S1612: Yes), the process of stopping the variable display being executed is executed (S1613), the avoidance flag 223i is set to OFF (S1614), A stop command for display is set (S1615), and this processing ends.

The display stop command set by the process of S1615 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 106). , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When receiving the display stop command, the display control device 114 stops the variable effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1612 that the stop command has not been received (S1612: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1616) and returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is sent to the display control device 114. Set the command to send to

Next, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1801). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S1806. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 Variation pattern selection processing for selection is executed (S1803).

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, details of the variation pattern selection process (S1803) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1803). In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 and the effect counter 223j counted by the sound lamp control device 113 are used to select the variation pattern type corresponding to the effect mode. be.

In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the production counter 223j is acquired (S1901), and it is determined whether or not the current production mode is production mode A (normal production period) (S1902). The performance mode is determined by referring to the value of the performance mode storage area 223h.

In the process of S1902, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is the effect mode A (normal effect period) (S1902: Yes), in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108), Based on the variation pattern type extracted from the received variation pattern command and the production counter 223j, the variation pattern of the corresponding normal production period (production mode A) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1903), and this processing is performed. finish. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a display variation pattern command in the variation display setting process described later (see S1804 in FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1902, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode A (normal production period) (S1902: No), then the current production mode is production mode B (time production period). (S1904).

In the processing of S1904, if it is determined that the value of the production mode storage area 223h is the production mode B (time production period) (S1904: Yes), based on the extracted variation pattern type and production counter 223j, correspondence The variation pattern of the time presentation period (drawing mode B) to be performed is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1905), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1904, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode B (time production period) (S1904: No), the current production mode is production mode C (extended time production period) Therefore, based on the extracted variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j, the variation pattern of the corresponding extended time effect period (result mode C) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1906), and the process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the process of the variation pattern selection process (S1803), it is possible to perform a variable display corresponding to each effect period (effect mode).

Returning to FIG. 109, the description continues. After completing the processing of S1803, based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1803, to generate a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 and to transmit the command to the display control device 114 Set (S1804). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started. When the processing of S1804 is completed, next, the announcement selection process for setting the announcement effect based on the success/failure determination result corresponding to the current effect mode is executed (S1805).

Here, details of the advance notice effect processing (S1805) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect processing (S1805). This notice effect processing (S1805) is executed in the above-described variable display setting processing (see FIG. 109), and is a process for setting the notice effect based on the result of determination according to the current effect mode.

In the notice effect processing (S1805), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal effect period) (S2002). In the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the current effect mode (value of the effect mode storage area 223h) is the effect mode A (normal effect period) (S2002: Yes), it is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Based on the determination result of each held ball and the value of the effect counter 223j, the normal notice effect, which is the notice effect of the normal effect period, is selected (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2011.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode A (normal production period) (S2002: No), then the current production mode is production mode B (time production period). (S2004).

In the process of S2004, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), the winning judgment result of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a and , and based on the value of the effect counter 223j, the time announcement effect, which is the announcement effect of the time effect period, is selected (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the time announcement effect selected in the process of S2005 is the countdown announcement effect (S2006). In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the selected time notice effect is the countdown notice effect (S2006: Yes), the countdown notice effect based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 is executed during the time effect period. Therefore, in order not to execute the countdown effect of the specific time effect, the avoidance flag 223i is turned on (S2007), and the process proceeds to S2011. By setting the avoidance flag 223i to ON in the process of S2007, it can be determined that the countdown notice effect is to be executed during execution of the time effect. In the specific time production process (see FIG. 114), control is performed so that the specific time production is not executed (S2305 in FIG. 114: Yes). As a result, the countdown effect related to the ball-entering effect and the countdown effect related to the specific time effect are not executed in duplicate, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In this embodiment, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON when the countdown notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, and control is performed so that the specific time effect is not executed. is not limited to For example, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the timing at which the countdown notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 is pre-read (guessed), and the countdown notice effect is executed. The avoidance flag 223i may be set to ON so that the specific time effect is not executed in the vicinity of the execution timing (for example, one minute before or after). As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for players to understand by suppressing the continuous execution of the countdown notice effect while minimizing the number of times that the specific time effect is avoided (not executed). can. In addition, the prevention of duplication is not limited to the display mode. You may make it prevent putting away. For example, it is possible to prevent the output of a voice saying "Please press the button" even though there is no indication to press the button.

By the processing of S1614, when the countdown notice effect, which is one aspect of the notice effect, is being executed, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON, and the specific time effect is not executed (avoided) during the time effect period. be. Execution of the countdown notice effect is ended when the variable display for performing the notice effect is stopped, so the countdown notice effect is ended by turning off the avoidance flag 223i when the stop command is received. A countdown specific time effect can be executed later. Alternatively, the avoidance flag 223i may be turned off after a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of the execution of the countdown notice effect, so that the specific time effect can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the countdown notice effect from being continuously executed, and to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the process of S2006, when it is determined that the selected time announcement effect is other than the countdown announcement effect (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the processing of S2004, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode B (time production period) (S2004: No), then whether the current production mode is production mode C (extended time production period) It is determined whether or not (S2008). If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the current effect mode is the effect mode C (extended time effect period) (S2008: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the result of the pertinence determination of the variation is a win. (S2009).

In the processing of S2009, when it is determined that the result of determination of whether or not the variation is a hit, the super school of fish announcement effect is selected (S2010), and the processing proceeds to S2011.

When the processing of S2003, S2006, S2007 or S2010 is completed, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2011), and this processing ends. The display notice command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1502) of the main processing (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display advance notice command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 the advance notice effect corresponding to the command.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current production mode is not the production mode C (extended time production period) in the processing of S2008 (S2008: No), or in the processing of S2009, the determination result of the variation is out. If it is determined that (S2009: No), there is no advance notice effect to be executed, so this process is terminated as it is. In the processing of S2003 and S2005, there is a case where the advance notice effect is not selected depending on the value of the effect counter 223j. In this case, similarly, the present processing ends without setting the advance notice command for display.

In addition, in this control example, in the extended time production period (production mode C), the specific time production that is periodically executed in the time production period (production mode B) is not executed, but it is not limited to this. A specific time effect may be executed in the same manner as the time effect period (production mode B), or an effect different in display mode from the specific time effect may be periodically performed. In this case, the above-described avoidance flag 223i may be used to control the effect so as not to be performed at the timing overlapping with the effect based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 . As a result, even in the extension time performance period (performance mode C), the continuous execution of the countdown notice performance or the like is suppressed, or the duplication of the performance is suppressed, thereby providing a game machine that is easy for the player to understand. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 109, the description continues. After completing the processing of S1805, it is then determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S1806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, is OFF) (S1806: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1807). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1808). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1810. In the process of S1810, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1810). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the synchronous effect management process (S1513), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1513). In this synchronous effect management process (S1513), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating it is displayed. Perform processing to set the mode.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 112, S1513), time information of "hour, minute" is first obtained from the RTC 292 (S2101). It is determined whether the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2102). If it is determined that the production mode A is set (S2102: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is the transition timing to the production mode B (time production period) (whether it is the period of the time production period) ) is determined (S2103). In the process of S2103, if it is determined that it is time to shift to the effect mode B (time effect period), that is, if it is determined that it is time to start the time effect (S2103: Yes), the effect mode storage area 223h (S2104), sets the display effect mode change command based on the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2105), and ends this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2103 that it is not the time effect period, the processing of S2104 and S2105 is skipped, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2102, if it is determined that the production mode A (normal production period) is not set (S2102: No), it is determined whether or not the production mode B (time production period) is set. (S2106). In the process of S2106, if it is determined that the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S2106: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is within 3 seconds from the end of the time effect, That is, it is determined whether it is three seconds before the end timing of the time effect period (S2107). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the re-variation production which is the production suggesting that the time production period ends and shifts to the extended time production period. By executing this performance, the player can be made aware of the transition to the extended time performance period, and the expectation of a big win can be heightened, so that the interest of the player can be improved. can be done.

When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S2107: Yes), an extension effect setting process is executed (S2108). After that, this process ends. This extension effect setting process (S2108) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 113, and the process of whether or not to set the time effect extension period is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2107, if it is determined that the acquired time data is not within 3 seconds from the end of the time effect, the process of S2108 is skipped because there are 3 seconds or more until the end timing of the time effect period. exit.

In the processing of S2106, if it is determined that it is not production mode B (time production period), that is, production mode C (time production extension period) (S2106: No), it is outside the time production extension period, that is, , It is determined whether it is the end timing of the extension time production period (S2109). In the process of S2109, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the extended time production period (S2109: Yes), the production mode storage area 223h is set to production mode A (normal production period) (S2110), production mode A A display effect mode change command based on (normal effect period) is set (S2111), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2109, if it is determined that the acquired time data is not the end timing of the extension time effect period (S2109: No), the processing of S2110 and S2111 is skipped, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the extension effect setting process (S2108), which is one process in the synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the contents of this extension effect setting process (S2108).

In the extension effect setting process (FIG. 113, S2108), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S2201). When it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S2201: Yes), the value of the performance mode storage area 223h is set to the performance mode A (normal game period) (S2202). Then, a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2203), and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the jackpot game is already executed during the time performance period, the extended performance is not executed after the jackpot game is finished, and control is made to shift to the normal game period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect mode A (normal effect period) may not be set until the time effect period or the extended time effect period ends. As a result, even when it is the time performance period at the end of the jackpot game, the extension performance can be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time presentation period (S2204). In the process of S2204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S2204: Yes), whether or not the re-variation effect set in the process of S2210 described later is set, that is, the extension effect It is determined whether or not it is determined to be set (S2205). When the re-variation production is set, that is, when it is determined that the extension production is set (S2205: Yes), the value of the production mode storage area 223h is set to production mode C (S2206 ), the display effect mode change command based on the effect mode C is set (S2207), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the re-variation effect is not set and it is determined that the extension effect is not set (S2205: No), then the process moves to the extension selection period. However, since it will shift to the normal effect period, the process shifts to S2202. Thereby, the production mode can be shifted to the production mode A (normal production period).

In addition, in the process of S2204, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the time effect period (S2204: No), it is determined whether the winning prize information is stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a, or whether the winning prize information during fluctuation is determined as winning. (S2208). In the process of S2208, if it is determined that winning prize information is stored, or if it is determined that the winning judgment during the change is a win (S2208: Yes), the time until the winning change ends It is calculated and set as the extension performance time (S2209). Then, a re-variation effect is set (S2210), and this process is terminated. Here, the re-fluctuation effect is a effect suggesting transition from the time effect period to the extended time effect period, and specifically, the display mode in which the fish school appears from the right is displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if it is determined that the winning prize information is not stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a and the winning/failure judgment result during fluctuation is out (S2208: No), S2209 and S2210 are executed. Skip the process and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the specific time rendering process (S1514), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific time effect process (S1514). This specific time production process (S1514) is a process for executing a specific time production during the time production period (production mode B).

In the specific time effect process, first, time information is obtained from the RTC 292 (S2301). Next, based on the acquired time information, it is determined whether or not the current production mode is production mode B (time production period) (S2302). In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: No), it is not the timing to execute the specific time effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: Yes), then based on the time information acquired in the process of S2301, the specific time It is determined whether or not it is the production timing (S2303). In the processing of S2303, if it is determined that it is not the specific time production timing (S2303: No), it is not the time to execute the specific time production, so this processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S2303, if it is determined that the effect is for a specific time (S2303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being executed (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed (S2304: Yes), this process ends. As a result, during execution of the demonstration effect, that is, when the player is not playing the game, the effect suggests whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the variable probability game state (variable latent probability state). It is possible to prevent the specific time performance from being displayed and prevent the game state from being suggested even to a player who is not playing the game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2304 that the demonstration effect is not being executed (S2304: No), then it is determined whether or not the avoidance flag 223i is ON (S2305). In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is ON (S2305: Yes), the countdown ball entry effect is being executed among the ball entry effects based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640. Since this is the case, the processing is terminated as it is in order not to display the specific time effect.

In the process of S2305, if it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is off (S2305: No), a specific time effect command for display is set to execute the specific time effect, and this process ends.

By the processing of S2305, when the countdown notice effect based on the winning to the second winning opening 640 is executed during execution of the specific time effect, control is performed so that the countdown effect related to the specific time effect is not executed. As a result, since the countdown effect related to the ball-entering effect and the countdown effect related to the specific time effect are not executed in duplicate, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the ball entry effect setting process (S1515), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ball entry effect setting process (S1515). This ball-entering effect setting process (S1515) is a process for displaying a ball-entering effect based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 during the time-saving game. In this ball-entering effect, the type selected by the number of remaining fluctuations until a big hit is changed, and the displayed area is changed from the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 to the fourth area 81d. set in order.

In the entering effect setting process (S1515), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is a time-saving game (S2401). In the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the time-saving game is not being performed, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the time-saving game is in progress (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball entered the second winning hole 640 (S2402). In this control example, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 in the main controller 110, a ball entering command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (not shown). In the sound lamp control device 113, upon receiving the ball entry command, the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 stores that the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, and in the process of S2402, the second winning hole It is determined whether or not a ball has entered the 640.

In addition, not limited to this, by providing a ball entry detection switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the voice lamp control device that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 640 113, or by using the switch that detects the ball entering the second winning hole 640 with the main controller 110 also in the voice lamp control device 113, the second winning hole 640 It may be possible to detect that a game ball has entered.

In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 (S2402: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if the above-described ball entry command is received from the main control device 110 and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 640 (S2402: Yes), the winning information is stored. A ball-entering effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the area 223a and the ball-entering effect selection table 222b (S2403). Then, based on the ball-entering effect selected in the process of S2403 and the display area counter 223f, the ball-entering effect command for display is set (S2404). The display-purpose entering effect command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output processing (S1502) of the main processing (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . The display controller 114; When this display-purpose entering effect command is received, the entering effect is displayed in the display area corresponding to the command (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third pattern display device 81).

When the processing of S2404 is finished, the value of the display area counter 223f is incremented by 1 (S2405), and it is determined whether or not the added value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406). In the process of S2406, if it is determined that the value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406: Yes), the entering effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d (see FIG. 89 or 90) in the entering effect setting process. is set to be displayed, and the value of the display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 (S2407) so that the area where the ball-entering effect is displayed is the first area 81a (see FIG. 89 or 90). End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2406 that the display area counter 223f is not 5 (that is, it is any of 2 to 4) (S2406: No), it is necessary to initialize the value of the display area counter 223f. Therefore, the process of S2407 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, the processing of S2404 can display the ball-entering effect in the area of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the display area counter 223f. Specifically, when the display area counter 223f is 1, it is in the first area 81a of the third pattern display device 81, and when it is 2, it is 3 in the second area 81b of the third pattern display device 81. In the case of 4, the entering effect is displayed in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and in the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81 when the number is 4. Then, by the processing from S2405 to S2407, the winning effect setting process (S1515) is executed, and every time the entering ball effect command for display is set, the value of the display area counter 223 can be updated. The ball-entering effect can be displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the display device 81, and after the ball-entering effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d, the ball-entering effect can be displayed again from the first area 81a. can be displayed in order. As a result, the ball-entering effect based on one ball-entering is continuously displayed until four game balls newly enter the second prize-winning hole 640, and the game balls enter the second prize-winning hole 640. Even if the ball-entering interval is very short, the time for displaying the ball-entering effect can be secured, and the problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the ball-entering effect can be suppressed.

In this control example, the ball-entering effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. They may be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or variation is executed, or when there is prize winning information for a big win. As a result, the order of displayed ball-entering effects can be changed, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the player can be prevented from becoming bored early.

Also, the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big win. For example, when the expectation of a big win is low, the ball entry effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d. should be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation based on the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area). Since it is no longer necessary to see the details of the ball-entering effect displayed in , the burden on the player can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this control example, the ball-entering effect is displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display area of the third pattern display device may be further subdivided (for example, divided into six regions from the first region to the sixth region) and displayed in order, or the display region of the third pattern display device may be divided into six regions. The number of divisions may be reduced (for example, divided into two areas from the first area to the second area) and displayed.

In addition, in this control example, which of the display regions (first region 81a to fourth region 81d) of the third pattern display device 81 is to be displayed is configured to be selected by the sound lamp control device 113. , but not limited to this, and may be configured to be selected in the display control device 114, for example.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 134. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 116, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2501), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2501) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2501) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2601). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2602). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2602, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2602, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2603). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2604), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2501 in FIG. 116) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) (S2605), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2501) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 117, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2603 to S2605 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2601 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and then transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S2601. and the processing of S2602 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2603 to S2605 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2603 to S2605 without performing the processes of S2601 and S2602 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2502). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. Further, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2503). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2503, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction includes the starting address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2504, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2505). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4702 in FIG. 132(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118(b)), the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (see FIG. 82), which are the images at the time of power-on, are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S2809 in FIG. 118B) and simple display setting processing (see S2810 in FIG. 118B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first winning hole 64 (start winning), and the instruction to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (see FIG. 82) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation is performed. can be done. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure recovery. Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2505, interrupt permission is set (S2506), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2506, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a). FIG. 118(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). FIG. 118(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 87) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 118(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801). If it is off (S2801: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2802) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2803) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2802), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S2803), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2802), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2804). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2803) or the simple display setting processing (S2809). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

When the task processing is completed, effect information correction processing is executed (S2805). In this effect information correction processing (S2805), among the images for one frame determined in the task processing described above, various power-on images used for display at power-on (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation Image, title image at power-on) sprite, correct the display presence/absence, display coordinate position and enlargement ratio. Note that the effect information correction process (S2805) may be configured to be executed within the task process (S2804).

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2806). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. - 特許庁Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2807). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, which are determined in task processing (S2804) and effect information correction processing (S2805), and transfer setting processing (S2806). 87 is generated from the transfer instruction set by , and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2808). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2808, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete A stop type table and a stop type counter corresponding to (loss, chance eye) are compared with each other, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2801: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2809) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2810) is executed, and then S2804. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127, the details of the command determination process (S2802), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 119, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2901). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2803) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S2902). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2903).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2904), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2904: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2905) and returns to the processing of S2901.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2905) will now be described with reference to FIG. 120(a). FIG. 120(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3001).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3001 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3003). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3003, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3005). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3006), and when the effect of moving the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is executed. A special effect correction process for correcting the effect screen is executed (S3007). When the processing of S3007 is completed, the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3005, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 121, details of the special effect correction processing (S3007) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing special effect correction processing (S3007). This special effect correction process (S3007) is a process for correcting the effect screen when an effect is executed in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) moves. .

In the special effect correction process (S3007), first, it is determined whether or not the effect based on the received variation pattern command is the effect of moving the telescopic effect device (elastic accessory) 540 (whether or not there is a telescopic accessory scenario). (S3201). In the process of S3201, when it is determined that there is an expansion and contraction scenario (S3201: Yes), in the change, the front member 546 of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position, and the third symbol This is the case where an effect that makes the display device 81 difficult to see is executed. In this case, from the correction information table 234a3 to the correction information storage area 233m is set the correction information for movable stretchable role product (S3202), and the process proceeds to S3205. By the processing of S3202, the variable image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 83(a)) is displayed on the sub display device 690, so that the telescopic device moves to the front side of the third pattern display device 81. Even when the front member 546 of 540 moves, the player can visually recognize the changing image by looking at the sub-display device 690 . Here, the variable image is the "o" symbol displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 83(a). In addition to the "○" symbol, the "X" symbol is also displayed as a variation image. This variable image notifies that the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is being variably displayed by alternately displaying the "O" symbol and the "X" symbol. Then, when the "O" symbol is stopped and displayed, the winning of the special symbol is announced, and when the "X" symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is missed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3201, if it is determined that there is no stretchable accessory scenario (S3201: No), then the effect based on the received variation pattern command is the effect of moving the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9). It is determined whether or not (whether or not there is a leaning accessory scenario) (S3203). In the processing of S3203, if it is determined that there is a tilting accessory scenario (S3203: Yes), the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub display device 690 is moved in the variation, and the sub This is the case where an effect that makes the display device 690 difficult to see is executed. In this case, the tilting accessory movement correction information is set from the correction information table 234a3 to the correction information storage area 233m (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205. By the processing of S3204, the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub-display device 690 is moved, and even if an effect is executed in which the sub-display device 690 is difficult to see, By looking at the variable image displayed on the pattern display device 81, the variable image can be visually recognized.

Further, in the processing of S3202 and S3204 described above, by setting information for correcting the display position of the variable image in accordance with the effect to be executed, the display mode is controlled so that the player can easily visually recognize it. As a result, even if the image displayed in a display mode that is easy for the player to visually recognize is not retained for each effect executed, the same image data is displayed for each effect executed. The effect can be obtained, and the area of the ROM 234 can be saved.

After completing the processing of S3202 or S3204, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON (S3205), and this processing ends. The special effect correction flag 233n that is turned on in the process of S3205 indicates that information for correcting the image to be displayed has been set in the special effect correction process (S3007) with the execution of the stretchable accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario. flag to indicate By setting this special effect correction flag 233n to ON, in the effect information correction process described later, although the variation based on the stretchable role scenario and the tilting role scenario is executed, the correction information for the normal effect is stored in the correction information storage area 233m.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that there is no leaning accessory scenario (S3203: No), this process ends.

As described above, the tilting motion unit (tilting accessory) 600 has the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 50). It is possible to switch between an open state in which the player can see the sub-display device 690 and a closed state in which the player cannot see the sub-display device 690 . Therefore, when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state, the image displayed on the sub display device 690 may be corrected to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Further, whether or not the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are closed depends on the role scenario in the production, as in the case of determining the movement of the telescopic role and the tilting role described above. Alternatively, an origin sensor that detects the origin positions of the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 determines that these curtain members are at the origin position (closed state). The display of the sub-display device 690 may be switched to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the sub-display device 690 is displayed.

Furthermore, in the above-described tilting motion unit (tilting accessory) 600 and elastic effect device (elastic accessory) 540, the correction information is similarly changed based on the determination result of the origin sensor that detects the origin position. good too. As a result, even if the action is different from the role product scenario due to the failure of the role product, etc., the state can be accurately detected, and various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690. It can be displayed at a position where a person can visually recognize it.

In the present embodiment, the case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves up and down and the case where the tilting motion unit 600 tilts have been described. The same processing as that executed in the special effect correction processing (S3007) may be executed when an action scenario to operate is set. Note that even when the tilting motion unit 600 slides, a series of motion scenarios for the sliding motion are set by the audio lamp control device 113 . In that case, since the sound lamp control device 113 notifies that the variation pattern is for executing the slide motion by the display variation pattern command, in that case, the slide motion correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233m. Here, the slide motion correction information is the variable image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ("○" symbol (or "x" symbol shown in FIG. 83(a)) in accordance with the slide motion. ) moves to a position not on the back side of the tilting unit 600 that slides. In the present embodiment, the moving image (see FIG. 83(a)) is displayed on the upper left of the third pattern display device 81. However, if it is configured to be displayed on the lower right, the tilting operation unit 600 is on the right side. When it slides further to the left, it is gradually slid (moved) to the left in accordance with the motion of the tilting motion unit 600 and set to be displayed. Such coordinate information is set in the slide motion correction information. In addition, when the tilting operation unit 600 slides to the left according to the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and moves to the area where the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed, the tilting operation unit 600 The coordinates may be set so as to move to and display on the sub-display device 690 incorporated in the . With such a configuration, it is possible to display the variation image (see FIG. 83(a)) showing that the special symbol is being varied by the player in an easy-to-see manner. In the present embodiment, the object to be moved and displayed is the moving image (see FIG. 83(a)), but the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be the third symbol or the reserved symbol. Alternatively, it may be a pattern such as a character. The slide motion correction information described above is set in advance in the display control device 114 corresponding to the operation scenario of the slide motion set in the sound lamp control device 113, and the coordinate information is adjusted according to the timing of the slide motion. is set so that is variably set.

In addition, in this control example, the display positions of various power-on images are corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this. Or, the display position of such as fluctuation pattern) may be corrected.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2904, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2904: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2906), If there is a display variation type command (S2906: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2907), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the stop type command process (S2907) will now be described with reference to FIG. 120(b). FIG. 120(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance) is handled. A stop type table is determined (S3101), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118(b)) is executed. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the pattern display device 81 is set (S3102).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S3103), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S3102. In the above-described task processing (S2804), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3102 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S3103, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed. Image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236 . Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S3101, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S3102.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the processing of S2906, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2906: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command in the unprocessed commands (S2908). In the process of S2908, when it is determined that there is a jackpot related command (S2908: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S2909), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S2909) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the jackpot-related command processing (S2909). This jackpot-related command processing (S2909) performs processing corresponding to various commands (opening command for display, number of rounds command for display, ending command for display) for executing the jackpot effect received from the sound lamp control device 113. It is a process for execution.

In the jackpot-related command processing (S2909), first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among unprocessed commands (S3301). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that there is an opening command for display (S3301: Yes), the opening command process (S3302) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3303.

Details of the opening command process (S3302) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, time data representing the rendering time is set in the timer counter 233h (S3403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3405), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3404, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped.

In addition, the ending command for display instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 16 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the ending command for display, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the motion has stopped or to have a sense of incompatibility.

Therefore, in this control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there. , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81 (for 5 rounds). ) When the game ends, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player does not feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started, Control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the third pattern display device 81 finishes the variation effect that becomes a big hit. As a result, when the variation performance that becomes a big win is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the opening performance can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is worried whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Returning to FIG. 122, the description is continued. In the process of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S3303), and the If there is a round number command for use (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

Details of the round number command process (S3304) will now be described with reference to FIG. 123(b). FIG. 123(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process (S3304). The number-of-rounds command processing (S3304) executes processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3502).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3505), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 122 . In the processing of S3303, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3305). If there is an ending command (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if there is no display ending command (S3305: No), the process of S3306 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

Details of the ending command process (S3306) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124(a) is a flow chart showing the ending command process (S3306). This ending command process (S3306) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. (S3601). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3602).

Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3601, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2908, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S2908: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an advance notice command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2910), and the advance notice for display is determined. If there is a command (S2910: Yes), the notice command process is executed (S2911), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124(b), details of the advance notice command process (S2911) will be described. FIG. 124(b) is a flow chart showing the advance notice command process. This advance notice command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display advance notice command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the notice command process, first, the notice effect display data table indicated by the notice command for display is determined, and the decided notice effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S3701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3702).

Then, based on the advance notice effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the advance notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this notice command processing (S2911), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the notice effect display data table, so that the notice effect set corresponding to the effect mode in the sound lamp control device 113 is the third symbol. It will be displayed on the display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the processing of S2910, if it is determined that there is no advance notice command for display (S2910: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an entering ball effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2912), If there is an entering ball effect command for display (S2912: Yes), the entering ball effect command process is executed (S2913), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, with reference to FIG. 125(a), details of the entering ball effect command process (S2913) will be described. FIG. 125(a) is a flow chart showing the entering ball effect command process (S2913). This ball-entering effect command process (S2913) executes a process corresponding to the display-purpose entering-ball effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the notice command process, first, the ball-entering effect display data table indicated by the display-use ball-entering effect command is determined, the determined ball-entering effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. (S3801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3802).

Then, based on the ball-entering effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the entering-ball effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this entering-ball effect command processing (S2913), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the entering-ball effect display data table. 81.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the processing of S2912, if it is determined that there is no display-use entering-ball effect command (S2912: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display-specific time effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2914). ), if there is a specific time effect command for display (S2914: Yes), specific time effect command processing is executed (S2915), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the specific time effect command process (S2915) will now be described with reference to FIG. 125(b). FIG. 125(b) is a flow chart showing the specific time effect command process (S2915). This specific time effect command process (S2915) executes a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the specific time effect command process, first, the specific time effect display data table indicated by the display specific time effect command is determined, and the determined specific time effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S3902).

Then, based on the specific time effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3905), the entering-ball effect command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

By this specific time effect command processing (S2915), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the specific time effect display data table, so that the specific time effect selected in the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2914, if it is determined that there is no display specific time effect command (S2914: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect mode change command in the unprocessed commands (S2916 ), if there is an effect mode change command for display (S2916: Yes), effect mode change command processing is executed (S2917), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, the details of the effect mode change command process (S2917) will be described with reference to FIG. 126(a). FIG. 126(a) is a flow chart showing the effect mode change command process (S2917). This effect mode change command process (S2917) executes the process corresponding to the specific time effect command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the effect mode change command process, first, the back image change flag 233p is set to ON (S4001), the effect mode flag 233r corresponding to the effect mode type based on the received command is set to ON (S4002), and this process is performed. exit.

With the background image change flag 233p set to ON in the process of S4001, the processes (S4910 to S4915) for changing the background image are executed in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133), which will be described later. In addition, the effect mode flag 233r that is set to ON in S4002 is referred to in the processing for changing the background image in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4911 in FIG. 133), and is set to the effect mode flag 233r. The background image is changed based on the set production mode type. Thereby, the rear image can be changed according to the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 . As a result, the rear image can be changed based on the change of the effect mode, and the player can easily recognize that the effect mode has been changed.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2916, if it is determined that there is no display effect mode command (S2916: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop command in the unprocessed commands (S2918), and the If there is a stop command (S2918: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2919), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the stop command process (S2919) will now be described with reference to FIG. 126(b). FIG. 126(b) is a flow chart showing the stop command process (S2919). This stop command process (S2919) is to execute the process corresponding to the display stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the stop command process, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to OFF (S4101), and the process ends. The special effect correction flag 233n, which is set to OFF in the process of S4101, is set in the special effect correction process (S3007) executed when the variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 as described above. 540 (see FIG. 9), or if there is a tilting role scenario in which the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable, correction information corresponding to the correction information storage area 233m It stores the correction information of the table 234a3 and is set to ON.

This stop command process is a process executed based on a stop command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 when each variable effect is stopped. Therefore, when the variable performance based on the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario is stopped, the special effect correction flag 233n is turned off. As a result, in the effect information correction process (see S2804) executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118(b)), the correction information for the normal effect or the correction information for the demonstration effect is set in the correction information storage area 233m. As a result, an image whose coordinates and the like displayed based on the variable effect of the stretchable role scenario or the tilting role scenario is corrected to the original coordinates and the like is displayed.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 119 . In the process of S2918, if it is determined that there is no display stop command (S2918: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2920). If (S2920: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2921), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the error command processing (S2921) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4202, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 119 . If it is determined in the process of S2920 that there is no error command (S2920: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2922), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Other unprocessed commands include, for example, a back image change command. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

If the back image change command has been received, back image change command processing is executed (S2922). In this back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 223p for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4703) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 223p set by the back image change command process is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Also, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, from the set back face image discrimination flag, at that point specifies the type of the background image to be displayed in step 2, further specifies the range of the background image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and determines the RAM type (resident use) in which image data corresponding to the range of the background image is stored. video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the background image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more background image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the background image discrimination flag corresponding to the background image type indicated by the previously received background image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the process of S2901, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes ), and the processing of S2902 to S2922 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2901 to S2922 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2809) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only stop type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 120(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed, and other command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

In addition, when power failure occurs during the fluctuation of the special symbol and then recovers, the MPU 201 of the above-described main control unit 110 executes the startup process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the effect permission command including that the pattern is changing, the display control device 114 (received in S1616 of command determination processing (FIG. 107, S1511)), the display control device 114 receives a variation start command for the power-on variation image output to 114, and performs simple command determination processing (S2809). , and the start of the variable display (the display data table of the power-on variable image is set in the display data table buffer 233d) is set in the simple display setting processing (S2810) executed thereafter. It should be noted that at the timing when main controller 110 outputs an instruction to start varying the power-on varying image corresponding to the special symbol that was varying when power was turned off, the power-on varying image is displayed on the power supply of resident video RAM 235 . Since it has already been transferred to the input-time variation image area 235b, the variation display is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 (display is started). In this case, the power-on fluctuation images shown in FIGS. 82(b) to (c) are alternately displayed.

In addition, after the effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 to stop the variable display. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a stop command for display to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. In the display control device 114, the simple command determination processing (see 118(b)) determines that the stop command for display has been received, and the power-on fluctuation image (FIG. 82(b) or (c)) is stopped.

Note that if the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 has been completed in the display control device 114 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the power-on varying image, only the power-on varying image is displayed at the coordinate position for normal effect on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83(a)). This is because the stop mode of the power-on varying image is defined in the display stop command for stopping the power-on varying image, and therefore the stop mode for the normal effect cannot be selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may determine and display the stop mode based on the stop mode (jackpot or loss) of the power-on fluctuation image. As a result, even when the variation of the power-on variation image is executed, it is possible to switch to the normal presentation from the point of time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed, and the interest of the player can be improved. .

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S3001, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3002, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the details of the display setting process (S2803), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 128, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S4302), S4303-S4304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

Details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S4401).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4304), or if it is determined in the process of S4303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S4303: No), then the process proceeds to S4305.

In S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S4501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S4505), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4502: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 128, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S4306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S4309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S4310), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2804), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last time stop design determination flag set by S4315, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S4317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S4316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2810) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image by the power-on fluctuation image is over, for a predetermined time, the power-on fluctuation image (Fig. 82) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the details of the effect information correction process (S2805), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing effect information correction processing (S2805). This effect information correction processing (S2805) corrects the display positions of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) during normal effects and demonstration effects. It is a process for using.

In the effect information correction process (S2805), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4601: No), it means that the simple image is being displayed when the power is turned on. End the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is off (S4601: Yes), the transfer of the resident image is completed in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132(a)), which will be described later. Since the normal effect can be executed, it is then determined whether or not the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602).

In the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the special effect correction flag 233n is ON (S4602: No), the expansion/contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable in the above-described special effect correction process (see FIG. 121). or the tilting role scenario in which the tilting action unit 600 (see FIG. 9) moves is already stored in the correction information storage area 233m. This processing ends without setting the correction information.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602: Yes), the demonstration display flag is turned off in order to set the correction information according to the effect currently being executed. (S4603).

In the processing of S4603, if it is determined that the demonstration display flag is off (S4603: Yes), the demonstration effect is not being executed, that is, the normal effect is being executed, so the correction information storage area Correction information for normal effect is set to 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S4604), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, if it is determined that the demonstration display flag is ON (S4603: No), it means that the demonstration effect is being executed, so the demonstration display is stored in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3. The effect correction information is set (S4605), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the effect information correction process (S2805), correction information for correcting the display position of various power-on images according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power-on, normal effect, demonstration effect, etc.) making settings. As a result, in a plurality of states of the pachinko machine 10, since a common image can be used to produce an effect, the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since it is configured to correct the display mode such as the position to be displayed and the enlargement ratio, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to visually recognize according to each effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, the details of the transfer setting process (S2806), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 132(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S4702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S4701, that is, if it is turned off (S4701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S4702), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 132(b). FIG. 132(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S4801). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4802). In the processing of S4802, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of S4802 that the transfer processing has not ended (S4802: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to S4803. Also, as a result of the processing of S4801, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4801: No), the process proceeds to S4803.

In the process of S4803, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4803). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S4803, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S4803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4805), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 118B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2809 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4701: No in FIG. 132(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 stores data in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image, and the power-on title image, which have already been transferred in the main process. All resident object image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

In addition, in this control example, by correcting the display positions of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) that are displayed when the power is turned on, configured to be available. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare images to be used when the power is turned on and when performing normal effects, so the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

Furthermore, in this control example, the image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are treated as one image data, and depending on the coordinates, the third pattern display device 81 is displayed or the sub display device 690 is controlled. This eliminates the need to separately control (transfer, etc.) the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, thereby reducing the control load. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 may be provided respectively.

Further, since the sub-display device 690 has a resolution lower than that of the third pattern display device 81, the data amount of the image displayed on the sub-display device 690 is the same as the data of the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 less than quantity. Therefore, in the display control device 114, an image to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 with a small amount of image data (a title image when the power is turned on) is first stored in the resident video RAM. to the image display can be shortened.

Here, the image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 is composed of one image data as described above. Therefore, when the power is turned on, first, when the power-on title image (see FIG. 82(a)), which is the power-on image, is displayed on the sub display device 690, the area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 ( 81, 0 data may be set for the data of the area of 800 horizontal×600 vertical. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on, the image data to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 is set to match the resolution of the sub-display device 690 (see FIG. 81, image data of 400 horizontal×300 vertical). may be used to display on the sub-display device 690 . In this case, when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 690 (the main image when the power is turned on, the variation image when the power is turned on, etc.) is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 and the Using the image data (see FIG. 81, horizontal 1200×vertical 600) for display on the sub-display device 690, switching is performed between the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 for display. As a result, the amount of image data to be set to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the power is turned on can be reduced. can shorten the time to

Next, referring to FIG. 133, the normal image transfer setting process (S4703), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the previously executed display setting process (S2803) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S4901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4902). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4903), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905.

Also, in the process of S4902, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4902: No), the process of S4903 and S4904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4905. In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4906).

In the process of S4906, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4906 that the transfer process has not ended (S4906: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4906: Yes), the process proceeds to S4907. Also, as a result of the process of S4905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4907.

In the process of S4907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4907). is turned off (S4908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S4913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S4907: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 223p is ON (S4909). Then, if the back image change flag 223p is not on but off (S4909: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 223r is on (S4909: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag that is in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S4911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S4909, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated.

In the process of S4913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913). The determination in the process of S4913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S4913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4913 (S4913: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4914). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S4914, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4915), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing the normal image transfer processing, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the rear image is changed. Of the image data used in , image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, details of the drawing process (S2807), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2804) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated (S5001). That is, in the processing of S5001, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S2804). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the drawing process, after the process of S5002, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S5003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 118(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the first control example, the display image that is used when the power is turned on is corrected and used during normal presentation. As a result, since a common display image can be used when the power is turned on and when the normal presentation is performed, the capacity of the ROM can be saved.

In addition, in this control example, the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are used in the effect in which a specific role object (the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) and the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is moved. It is controlled to correct the contents of the production displayed in. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 becomes difficult to see, for example, the display content displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed on the sub-display device 690 in an effect in which a specific accessory moves. By doing so, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to visually recognize the display contents.

Furthermore, when the vertical movement unit 400 is moved and the door member 470 is opened, the opening/closing drive motor 466 for keeping the door member 470 closed is not excited when the door member 470 is dropped. It is controlled (energization stop control). As a result, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force acting on the door member 470 when the door member 470 is dropped without driving the opening/closing drive motor 466, so that power consumption can be reduced.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when a specific advance notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the winning hole during the time effect period which is periodically executed, the effect to be executed during the time effect period is restricted. controlled to do so. Thereby, when the countdown effect which is the specific advance notice effect is executed, the countdown effect executed during the time effect period can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is puzzled by the repeated countdown effect during the time effect period.

Further, the ball-entering effect displayed based on the ball entering the winning hole is displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the intervals at which game balls enter a winning hole are short, the period for displaying the ball-entering performance can be lengthened, and the player can easily visually recognize the ball-entering performance. be able to.

It should be noted that this control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of the above-described embodiments, or by combining the above-described embodiments. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the embodiments described above, the front rail portion 715 is formed in a single arc shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed from a plurality of circular arcs, and the direction of adjacent circular arcs may be reversed (wavy shape). In this case, the slide movement speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed, and the attitude of the effect member 620 is made unstable, so that the effect of rattling the effect member 620 can be performed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the effect member 620 forms an inverted state, the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is vertically above the first shaft support portion 613, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity may be arranged obliquely above the first shaft support portion 613 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 of the left lower plate member 320 has been described as being horizontal in the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the widthwise outer side. In this case, the speed of the ball flowing into the upper surface of the left lower plate member 320 from the outside in the width direction of the board can be reduced by the acceleration in the direction of gravity, and the deceleration time of the ball can be shortened.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed as an elongated hole has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the positional deviation between the slide hole 643 and the slide shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by expanding and contracting the transmission member 640. FIG. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the position of the contact portion 644 can be switched between two positions has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously variable (movable). In this case, the change rate of the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the case where the attitude of the tip end swinging member 6556 changes between two positions has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the posture of the tip end swinging member 6556 may be changed in multiple steps. In this case, the amount of swinging of the expansion and contraction production device 6540 can be formed in a plurality of types, and the variation of production can be increased.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Of course, each of the above-described embodiments and control examples, or a combination thereof, may be used. Furthermore, although it is composed of a plurality of controllers, it may be composed of one integrated controller or several integrated controllers.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Example of Technical Concept for Changing Driving Force Transmission with Deformed Long Hole 553 of Rotating Arm Member 550>
A crank member that rotates about a first shaft and has a protrusion protruding at a position eccentric to the first shaft, and an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted are provided at a first position and separated from the first position. an arm member movably formed between a second position and a driving device for generating a driving force for rotating the crank member about the first shaft; The driving force is transmitted to the arm member when the protrusion is brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protrusion, and the arm member is moved from the first position to the second position. and a non-transmission area connected to the transmission area and blocking the transmission of the driving force. A1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a crank member provided with a projection projecting at a position eccentric from a rotating shaft, and an arm member provided with an insertion portion through which the projection of the crank member is inserted. , there is a gaming machine in which an arm member operates in conjunction with rotation of a crank member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-000306). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked. Therefore, the arm member is driven from the start of the crank member, and the timing of starting the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member cannot be shifted. In this case, when starting the crank member, a large force is required to overcome the inertia of the crank member and the arm member, and there is a problem that the size of the driving device is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes the transmission area and the non-transmission area connected to the transmission area, the crank can be rotated while the protrusion is inserted into the non-transmission area. By starting the member, the timing for driving the arm member and the timing for starting the crank member can be shifted. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission area from the non-transmission area. As a result, the driving force required for starting the crank member can be suppressed, and the size of the driving device can be reduced.

The arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves through the non-transmission area. For example, when the arm member is moved, it is exemplified by a case where it is moved by gravity or elastic force generated by an elastic spring for assistance.

Examples of the insertion portion include a recess having a bottomed recess shape and an elongated through hole.

In the game machine A1, the crank member is formed to be capable of rotating one or more rotations, and the insertion portion serves as the transmission area when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction. A gaming machine A2 comprising a selection area that becomes the non-transmitting area when the game machine is rotated in another rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, it is possible to change the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member according to the rotation direction of the crank member. As a result, by reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device without changing the rotation speed of the crank member, it is possible to form two speed modes of the arm member when the crank members are arranged in the same phase. can increase the variation in speed of the arm members.

In the game machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the protrusion and an inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion that faces the movement direction of the protrusion when the crank member is rotated in the one rotation direction. A game machine A3 characterized in that the selection area is formed by providing a margin portion that is filled with the selected area.

In addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is formed by providing the insertion portion with a margin, so that the game machine A3 has other functions for changing the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member. A member can be made unnecessary, and the material cost can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position and the second position is formed as a terminal position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the terminal position formed as the terminal position When the arm member is arranged at either one of the second positions, the arm member directed to the other opposite to either the first position or the second position formed as the terminal position A gaming machine A4 characterized in that a bounce suppression mechanism for suppressing movement is formed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, when the arm member is arranged at either the first position or the second position formed as the end position of the movable range of the arm member, It is possible to suppress the driving force that the driving device needs to generate in order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other side of the opposite side. Therefore, the durability of the driving device can be improved.

As the bounce suppression mechanism, when using the attractive force of a magnet, when suppressing the movement with a claw-shaped member, and when the load received by the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member, the arm A case where an insertion portion of a member is formed is exemplified.

In the case of attracting with a magnet, the magnet is required as a separate member, but it is possible to generate different magnitudes of attracting force depending on the internal composition of the magnet, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the claw-shaped member is used to suppress the movement, a driving device for operating the claw-shaped member is required, but the movement of the arm member can be mechanically blocked by the claw-shaped member.

When the insertion portion of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received by the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed toward the shaft of the crank member, there is no need to dispose a separate member for suppressing the movement of the arm member, Bouncing of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

In the gaming machine A4, when the arm member is arranged at least one of the first position and the second position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position where the non-transmission area is connected to the transmission area is the A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by making the circumscribed circle of the protrusion about the rotation axis of the crank member substantially the same.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the bounce suppression mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is arranged at the first position or the second position. As a result, the arm member can be smoothly changed from the moving state to the stopped state.

In addition, in the bounce suppression mechanism, the load applied from the insertion portion to the protrusion is directed toward the rotating shaft of the crank member, so it is possible to suppress the load applied in the rotation direction of the crank member, thereby suppressing the load on the drive device. can do.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position where the non-transmission region is connected to the transmission region is the same as that of the crank member. The circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis is substantially the same, and a biasing force is applied to move the arm member from the first position toward the second position, and the non-transmission region of the insertion portion is applied. At least one of an inner recess portion protruding inside the insertion portion and an outer recess portion projecting outside the insertion portion and having a size capable of accommodating the projection portion is formed on the side surface on the first position side. A gaming machine A6, characterized in that:

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission area is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member, and a biasing force is applied to the arm member to move the arm member from the first position toward the second position. In this case, the protrusion of the crank member is arranged in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, so that the arm member is prevented from moving by the protrusion and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved through the non-transmitting region so that the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, the arm member is moved. That is, when the protrusion is arranged to face the inner recess, the protrusion pushes the inner recess and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. Further, when the protrusion is arranged to face the outer recess, the protrusion is accommodated in the outer recess and the arm member is moved toward the crank member.

As a result, the projection of the crank member moves in the non-transmission region, and the movement of the arm member differs in movement width from the movement of the arm member that occurs when the projection moves in the transmission region due to the rotation of the crank member. can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving device and change the movement width of the arm member.

That is, in order to change the movement width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the driving device according to the movement width of the arm member. In this case, the control load on the driving device increases, and it is difficult to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, the movement of the arm member with different movement widths is formed by moving the protrusion of the crank member in the non-transmission area and arranging the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess so as to face each other. be. Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. Further, by narrowing the formation interval between adjacent inner recessed portions or outer recessed portions, the arm member can be caused to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

The mode in which the protrusion can be accommodated may be a mode in which the entire protrusion is included in the recess, or a mode in which a part of the protrusion is included in the recess.

<An example of the technical concept of limiting the swing width of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 by the arc-shaped hole 554>
A movable member that can move along a predetermined movement trajectory and can be arranged at a first position and a second position that are different from each other; a stopper member that limits the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or at the second position; A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine provided with a movable member that is formed to be movable and a stopper member that limits the movement width of the movable member (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the stopper member is immovably fixed, separate stopper members are prepared for the case where the movable member is arranged at the first position and the case where the movable member is arranged at the second position. Therefore, there is a problem that the space for arranging the stopper member becomes wide.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the stopper member moves corresponding to the movable member, the stopper member when the movable member is arranged at the first position is arranged at the second position. It can also be used as a stopper member in the case. Thereby, the space for arranging the stopper member can be suppressed.

Further, the stopper member changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or at the second position, so that variations in the movement width of the movable member are increased. be able to.

Examples of the stopper member include a projecting portion that protrudes from the transmission member and abuts against the movable member, and an inner wall portion of a recess that is recessed in the transmission member and accommodates a part of the movable member.

Examples of modes of movement include linear movement, curvilinear movement, meandering movement, vibration, rocking movement, rotational movement, and the like. Further, the width of movement in each mode of movement means, for example, in the case of linear movement, curvilinear movement, meandering movement, vibration, etc., the actual movement distance or the linear distance between two points. In the case of , etc., it means the actual movement distance, movement angle, and the like.

In the game machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is pivotally supported on a first shaft and that expands and contracts in the radial direction of the first shaft, , the extension length of the intermediate member is different, the predetermined movement trajectory is formed in an arc shape centering on the first axis, and the stopper member is provided when the intermediate member is in a predetermined extension state. A gaming machine B2, wherein the movable member extends along the predetermined movement locus.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the movable member is pivotally supported so as to be able to swing about the first axis and is formed to be able to expand and contract in the radial direction of the first axis. Equipped with members. Therefore, the radius of curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member about the first axis can be changed by the length of the intermediate member in the expansion/contraction direction.

Here, the stopper member extends along a predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member when the intermediate member is in a predetermined elastic state (the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member in the predetermined elastic state). is assumed to be the same as the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member in the case of . In this case, the movable member is moved along the stopper member when the intermediate member is brought into a predetermined expansion/contraction state, and the movable member can be moved in the extension direction of the stopper member. Therefore, the movement width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

On the other hand, if the intermediate member is set to a different expansion/contraction state than the predetermined expansion/contraction state, the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be made different from the curvature of the stopper member in the extending direction. The trajectory and the extension direction of the stopper member can be crossed. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, by changing the expansion/contraction state of the intermediate member, it is possible to change the movement width of the movable member.

In the game machine B2, the movable member includes a projection projecting toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the projection is inserted, and the projection is inserted into the insertion portion. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the movable member and the stopper member interlock with each other in an extending/contracting direction of the intermediate member in an inserted state, and the movable member abuts against the insertion portion.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the protrusion of the movable member is inserted into the insertion portion of the stopper member, so that the movable member and the stopper member interlock in the expansion and contraction direction of the intermediate member. , the driving device for expanding and contracting the movable member and the driving device for moving the stopper member can be used together. Further, the insertion portion restricts the movement of the movable member by coming into contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper that restricts movement of the movable member and a function that interlocks the movable member and the stopper member. As a result, it is possible to consolidate functions.

A game machine B4 characterized in that, in the game machine B3, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side by the expansion and contraction of the intermediate member.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side due to the expansion and contraction of the intermediate member. Thereby, the moving width of the movable member can be changed between when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion and when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion.

That is, when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along a predetermined movement locus follows the shape of the insertion portion), The movement trajectory and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement trajectory of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along a predetermined movement trajectory is substantially reversed from the shape of the insertion portion), the protrusion The angle formed by the movement trajectory of the movable member and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion becomes large, and the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be narrowed.

In the game machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so as to be able to change its posture while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. is changed, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member is changed.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3 or B4, the position of contact between the movable member and the insertion part is changed by changing the posture of the insertion part while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. In this case, it is possible to change the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member.

In any one of game machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion includes a groove portion that allows the projection portion to enter and exit along the movement trajectory, and the projection portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that a state can be formed, and the movable member includes a positioning assisting portion that engages with the stopper member in the separated state.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B5, it is possible to form a separated state in which the protrusion is separated from the insertion portion through the groove, and the movable member can be moved in the separated state. A positioning aid is provided for engagement with the stop member. Therefore, the formation range of the stopper member can be made smaller than the movement range of the movable member, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the positional deviation between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be reduced. can be prevented. That is, even if the projecting portion is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member is suppressed by the positioning assistance portion, so that the projection portion can be returned to the insertion portion.

<An example of the technical concept of supporting two points of the production member 620 that is supported in an inverted position>
a base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member and moves upward from a predetermined position, a driving device that generates a driving force for displacing the movable member, and is connected to the movable member. and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member, wherein the transmission member is swingably supported by a shaft support portion formed in the base member, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the length from the pivotal support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the support portion to the connection position of the movable member and the transmission member. .

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed in a base member and moves upward from a predetermined position is driven by transmission of a driving force through a gear (for example, See JP-A-2011-120640). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the driving device is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution of the driving device (for example, one step in a stepping motor) is determined by the support portion of the movable member. to the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, the positional adjustment of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes more difficult as the center of gravity of the movable member moves away from the supporting portion in the radial direction.

Further, when the center of gravity of the movable member deviates to one side from the inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion, a driving force is generated to displace the movable member in the opposite direction, thereby causing the movable member to stand upside down. Even if an attempt is made to maintain the state, if the driving force causes the center of gravity to shift to the other side, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity will coincide, resulting in a large displacement of the movable member.

Therefore, as the movable member becomes longer in the radial direction of the supporting portion, it becomes more difficult to stop the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the supporting portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device to the movable member to move the movable member upward is supported by the shaft support portion of the base member and connected to the movable member, The length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the pivot portion is formed shorter than the length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the supporting portion. Therefore, even if the movable member is elongated in the radial direction of the supporting portion, it is possible to suppress the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the driving device is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution of the driving device. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

The manner in which the movable member is supported by the base member includes a manner in which the movable member is pivotably supported by the base member, a manner in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, and others. A combined aspect and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine C1, a game characterized in that the length of an arm of the transmission member from the pivotal support portion to a connection position with the movable member is shortened as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the more the movable member displaced about the support part moves upward from the predetermined position, the more the transmission member from the shaft support part to the connection position with the movable member. Arm length is shortened. Therefore, compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved.

For example, when the number of revolutions of the driving device that rotates the transmission member is constant, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is the first length. A description will be made assuming that the second length is fixed at a second length shorter than the length of . At a constant number of revolutions of the drive device, the transmission is better when the transmission member is fixed at the first length than when the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at the second length. The movement speed of the center of gravity of the movable member increases when the member is arranged in a predetermined phase.

Here, in the vicinity of the predetermined position, the movable member is quickly operated at the speed generated when the transmission member is set to the first arm length, and near the inverted state, the speed generated when the transmission member is set to the second arm length Consider a case where it is desired to move the movable member slowly at . As a method for that purpose, it is conceivable to change the rotation speed of the driving device in the middle, but this method cannot be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotation speed of the driving device. Further, even if the number of revolutions of the driving device can be changed, if the number of revolutions is to be changed midway, a detection sensor is required to detect the timing of the change, which increases the cost. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the arm length from the shaft support portion where the transmission member is supported to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is such that the transmission member is at a predetermined position. It is formed in such a manner that it is shortened as it moves upward from . Therefore, the transmission member can be set to have the first arm length near the predetermined position, and the transmission member can be set to have the second arm length near the inverted state, so that the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. .

As a configuration in which the length of the arm from the shaft support portion to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is fixed, a case where a projection projecting from the transmission member is inserted into and connected to the movable member is exemplified. be. In addition, as a configuration in which the arm length can be changed, a long hole is formed in the transmission member, and a projection projecting from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member, For example, the member is provided with an elongated hole in a portion supported by the support portion, and an insertion shaft is formed through the elongated hole from the base member.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the movable member has a protrusion projecting in a direction parallel to the support, and the transmission member is an elongated hole extending in a radial direction of the shaft support. A gaming machine C3 comprising an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted.

In the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion extends in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the projection portion of the transmission member is inserted through the insertion portion, thereby connecting the transmission member and the movable member. are connected, the moving direction of the connecting position is restricted to the radial direction of the pivot portion. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically change the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the transmission member with the movable member as the transmission arm swings.

Examples of the insertion portion include elongated holes that are formed through the hole, recessed portions that are formed as bottomed recesses, and the like.

A gaming machine C4 in the gaming machine C3, wherein the pivotal support is arranged vertically above the support, and the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged on a straight line connecting the support and the projection.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, when the movable member takes a posture in which the projection is arranged vertically above the support, the center of gravity of the support, the pivot, the projection and the movable member is Formed on a vertical line. In this case, the gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is applied vertically downward to the support portion and the pivot portion. As a result, no rotational force is applied to the movable member, so that the posture of the movable member can be maintained even if the power of the driving device is cut off. Thereby, the load on the driving device can be reduced.

A game machine C5 is characterized in that, in the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and rotation of the driving device is reduced by the worm gear.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and the worm gear slows down the rotation of the driving device, thereby controlling the driving device. The movement width of the movable member can be greatly reduced when operating with the minimum unit of resolution of . In addition, since the direction of transmission of force via the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive device side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to the load from the transmission member side, thereby improving the drive device. It is possible to reduce the load on the driving device when the motor is stopped.

In any one of game machines C1 to C5, an urging device is provided in which an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member above the supporting portion is generated in both directions of displacement of the movable member, and the urging force is A game machine C6 characterized in that the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the direction of displacement in an inverted state arranged vertically above the support portion, and increases as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

According to the game machine C6, in any one of the game machines C1 to C5, the biasing device generates a biasing force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the supporting portion, and the biasing force is such that the center of gravity of the movable member It increases as the movable member is displaced from the state (inverted state) arranged vertically above the support portion. That is, the urging force can be minimized in the inverted state.

Therefore, by increasing the urging force when moving the movable member upward from the predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the burden on the driving device that moves the movable member upward from the state in which the movable member is arranged at the predetermined position.

Further, the biasing force is generated in both directions of displacement of the movable member, and is balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved upward from a predetermined position and the drive device is controlled to stop, even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes the inverted state, the posture of the movable member is changed to the inverted state by the biasing force. can be directed to This makes it easy to stop the movable member in an inverted state.

In the gaming machine C6, the movable member can form a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount from vertically above the support portion, and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by the predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the rate of change in the biasing force when the displacement is the same is greater in the second state than in the first state.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6, the movable member is larger than the predetermined amount from the inverted state than the first state on the inverted state side in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support portion. In the second state of being displaced, the rate of change in biasing force for the same displacement is greater. In this case, when starting the movable member from the state in which the movable member is arranged in the second state, it is possible to reduce the load on the driving device at the time of starting. Moreover, since the acceleration of the movable member can be reduced when the movable member is arranged near the inverted state, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in the inverted state.

<An example of the technical concept in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during oscillation>
a movable member movably formed between a first position and a second position; a driving device for generating a driving force for moving the movable member; and an urging force for returning the movable member to the first position. and an urging device that generates an urging force in response to a rate of change in the urging force generated when the movable member is arranged in a first urging region from the first position to a predetermined position. When the member is arranged in a second urging region that is connected to the first urging region and is separated from the first position, the rate of change in the urging force is formed to be large. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that uses an urging force from an urging device such as an elastic spring as an auxiliary force when moving a movable member with a driving force generated by a driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011. -120640). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the biasing force of the biasing device is proportionally increased according to the amount of displacement of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the biasing device by changing the arrangement of the movable member. There was a problem that That is, it has been difficult to make the movement of the movable member smoother by suppressing the biasing force in one region, and to increase the biasing force to make the movement of the movable member more rapid in another region.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rate of change in the biasing force biased toward the first position is higher than that in the case where the movable member is disposed in the first biasing region. It is made larger when placed in the active region. That is, for example, when starting the movable member stopped at the second position toward the first position (second biasing region), a sufficient biasing force can be obtained from the biasing device, while the movable member is moved to the first position. When arranged in the urging region, the change in urging force is suppressed, and the movable member can be operated supplely (slowly).

In addition, as a mode in which the rate of change in the biasing force of the biasing device is changed by the arrangement of the movable members, the number of biasing devices that generate a biasing amount on the movable member increases in the middle, or the number of biasing devices increases. A case where the elastic spring is formed from an elastic spring and the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed by the arrangement of the movable member is exemplified.

In the game machine D1, the urging device is a pair of long members arranged on a pair of surfaces intersecting the moving direction of the movable member and sandwiching the movable member in the moving direction. are arranged on both sides of the movable member so as to face each other, and the other end, which is the end opposite to the one end, is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed; a main body sandwiched between the pair of elongated members, and a main body formed on the opposite side of the main body with respect to the pair of elongated members and contacting at least one of the pair of elongated members in the movement direction of the main body. a contact portion formed to be able to contact, the contact portion being connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is arranged in the first urging region, the movable member engages the pair Among the elongated members, one of the elongated members on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member is abutted and biased, and the movable member contacts the other elongated member. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the abutting portion abuts and is given an urging force.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the change in the rate of change in the biasing force of the biasing device is achieved by shifting the contact timing between the movable member and the pair of long members for each long member. can be formed by Therefore, it is not necessary to change the biasing force of the biasing device by control or prepare a separate member for improving the biasing force.

That is, since the movement of the pair of long members is restricted at the other end, one of the long members on the side closer to the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moves. The other elongated member on the opposite side receives no force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first urging region, when the movable member moves, the other elongated member arranged on the opposite side of the moving direction of the movable member stays in place.

On the other hand, in the second urging region, the other elongated member is brought into contact with the contact portion by moving the movable member. As a result, a biasing force is also generated from the other elongated member. Therefore, it is possible to increase the biasing force applied to the movable member in the second biasing region.

Examples of elastic springs include coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, and the like.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the urging device is a pair of long members arranged on a pair of surfaces intersecting the moving direction of the movable member and sandwiching the movable member in the moving direction. are arranged opposite to both side surfaces of the movable member, and the other end opposite to the one end is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is a main body sandwiched between the pair of elongated members; and at least one of the pair of elongated members formed on the opposite side of the main body with respect to the pair of elongated members in the moving direction of the main body. and an abutment portion formed so as to be able to abut on the movable member, the abutment portion being connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is arranged in the first urging region, the movable member Of the pair of elongated members, one of the elongated members on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member abuts and is applied with a biasing force, and the movable member is subjected to the second biasing force. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that, when arranged in the area, the intermediate portion of the one long member is pressed against the abutment portion arranged on the side of the one long member with respect to the body portion.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, the change in the rate of change in the biasing force is formed by pressing the intermediate portion of one of the long members against the contact portion. That is, one of the long members already deformed by the movement of the movable member is further deformed starting from the intermediate portion pressed against the contact portion, thereby causing a change in the rate of change in the biasing force. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subjected to deformation is shorter than in the deformation starting from the other end, so the rate of change in the biasing force with respect to the amount of movement of the movable member is reduced. Increase. This makes it possible to increase the change in the biasing force with respect to the amount of movement of the movable member in the second biasing region. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate of change in the biasing force.

In the gaming machine D3, the one elongated member has a first bending point that is bent toward the contact portion side that is arranged oppositely, and the one elongated member is bent at the first bending point. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being pressed against a contact portion.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, one of the elongated members abuts against the abutting portion arranged opposite to the first bending point, so that the one of the elongated members abuts. It is stretched by contact with the part. Therefore, the tip portion of the biasing device that applies the biasing force to the movable member can be separated from the other end of the elongated member or the first bending point, which is the starting point of the biasing force. Therefore, the moment applied to the movable member from the biasing device can be increased in the second biasing region.

In the gaming machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged area that is enlarged in the movement direction as it separates from the other end of the elongated member, and one of the movable member and the elongated member is expanded in the tip enlarged area. A game machine D5 characterized in that the end of the game machine D5 is abutted against.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged area, and the movable member and one end of the long member are brought into contact with each other in the tip enlarged area. Therefore, when one elongated member is stretched by being pressed against the contact portion, the contact position between the movable member and the elongated member separates from the other end of the elongated member. direction to increase the amount of deformation of the elongated member. Therefore, the biasing force applied from the biasing device to the movable member can be increased.

A gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D2 to D5, variations in the change in the biasing force generated by the long member can be increased. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the biasing force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<An example of technical concept in which a plurality of outlets are provided and the buffer ribs 322 are formed on the lower plate 320>
Inside a game area formed so that a ball can flow down, a board accessory placed in contact with the lower edge of the game area and a ball formed on one side in the width direction of the board accessory are played. A first out port that is an opening for discharging from the area, and a second out port that is an opening formed on the other side in the width direction of the inner-board accessory that is opposite to the one side in the width direction and is an opening for discharging the ball from the game area. , wherein the first out port and the second out port include a lower plate portion extending from the lower side surface of the opening to the front and having a guide surface on the upper surface, and the guide surface of the lower plate portion The surface includes cushioning ribs extending in the direction of the opening of the corresponding side of the first outlet or the second outlet, and is raised from the guide surface on the outside in the width direction. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the aspect ratio of the cushioning ribs is formed to decrease toward the outer side in the width direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a plurality of outlets are provided (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 9-192301). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is preferable to reduce the size of each outlet to the extent that the number of outlets increases, because it is preferable to secure the space for arranging attackers, etc., but if the outlets are made too small, There is a problem that the discharge of game balls may be delayed.

For example, if the height at which the ball bounces up and down on the front side of the out port is equal to or greater than the vertical width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port. Also, for example, when the side surface of the accessory is arranged on the side surface in the width direction of the out port and becomes a wall, the ball flowing into the front side of the out port from the width direction collides with the side surface of the accessory and rebounds in the width direction. At this time, if the amount of rebound in the width direction becomes equal to or greater than the width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the cushioning ribs are formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate portion, so that the bounce of the ball can be suppressed and the ball can be decelerated. That is, when a ball collides from above and below, the cushioning ribs bend and deform, so that the cushioning ribs act as a cushion to suppress the bouncing of the ball. Also, when the ball collides from the left and right, the ball is damped by being stuck in the buffer ribs.

Here, the cushioning ribs extending in the opening direction are weak against loads from the left and right directions, and may be damaged by collision with balls from the left and right directions.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the guide surface has a stepped portion on the outside in the width direction, the ball flowing down from the left and right toward the buffer rib falls from above the stepped portion to the buffer rib. . In this case, it is possible to increase the vertical component of the direction in which the ball collides with the buffer ribs, thereby suppressing damage to the buffer ribs.

In addition, since the stepped portion has a function of blocking the ball moving in the lateral direction on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the ball moving on the guide surface from rebounding beyond the lateral width of the out port.

Since the buffer ribs are formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to obtain a large rebound suppressing effect in the vicinity of the center in the width direction of the game area where the falling balls tend to concentrate. As a result, the ball can be discharged smoothly from the out port. In addition, by aligning the curve of the lower side of the game area with the lower surface of the buffer rib, the arrangement position of the out port can be downwardly corrected.

Here, the reason why the effect of suppressing the bounce of the ball increases as the height of the cushioning rib increases is that the amount of deflection of the cushioning rib increases. In other words, the greater the amount of deflection of the buffer ribs, the more the cushioning effect works and the more easily the rebound can be suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable to keep the aspect ratio of the buffer rib constant in the left-right direction (the length in the vertical direction is constant) for the effect of suppressing rebound.

On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs is fixed (the length in the vertical direction is fixed), it is necessary to increase the formation height of the stepped portion, and the path of the sphere to the stepped portion is also upward. As a result, the game area is narrowed, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the aspect ratio (longitudinal length) of the buffer ribs is reduced at the widthwise outer side of the game area where the falling balls are difficult to concentrate, and the widthwise center of the game area where the falling balls are easy to concentrate. In , the aspect ratio (longitudinal length) of the buffer rib is increased. As a result, it is possible to achieve both improvement in ball ejection efficiency and securing of a game area.

Extending in the direction of the opening is not particularly limited, and means extending along the direction of the opening in a shape such as a straight line, a waveform, or a chevron.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the guide surface has an outer inclined portion that is downwardly inclined to the outside in the width direction of the game area.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, since the guide surface is provided with the outer inclined portion, the speed of the ball flowing into the guide surface from the outside in the width direction can be reduced by the gravitational acceleration, and the ball can be moved. Deceleration time can be shortened.

A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1 or E2, a non-flowing region is formed obliquely above at least one of the first out port and the second out port, in which balls cannot flow down.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1 or E2, since the ball flowing obliquely downward from the non-flowing area toward the guide surface is restricted, the ball does not flow down to the guide surface. The number of paths can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to narrow the direction in which the falling ball rebounds. Thereby, the outer shape of at least one of the first out port and the second out port can be narrowed.

In the gaming machine E3, the non-downflow area is provided with an opening/closing device that is arranged in the game area and that can be opened and closed to the front side, and is arranged above at least one of the first outlet and the second outlet. , a game machine E4 formed on the front side of the opening/closing device.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the non-flow region is formed by the opening/closing device. As a result, the space generated by suppressing the opening dimension of the first outlet or the second outlet in the direction toward the non-downstream area can be used as the installation space for the opening/closing device.

When the opening/closing device is in the closed state, the ball flowing down in front of the opening/closing device is caused to flow downward in the game area. It has a function to flow down. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form a non-flowing area, as compared with the case where the balls flow down irregularly by colliding with a nail or the like.

A gaming machine E5 in any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, wherein a direction adjusting rib extending in the opening direction is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first outlet or the second outlet.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port is provided with a direction adjusting rib extending in the opening direction in a rib shape. , the resistance to the ball flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed.

<Feature F group> (Use the image at power-on even during normal operation)
display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and storage means for storing display data corresponding to the display mode displayed by the display control means and setting means for reading out the display data from the storage means and setting the data as display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, wherein initial settings of a game are executed in the storage means. Initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed when the image is displayed is stored, and the setting means reads the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and sets it as display data to be displayed on the display means. The game machine F1 is characterized in that the initial display data read in the initial setting is used as display data to be displayed on the display means in an effect executed after the completion of the initial setting.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine, various effects images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to enhance the interest of the game. In such a game machine, generally, image information of an image to be displayed on the display device is stored in advance in a storage means, and when the image is displayed, the corresponding image information is read out from the storage means and image processing is performed. After applying, the image is displayed on the display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598). However, as the amount of image information increases in the gaming machine described above, the amount of image data used in the gaming machine increases, increasing the capacity of storage means for storing data, and increasing the load due to the process of reading the data. There was a problem. Due to such problems, an improvement in image display control has been demanded.

According to the game machine F1, since the initial display data displayed at the time of initial setting is also used for effects after the completion of the initial setting, the display data can be shared, the amount of display data can be reduced, and the image display There is an effect that control can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the display means is composed of first display means and second display means different from the first display means, and the display control means is the first display means or the second display means. and the setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and uses it as display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means. In the effect executed after the initial setting, the initial display data read out in the initial setting is set as display data for displaying on either one of the first display means and the second display means. The game machine F2 is characterized by:

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, it is possible to share the display data for the display means composed of the first display means and the second display means, and display control can be performed. This has the effect of reducing the load.

In the game machine F2, the initial display data is set such that the display areas of the first display means and the second display means are set as one display area.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the first display means and the second display means can be set as one display data, so there is an effect that the display control can be simplified.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a determination means for determining the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination result determined by the determination means are shown. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information, wherein the identification information is displayed in the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and in the dynamic display after completion of the initial setting. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is composed of normal identification information.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and the normal identification information. Since it is configured, there is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that it is the initial setting.

In the gaming machine F4, the initial image is a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a display including a game information image showing game content displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by comprising at least an image.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, the initial image is composed of the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and the display image including the game information image displayed on the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be notified of the contents of the game and the results of determination at the same time even during initial setting.

In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the initial identification information displayed on the first display means during the initial setting consists of a smaller amount of data than the normal identification information. F6.

According to the game machine F6, since the initial identification information is composed of less display data than the normal identification information, the control load at the time of initial setting can be reduced, and the initial identification information can be read and displayed quickly. effective.

In any one of the game machines F4 to F6, the second display means has a smaller display area than the first display means, and when no game is played for a predetermined period of time, the second display means displays , a game machine F7, wherein a display image including the game information image displayed in the initial image is displayed.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F4 to F6, when the game is not played for a predetermined period, the initial display data is used to display the game information image on the second display means. Since the image is displayed, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced and the content of the game can be notified.

In the gaming machine F7, when the game is not played for the predetermined period, the display data corresponding to the display image displayed on the first display means among the initial images is set to non-display. A gaming machine F8 characterized by:

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, the initial image displayed on the first display means is set to non-display, so that the first display means can display a different image. be.

In any one of the game machines F2 to F8, when the setting means sets the initial display data read out in the initial setting to the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting, The display data corresponding to the second display means is set to non-display, and when setting the second display means, the display data corresponding to the first display means is set to non-display. A game machine F9 characterized by.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F2 to F8, the first display means and the second display means can independently perform display using the initial display data. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine F9, the setting means sets the initial display data read out in the initial setting to the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting. A game machine F10 characterized in that it is set to be displayed in different display positions.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F9, it is possible to show to the player as if the display is different from the display displayed in the initial setting, and the initial display data can be used in a wide variety of ways. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic group G> (Positions of ○ and × are changed depending on the content of fluctuation between the shutter and the main liquid crystal)
a first display means capable of displaying identification information; a second display means different from the first display means; and dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the first display means or the second display means dynamic display means for displaying; privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the specific identification information is displayed on the first display means or the second display means; A game machine G1, further comprising switching display means for switching between the first display means and the second display means for displaying the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means.

Here, for example, by providing a plurality of display means for performing the production of the game machine and performing a variable production or a jackpot production on each display means, a synergistic production using the plurality of display means can be performed. There is known a gaming machine intended to enhance the interest of players (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-081256). However, in the gaming machine described above, there has been a demand for improved convenience using a plurality of display devices. Due to such problems, there has been a demand for an improvement in convenience.

According to the gaming machine G1, the effect (dynamic display of identification information) displayed on the first display means or the second display means is switched between the first display means and the second display means by the switching display means. It can be displayed by switching. As a result, the identification information can be displayed at a position where the player can easily see it according to the state of the game, and there is an effect that convenience can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, a first drive means capable of driving to a first position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information dynamically displayed on the first display means, and a dynamic display on the second display means. and a second driving means drivable to a second position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information, and the switching display means is provided when the first driving means is at the first position. the identification information is displayed on the second display means, and when the second driving means is at the second position, the identification information is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by:

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the first drive means and the second drive means can suppress the problem of obstructing the recognition of the identification information.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second display means has moving means capable of moving on the front side of the first display means, and the switching display means moves the second display means by the moving means. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that, when the identification information is displayed on the second display means, the game machine G3 is characterized in that it is switched so that the identification information is displayed on the second display means.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the identification information is prevented from being visually recognized by the second display means.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the display data of the display modes displayed on the first display means and the second display means are displayed in one display area. A gaming machine G4, characterized in that the gaming machine G4 is composed of synthetic display data corresponding to the second display means.

According to the game machine G4, the display data of the first display means and the second display means can be set by combined display data in any one of the game machines G1 to G3, thereby reducing the control load. be.

In the gaming machine G4, coordinate information is set for setting the respective display areas of the first display means and the second display means as one display area, and the combined display data is the The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that it is composed of display data for displaying respective coordinates corresponding to the coordinate information.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, there is an effect that the display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means can be easily set.

<Characteristic group H> (fall control)
A game machine comprising: a movable member having a movable portion movable at least between a first position and a second position; and driving means for driving the movable member to a third position and a fourth position, wherein: a regulating means for regulating the movement from the position to the second position; and the movable from the third position to the fourth position in a state in which the regulation by the regulating means is released based on the establishment of a first condition. The member is driven by the driving means, and the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position while being regulated by the regulating means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. A game machine H1 characterized by having drive control means for driving by means.

Here, for example, by moving a movable accessory provided in the game machine, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested. In such a gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the player by increasing the number of movable patterns of movable accessories (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-079687). In this case, it is necessary to use many driving devices (for example, motors) in order to increase the number of movable patterns of the movable accessory, resulting in an increase in power consumption. Due to such problems, suppression of power consumption has been demanded.

According to the game machine H1, by driving the driving means, the movable part can be moved by the drive vibration or the like, so power consumption is increased compared to the case where the movable part is electrically moved. has the effect of suppressing

The game machine H2 is characterized in that, in the game machine H1, it has a movable means for moving the movable portion from the second position to the first position.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the driving means drives the movable member to the fourth position, so that even when the movable part moves to the second position, the movable means moves the movable member to the fourth position. There is an effect that it can be returned to the 1 position. In this case, the movable portion may be moved to the first position by an inertial force (acceleration) that drives the movable member from the fourth position to the third position without providing the movable means.

In the game machine H1 or H2, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player and a predetermined effect indicating whether or not the privilege is given by the privilege giving means are provided. effect execution means for executing during a performance period, and the drive control means moves the movable member to the third position when a movable condition is satisfied during the period during which the effect is executed by the effect execution means. to the fourth position, and when an effect indicating that the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means is executed, it is easy to drive in a state in which the regulation by the regulation means is released. A gaming machine H3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the movable member is likely to be driven to the fourth position in a state in which the regulation is released in the effect that the privilege is likely to be provided. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that a privilege will be awarded when the movable position is reached.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the drive control means moves the movable member in the same operation in a state in which the regulation by the regulation means is released and in a state in which the regulation is regulated. Gaming machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination of whether or not the movable member is restricted due to the difference in the operation of driving the movable member. Here, the operation means a difference in speed, a driving pattern, a difference in driving direction, and the like.

In any one of game machines H1 to H4, the drive control means is positioned between the third position and the fourth position when driving the movable member from the third position to the fourth position. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position for a predetermined period.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H4, by temporarily stopping, the effect that the movable part can be easily moved to the second position by inertia force etc. when it is not excited. There is

In any one of game machines H1 to H5, the fourth position is located below the third position, and the drive means reciprocates between the third position and the fourth position. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being configured to be able to

According to the game machine H6, one of the effects of the game machines H1 to H5 is that the movable part can be easily moved by the downward gravity.

The game machine H7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the moving means is composed of a stepping motor, and the regulating means energizes the stepping motor in a stopped state.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the moving means and the regulating means can be configured by stepping motors, and there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

<Feature Group I> (Avoids execution of similar effects)
an effect execution means capable of executing an effect; a specific period setting means for setting a specific period during which the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means; and a specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition that can be executed by the execution period of the effect is satisfied when executing the effect, and the effect executing means is determined by the specific condition determining means. The game machine I1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on determination that the specific condition is established.

Here, for example, when a certain amount of time has passed since the power of the gaming machine was turned on, by shifting to a specific effect different from the normal general effect and displaying the regular effect that is executed periodically, Gaming machines have been proposed for the purpose of increasing the interest of players (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-252534). In this case, in the regular performance that is executed periodically, when the performance with sound and image similar to the regular performance is executed, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the regular performance is being executed. There was a problem that the player was confused. Due to such problems, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

According to the gaming machine I1, during the period in which the specific effect is executed, whether or not the specific effect can be executed is determined before the execution, so that the confusion of the player due to the malfunction of the execution timing of the effect can be suppressed, and the game can be easily understood by the player. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine I1 has a clock means capable of clocking clock information, and the specific period setting means starts the specific period based on the timing of the predetermined clock information by the clock means. A gaming machine I2 characterized by at least setting.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the start of the specific period is set based on the clocking of the predetermined clock information, so the specific period is set at the same time in the other game machines. There is an effect that it can be easily configured.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the effect execution means executes a normal effect other than the specific effect during the specific period, and the specific condition determining means performs the normal effect based on the normal effect being executed. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it determines whether a specific condition is established.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, establishment of the specific condition is determined based on the normal effect, so the specific effect is determined in consideration of the relationship between the specific effect and the normal effect. There is an effect that it can be executed.

The gaming machine I3 has operation means that can be operated by a player and detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated, and at least one of the specific effect and the normal effect includes and an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means, and the specific condition is satisfied when the operation effect of the specific effect and the normal effect are not synchronized. Game machine I4 to play.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, it is possible to suppress the problem that the specific presentation and the normal presentation are executed at the same time, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand. effective.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I4, a dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on establishment of a start condition, and a specific identification that gives advantageous benefits to the player. special game state setting means for setting a special game state, which is a game state in which information is likely to be displayed, and the specific effect includes a suggestive effect indicating whether or not the special game state is set. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines I1 to I4, it is possible to recognize that a special game state is set by a specific performance, and to make the player interested in the specific performance. has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the specific period setting means sets the specific period for a predetermined period each time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. The execution means executes the specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied for each predetermined period based on the setting of the specific period, and the specific condition determination means determines the specific condition A gaming machine I6 characterized by comprising a delay means for delaying the specific effect and causing the effect executing means to execute the specific effect when it is determined that the condition is not established.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines I2 to I5, even when the specific condition is not established, the specific performance is delayed and executed, thereby giving more confusion to the player. It has the effect of suppressing the

<Feature J group> (0.125 second production)
information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; discrimination means for discriminating stored information; display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result discriminated by the discrimination means; and when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means , privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player; performance mode output means for outputting a predetermined performance; pre-discrimination means for discriminating the acquired information; and effect execution means for outputting a effect based on the result of discrimination by the pre-discrimination means to the effect mode output means; The output means has a plurality of output areas in which the output of the effect is set, and the effect executing means, when executing the output of the new effect, the output area in which the effect was previously output. A game machine J1 characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output area different from the output area.

Here, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting hole and the number of reserved memories increases, the reserved random number information is determined in advance (read ahead), and the determination result is a predetermined result (jackpot). etc.), the game machine aims to increase the player's expectation of whether or not the variable display corresponding to the hold will be a big win by executing an effect that suggests that the For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-16499). In such a game machine, if the efficiency of the game is improved by shortening the variable time, the period of presentation of the lottery results, etc. is also shortened, which makes it difficult for the player to understand. To solve this problem, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that is easy for a player to understand even when the fluctuation time is shortened.

According to the gaming machine J1, a plurality of output areas are set in which an effect based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means (an effect suggesting the determination result of suspension) is output. The next effect is output to an output area different from the output area where the effect was output. As a result, even if the determination result of the preliminary determination means is newly acquired during execution of the performance, the performance being executed can be reproduced by displaying the performance based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means in a different output area. It is possible to execute a new performance based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means without terminating the process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the gaming machine J1, a predetermined order is set for the plurality of output areas, and the effect executing means, when executing a new effect, outputs the output area next to the output area that previously output the effect. A game machine J2 characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output areas in the order corresponding to the order of the game machine J2.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine J1, the effects are sequentially output according to the order set in the output areas, so that the problem that the output areas of the latest effects and the new effects overlap is eliminated. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect mode output means is composed of display means for displaying a predetermined display mode that is the predetermined effect, and the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of small areas as the output areas. A gaming machine J3 characterized by having a set area.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of effects can be displayed at the same time by effectively using the display area. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance period can be set longer.

In the game machine J2 or J3, the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to a predetermined number, and the information acquisition means stores information stored in the storage means when the acquisition condition is satisfied. If the information is less than the predetermined number, the information is acquired. Even if the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquisition means, the effect execution means The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that an effect is output to the output area corresponding to the next order of the output area.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of the game machine J2 or J3, there is an effect that the player can feel as if more information has been acquired.

In the gaming machine J3 or J4, when the information is acquired by the acquisition means, the effect content to be executed by the effect execution means is determined based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means for the information, and If the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquiring means, the effect content determination for determining the effect contents to be executed by the effect executing means based on the determination result other than the specific determination result. A game machine J5 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of the game machine J3, there is an effect that the player can play the game as if the information has been acquired.

In the gaming machine J5, the effect content determining means determines the effect period together with the effect content, and the determined effect period elapses in the output area where the effect output is executed by the effect executing means. A game machine J6 characterized in that it has end means for forcibly ending the performance being executed when the performance that is not executed is being executed.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effects of the game machine J5, it is possible to suppress the problem that different effects are output to the same output area, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine J5, the effect content determination means determines the effect period together with the effect content, and the effect execution means places the effect period in the output area for executing the output of the newly determined effect. The game machine J7 is characterized in that, when the performance that has not elapsed is being executed, the performance being executed is overwritten and the newly determined performance is executed.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effects of the game machine J5, it is possible to suppress the problem that different effects are output to the same output area, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In any one of game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, and J1 to J7, the game machine is A gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, and J1 to J7, the game machine is A gaming machine Z2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, and J1 to J7, the game machine is A game machine Z3 characterized by being a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 Third pattern display device (part of display means)
114 display control device (part of display control means)
234 character ROM (part of storage means)
237 image controller (part of setting means)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in game machines, display devices such as liquid crystal display devices display various effect images to enhance the enjoyment of games.

JP-A-2006-223598

However, the gaming machine described above is required to further reduce the control load.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the control load.

To achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and display by the display control means. and setting means for reading the display data from the storage means and setting it as display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means. wherein the storage means stores initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed when initial settings of the game are executed, and the setting means stores the initial display data in the initial settings. display data read out from means and set as display data to be displayed on said display means, and in an effect executed after completion of said initial setting, said initial display data read out by said initial setting is displayed on said display means. It is used as data.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there are provided display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and the display mode displayed by the display control means. storage means for storing corresponding display data; and setting means for reading the display data from the storage means and setting the display data as display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, wherein the storage means The means stores initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed when initial settings of the game are executed, and the setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial settings, It is set as display data to be displayed on the display means, and the initial display data read out in the initial setting is used as display data to be displayed on the display means in an effect executed after the completion of the initial setting. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface lower unit. (a) is a front view of a base member, a first outlet, a second outlet, a lower left plate member, and a lower right plate member, and (b) is a base member taken along line XVb-XVb in FIG. 15(a). and a cross-sectional view of the left lower plate member. It is a front perspective view of a vertical movement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical movement unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a vertical movement unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the up-and-down motion unit; It is a front view of a vertical movement unit. It is a front view of a vertical movement unit. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the compound action unit; Fig. 2 is a front exploded perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the compound action unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of the expansion and contraction effect device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion and contraction effect device. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a front view of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a graph showing the distance from a standard horizontal line of a projection part. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a tilting motion unit and a sliding motion unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a sliding operation unit; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting motion unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a production|presentation member and a 2nd drive device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the rocking|swiveling angle of the production|presentation member with respect to the rocking|swiveling angle of a transmission member. 4 is a front view of a tilting motion unit and a sliding motion unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of a tilting motion unit and a sliding motion unit; FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring in a second embodiment. 4 is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring; FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring in a third embodiment. (a) is a back perspective view of a transmission member in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a back perspective view of a moving contact member. (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member, and (c) and (d) are top views of the transmission member. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the main-body member of the production|presentation member typically. 4 is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of a compound action unit according to the fifth embodiment; It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. (a) is a partial front view of a rotating arm member in a sixth embodiment, (b) is a partial top view of the rotating arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXb in FIG. ) is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a switching device. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a tilting motion unit according to a seventh embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, a special symbol reserved ball storage area, a special symbol reserved ball execution area, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a first winning random number table set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first control example, and (b) is in the ROM of the main controller 110 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing a set first winning type selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram showing a second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller 110 in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is set in the variation pattern selection table, It is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for big hits, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a (normal) variation pattern table for loss, and (d) is a (probable variation) variation pattern for loss It is the figure which showed the table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example, and (b) is the content of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing contents of a ball-entering effect selection table in the first control example; 2 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a work RAM of a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a correction information table in the first control example. be. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing set coordinates of a display area in the first control example; (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the power is turned on in the first control example. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a display data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. It is an example of a timing chart of the variable display mode during the time saving game in the first control example. (a) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device during time saving in the first control example. (a) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device during time saving in the first control example. It is a timing chart in which the time production in the first control example is set. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 8 is a flow chart showing stop setting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing time setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing an advance notice selection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production|presentation management process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the extension production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 9 is a flow chart showing specific time effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing a ball-entering effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing special effect correction processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing advance notice command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing a ball entry effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a specific time effect command process to be executed. (a) is a flowchart showing an effect mode change command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by . 8 is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect information correction processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) to (b) are explanatory diagrams of control of the stepping motor in the first control example.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

A front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and award balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper tray 17. - 特許庁The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and each of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or flashing of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball while the pressing operation is being performed, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are connected to the game board. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 .

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below. The first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the board surface lower unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 16R probability variable jackpot, a 16R short time jackpot, and a 2R probability variable with short time jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “16R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds and becomes a time-saving state. It is a jackpot where the number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds, but no time-saving game is awarded. In addition, "16R time-saving jackpot" shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment). It's about.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows some of the balls launched to the game board that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes. On the other hand, an electric accessory 640a is provided in the second winning hole 640, and it is difficult to open the electric accessory 640a normally (when it is not during time saving), so that the game ball can enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加is in a difficult state.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning a prize in the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a first specific prize winning port 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the variable display device 80, and a second variable winning device 650 having a circular shape of about the same size as the other winning ports 63, 64, 640 is placed substantially in the center. A specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the normally closed specific winning holes 65a and 650a are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific prize winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b ( See FIG. 15, only the outline is shown). The first specific prize winning port 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted to the front side by driving the large opening solenoid 65b to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the first specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal state are formed. The closed state and the state of the closed state are alternately repeated.

Specifically, the second variable prize winning device 650 has a triangular opening and closing plate in front view disposed on the left side of the second specific prize winning opening 650a, and is driven to open and close to the left with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. and a large open solenoid (not shown). The second specific prize winning port 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big hit, the opening/closing plate is tilted to the left by driving the small opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the open state and the normal state are formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to win the ball in the second variable winning device 650 by hitting left, thus eliminating the trouble of switching between hitting left and hitting right each time the game state changes. can do.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area. Triggered by a ball entering the specific winning openings 65a and 650a while the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are open, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is opened for a predetermined time. A game state in which the game is opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a and 650a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. It is not limited to the left side of the variable display device 80, and may be, for example, below the first prize winning opening 64.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 314 and a second outlet 315 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out hole 314 or the second out hole 315 (not shown). guided to the road. The first out port 314 is arranged on the lower left side of the first prize winning port 64 , while the second out port 315 is arranged on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64 . That is, the second out port 315 is arranged on the opposite side of the first out port 314 with the first winning port 64 interposed therebetween.

Therefore, the ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end of the game area (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) on the right side of the first winning hole 64 (the right side in FIG. 2) is the inner rail 61 Or it flows down along the slope of the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 315, while the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area is located on the left side of the first winning port 64 in front view. The ball that has reached it flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 102) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 100) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include a vertical driving motor 431 , an opening/closing driving motor 466 , and other driving motors 531 , 561 , 631 , 661 , and 751 .

Various drive motors (the vertical drive motor 431, the open/close drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, and 751) will now be described. These various drive motors are composed of, for example, known stepping motors, and are provided in plurality in association with the respective roles installed in the pachinko machine 10 in order to operate the respective roles. These various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, a command including at least the number of steps of rotation, the direction of rotation (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed is sent from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). to output A control IC (motor driver) drives various corresponding drive motors based on the output command. As the motor control IC (motor driver), a single IC that can set operations for a plurality of drive motors may be adopted, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. may be configured to operate the drive motors corresponding to different accessories respectively. When using a motor control IC (motor driver) that can set the operation for multiple drive motors, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps, etc., includes information for specifying the type of drive motor. and output it.

Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described using the vertical drive motor 431 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the up-and-down drive motor 431 based on the set command, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is operated each time one step of operation is executed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the execution has been executed is output. This execution signal allows the MPU 221 to grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has moved from the origin (retreat) position. That is, with the origin (retraction) position as the position of step 0, the value is updated by 1 each time an execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, the value is incremented by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (retreat) position to the end point (projection) position. Also, the value is decremented by 1 each time one step is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (projection) position to the origin (retraction) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the action position of each role based on the value of the step counter.

Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and is the position to which the character moves when returning to the origin when the power is turned on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is at the origin position. If the origin sensor is not turned on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor turns on. The accessory is varied until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position is the reference position for the action of each accessory. The step counter described above is reset to 0 when the accessory returns to the origin position (that is, when the origin sensor detects that it is on). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

Next, an example of control of various drive motors (vertical drive motor 431 in this case) by a motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one turn in four steps) will be described as an example. It is configured so that the rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once per step.

First, FIG. 135(a) is a diagram showing an overview of the up-and-down drive motor 431 which is a stepping motor. The up-and-down drive motor 431 is configured such that when excitation control data is sent from the sound lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC, the portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited. Specifically, excitation is performed by the motor control IC according to excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to "A, B, C, D" shown in FIG. 135(a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any of A, B, C, and D) of the vertical drive motor 431 is "1", it is excited, and the excitation control data is "0". is not excited. For example, if the excitation control data is "1100", A and B are excited and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 135(b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The sound lamp control device 113 also includes an excitation counter that is used to select and set one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 135(b)). is provided. This excitation counter can be updated by 1 in the positive direction starting from "0". It's becoming Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, each part is immediately excited based on the excitation control data (that is, the vertical drive motor 431 operates without time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Additionally, the excitation counter can be updated in the negative direction as well. That is, the value can be updated in the order of "0"→"3"→"2"→"1"→"0" starting from "0". When updating in the negative direction, the direction of rotation of the up/down drive motor 431 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction (positive direction or negative direction) in which the excitation counter is updated and the update frequency of the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of character whose action is to be set. Note that the maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once per step (that is, it takes 360 steps for one rotation of the motor), the excitation counter is updated in the range of "0" to "359". A loop counter.

Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the vertical drive motor 431 will be described with reference to FIG. 135(b). FIG. 135(b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an excitation table defining excitation control data and the state of the vertical drive motor 431 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 135(b), the excitation control data is defined for each value of the excitation counter in the excitation table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(b), as the sequence data corresponding to the up/down drive motor 431, excitation control of "1100, 0110, 0011, 1001" in the order of excitation counters "0" to "3" is performed. Data are specified for each. When the sequence data "1100" corresponding to the excitation counter value "0" is set, the vertical drive motor 431 is excited at positions A and B. When "0110", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "1", is set, the positions B and C of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "0". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of . Further, when the sequence data "0011" corresponding to the excitation counter value "2" is set, the positions C and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, and the excitation counter value is "1". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from Further, when the sequence data "1001" corresponding to the excitation counter value "3" is set, the positions A and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "2". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of . Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 135, the up/down drive motor 431 rotates clockwise by 90 degrees each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 in the positive direction. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the up/down drive motor 431 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

As described above, the control of the vertical drive motor 431 has been described using a simplified operation model. It can be rotated by 1 degree each time it is updated). That is, when varying each accessory, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 by the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be varied, and by setting the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter each time the excitation counter is updated, Each role can be changed accurately.

Thus, in this embodiment, by setting a command to the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotational speed, rotational direction, and number of rotational steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize various performance actions using the role item.

In addition, a unique action pattern is set for each role object according to the production. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time.

Further, in this embodiment, whether or not the various drive motors have completed their operation based on the command set for the motor driver is determined based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors have operated. That is, based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times of reception of the execution signal output from the motor driver each time one step of operation is set by the motor driver, it is determined whether the operation set for each drive motor has been completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to measure the elapsed time after setting a command for operating various drive motors, and determine whether or not the operation of the various drive motors is completed based on the elapsed time. .

Here, the control of the up/down driving motor 431 and the opening/closing driving motor 466 that are cooperatively controlled in this embodiment will be described. Details will be described in the first control example described later, but in this embodiment, the vertical motion unit device (falling role) 400 is used as an effect (falling role scenario) in which the vertical motion unit device (falling role) 400 moves. An effect is provided in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the falling direction by driving the vertical drive motor 431 . In the production (falling accessory scenario), after the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the falling direction, the door member 470 is opened by the opening/closing driving motor 466, and the production is provided in which the door member 470 is not opened. ing.

The sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment controls the opening/closing drive motor 466 for opening and closing the door member 470 when the effect of opening the door member 470 is executed in the effect (falling accessory scenario). On the other hand, control (energization stop control) is performed so that excitation is turned off for all positions A to D (see S1706 in FIG. 108). When the excitation for all positions is off, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening/closing drive motor 466, that is, the torque for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized. In this case, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is moved in the falling direction, an inertial force is generated in the door member 470 .

Here, in the present embodiment, the above-described torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is configured to be smaller than the inertial force generated in the door member 470 . Thus, when the slide member 450 is moved in the falling direction without driving the opening/closing drive motor 466 to open the door member 470, the inertial force generated in the door member 470 causes the door member 470 to be closed. can be released from to the open state. Therefore, power consumption for driving the opening/closing motor 466 can be reduced.

If the inertial force generated in the door member 470 due to the movement of the slide member 450 is insufficient to open the door member 470, the open/close drive motor 466 may be driven to open the door member 470. In this case, by using the inertial force generated in the door member 470 along with the movement of the slide member 450, the drive torque of the opening/closing drive motor 466 can be reduced. 466 can be made smaller.

In addition, switching between opening the door member 470 by driving the opening/closing motor 466 and opening the door member 470 without driving the opening/closing motor 466 may be performed according to the effect pattern. For example, when a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation is executed, the opening/closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to reliably open the door member 470. On the other hand, when a performance pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, the door member 470 is opened and closed. The door member 470 is opened without driving the opening motor 466 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the door member 470 is not opened in spite of the performance pattern with a high degree of expectation.

Further, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is not moved in the falling direction, that is, when the inertial force does not act on the door member 470, torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state ) is configured to provide sufficient torque to keep the door member 470 closed. Therefore, even during a period in which the falling accessory scenario is not executed, there is no need to excite the opening/closing drive motor 466 to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state, and power consumption can be reduced. If the torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is insufficient for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state, for example, a magnet may be attached to the tip of the door member 470. Such provision may be configured to reduce the torque required to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state.

On the other hand, when an effect (falling accessory scenario) in which the door member 470 is not opened is executed, excitation control is performed so that the opening/closing driving motor 466 for opening and closing the door member does not rotate. Specifically, by continuing to energize the corresponding portion (A to D) based on the current excitation counter in the excitation table (FIG. 135(b)) for a certain period of time, the opening/closing drive motor 466 is stopped. A torque to maintain the position (so-called holding torque) is generated to maintain the closed state of the door member 470. As a result, the sliding member 450 is not opened even though the door member 470 is not opened. It is possible to reliably prevent the door member 470 from being opened due to momentum (inertial force) when the door member 470 is moved in the falling direction.

If the above-described opening/closing control of the door member 470 and the opening/closing state of the door member 470 controlled by the opening/closing control do not match, the effect to be executed thereafter may be changed.

Specifically, when an effect based on a falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened is being executed, the opening/closing drive motor 466 is controlled to be energized and stopped, and then the door member 470 is opened. The lens member 460 located on the back side of the door member 470 becomes visible. Then, the player can visually recognize the characters "Super Hot" displayed on the third pattern display device 81 through the lens member 460. - 特許庁By visually recognizing the display of the third pattern display device 81 through the lens member 460, the display is enlarged and displayed, and the display can be made more impressive to the player.

On the other hand, when the door member 470 is not opened even though the opening/closing drive motor 466 is controlled to be deenergized, even though the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "hot". In this case, the door member 470 is opened and the lens member 460 can be visually recognized, but the door member 470 is not opened. Therefore, in this effect, the fact that the door member 470 has not been opened although the opening/closing drive motor 466 has been controlled to stop being energized is detected by an origin sensor or the like capable of detecting the state of the door member 470. In this case, After that, the effect is changed so that the third pattern display device 81 does not display the characters "Extremely Hot". As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened, the characters "Extremely Hot" are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be made to recognize that the effect of not opening the door member 470 has been executed. , it is possible to avoid giving the impression that the above-described problem has occurred. In this case, the occurrence of the problem may be notified to the employee by lighting a specific LED or notifying the hall computer through an external output terminal.

In addition, as a scenario for dropping the lens member 460 and the door member 470 of the vertical motion unit device (dropping accessory) 400, a scenario in which it moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position in one motion, and a scenario in which a plurality of motions (for example, two degrees) from the retracted position to the extended position. As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened after that, even if the door member 470 is opened by the second operation, two It is possible to make the player feel that the door member 470 is moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position by the action, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, the driving speed of the vertical driving motor 431 is changed to change the inertial force acting on the door member 470 depending on the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened and the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is not opened. It may be configured as Specifically, in a falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is increased so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is increased, while the door member 470 is opened. In the falling accessory scenario, the driving speed of the vertical driving motor 431 is slowed down so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is reduced. Thereby, the opening and closing of the door member 470 can be controlled with high accuracy. It is not limited to changing the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 according to the scenario of the falling accessory. The drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 may be changed by and.

In addition, switching between opening the door member 470 by driving the opening/closing motor 466 and opening the door member 470 without driving the opening/closing motor 466 may be performed according to the effect pattern. For example, when a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation is executed, the opening/closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to reliably open the door member 470. On the other hand, when a performance pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, the door member 470 is opened and closed. The door member 470 is opened without driving the opening motor 466 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the door member 470 is not opened in spite of the performance pattern with a high degree of expectation.

Next, in this embodiment, an RTC (real time clock) 292 is connected to the input/output port 225 . This RTC 292 is a timekeeping means for measuring time, and since it is provided with a dedicated internal power supply (battery in this embodiment), it continues timekeeping even when power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10. can do. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, by setting the same time (for example, the current time) in the clock means and manufacturing it, it is possible to obtain the same time information in the plurality of pachinko machines 10. . By configuring in this way, the time production can be executed synchronously among the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加Details of this time presentation will be specifically described in a first control example described later. In order to improve the accuracy of time keeping by the time keeping means (RTC), correction means (GPS, radio clock, etc.) for correcting the time information from the outside may be provided.

In addition, the time information is corrected each time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) by correction means (for example, GPS or radio clock) for correcting the time information from the outside. good too. As a result, even without providing a dedicated internal power supply (battery in this embodiment), every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started), the time information by the clock means can be updated. , the manufacturing cost and maintenance cost of the clocking means (exchange cost due to deterioration of the internal power source, etc.) can be reduced. The correction of the time information by the correcting means is not limited to each time the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time the pachinko machine 10 is started), but may be performed periodically (for example, every hour).

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

Here, display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 will be described. The third pattern is composed of main patterns of numerals "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "jackpot A" or "jackpot C", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are stopped and displayed. will be In addition, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which even-numbered "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" main symbols are aligned.

The display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. It is a sub-display area Ds for displaying characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. Approximately the center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and the third symbols stop on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 during each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning hole 64, and the small area Ds2 , and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of pending balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that entered the second winning hole 640. is.

On the actual display screen, a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are stop-displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, when the variable display is performed, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are also displayed so that a maximum of 9 main symbols are displayed. In some cases. In the secondary display area Ds, one "●" symbol is displayed for one reserved ball, and reserved symbols are displayed corresponding to up to four reserved balls for each of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2. Is displayed. That is, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this embodiment, the same reserved design (design) is used for the special design 1 and the special design 2, but this is not the only option. Symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed as a “□” symbol).

Thereby, the reserved balls of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be easily identified and displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the held ball entering the second winning hole 640 is displayed differently depending on the winning type of the normal symbol, the player can easily discriminate that the held ball is generated after winning for a long time. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-described main symbols, reserved symbols, etc., a notice effect display such as character display and characters, etc. Display of the number of fluctuations, etc. are displayed as appropriate. Further, when the reserved pattern is not displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or Ds3, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the number of reserved balls may be displayed in four divided areas. It may be displayed in a manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) that differs by the amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

A sub-display device 690 is also connected to the display control device 114 . The sub-display device 690 is a display device (for example, a liquid crystal panel) having a resolution different from that of the third pattern display device 81 . Specifically, the resolution of the third pattern display device 81 is (horizontal 800×vertical 600), and the resolution of the sub-display device 690 is (horizontal 400×vertical 300) (see FIG. 82). The resolutions of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be different from those described above, or the sub display device 690 and the third pattern display device 81 may have the same resolution. Alternatively, the resolution of the sub-display device 690 may be higher than that of the third pattern display device 81 .

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. Display control is performed using one image data (in this embodiment, image data with a resolution of 1200 horizontal×600 vertical) including images to be displayed respectively. Of the one image data, the image data corresponding to the resolution of the third pattern display device 81 (area of 800 horizontal x 600 vertical) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the remaining part is displayed on the sub display device 690. is displayed on the sub-display device 690 (400 horizontal×300 vertical area). The rest of the data (area of 400 horizontal pixels by 300 vertical pixels) is unused.

This makes it easy to synchronize the display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, and the display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are out of sync. It is possible to suppress the problem that occurs.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the structure for accommodating the units 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described.

5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the action unit 200 as seen from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which the compound action unit 500 is attached to the rear case 210 .

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and one side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 6) is open. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, so that the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The motion unit 200 includes a vertical motion unit 400, a compound motion unit 500, a tilting motion unit 600, and a sliding motion unit 700, which are accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 210, and configured as one unit.

Specifically, the compound action unit 500 is arranged in the upper right portion of the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7). In the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged below the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 . In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the up-and-down motion unit 400 is arranged in a stacked state on the front side of the compound motion unit 500 and accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in this embodiment, a predetermined action unit (for example, the combined action unit 500) is arranged in a layered state in which another action unit (for example, the vertical action unit 400) is superimposed on the front side. Therefore, when viewed from the front, a given action unit can be shielded by another action unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light-transmissive material and the player can visually recognize the action units arranged on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined action unit The player can see only the required part of the screen, and the other parts can be shielded from the player by another action unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other motion units on the assumption that the entirety of the effect member will be visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in designing can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, outlines of the operation modes of the vertical movement unit 400, the compound movement unit 500, the tilting movement unit 600, and the sliding movement unit 700 will be described. 8 to 10, FIG. 5 to FIG. 7 will be referred to as needed.

8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200. FIG. 8 shows the state in which the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical motion unit 400 is arranged in the extended position, and FIG. The formed state is shown in FIG. 10, in which the tilting unit 600 is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction.

As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical motion unit 400 moves the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is positioned at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2). ).

As shown in FIG. 9, the compound action unit 500 is arranged in the projecting position where the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) projects downward, and the front plate member 546 is positioned at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, 2), and the retracted position where the rotating arm member 550 is retracted upward, and the front plate member 546 is positioned in the opening 211a of the rear case 210. and a retracted state (see FIG. 5). In the contracted state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 10, the tilting motion unit 600 moves to the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. It is movable between positions. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting motion unit 600 is retracted to the right outside of the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and is visually recognized by the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2).

10 shows a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened so that the internal liquid crystal device can be seen. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) viewed through the opening 211a and the liquid crystal device inside the tilting operation unit 600 are displayed. It is possible to make the player visually recognize both the effect displayed on the .

These operation units 400 to 700 are formed to be independently operable, and are arranged in a superimposed (stacked) state as described above. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inwardly of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. As shown in FIG. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, each of the motion units 400 to 700 can be operated individually, and these motions can be combined, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. 11, the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the compound action unit 500 is in the extended state, the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the vertical action unit 400 are arranged in the extended position, and the door member 470 is arranged. form an open state.

As shown in FIG. 11 , the front plate member 546 of the compound motion unit 500 is visible through the lens member 460 of the vertical motion unit 400 . As will be described later, the lens member 460 is formed with a magnifying lens processing, so that the front plate member 546 is enlarged.

11, the rotary plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the compound motion unit 500 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved to the vertical motion unit 400. 39), the front plate member 546 can be seen in its normal size. As a result, it is possible to switch between a state in which the front plate member 546 is viewed in a normal size and a state in which the front plate member 546 is viewed in an enlarged manner (see FIG. 11), thereby improving the presentation effect.

12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. 12, the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the compound action unit 500 is in the extended state, the tilting action unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position and is in the tilting state, and the tilting action unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are in the state of being tilted. The figure shows the state immediately before the contact with the . By further tilting the tilting motion unit 600, the tilting motion unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the compound action unit 500 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to produce an effect as if the tilting action unit 600 is applying force to the compound action unit 500. (By associating the actions of the units, it is possible to perform more complex effects). As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

Next, the board surface lower unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface 13 and the board surface lower unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, in the lower part of the game board 13, a receiving opening 13a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and through which the board surface lower unit 300 is inserted.

FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the board lower unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the board surface lower unit 300 includes a base member 310 that is internally fitted and fixed in the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13, and a first out port that is disposed on the lower left side of the base member 310 when viewed from the front. 314, a lower right plate member 330 disposed on the lower right side of the base member 310 in front view and guiding the ball to the second outlet 315, and a lower left plate fastened and fixed to the base member 310 from the front. A front lid member 340 in which the member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 are pivotally supported by an insertion shaft 343 is mainly provided.

The base member 310 includes a plate-like main body portion 311 having a shape substantially equivalent to the shape of the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and having a slightly smaller cross-sectional shape than the receiving opening 13a, and a front side of the main body portion 311. A decorative front plate portion 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, a movable effect member 313 attached to the substantially central portion of the decorative front plate portion 312 in the width direction, and a movable effect member 313 formed on the left side of the movable effect member 313 when viewed from the front. and a second outlet 315 which is a rectangular hole formed on the right side of the movable effect member 313 in front view.

The movable effect member 313 includes a rotating effect member 313a which is arranged at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13 and rotated by a driving device (not shown). Here, when the outlet is provided at the lower edge of the widthwise center of the game board 13 , the movable effect member 313 cannot be arranged at the lower edge of the widthwise center of the game board 13 . In this embodiment, the first outlet 314 and the second outlet 315 are provided at positions spaced apart from the center of the game board 13 to the left and right, without providing the outlet at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13. Thus, a space for disposing the movable effect member 313 at the center lower edge in the width direction of the game board 13 can be secured.

The shapes of the first outlet 314, the second outlet 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a) is a front view of the base member 310, the first outlet 314, the second outlet 315, the lower left plate member 320 and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. ) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 310 and the left lower plate member 320 along line XVb-XVb of FIG. Note that FIG. 15( a ) shows the outer shape of the front cover member 340 fastened and fixed to the base member 310 and the nails formed above the first outlet 314 and the second outlet 315 .

The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. As compared with the first out port 314, the second out port 315 has a shorter length in the width direction. The reason for this will be described later. Further, a guide rib 315 a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner side surface of the second outlet 315 . The guide ribs 315 a can suppress the resistance applied to the ball when the ball flowing into the second out port 315 bounces high and collides with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315 . In addition, the flow of balls discharged from the second outlet 315 can be arranged in the front-rear direction, and variations in the direction of the discharged balls can be suppressed.

A buffer rib 322 of the left lower plate member 320, which will be described later, is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) (see FIG. 15(a)). As a result, even in this embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area increases toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the effect of suppressing the rebound of the ball falling on the left lower plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer to the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the higher the drop height of the ball. On the other hand, since the buffer rib 322 is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the more the buffer rib 322 bends, thereby increasing the cushion effect of softening the impact of falling. You can increase the degree.

Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling ball will be described. For example, if a ball that lands on the buffer ribs 322, 332 falls to a high height, but the frequency of the ball reaching that position is extremely low, even if the bounce of the ball is not intentionally suppressed, other balls may be prevented from being ejected. may not be If the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, 332 is increased even in this case, the space in the game area is unnecessarily suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is set not only based on the drop height of the ball, but also in relation to the drop height and the frequency with which the ball lands at that position.

As shown in FIG. 15, the ball flowing down above the buffer ribs 322, 332 starts to flow down paths c1, c2, then passes through a plurality of branches b1 to b10, and reaches landing areas z0 to z4. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the probability of the sphere flowing down the paths c1 and c2 is equal (1/2), and the probability of branching to the left and right at the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). explain. It is assumed that the sphere never flows down from the upper right.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z0 will be explained. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 and reach the route c11. The path to the branch b5 can be reached from the path c1 via the branch b1 or from the path c2. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the path c11 and the ball reaches the landing area z0 is 1/8 (=1/2×(1/2)^2) of the ball flowing down from the path c1, Since it is represented by the sum of the probability 1/4 (=1/2×1/2) of the ball flowing down from the path c2, it is 3/8 (“̂” means exponentiation). That is, each probability is the product of the probability 1/2 that the ball flows down the paths c1 and c2 and the number obtained by multiplying 1/2 by the number of branches b1 to b10 that the ball passes through until it reaches the landing area z0. is represented by

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z1 will be explained. In order to reach the landing area z1, flow down the left side at branch b3 to reach path c15, flow down the left side at branch b4 to reach path c16, or flow down the right side at branch b6 to path c14. or flow down the right side at the branch b7 to reach the route c13.

Up to the branch b3, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c15, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c15 is 1/16 (= 1/2*(1*2)^3). Up to the branch b4, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is conceivable, and since there are four branches before the sphere reaches the path c16, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c16 is 1/32. (=1/2*(1*2)^4). Also, up to branch b6, only the case where the sphere flows down from path c1 is considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches path c14, the probability of the sphere reaching path c14 is 1/16. (=1/2*(1*2)^3).

Up to the branch b7, both the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 and the path c2 are conceivable. May exist. There are two branches before the sphere flowing down from the path c2 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability of the sphere reaching the path c13 is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1 being 3/32 (=1/2*(1/2)^4+1/2*(1/2)^3), It is 7/32 because it is represented by the sum of the probability 1/8 (=1/2×(1/2)̂2) of the ball flowing down from the route c2.

Here, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z1 is the total sum of the probability that the ball reaches the paths c13 to c16 described above, so it is 12/32.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the ball reaches the landing area z2 can be represented by the probability that the ball reaches the path c12, which is equal to the probability that the ball that reaches the branch b7 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z2 is 7/32.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the path c17, or flow down the left side at the branch b10 to reach the path c18.

Up to the branch b9, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered, and since there are 6 branches before the sphere reaches the path c17, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c17 is 1/128 (= 1/2*(1*2)^6). Also, up to the branch b10, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered, and since there are seven branches before the sphere reaches the path c18, the probability of the sphere reaching the path c18 is 1/256. (=1/2*(1*2)^7).

The probability that the ball reaches the landing area z3 is 3/256 because it is the sum of the probabilities that the ball reaches the paths c17 and c18 described above.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 and reach the route c19. It is assumed that all the balls flowing down the right side of the branch b10 flow down along the route c19. The probability that the ball reaches the path c19 is equal to the probability that the ball that reaches the branch b10 reaches the path c18. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z4 is 1/256 (=1/2×(1×2)̂7).

From these facts, the ratio of the balls reaching the landing areas z0 to z4 is (z0:z1:z2:z3:z4)=(96:96:56:3:1). This ratio correlates with the damping ribs 322,332.

For example, when the landing area z1 and the landing area z3 are compared, although the heights of the balls falling on the landing areas z1 and z3 are the same, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is higher in the landing area z3. less than z1. This is because the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z3 is 1/32 of the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z1. That is, even if the bounce of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as in the landing area z1, there is little possibility that the ejection of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing area z3, by making the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 smaller than in the landing area z1, the arrangement position of the second outlet 315 can be lowered.

For example, when the landing area z2 and the landing area z4 are compared, although the ball falling distance to the landing area z4 is longer than the ball falling distance to the landing area z2, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z4 is 1/56 of the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z2. That is, even if the bounce of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as in the landing area z2, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing area z4, the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 is made smaller than in the landing area z2, so that the position of the second outlet 315 can be lowered.

In the above description, the probability of branching of the spheres b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by making the interval between the nails in the flow path through which the arrow on the left side of the branch b1 passes as small as the diameter of the sphere, the probability that the sphere flows down along the arrow on the right side at the branch b1 is greater than 1/2. can do. In the other branches b2 to b10, the branch probabilities of the sphere can be similarly adjusted.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the frequency with which the balls reach the paths c11 to c19, and the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

Further, the buffer rib 322 is formed such that the upper surface is inclined downward toward the rear (see FIG. 15(b)). Thereby, the ball flow to the first out port 314 can be made faster.

Returning to FIG. 14, description will be made. The left lower plate member 320 includes a long plate-like main body portion 321, buffer ribs 322 each having a thin plate extending in the front-rear direction, and buffer ribs 322 that are continuously arranged in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321, and the buffer ribs. A connecting front plate 323 formed in a manner to connect the front surfaces of 322, a stepped portion 324 formed so as to protrude upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front, and extending from the stepped portion 324 to the left when viewed from the front. and a shaft support hole 326 drilled in the front-rear direction at the right end of the main body 321 when viewed from the front.

The cushioning rib 322 is a portion through which the ball heading for the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses the rebound of the vertically falling ball in the vertical direction. That is, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed of a thin plate continuously arranged in the left-right direction, when it collides with a falling ball, it bends in the thickness direction, so that the impact of the collision can be softened. Also, when the ball moves in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the buffer ribs 322, the ball gets stuck between the buffer ribs 322 and is braked. In addition, the buffer rib 322 has a height and an aspect ratio that increase toward the right in front view (inward in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2)).

The connecting front plate 323 improves the strength of the buffer ribs 322 by connecting the buffer ribs 322 .

The stepped portion 324 is a raised portion for vertically dropping the ball that has flowed down from the ball flow rail portion 325 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the load in the left-right direction from being applied to the cushioning rib 322 from the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 325 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the buffer rib 322 from bending in the left-right direction due to the load in the left-right direction.

That is, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed of a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, there is a risk that it will break when a load is applied in the left-right direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325 , which has a lateral velocity and may apply a lateral load to the buffer rib 322 , moves up and down from the stepped portion 324 to the buffer rib 322 . It is formed in a manner of falling in the direction. As a result, the position at which the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be shifted to the right in the width direction as the speed of the ball in the left-right direction increases.

Therefore, the load applied to the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction when the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be reduced toward the left (outer side) in the width direction. Therefore, the more to the left in the width direction of the buffer rib 322, the less likely it is that the ball will be bent due to the load in the left-right direction. . In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer ribs 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer ribs 322 are arranged in comparison with the case where the buffer ribs 322 have the same length in the width direction. You can lower the position.

Here, while the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 is kept constant in the left and right positions in the width direction (in a state where the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 is It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface formed in the . However, in this case, the arrangement position of the stepped portion 324 becomes higher, and the arrangement position of the ball flow rail portion 325 which is inclined downward toward the stepped portion 324 also becomes higher. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) is increased, and the game area is suppressed.

On the other hand, the greater the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, the greater the effect of reducing the momentum of the ball (deceleration effect). Therefore, the cushioning rib 322 is formed in a manner that increases the aspect ratio from the vicinity of the stepped portion 324 toward the center of the game area.

In addition, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 up to this side of the step portion 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step portion 324 (there is a curve halfway in the left-right direction of the buffer rib 322). maximum height) is also conceivable. However, in this case, the ball that has reached the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling leftward. As a result, the ball tends to stay in the landing area z1, making it difficult to discharge the ball smoothly.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 in the width direction of the buffer rib 322 varies little, the ball that reaches the landing area z1 easily rolls left (toward the landing area z2). move. Therefore, since the ball can be flowed to the landing area z2 before it stays in the landing area z1, the ball can be discharged smoothly.

In addition, the step portion 324 has a function of damming the ball flowing down above the buffer rib 322 and flowing leftward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from rebounding beyond the lateral width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front cover member 340 (see FIG. 13).

The shaft support hole 326 is a portion through which the insertion shaft 343 of the front cover member 340 is inserted and supported.

The lower right plate member 330 includes a long plate-shaped main body portion 331, a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 331, and thin wall portions extending in the left-right direction. A connecting front plate 333 formed to connect the front surfaces of the buffer ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 recessed downward at the right end of the main body portion 331 in front view, and a right side from the recessed portion 324 in front view. It mainly includes a ball flow rail portion 335 extending from the main body portion 331 and a pivot hole 336 drilled in the front-rear direction at the left end portion of the main body portion 331 when viewed from the front.

The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body portion 331 is connected to the main body portion 321, the buffer rib 332 is connected to the buffer rib 322, the connection front plate 333 is connected to the connection front plate 323, the ball flow rail portion 335 is connected to the ball flow rail portion 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is connected to the shaft. Since the technical idea is common to each of the support holes 326, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted.

The cushioning ribs 332 are formed to have shorter left and right widths than the cushioning ribs 322 . As a result, the lateral width of the second outlet 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second outlet 315 can be lowered relative to the first outlet 314. It is possible to secure the installation space for the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 (the installation position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered).

Here, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 because the flow path of the ball to the second out port 315 is regulated. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, the first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the second out port 315 in the front view, so that when the opening/closing plate is opened, the balls flow into the first specific prize winning port 65a, When the opening/closing plate is closed, the ball falls vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second out port 315 from the upper right in the front view. In other words, a non-flow region is formed in the upper right portion of the second out port 315 where the ball is restricted from flowing down.

Therefore, the direction in which the ball flows down to the lower right plate member 330 is limited to falling in the vertical direction and flowing down from the width direction (from the ball flow rail portion 335) (flowing down from the oblique upper right direction is restricted). . Therefore, since there is no inflow of the ball obliquely from the upper right, the direction in which the ball bounces can be restricted, and the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be narrowed, and the formation width of the second out port 315 can be narrowed. As a result, the installation space for the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

The concave portion 334 is a depression for causing the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 335 to bounce. Therefore, the formation width of the concave portion 334 is set to a width that allows the ball to be placed without coming into contact with the adjacent buffer ribs 332 .

The ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 is dropped into the recessed portion 334 , bounces off when it contacts the upper surface of the recessed portion 334 , and falls onto the buffer ribs 332 . This prevents a load from being applied to the buffer rib 332 from the width direction, thereby preventing the buffer rib 332 from breaking.

The concave portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 are inserted. This makes it easier to use a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing a fastening screw into the fastening hole B to fasten and fix the lower board unit 300 to the game board 13 . That is, the recessed portion 334 has both the effect of preventing the buffer rib 332 from breaking and the effect of facilitating fastening and fixing of the base member 310 .

The front lid member 340 includes a plate-like main body portion 341 having a first winning port 64 formed at the top, an opening 342 formed at the center of the main body portion 341 and allowing the rotation effect member 313a to be visually recognized, and a pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336 .

The body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the side wall portion limits the direction in which the ball flows down. That is, a ball that collides with the main body portion 341 from the right side cannot penetrate leftward, while a ball that collides with the main body portion 341 from the left side cannot penetrate rightward.

The insertion shaft 343 is a portion that is inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336 . Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is slightly smaller than that of the shaft support holes 326 and 336 .

Next, the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical motion unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical motion unit 400. FIG. 16 and 17 illustrate a state in which the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position.

18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical movement unit 400 includes a base member 410 having a vertical groove portion 414 which is recessed from the back side to the front side on the right side in rear view and which is vertically extended. , a rotating crank member 420 that rotates around a connecting hole 413 of the base member 410 , a driving device 430 that generates driving force for the rotating crank member 420 , and a base member 410 to which the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 420 . and an arm member 440 that swings around a shaft portion 412, and an arm member 440 that is disposed on the opposite side of the vertical groove portion 414 of the base member 410 and is formed to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swinging motion of the arm member 440. A slide member 450, a lens member 460 suspended from a slide hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440 and slidably movable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440, and the lens member 460 and a pair of door members 470 pivotally supported respectively.

The base member 410 includes a main body portion 411 formed in a plate-like shape elongated in the left and right direction, and a cylindrical support hole 442 of an arm member 440 protruding from the right end of the main body portion 411 toward the front side. A shaft portion 412 to be supported, a connecting hole 413 drilled circularly in the front-rear direction to connect the rotating crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and formed on the right side of the main body portion 411 in rear view from the rear side to the front side. An upper and lower groove portion 414 in which a depression extends in the vertical direction, and recessed portions 415 which are depressed from the front to the back side on both left and right outer sides of the upper and lower groove portion 414 are mainly provided.

The vertical groove portion 414 is a portion in which the expansion and contraction effect device 540 of the compound action unit 500 is accommodated on the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, the compound action unit 500 suppresses the swinging angle of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 as the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves toward the reduced state. Collision with the left and right inner surfaces is prevented. The recessed portion 415 is a portion in which the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

The rotary crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 421 and a sliding projection portion 422 that projects from one end of the main body portion 421 toward the front side in a columnar shape and that is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 . , and an engaging portion 423 that engages with the fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 to disable relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420. As shown in FIG.

The driving force of the driving device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440 by inserting the sliding protrusion 422 into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotating it, and the arm member 440 swings about the shaft portion 412 . .

The driving device 430 includes a vertical driving motor 431 fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a driving gear 431a rotationally driven by the vertical driving motor 431, a transmission gear 432 meshing with the driving gear 431a, A fitting portion 432 a formed on the front side of the transmission gear 432 with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting hole 413 and having an inner side surface fitted with the engaging portion 423 of the rotating crank member 420 is mainly provided. .

The fitting portion 432a is a portion having recesses having a cross-sectional shape in which circular shapes are arranged at each vertex of a triangle. are engaged so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the body portion 411 of the base member 410 is sandwiched between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420, and as described above, relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 is disabled. , the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 rotate synchronously. That is, the driving force of the vertical drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432 .

The arm member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in the shape of an elongated bar, a shaft support hole 442 drilled in the base end side (right side in front view) and pivotably supported by the shaft portion 412, and a base end side. A sliding hole 443 is drilled as an elongated hole on the rocking end side, which is the opposite end of the lens member 443, into which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the sliding protrusion 422 of the rotating crank member 420 is inserted. and a hole-like insertion portion 444 with a bottom.

The shape of the inserting portion 444 is set so that the rotating crank member 420 can rotate once while the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted through the inserting portion 444 . Therefore, the arm member 440 can swing regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 420 .

The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-like body portion 451, a slide guide portion 452 extending rearward from both left and right ends of the body portion 451 and guided by the concave portion 415 so as to be vertically slidable, and a body portion. 451 , a central guide concave portion 453 which is a vertically extending depression formed in the front at the center portion in the width direction of the lens member 451 and into which the sliding projection portion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted; 454, which is a depression formed on the front surface of the lens member 460 and extends in the vertical direction, in which the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460 is guided.

The lens member 460 includes a plate-like main body portion 461 having a circular opening formed in the center, a magnifying lens 462 formed with a magnifying lens processing to be fitted into the opening of the main body portion 461, and a central portion of the main body portion 461 in the width direction. Sliding protrusions 463 protruded from the upper end to the back side and are inserted into the slide holes 443 of the arm member 440 so as to be vertically slidable, and both ends in the width direction of the main body 461 are protruded to the back side and slidable. A stable slide portion 464 that is vertically slidably inserted into the both end guide recessed portions 454 of the member 450, and a lower shaft portion 473 and an upper side shaft portion 473 of the door member 470 that are axially rotatably disposed on the lower left side of the main body portion 461 in front view. It mainly includes a pair of rotating cylinders 465 through which the shaft portion 474 is inserted, and an opening/closing driving motor 466 that rotates the pair of rotating cylinders 465 in opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown).

The movement operation of the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 . FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. 20 illustrates the closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical motion unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

When the arm member 440 swings from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the extended position (see FIG. 20), the lens member 460 pivotally supported in the slide hole 443 on the swing end side of the arm member 440 slides. A moving protrusion 463 (see FIG. 18) is slidably moved in the central guide recess 453 of the slide member 450 . The lens member 460 is vertically guided by the both end guide recesses 454 of the slide member 450, and the slide member 450 is vertically guided by the recesses 415 of the base member 410. The member 460 is slid vertically.

Returning to FIGS. 18 and 19, description will be made. The door member 470 is configured by dividing a circular plate into two upper and lower parts. A lower shaft portion 473 that protrudes rearward from the lower end of the main body portion 471 and is inserted into the rotary cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relatively; It mainly includes an upper shaft portion 474 that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relative to the lens member 460 .

The lower body portion 471 includes a guide protrusion 471a protruding from the side surface of the upper body portion 472 that contacts the upper body portion 472, and the upper body portion 472 has the side surface that contacts the lower body portion 471. It has a receiving recess 472a recessed into it. By fitting the guide protrusion 471a and the receiving recess 472a, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be positioned relative to each other in the closed state. In addition, in this embodiment, since the guide protrusion 471a protrudes in a tapered shape, the guide protrusion 471a can be reliably fitted into the receiving recess 472a.

The operation of door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. Note that FIG. 21 illustrates an open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by rotation of the rotating cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. As shown in FIG. The pair of rotary cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the opening/closing drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), so that the door member 470 is moved from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). , the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung outward (opposite directions). Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung inward relative to each other.

As a result, compared to the case where the front side of the lens member 460 is covered by swinging a single cover member, the time for swinging the lower body portion 471 and the upper body portion 472 can be halved.

Next, the compound action unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 45. FIG. The compound action unit 500 swings the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 9) to arrange the expansion and contraction effect device 540 on the front side of the third pattern display device 81. is a unit. Further, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is formed so as to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510 .

22 is a front perspective view of compound action unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of compound action unit 500. FIG. 22 and 23 illustrate a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, which is the end position formed outside the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

24 is a front exploded perspective view of compound action unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of compound action unit 500. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the compound action unit 500 is a unit that performs an effect by causing a telescopic effect device 540 to slide and swing. a rotating plate 520 formed to be rotatable around a first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510; An expansion and contraction effect device 540 which is fixed and formed so as to be able to expand and contract in the radial direction of the rotating plate 520 , and one end is connected to the expansion and contraction effect device 540 and the other end on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510 . A rotating arm member 550 that forms the telescopic motion of the telescopic effect device 540 by a swinging motion together with a second driving device 560 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 to generate a driving force of the rotating arm member 550, and the second A rotating crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 560 to the rotating arm member 550, and a mechanical portion on the rotating shaft side such as the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 that are fastened and fixed from the front of the base member 510. and a front cover 580 for blindfolding.

The base member 510 includes a rectangular plate-shaped body portion 511, a columnar first shaft portion 512 protruding forward from the lower center in the width direction of the body portion 511, and the first shaft portion 512. Three rows of arcuate holes 513 drilled along the center arc, and first through holes 514 drilled adjacent to the second arcuate holes 513b of the three rows of arcuate holes 513. and a columnar second shaft portion 515 projecting forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511, and a second shaft portion 515 adjacent to the second shaft portion 515. A second through-hole 516 to be drilled, a cylindrical third shaft portion 517 projecting forward from the lower right end portion of the main body portion 511 in a front view, and an edge of the main body portion 511 to be bent forward. and a folded wall portion 518 that is formed.

The first shaft portion 512 is inserted through the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520 and serves as the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 520 . Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotary plate 520 .

The arcuate hole 513 includes a first arcuate hole 513a, a second arcuate hole 513b, and a third arcuate hole 513c from the side near the first shaft portion 512 .

The first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c are long holes through which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotary plate 520 is inserted and guides the rotation of the rotary plate 520. As shown in FIG. As a result, the load applied to the first shaft portion 512 when the rotating plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. 24 and 25 show a state in which the collar is fastened to the tip of the insertion shaft 525, the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are provided for connecting the collar and the body portion 521. placed in between (passed through before fastening of the collar);

The second arcuate hole 513b is a long hole in which the arcuate rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 is arranged and moved. The upper side of the substantially central portion is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first driving device 530 is arranged in the opened portion. As a result, the meshing portion between the driving motor 531 of the first driving device 530 and the circular arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 can be arranged in the plate thickness portion of the main body portion 511, so that the thickness of the compound action unit 500 can be reduced. The lengthwise dimension (the dimension in the front-rear direction in FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes through which the driving gear 532 of the first driving device 530 and the driving gear 562 of the second driving device 560 are inserted, respectively.

The second shaft portion 515 is a columnar portion to which the lid portion 575 of the turning crank member 570 is fastened and fixed on the front side thereof, and which serves as the central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571 . Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 571 of the turning crank member 570 .

The third shaft portion 517 is inserted through the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 and serves as the central axis of rotation of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 . A torsion spring 517a is wound around the third shaft portion 517 to generate an urging force to move the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position.

The torsion spring 517 a is formed in such a manner that arm portions extend from both ends of a coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517 . One arm is fixed to the lower right portion of the bent wall portion 518 (near the first stopper portion 518a) in front view, and the other arm on the opposite side of the one arm is engaged with the rotating arm member 550. It is locked to the stop portion 555 .

The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed on the right side of the first shaft portion 512, and a second stopper portion 518b formed on the left side of the first shaft portion 512. and a third stopper portion 518c formed in the .

The first stopper portion 518 a is a portion that restricts the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 . That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the extended position (see FIG. 9), it abuts against the first stopper portion 518a and stops descending.

As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is arranged below the third stopper portion 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotating plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotating plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the direction of rotation toward the second stopper portion 512b. can be done. That is, the expansion and contraction effect device 540 described later is formed such that the maximum angle of the clockwise swing when viewed from the front is larger than the swing of the counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

The rotary plate 520 includes a fan-shaped body portion 521, a shaft support hole 522 circularly drilled in the thickness direction at the root portion of the body portion 521, and a width slightly larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 linearly recessed in the front surface of the portion 521; a plurality of (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 525, and an arc-shaped rack protruding from the rear surface of the main body 521 in an arc centering on the shaft support hole 522 and having gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral portion. 526 and .

The first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is inserted through the shaft support hole 522 . Therefore, the rotating plate 520 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 .

The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion to which the slide rail 545 of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is fastened and fixed. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is changed depending on the posture of the rotating plate 520 .

The expansion/contraction stopper 524 is a portion that abuts against the inner surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction and regulates the movement width of the slide plate 544 . Formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523, and by contacting the inner side surfaces of the slide plate 544 on both sides, the slide rail 545 is prevented from receiving a load in the direction perpendicular to the expansion/contraction direction, and durability is improved. can be achieved.

The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted through the first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c of the base member 510 and guides the rotation of the rotary plate 520. It is formed slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 513c. Further, a collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c is fastened and fixed to the tip, so that the rotating plate 520 is connected to the base member 510 so as not to be pulled out.

The arc-shaped rack 526 is inserted through the second arc-shaped hole 513 b of the base member 510 and meshed with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 . Since the meshing portion between arc-shaped rack 526 and first driving device 530 is formed in a region including the thickness portion of base member 510, the dimension in the thickness direction of compound action unit 500 can be suppressed.

The first driving device 530 mainly includes a driving motor 531 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and a driving gear 532 inserted through the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and rotated by the driving motor 531 .

Next, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the expansion/contraction effect device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion/contraction effect device 540. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the expansion and contraction effect device 540 includes a main body member 541 forming a skeleton, and a pair of rotating arm members 550 which are fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the main body member 541. A first guide member 542 and a second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted, and the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are arranged so as to be axially slidable along the extending direction. and a slide plate 544 connected to the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520, one end of which is fitted in the rail receiving groove 523 and fastened and fixed; A front plate member 546 fastened and fixed to the front plate member 546; and a decorative member 548 whose 548b is movably formed in front of the main body member 541 .

The main body member 541 includes a plate-like main body portion 541a forming a skeleton, a columnar protrusion 541b protruding toward the back side from the central portion in the width direction of the main body portion 541a, and the back of the protrusion 541b. A first raised fastening portion 541c protruding on the left side of the view, a second raised fastening portion 541d protruding on the right side of the protrusion 541b in the rear view, and a top left portion of the main body portion 541a in the rear view. It mainly includes a protruding guide fastening portion 541e and fastening holes 541f formed in plurality (three locations in this embodiment) on the front side of the main body portion 541a and in which the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

The projecting portion 541 b is a portion that is inserted through the circular arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the diameter of the protruding portion 541b is slightly smaller than the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554. As shown in FIG. Further, since the projecting portion 541b is inserted through the arcuate hole 554, the main body member 541 can be interlocked with the rotating arm member 550 by swinging.

The first raised fastening portion 541c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. As shown in FIG. The reason why the second raising fastening portion 541d is separated in the vertical direction by a longer distance than the first raising fastening portion 541c is that it is arranged at a position that does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550 . Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation locus of the rotation arm member does not pass through the lower left portion of the main body member 541 in front view (see FIGS. 37, 40 and 44). Therefore, it is possible to widen the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541d compared to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and it is possible to improve the rigidity of the second raised fastening portions 541d.

The guide fastening portion 541e is a portion to which the auxiliary fastening portion 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and a portion to which the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in an extended state. That is, even if the projecting portion 541b is not guided by the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guiding fastening portion 541e is guided by the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion/contraction effect member 540 are operated in conjunction with each other.

The fastening hole 541f is a through hole in which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a that is fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a back surface regulation portion that extends upward from a position on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a that is one step higher toward the back side. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c protruding from both left and right sides of the rear surface regulating portion 542b to the rear surface in a wall shape, and a portion of the upper end portion of the rear surface regulating portion 542b protruding toward the rear surface. and an auxiliary fastening portion 542e that extends from the rear restriction portion 542b and is fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541e.

The rear restricting portion 542b is a portion disposed on the rear surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the protrusion 541b from falling out of the arc-shaped hole 554 when the rotating arm member 550 moves to the rear surface. be.

The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 and suppresses the deviation of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542 when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is expanded and contracted.

The insertion hole 542d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is slidably formed with respect to the first guide member 542. As shown in FIG.

The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raising fastening portion 541d, and a rear restriction portion that extends upward from a position on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a, which is one step toward the rear side. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c protruding from the left and right sides of the rear surface regulating portion 543b toward the rear surface in a wall shape, and a portion of the upper end portion of the rear surface regulating portion 543b projecting toward the rear surface. and an insertion hole 543d.

The rear restricting portion 543b is a portion disposed on the rear surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the protrusion 541b from falling out of the arc-shaped hole 554 when the rotating arm member 550 moves to the rear surface. be.

The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 and suppresses the deviation of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543 when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is expanded and contracted.

The insertion hole 543d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is slidably formed with respect to the first guide member 543. As shown in FIG.

The slide plate 544 includes a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed portion 544b formed with a wide recess extending vertically on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and a recessed portion 544b. Both end recessed portions 544c formed with recesses extending in the vertical direction on the left and right front surfaces, and rail receivers protruding in a semicircular shape toward the front side at the upper and lower ends of the both end recessed portions 544c. portion 544d, a cylindrical slide rod 544e extending vertically inside the recessed portions 544c at both ends, an effect assisting wall 544f projecting toward the front in the vertical center of the main body portion 544a, Stopper portions 544g projecting toward the rear surface are mainly provided at both left and right ends of the recessed portion 544b.

The recessed portion 544 b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the expansion stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 . Therefore, the width of the inner side surface of the concave portion 544b is formed slightly larger than the width dimension of the elastic stopper 524. As shown in FIG.

The recessed portions 544c on both ends are portions for accommodating protrusions into which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. As a result, the protrusions in which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed can be guided from the outside.

The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion that is accommodated in the guide rail portions 542c and 543c of the guide members 542 and 543, respectively. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 can be prevented from wobbling with respect to the slide plate 544 .

The slide rod 544e is a cylindrical rod inserted through the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. As shown in FIG. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 are slidably formed in the direction in which the slide rod 544e extends (vertical direction in FIG. 26).

The effect assisting portion 544f is a portion that is brought into contact with the rear hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 to move the decorative member 548 when the telescopic effect device 540 is in the extended state. Thereby, the appearance of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be changed.

The stopper portion 544g is a portion that abuts against the extension stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 and defines the vertical movement end of the slide plate 544. As shown in FIG.

Slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini-rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotating plate 520 , and the other end opposite to the one end is fastened and fixed to the concave portion 544 b of the slide plate 544 .

The front plate member 546 is a presentation part that can be visually recognized by the player, and includes a plate-shaped main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 when viewed from the front, and It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b that protrudes in accordance with the formation position of the fastening hole 541f, and a pair of shaft support portions 546c that protrude from the upper end portion of the main body portion 546a toward the back side.

The fastening portion 546b is a portion for fixing the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

The shaft support portion 546c is a portion that slidably supports the connecting slide member 547. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support portion 546c is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the long sliding hole 547b of the connecting sliding member 547. As shown in FIG.

The connecting sliding member 547 has a main body portion 547a formed in a plate shape, a pair of sliding elongated holes 547b formed in an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction and bored in the front-rear direction, and bored in the vertical direction. A pair of insertion holes 547c are mainly provided.

The sliding elongated hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is formed slightly larger than that of the pivot portion 546c. A collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is fastened and fixed to the tip of the shaft supporting portion 546c, so that the connecting sliding member 547 is pivotally supported by the front plate member 546 so that it cannot be pulled out. be. The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

The decorative member 548 includes a main body portion 548a which is formed in a plate shape and to which the connecting sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front hanging portion 548b which is formed to hang downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a. and a rear hanging portion 548c formed by hanging downward on the rear side of the .

When the connecting sliding member 547 moves with respect to the front plate member 546, the front hanging portion 548b covers the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and is visually recognized apart from the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43). 37) can be formed. As a result, the appearance of the stretchable effect member 540 can be changed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The rear hanging portion 548c is a portion that abuts against the production auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 due to the expansion and contraction operation of the expansion and contraction production device 540. is moved relative to the front plate member 546 .

Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, description will be made. The rotating arm member 550 includes a main body portion 551 formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 drilled in one end of the main body portion 551 in the front-rear direction, and the shaft support hole 552 being adjacent to the shaft support hole 552 . An irregularly-shaped long hole 553, which is a special-shaped bottomed long hole, is formed on the back side of the main body 551, and the other end opposite to the one end is formed on the front side. An arc-shaped hole 554, which is an arc-shaped elongated hole with a bottom, is protruded toward the rear side in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 552 of the body portion 551, and the tip thereof is bent into a hook shape, and the other arm portion of the torsion spring 517a is engaged. It mainly includes a locking portion 555 that is engaged.

The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole through which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 , so that the rotating arm member 550 can rotate around the third shaft portion 517 .

The deformed long hole 553 is a portion through which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed long hole 553 will be described later.

The arcuate hole 554 is a long hole through which the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 554 is formed slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 541b. In addition, the arc formed by the arc-shaped hole 554 matches the arc formed by the protrusion 541b when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is swung about the first shaft 512 in the expanded state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). ).

In addition, the arc-shaped hole 554 is open at the tip of the other end of the rotating arm member 550 and has a tip portion 554a that widens at the tip.

The second driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force to rotate the rotating crank member 570 , and is inserted through a driving motor 561 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510 . and a drive gear 562 that is axially rotated by a drive motor 561 .

The drive gear 562 meshes with transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotating crank member 570 . Accordingly, when the driving gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

The rotating crank member 570 is a member that transmits a driving force to the rotating arm member 550. The rotating crank member 570 has a ring-shaped body portion 571 pivotally supported by the second shaft portion 515, and the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 571 is engraved. A transmission gear tooth 572 provided, a regulating head portion 573 formed in a manner to cover the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572, and the center of the main body portion 571 are located eccentrically and protrude toward the front side. It mainly includes a projecting portion 574 and a lid portion 575 formed with a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the main body portion 571 and fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft portion 515 .

The transmission gear tooth 572 meshes with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 . Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor 561 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 570 .

The restriction head portion 573 prevents the drive gear 532 from being displaced toward the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572 . As a result, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear teeth 572 can be optimized.

The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion that is inserted through the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 . That is, the relationship between the sliding projection 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550 determines whether or not the driving force is transmitted.

The lid portion 575 is a portion for arranging the main body portion 571 on the base member 510 so that it cannot be pulled out.

28 to 31, the relationship between the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. First, referring to FIGS. 28(a) and 29(a), the shape of the deformed long hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described.

28(a) and 29(a) are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. FIG. Note that FIG. 28(a) illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 29(a) illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position. 28(a) and 29(a), the deformed long hole 553 and the sliding protrusion 574 are shown by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 are shown by imaginary lines. be done.

As shown in FIG. 28( a ), when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and the straight line of the rotating crank member 570 An upward perpendicular state is formed in which the straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the shaft support hole 552 is perpendicular to each other.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the extended position, the straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574 and the rotating crank member 570 and a straight line connecting the rotation axis of and the shaft support hole 552 are perpendicular to each other. Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise in a front view from the downward orthogonal state described above.

The deformed elongated hole 553 includes a transmission groove portion 553a to which the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 by the movement of the sliding projection portion 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. 553b and a second non-transmission wall portion 553c connected from the lower end of the transmission groove portion 553a, and a selection wall portion 553d connecting the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Prepare.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the transmission groove portion 553a is a concave groove extending linearly to the left from the sliding projection portion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove portion 553a is formed with a length that allows the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 to move from the upward perpendicular state to the downward perpendicular state, and the formation width of the inner peripheral surface thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. formed large. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550 while the sliding protrusion 574 moves in the transmission groove 553a.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding projection about the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in the upward orthogonal state. It is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574 . That is, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in front view from the upward orthogonal state, the rotary crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotary arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotary crank member 570 is transferred to the rotary arm. Not transmitted to member 550 .

Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 28(a)), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b moves. The direction is toward the axis of rotation of the pivot crank member 570 . Therefore, when the sliding projection 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b, the load applied to the sliding projection 574 due to the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is reduced by the rotation of the rotating crank member 570. directed to the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the second non-transmission wall portion 553c extends from the lower wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position. It is a wall formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding protrusion 574 centering on the rotation axis of the member 570 . That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the downward perpendicular state (the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 29A), The rotating crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550 .

It should be noted that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. be done. Therefore, when the sliding projection 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 29(b)), the load applied to the sliding projection 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550 is directed toward the axis of rotation of the pivot crank member 570 . Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

The selection wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed of a smooth curved surface that connects the right end portion of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b in front view and the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c in front view. It is formed above the curve extending from the transmission wall portion 553b.

The selection wall portion 553d is arranged to face the right portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed in such a manner that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c increases toward the left end portion of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), the sliding protrusion 574 crosses the first non-transmission wall portion 553b to the second non-transmission wall portion 553b. In the margin D (see FIG. 32(b)) before reaching the wall portion 553c, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and rotation is not restricted. In other words, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is not restricted by the sliding protrusion 574 either.

The right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is It is formed to intersect the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the forming angle between the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the amount of swinging of the rotating arm member 550 necessary to correspond to the amount of change changes. That is, when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other and the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is , the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding projection 574 and the right end of the second non-transmitting wall 553c are in contact with each other. Therefore, depending on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall portion 553c or along the selection wall portion 553d, the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 550 with respect to the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is determined. You can change the speed.

Returning to FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, description will be made. 28 to 31 are front views of the pivoting arm member 550 and the pivoting crank member 570 illustrating the swinging of the pivoting arm member 550 and the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 in chronological order. In FIG. 28(a), the upward orthogonal state described above is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), and in FIGS. Rotating states are shown in order, the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the turning crank member 570 are shown with hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 are shown with imaginary lines. .

In FIGS. 28 to 31, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is detected by a position detection sensor (not shown) in its vertical expansion/contraction posture, and stops swinging in that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, the swinging of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is prevented by the resistance between it and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25).

In the state shown in FIG. 28(a), the rotating crank member 570 is perpendicular to the upward direction. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position vertically downward by a distance h1 from the protrusion 541b. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state, the projection 541b is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 28(a) (rotated counterclockwise by angle T1 from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a))), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2<h1) (FIG. 28(b)). ) see). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) to the counterclockwise angle T2 (T2≈180 degrees>T1 )), the sliding projection 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553 (transmission area), enters the area facing the second non-transmission wall 553c, and the projection 541 moves to the reference position. It reaches a state where it is arranged at a position vertically above the horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3<h2) (see FIG. 29(a)). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28(c), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (rotated counterclockwise from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) by an angle T3 (T3>T2). 29(b), the sliding projection 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 29(b) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

29(a) and 29(b), when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the sliding projection 574 is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 to move toward the second position. It is pushed by the non-transmitting wall portion 553c. In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, thereby restricting the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b).

Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. However, if the performance speed of the rotating arm member 550 is set to a high speed just before reaching the extended position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is reduced. If it is slowed down, the performance effect cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated to the state of FIG. 29(b) without being stopped in the state of FIG. The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state of FIG. 29(a) (the protrusion 541 can be stopped at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3). As a result, the speed of the rotary crank member 570 is maintained until the rotary arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotary crank member 570 changes from the state shown in FIG. 29(a) to the state shown in FIG. 29(b). 570 can be slowed down. Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, it is possible to improve both the performance effect of the rotating arm member 550 and the durability of the second driving device 560 .

From the state of FIG. 29(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) to the counterclockwise angle T4 (T4≈270 degrees>T3 )), the sliding protrusion 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed long hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 30(a) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

That is, while the rotary crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. maintained. In this embodiment, the length for which the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protrusion 541b is maintained in the same position is set to the period during which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn. It need not be limited to that. The length over which the front plate member 546 remains in the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553. FIG. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than in the present embodiment, the length of the front plate member 546 that continues to be arranged in the lower position can be made longer than in the present embodiment.

From the state of FIG. 30(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (rotated counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)) by an angle T5 (T5>T4). ), the sliding projection 574 pushes up the selection wall portion 553d of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the projection 541 is arranged at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2>h3). (See FIG. 30(b)). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ).

That is, when the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the selection wall portion 553d and the sliding projection portion 574 are brought into contact with each other, so that the rotating arm member Driving force is transmitted to 550 (transmission area).

From the state of FIG. 30(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (rotated counterclockwise from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) by an angle T6 (T6>T5). ), the sliding protrusion 574 enters the region facing the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b of the deformed long hole 553, and the protrusion 541 moves vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1>h2). A spaced position is reached (see FIG. 31). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ).

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. The state of 28(a) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region).

When rotating the rotating arm member 550 counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. . In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, thereby restricting the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG.

Here, as a method for stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 31, stopping the rotating crank member 570 is conceivable. However, if the performance speed of the rotating arm member 550 is made high until just before reaching the retracted position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 slows down. If you set it to , you will not be able to improve the performance effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotating crank member 570 to the state of FIG. can be done. As a result, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member 570 is decelerated from the state shown in FIG. 31 to the state shown in FIG. 28(a). can be made Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, it is possible to achieve both an improvement in the effect of the telescopic effect device 540 interlocked with the rotating arm member 550 and an improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560 .

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotary crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotary arm member 550 can be reciprocated from the retracted position to the extended position.

28 to 31, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b is aligned with the reference horizontal line in half the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position separated by a distance h1 vertically above O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3<h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained vertically above the reference horizontal line O for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation period, and the protrusion 541b is maintained at the position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 during the subsequent 1/4 period of the rotation period. is vertically moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1>h3). As a result, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction) can be doubled.

Here, in the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), and the rotating arm member 550 extends. In the position, the pivot arm member 550 and the pivot crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal state (see FIG. 29(a)). From the state of FIG. 29(a), the downward orthogonal state can be formed by rotating the turning crank member 570 clockwise by a predetermined amount.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by half (180 degrees) in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotary arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the extended position (from FIG. 28(a) to FIG. 29(a) ) can be made equivalent to the time required for swinging from the extended position to the retracted position (see FIG. 29(a) through FIG. 31 to FIG. 28(a)).

32 to 35, the relationship between the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 illustrating the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in chronological order. 32 to 35 illustrate a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines and extend and contract. The front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the effect device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In FIG. 32(a), the upward orthogonal state described above is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), and in FIGS. The states in which the member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount are illustrated in chronological order.

In the state shown in FIG. 32(a), the rotating crank member 570 is perpendicular to the upward direction. In this case, the projecting portion 541b is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 32(a) (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a))), the sliding The projecting portion 574 moves through the area facing the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 32(b). During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When rotating the rotating arm member 550 counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 32(b), the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, so that the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. be. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 32(b).

From the state of FIG. 32(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12>T11). 33(a), the sliding projection 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the deformed long hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, in the margin D between the state of FIG. driving force is not transmitted to (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h4 (h4<h1).

From the state of FIG. 33(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13>T12). ), and as shown in FIG. 33(b), the sliding protrusion 574 abuts against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 which swings downward under the action of gravity. be. That is, from the state of FIG. 33(b) to the state of FIG. 34(a), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). In the state of FIG. 33(b), the projecting portion 541 is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h5 (h5<h4).

From the state of FIG. 33(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 32(a)) clockwise by an angle T14 (T14≈90 degrees>T13). is rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is housed in the right end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3. The state (see FIG. 34(a)) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is brought into contact with the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

Here, the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32(b) to 34(a) and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. Although the rotating direction of the moving crank member 570 is different, the rotating region (phase) of the rotating crank member 570 is the same.

In this case, in the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. While the surfaces are not in contact, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (non-transmitting region). , the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

Therefore, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed depending on the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 . As a result, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, it is possible to form two effects of the rotating arm member 550. FIG.

That is, in this embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIG. 32(a) and FIG. When rotated, the rotating arm member 550 swings in a free fall dependent on gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 (non-transmission area). On the other hand, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the rotary arm member 550 is swung at a speed dependent on the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 (transmission area).

As a result, even when the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 is constant, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, the rotary crank member 570 can be rotated in the same phase. Variations in the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

Further, since the variation in the swing speed of the rotating arm member 550 is increased by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (formation of the clearance portion D), the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed. It is possible to eliminate the need for other members such as a changeover switch for changing, and reduce the member cost.

In this embodiment, the allowance D is formed on the pivot hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, compared to the case where the clearance portion D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotating shaft of the turning crank member 570, the sliding protrusion 574 can move through the clearance portion D for a predetermined distance. The downward movement distance of the protrusion 541b can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to conspicuously change the operation of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed while suppressing the formation range of the allowance portion D of the rotating crank member 570 .

From the state of FIG. 34(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15>T14). ), the sliding protrusion 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 34(b) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. pushed. In this case, since the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 34(b).

From the state of FIG. 34(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 32(a)) clockwise by an angle T16 (T16≈180 degrees>T15). 35(a), the sliding protrusion 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 35(a) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

From the state of FIG. 35(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17>T16). ), the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2>h3) (FIG. 35 (b)) is reached. That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

Here, when the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 and the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 are always interlocked, it is difficult to shift the start timings of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 . . Therefore, when starting the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550, it is necessary to generate a large force corresponding to the rigidity of the force that overcomes the inertia of each member. Therefore, a driving device with a large driving force is required, and there is a risk that the driving device will become large.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the start timings of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 34(b) to the state shown in FIG. 35(a), only the rotary crank member 570 is rotated until the state shown in FIG. 35(a) reaches the state shown in FIG. 35(b). By interlocking with the rotating crank member 570, the rotating arm member 550 can be started.

As a result, since the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used to start the rotating arm member 550, the driving force required for the second driving device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the size of the second driving device 560 can be reduced.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35(b), the sliding projection 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a to reach the state shown in FIG. 32(a). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From these facts, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. It is moved downward from a position separated by a distance h1 vertically above the horizontal line O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3<h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained vertically above the reference horizontal line O for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation period by a distance h3. It is moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1>h3). As a result, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction) can be doubled.

Further, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially accelerated by gravitational acceleration when moving downward, while the speed always follows the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570 when moving upward. be done. As a result, the mode of speed change of the protrusion 541b (extension effect device 540) can be changed according to the moving direction of the protrusion 541b (extension effect device 540).

With reference to FIG. 36, the change in the distance of the protrusion 541b (extension effect device 540) from the reference horizontal line O when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise will be described.

FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28(a)). In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the horizontal axis indicates the swing angle increasing rightward from the upper orthogonal state of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) as the left end, and the vertical axis indicates the swing angle. shows the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b.

In FIG. 36, the curve CC1 indicates the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise, and the distance when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise is indicated by the curve CC1. A curve CW1 indicates the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the projection 541b. Curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusion 541b shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, respectively. A curve CC2, which is obtained by horizontally reversing the curve CC1, is illustrated by an imaginary line. By comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, as described above, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the upward and downward speeds of the protrusion 541b moved vertically by the rotating arm member 550 can be changed. can be done.

As a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise, the sliding protrusion 574 does not rotate until it contacts the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)). A dashed line indicates the case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) is arranged at the retracted position as a curved line CW2. Note that this corresponds to the case where the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) for swinging the rotating arm member 550 upward is set to be large. In this case, the period during which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position can be made longer.

In the curves CC1 and CW1, in the angular range N1 in which the distance of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) from the horizontal reference line O remains unchanged, the turning crank member 570 and the turning arm member 550 ( (see FIG. 28(a)), a non-transmission region is formed in which the driving force is not transmitted. The width of the angular range N1 can be adjusted by adjusting the width of the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)).

In addition, on the curve CW1, the angle until the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) abuts on the deformed long hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) In the range N2, a non-transmission region is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 where the driving force is not transmitted. In addition, the width of this angular range N2 can be adjusted by the formation width of the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28(a)).

As shown in FIG. 36, between the angle T11 and the angle T14 and the angle T4 and the angle T6 where the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) is arranged in the same phase, the curve The shapes of CW1 and the curve CC1 are different (the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 obtained by horizontally reversing the curve CC1 do not overlap).

That is, when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) rotates between the angle T4 and the angle T6 so as to lift the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)), the angle 11 to angle T14, the curve is gentler than that in the case where the rotating crank member 570 rotates in such a manner that the rotating arm member 550 is pushed down.

This is because the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28(a)) abuts the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553 on the curve CW1 and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) 28(a)) is rotated, and at curve CC1, the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the selection wall portion 553d (see FIG. 28(a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. It depends.

Returning to FIG. 28(a), description will be made. As described above, in the deformed elongated hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small). The right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is formed to intersect the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the forming angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1. be.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the amount of swinging of the rotating arm member 550 necessary to correspond to the amount of change changes. That is, when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other and the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is , the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding projection 574 and the right end of the second non-transmitting wall 553c are in contact with each other.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, depending on the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, the rotary crank member 570 may be arranged in the same phase. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

Although FIGS. 28 to 35 illustrate the case where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in one direction, it is also possible to reverse the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 halfway. The timing for reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is the state in which the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b (for example, FIG. 28(a), FIG. 31, FIG. 32(a)). and FIG. 32(b), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), or a state where the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (for example, FIG. 29(a), 29(b), 34(b) and 35(a), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position).

In this case, since the rotating arm member 550 is not in contact with the rotating crank member 570 in the rotating direction, the resistance applied from the rotating arm member 550 to the rotating crank member 570 when the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed is reduced. can be suppressed. Further, in this embodiment, a position detection sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position and the state in which it is arranged in the extended position. It is possible to facilitate the control of reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 when the moving arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position or the extended position.

By reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the variation of the reciprocating motion of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction can be increased.

For example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 28(a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated half a turn counterclockwise (see FIG. 29(a)), and then rotated. A case in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position is exemplified by reversing the direction of rotation of the moving crank member 570 and rotating it clockwise by half a turn (see FIG. 28(a)). That is, this is the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 .

In this case, the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 moves from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 during half the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570 to a distance h3 (h3<h1) from the reference horizontal line O. ) moves down to a position separated by ). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) from 0 degrees to 180 degrees on the horizontal axis. Next, the projecting portion 541b extends from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1>h3) from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation period of the rotary crank member 570. move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis extending from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

As a result, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 moves downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and moves upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). can be the same as the period of

Further, for example, from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 32(a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise by 1/4 turn (see FIG. 34(a)). Next, the direction of rotation of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, and the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position by rotating the rotating crank member 570 counterclockwise by 1/4 turn (FIG. 32). (a)). That is, this is the case where the sliding protrusion 574 moves on the side where it approaches the shaft support hole 552 .

In this case, the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 moves from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 during a quarter of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570 to a distance h3 (h3) from the reference horizontal line O. It moves downward to a position spaced apart by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along a curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) from 0 degrees to 90 degrees on the horizontal axis. Next, the projecting portion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1>h3) from a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a period of 1/4 of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up to position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis extending from 270 degrees to 360 degrees.

Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3), and is moved upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The moving period can be the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened compared to the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 .

Further, when the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves downward, it can be partially free-falled (from the angle T11 to the angle T13), while the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves upward. In that case, it is always moved at a speed along the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, even when the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the telescopic effect device 540 ( degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from angle T11 to angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

Next, the difference in swing angle due to the difference in the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state will be described.

37-39 are front views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 37 to 39 illustrate the case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the expanded position). 37 shows a state in which the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and FIG. A state in which the projection 541 is moved counterclockwise is illustrated, and FIG. 39 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. 29(a). Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position spaced upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the locus of swinging of the protrusion 541b when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the stretched state is formed in an arc around the first shaft portion 512 and rotates. Along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554 of the arm member 550 . In other words, the arcuate hole 554 extends along the swing locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 is not arranged to face the swing direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arc-shaped hole 554 does not work as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the swinging of the rotating plate 520 is regulated. That is, the rotating plate 520 can swing until it abuts against the third stopper portion 518c. The protrusion 541b can swing until it abuts against the stopper portion 518b, and the protrusion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ2 when viewed from the front.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39 , when the protrusion 541b is swung leftward in front view at the swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 . In this case, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is moved in the expansion/contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550, and the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arc-shaped hole 554, which may cause malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the protrusion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the first lifting fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 are connected to the rotating arm member. By disposing so as to be able to engage with 550, the projection 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned. That is, it is possible to prevent the expansion/contraction effect device 540 from moving in the expansion/contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550 .

As a result, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the problem that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. FIG. As a result, the arrangement area of the rotating arm member 550 can be suppressed, and the arrangement area of other movable members can be secured accordingly. Moreover, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

Further, when the rotating arm member 550 swings in a state in which the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 shifts, and the protrusion 541b becomes circular. It becomes difficult to return to the arcuate hole 554, and malfunction may occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding protrusion 574 abuts against the deformed elongated hole 553, thereby preventing the pivoting arm member 550 from swinging (see FIG. 39).

In addition, the movement trajectory of the point farthest from the rotation axis of the sliding projection 574 (the point farthest from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 that contacts the sliding projection 574. (see FIG. 39), the rotating crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the attitude of the rotating arm member 550.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 29(a)). )), the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554 before the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the state shown in FIG. think of. After the projecting portion 541b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554, even if the rotating crank member 570 is further rotated and the rotating arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. However, there is no malfunction such that the magnetic tape cannot be returned to the arcuate hole 554 .

In this case, when swinging the rotating arm member 550 and the telescopic effect device 540 respectively, the rotating crank member 570 is controlled to stop or start according to the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554. It is not necessary and rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 can continue. In other words, it is only the timing of swinging of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 that needs to be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the control burden of the complicated operation of swinging the telescopic effect device 540 and the rotating arm member 550 at different timings.

In addition, in this embodiment, a proboscis portion 554a that widens the width of the arc-shaped hole 554 toward the opening end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 39) of the arc-shaped hole 554 is formed. As a result, positional deviation (positional deviation in the direction of expansion and contraction of the expansion and contraction effect device 540) when the protrusion 541b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554 can be largely tolerated, and the first raising fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be ensured.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state between the expanded state and the contracted state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in the extended state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arc-shaped hole 554, and the expansion/contraction effect Device 540 forms an intermediate state.

40-42 are front views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 40 to 42 illustrate a case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (a case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged between the extended position and the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the locus of swinging of the protrusion 541b changes depending on the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction.

40 shows a state in which the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and FIG. 42 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state in FIG. 40 .

The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the upward movement of the arc-shaped hole 554 due to the pivoting arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arc-shaped hole 554 has both the function of changing the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b and the function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546, as will be described later. As a result, it is possible to consolidate functions.

As shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state have a radius of curvature are the same on the upper side, but the radii of curvature and postures are different from each other. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 intersect at the forming angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arcuate hole 554 acts as a stopper to stop the swinging of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). .

As shown in FIG. 41 , when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the protrusion 541 b does not contact the circular arc hole 554 . That is, since the rotating plate 520 is allowed to swing until it abuts against the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b is allowed to swing up to a swing angle θ3 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (angle θ3= angle θ1).

As shown in FIG. 42 , when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise in front view, the projection 541b is brought into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554 . In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e abuts against the upper side surface of the rotating arm member 550, and the state change of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction is prevented. movement is stopped.

That is, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it abuts against the third stopper portion 518c, and the projection 541b is swung clockwise up to a swing angle θ4 (angle θ4<angle θ2). . Therefore, the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction. Thus, by varying the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540, the variation of the swing angle of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be increased. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e abuts on the body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550. As shown in FIG.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arc-shaped hole 554, and the expansion/contraction effect Device 540 creates a contracted state.

43-45 are front views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 43 to 45 illustrate the case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing trajectory of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the locus of swinging of the protrusion 541b changes depending on the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction.

43 shows a state in which the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and FIG. A state in which the projection 541 is moved counterclockwise is illustrated, and FIG. 45 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 28(a). Therefore, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the upward movement of the arc-shaped hole 554 due to the pivoting arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both the function of changing the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b and the function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546 together. As a result, it is possible to consolidate functions.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 are different from each other. The central axis of the radius of curvature is reversed. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is below the protrusion 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arcuate hole 554 is arranged above the arcuate hole 554. FIG. In this case, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 intersect at a forming angle α2 (angle α2>angle α1), and the arcuate hole 554 acts as a stopper to stop the swinging of the protrusion 541b ( 44 and 45).

As shown in FIG. 44 , when the rotary plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the second stopper surface 554c of the arcuate hole 554 . In this case, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the projecting portion 541b can swing counterclockwise up to a swing angle θ5 when viewed from the front. (angle θ5<angle θ1=angle θ3).

As shown in FIG. 45 , when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise in front view, the projection 541b is brought into contact with the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554 . In this case, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ6 when viewed from the front (angle θ6<angle θ4 <Angle θ2). Therefore, the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction. Thereby, the variation of the swing width of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be increased.

Here, the formation angle α2 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 in the reduced state is formed to be larger than the formation angle α1 between the movement locus of the projection 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 in the intermediate state. be.

In the relationship between the swing locus of the projection 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the projection 541b is swung across the arc-shaped hole 554. is minimized. On the other hand, regarding the relationship between the swing locus of the projection 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 0 degrees (see FIGS. , and the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is maximized. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1<formation angle α2 ).

As described above, the expansion and contraction state of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is changed, so that the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b is changed. The stopper surface 554 c and the third stopper surface 554 d) function as stoppers that regulate the swing angle of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 . As a result, the inner circumferential surface of the arcuate hole 554 can also be used as a portion for regulating the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is different. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the space for arranging the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b.

Further, the stopper that regulates the swinging angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by arranging the rotating arm member 550 at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where a fixed stopper is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81, the stopper remains on the front surface of the third pattern display device 81 even when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position. can be prevented. As a result, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, other members can be arranged on the front surface of the third pattern display device 81. The overhang space of the support member 720) can be secured.

In addition, the circular arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 functions as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 540, and the second drive of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 by swinging the rotation arm member 550. and a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion and contraction effect device 540 to perform an expansion and contraction operation. As a result, functions can be consolidated and the number of parts can be reduced.

The tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. FIG. The tilting operation unit 600 is a unit that swings (tilts) the effect member 620 (see FIG. 12), and the sliding operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilting operation unit 600 in the horizontal direction. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700. FIG. 46 and 47 illustrate a state in which the support members 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700 are arranged at the retracted position.

48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. FIG. 48 and 49, the tilting unit 600 is not disassembled for easy understanding.

The slide operation unit 700 has a base member 710 formed in the shape of a plate elongated in the left-right direction, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 with one end fastened and fixed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. a support member 720, a slide rail 730 having one end fastened and fixed to the support member 720 and the other end to which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed so as to be vertically extendable; A connecting member 740 formed slidably on the rear rail portion 716 of the main body portion 710 and pivotally supported by the pivotal support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a driving force for moving the support member 720 in the left-right direction are generated. It mainly includes a driving device 750 and a rear cover member 760 formed on the rear side of the driving device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710 .

The base member 710 is a member that forms the skeleton of the slide operation unit 700, and includes a slide plate 711 formed to be slidable in the left-right direction and to which the support member 720 is fastened and fixed from the rear side, and a rear view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 having a circular cross-section and being recessed in the lower left portion for supporting the fixed shaft portion 753a, and a shaft support hole having an elongated recess shape extending in the left-right direction at the lower right portion of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear. 712 and a slide shaft support hole 713 in which a moving shaft portion 754a is slidably supported, and a locking portion 725 of a support member 720 formed to be vertically swingable by a solenoid. a lever member 714 for restricting the movement of the base member 710; a front rail portion 715 protruding from the upper end portion of the base member 710 toward the front side in a downward arc shape in cross section and on which the upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740 rolls; A rear rail portion 716 is mainly provided in the rail portion 715 so as to be recessed from the rear side so as to have an arcuate cross section and through which the insertion plate portion 741b of the connecting member 740 is inserted.

Since the lever member 714 restricts the lateral sliding movement of the strut member 720 fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711, the driving force of the driving device 750 when maintaining the tilting operation unit 600 at the retracted position is not required. can be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting motion unit 600 is moved along the forming direction (arc track) of the front rail portion 715 and the rear rail portion 716, the support member 720 connected to the tilting motion unit 600 can move left and right. Sliding movement in the direction can occur under the action of gravity loaded on the tilting motion unit 600 . For example, when the tilting motion unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting motion unit 600 is oriented obliquely downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715 . Therefore, even if the movement direction of the support member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the lateral direction along the movement direction of the slide plate 711, the support member 720 may be moved by gravity. In this embodiment, when the lever member 714 is swung downward, it engages with the engaging portion 725 of the support member 720, and the lateral movement of the support member 720 is restricted. is unnecessary, the strut member 720 can be maintained at the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

The strut member 720 includes a main body portion 721 formed in a plate shape elongated in the vertical direction, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 which is continuously connected to the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 in the left-right direction and drilled in the front-rear direction. A first fastening portion 722 through which a screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted, and a second fastening portion that is vertically connected to the left end portion of the main body portion 721 in the front view and drilled in the front-rear direction to fasten and fix the slide rail 730. 723 and a slide hole 724 which is an elongated hole extending in a direction parallel to the continuous direction of the second fastening portion 723 and which is formed on the right side of the main body portion 721 when viewed from the front; A hook-shaped engaging portion 725 that protrudes upward from the lower end portion and engages with the lever member 714, and a lower cover portion that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main body portion 721 and in which the belt 755 of the driving device 750 is sandwiched between the main body portion 721 and the main body portion 721. 726, a rolling portion 727 protruding from the back side of the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 and formed to roll on the inner peripheral surface of the slide concave portion 764 of the back cover member 760; and a coil spring 728 that hangs downward and forward and is connected to the hooked portion 617 of the base member 610 at its lower end.

The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support member 720 so as to extend and contract in the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723 .

The slide hole 724 is an elongated hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723, and is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can prevent the vertical movement of the tilting operation unit 600 from shifting in the horizontal direction (relative rotation of the tilting operation unit 600 with respect to the support member 720).

The lower lid portion 726 has a tooth profile extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile has a shape that meshes with the tooth profile formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 of the driving device 750 . Thereby, it is possible to suppress the strut member 720 from slipping on the belt 755 of the driving device 750 .

The rolling portion 727 is inserted into the slide concave portion 764 of the back cover 760 so as to be able to roll, thereby suppressing frictional resistance and suppressing tilting in the front-rear direction around the lower end portion of the support member 720 . be able to.

The coil spring 728 is a biasing force that moves the tilting motion unit 600 upward. Since the biasing force from the coil spring 728 is constantly applied to the tilting motion unit 600, the tilting motion unit 600 is prevented from falling downward due to gravity.

The connecting member 740 is pivotally supported by a triangular plate-like main body member 741 rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and by a rolling shaft 741c projecting from the main body member 741. A pair of cylindrical upper rolling members 742 rolling on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. a front cover member 743 arranged in a manner such as a front rail portion 715; and a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 that is moved.

The main body member 741 is a member formed in a triangular plate shape, and has a circular recess formed in the upper end portion from the rear surface, and a shaft rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 . A support portion 741a, an insertion plate portion 741b which is a plate-like member protruding from the lower end portion toward the front side and is slidably inserted through the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710, and an insertion plate portion extending from the shaft support portion 741a. It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c projecting in a columnar shape toward the front side from positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular drawn to 741b, and on which the upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported.

Since the insertion plate portion 741 b is inserted through the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710 , the connecting member 740 is formed to be movable along the rear rail portion 716 . Therefore, the tilting unit 600 pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 741 a is also formed to be movable along the rear rail portion 716 .

The rolling shafts 741c are formed as a pair at positions symmetrical with respect to a vertical line drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c are brought into contact with the arc-shaped front rail portion 715 via the upper rolling portion 742, the load ( A force normal to the arc) passes through the pivot 741a. Therefore, the connecting member 740 can stably hold the pivotal support protrusion 612 of the tilting unit 600 .

The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 741 a and contacts the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 . That is, when the connecting member 740 slides along the front rail portion 715 , the upper rolling portion 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 . As a result, the frictional resistance generated when the connecting member 740 is slid can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slidable movement can be suppressed.

The lower rolling member 744 has its lower half rotatably fitted around the lower portion of the front cover member 743 and its upper end abuts against the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 . That is, when the connecting member 740 slides along the front rail portion 715 , the lower rolling portion 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 . As a result, the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 during the sliding movement can be reduced, and the driving force required for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

Thus, in this embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 , and the lower rolling member 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 . As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744 of the connecting member 740 while suppressing frictional resistance.

Here, the tilting motion unit 600 may tilt in the front-rear direction because the center of gravity is formed upward as described later. In this case, the connecting member 740 sandwiches the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744. , can generate resistance. This makes it easier to maintain the posture of the tilting motion unit 600 .

The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740 so that the upper rolling member 742 cannot be pulled out.

The driving device 750 includes a driving motor 751 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and generates a driving force for sliding the support member 720, a driving gear 752 pivotally supported by the driving motor 751, and A shaft fixed gear 753 meshed with a belt 755 wound thereon, and a shaft moving gear 754 spaced apart from the shaft fixed gear 753 and around which the belt 755 is wound and a rotary shaft 754a slidably formed. , a belt 755 wound around the fixed shaft gear 753 and the fixed shaft gear 754 and moved by the rotation of the fixed shaft gear 753, and a coil that generates an urging force to move the fixed shaft gear 754 away from the fixed shaft gear 753. and a spring 756 .

The fixed shaft gear 753 includes a fixed shaft portion 753a which is a cylindrical member serving as a rotating shaft and is inserted through the shaft support hole 712 of the base member 710 . In addition, the shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754 a which is a cylindrical member serving as a rotation shaft and is inserted through the slide shaft support hole 713 of the base member 710 .

The fixed shaft gear 753 and the movable shaft gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. The inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 is formed with a tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 . As a result, slippage between the belt 755 and the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the amount of rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755 .

One end of the coil spring 756 is fixed to a hook-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear, and the other end is fixed to a case that covers the axial movement gear 754. . As a result, an urging force can be generated to move the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft support hole 712 , and an appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755 , so that the belt 755 can move between the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 753 . Dropping off from the gear 754 can be prevented.

The rear cover member 760 is a member that covers the driving device 750 on the rear surface of the base member 710, and includes a main body portion 761 formed in a box shape with an open front side, and a fixed shaft portion 753a on the bottom surface of the main body portion 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a receiving recess, a moving recessed portion 763 that is a recess that extends in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and receives the moving shaft portion 754a, and a laterally extending portion that receives the rolling portion 727. and a slide recessed portion 764 which is a recess.

The slide recessed portion 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 rolls on its upper and lower inner surfaces. It suppresses the frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the support member 720 and suppresses the tilt of the support member 720 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the strut member 720 tilts in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 abuts against either the upper inner side surface or the lower inner side surface of the slide concave portion 764 . As a result, tilting of the strut member 720 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Next, the tilting motion unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600. FIG.

The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-shaped base member 610 fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, a box-shaped effect member 620 whose lower end is pivotably supported by the base member 610, A first driving device 630 that generates a driving force for swinging the effect member 620, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first driving device 630 to the effect member 620, and a contact with the transmission member 640 for transmission. It mainly includes a torsion spring 650 that generates a biasing force to move the member 640, and a second driving device 660 that generates driving force to open and close the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the effect member 620. .

The base member 610 includes a body portion 611 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape to which the slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed, and a columnar support portion of the connecting member 740 protruding from the front side of the body portion 611 . A shaft support projection 612 on which 741a is supported, and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the shaft support projection 612. and a first shaft support hole 613 formed vertically above the first shaft support hole 613, and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the first shaft support hole 613. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body 611 and inserted vertically slidably through the slide hole 724 of the support member 720, and an insertion hole through which the drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted. 616 and a hook-shaped hook-shaped portion 617 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 611 toward the back side.

The second shaft support hole 614 is provided with a lower receiving plate portion 614a projecting from the lower edge toward the front side with an arcuate cross section. The rotation of the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is guided by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. In addition, the lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed with a lateral width having a length substantially equal to the outer diameter of the tubular portion 642 (see FIG. 53(a)).

By inserting the auxiliary member 615 into the slide hole 724 , tilting of the base member 610 in the horizontal direction can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid in the vertical direction.

The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion on which one end of the coil spring 728 is hooked and a biasing force is applied.

The effect member 620 and the second driving device 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 52 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 620 and the second driving device 660. FIG. Note that the liquid crystal device arranged inside the effect member 620 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS.

The effect member 620 is a box-shaped member in which a liquid crystal device is arranged, and includes a rectangular plate-shaped body member 621 and a body member 621 extending forward from the top and bottom of the body member 621 so as to cover the body member 621. a bendable upper and lower cover member 622; left and right cover members 623, which are plate-shaped members attached from both sides of the upper and lower cover member 622 and form a rectangular box shape with an open front side together with the upper and lower cover member 622; A first curtain member 624 which is a member for opening and closing the opening and is connected to the fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 and moved, and a member for opening and closing the front opening together with the first curtain member 624 and being a member for opening and closing the front opening. It mainly includes a second curtain member 625 that is moved by being pulled by the curtain member 624, and a cylindrical swing shaft portion 626 that protrudes from the lower back surface of the main body member 621. ) is formed above (at a higher position) than the swing shaft portion 626 . The center of gravity position G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

The main body member 621 includes a columnar sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that is vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 and protrudes toward the rear side. The slide shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted through the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that accommodate the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the driving device 660. .

The left and right cover members 623 are provided with slide grooves 623a which are formed in the shape of grooves on the inner side surfaces and in which the slide projections 625c of the second curtain member 625 are slidable.

The slide groove 623a is connected to curved grooves formed in an arc shape at the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. As a result, the second curtain member 625 is slid along the shape of the slide groove 623a such that linear movement and curvilinear movement occur in sequence.

The first curtain member 624 is a member that swings vertically about the opening/closing shaft 664 of the second driving device 660. A fitting portion 624b that protrudes in the left-right direction from an end portion of the 624a and is fitted into a fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 so as not to rotate relative to the fitting portion 624b, and one end near the fitting portion 624b is a main body portion. A connecting member 624 c pivotally supported by 624 so as to be able to swing and having the other end connected to the connecting protrusion 625 b of the second curtain member 625 .

The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and moved in the vertical direction. A connecting protrusion 625b projecting in the left-right direction from an end portion and connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left-right cover member 623 projecting outward in the left-right direction from near the bent portion of the main body portion 625a. and a slide protrusion 625c inserted through the 623a.

The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 fastened and fixed to the back side of the production member 620, a drive gear 662 pivotally supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear meshed with the drive gear 662 to A pair of transmission gears 663 that rotate in opposite directions, and an opening/closing shaft that is inserted through the transmission gears 663 so as not to rotate relative to each other and is rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by a shaft support mechanism (not shown). 664 and transmission members 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of opening/closing shafts 664 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

The transmission member 665 has a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the first curtain member 624 swings up and down around the opening/closing shaft 664 .

Returning to FIGS. 50 and 51, description will be made. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 having a drive shaft inserted through an insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631 . , and a helical gear-shaped worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 .

The worm 632 is formed with a double thread. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, so the worm wheel 633 makes one rotation while the worm 632 makes ten rotations. As a result, the rotation angles of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be significantly reduced when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution.

The worm wheel 633 has a locking projection 633a that protrudes from the center of the rotation shaft, is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610, and is locked to the tubular portion 643 of the transmission member 640 so as not to rotate relative to it. Prepare. Structurally, the transmission of driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 actively rotates, the force 632). As a result, the load applied to the drive motor 631 when the worm wheel 633 is stopped can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped while the power of the drive motor 631 is turned off, so that the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53(a) and 53(b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 53(a) and 53(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and for the description of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650, refer to FIGS. 50 and 51 as appropriate. do. FIG. 53(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642. In this state, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 exerts a Balanced in the swinging direction. FIG. 53(b) shows a state in which the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise in a front view from the inverted state of FIG. 53(a) by a predetermined amount, and the effect member 620 is swung by a predetermined amount.

The transmission member 640 is a member that is swung by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50), and has a main body portion 641 that is formed in the shape of an elongated rectangular rod, and one end of the main body portion 641 that moves forward and backward. A cylindrical portion 642 extending in the axial direction and engaging the locking projection 633a of the first driving device 630, and a length extending in the axial radial direction of the cylindrical portion 642 at the other end of the body portion 641. Sliding holes 643 drilled as holes, contact portions 644 spaced apart on both sides of the body portion 641 in the swinging direction, and the contact portions 644 and the front side surface of the body portion 641 are connected. and a wide arcuate rear arcuate plate portion 646 connecting the abutting portion 644 and the back side surface of the body portion 641.

As shown in FIG. 53 , the abutting portion 644 , the front arcuate plate portion 645 and the rear arcuate plate portion 646 are arranged in a manner surrounding the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the torsion spring 650 from dropping (separating) from the transmission member 640 .

The cylindrical portion 642 is pivotally supported in the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked to the locking projection 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first driving device 630 so as not to rotate relatively. be.

The sliding shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is inserted through the sliding hole 643 . Accordingly, when the transmission member 640 is swung about the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is moved. is slid through the slide hole 643 (slid in the axial radial direction), the effect member 620 is swung about the first shaft support hole 613 .

By swinging the effect member 620 in this way, it is possible to suppress the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the driving motor 631 is rotated in the minimum unit of the control resolution of the driving device. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method of directly connecting a gear to the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor to the gear is also conceivable. However, in this case, the angle P0 (see FIG. 53(a)), which is the minimum unit of control resolution, is shown larger than the actual angle P0 for ease of understanding. The movement amount X1 by which the center of gravity of the effect member 620 shifts in the left-right direction from the inverted state increases as the center of gravity of the effect member 620 moves away from the swing shaft portion 626 when rotated in the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the more the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is separated from the swing shaft portion 626 , the more difficult it becomes to adjust the position of the center of gravity of the effect member 620 . It becomes difficult to stop the effect member 620 in the state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the production member 620 is connected to the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620 . The length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the cylindrical portion 642, which is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640, is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626, which is the swing shaft of the effect member 620. formed short compared to .

Therefore, even if the effect member 620 is elongated in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the minimum unit angle P0 (see FIG. In order to do so, it is possible to suppress the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity of the effect member 620 when the driving device is operated at an angle several times larger than the actual angle P0. Therefore, the movable member can be easily stopped in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the first axis.

In addition, as a method for swinging the production member 620, gear teeth are formed on the production member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear meshing with the gear teeth is rotated by a drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 is conceivable. However, in this case, the greater the swing range of the effect member 620, the larger the range in which the gear teeth on the arc are formed in the lateral direction of the effect member 620 is required. Therefore, when the effect member 620 is formed in a narrow shape in the swinging direction, the gear teeth on the circular arc protrude from the effect member 620, which interferes with the effect of the effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 has a cylindrical portion 642 that is a swing shaft and a swing shaft portion 626 that is a swing shaft of the effect member 620 . , and is connected to the swing shaft portion 621a at the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Since the production member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 with respect to the swing range of the production member 620 can be suppressed near the center of the production member 620 in the left-right direction. As a result, even if the effect member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 640 from protruding from the effect member 620, and the design flexibility of the effect member 620 can be improved.

The lower surface of the sliding shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 . As a result, the weight of the effect member 620 is applied not only to the swing shaft portion 626 but also to the transmission member 640 . That is, the force opposing the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the swing shaft portion 626 but also from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 . Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported at two points, the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, and the radial force applied to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be suppressed. .

Here, since the inverted state shown in FIG. 53(a) is the normal state for the effect member 620, the transmission member 640 is swung and after the predetermined amount of swinging from the inverted state, it can quickly return to the inverted state. is desirable.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53(b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. is rocked at a rocking angle φ2 (φ2<φ1).

That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is made smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 that swings by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53(a)).

Further, in the present embodiment, an elongated slide hole 643 is formed in the axial radial direction of the transmission member 640, and the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted through the slide hole 643. As shown in FIG. The transmission member 640 and the production member 620 have different swing axes, and the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620. Therefore, the transmission member 640 As is oscillated, the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the oscillating shaft of the transmission member 640. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53(a)) is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state ( The arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in FIG. 54(b) is shortened.

That is, the arm length of the transmission member 640 is shortened as it approaches the inverted state. can be made smaller as it approaches the inverted state compared to the case of . Therefore, without changing the rotational speed of the drive motor 631, the operation speed of the production member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position, while the operation speed of the production member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the production member 620 is turned upside down. (It is possible to easily control the stop of the effect member 620 in a state in which the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is arranged vertically above the first shaft support hole 613).

Referring to FIG. 55, by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640, the effect member 620 swings with respect to the swing angle of the transfer member 640. A change in angle will be described.

FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53(a)). 55, the rotation axis M1 corresponds to the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53(a)) that is the rotation shaft of the effect member 620, and the rotation shaft M2 is the tubular portion 642 that is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53(a)). Straight lines a1 to a4 schematically represent the arrangement of transmission member 640, and are straight lines drawn radially from rotation axis M2. Straight line a1 passes through rotation axis M1, and straight lines a2 to a4 are straight lines a1 and is formed in such a manner that the formation angle of is sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angles formed by the adjacent straight lines a1 to a4 are 15 degrees each.

An arc drawn with a radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53(a)) centered on the rotation axis M2 is illustrated by arc SR1, and the arm length R2 centered on the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54(b)). A circular arc drawn with a radius equal to is illustrated by arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn centering on the rotation axis M1, and has a radius of the arm length R1 plus the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2.

These arcs assume loci of connecting positions between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53(a)). In the present embodiment, a sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53(a)) as a connecting position protrudes from the effect member 620, and the connecting position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. . In addition, when the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, a long hole is formed in the effect member 620 in the axial radial direction, and the transmission member 640 is connected to the hole. A case is assumed in which the shaft inserted through the long hole protrudes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P10, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P11, and the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P12. is illustrated.

Similarly, the intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P20, the intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P21, and the intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P22. The intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P30, the intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P31, and the intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P32. The intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P40, the intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P41, and the intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P42. The intersection point P10 and the intersection point P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection point P40 and the intersection point P42 are arranged at the same position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, an angle A10 forms an angle between a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P10 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21 is indicated by the angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P12 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 is indicated by the angle A12. be done.

Similarly, an angle A20 forms between a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30. The angle A21 forms the angle between the straight line passing through the axis of rotation M1 and the intersection point P22, and the angle A22 forms the angle between the straight line passing the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32. An angle A30 forms an angle between a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P40. and the angle A31 forms an angle A31, and the angle A32 forms an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P42. Note that these angles correspond to the swing angles of the effect member 620 .

Here, the ratio of (distance between rotation axis M1 and rotation axis M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is (1:2.32:2.54) in this embodiment. When the angles are actually measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 swings between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the production member 640 is the largest when the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected along the arc SR0. , the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR2 (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

Angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is It is less than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between angles A22 and A20 is smaller than the difference between angles A20 and A21 (angle A20 is closer to angle A22 than to angle A21).

Angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung from the straight line a2 to the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is It surpasses the case where the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between angles A12 and A10 is greater than the difference between angles A10 and A11 (angle A10 is closer to angle A11 than angle A12).

From these, by setting the trajectory of the connection position of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) to the arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 is swung at a constant speed, the effect member It can be seen that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. That is, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 is close to the angular velocity (high speed side) when the trajectory of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a1. The angular velocity at the time of arrangement can approach the angular velocity (low speed side) when the trajectory of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the circular arc SR1.

Also, when calculating the ratio of each angle, the ratio of angle A22/angle A32 is 0.98, and the ratio of angle A12/angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21/angle A31 is 0.98 and the angle A11/angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the trajectories of the connecting positions of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) are the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at a constant speed. In this case, the deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

On the other hand, the angle A20/angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10/angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the trajectory of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) is an arc SR0 (an arc centered on the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant speed. The deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when swung toward the state can be set to 3 to 5%. That is, compared to the case where the trajectories of the connecting positions are circular arcs SR1 and SR2 (circular arcs centered on the rotation axis M2), the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 contacts the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so the force of the gravity G of the effect member 620 acts as the swing axis. It is applied vertically downward to the portion 626 and the cylindrical portion 642 . Therefore, since the gravity of the effect member 620 does not generate a force component in the direction of swinging the effect member 620, even if the power of the first driving device 630 is cut off, the attitude of the effect member 620 can be maintained in an inverted state. can be done. Thereby, durability improvement of the 1st drive device 630 can be aimed at.

In addition, since the force due to the gravity G of the effect member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, the rotational resistance of the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be increased. , the attitude of the production member 620 in the inverted state can be easily maintained.

The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring that generates an urging force in the direction of unwinding the coil portion 651 (the direction of pushing back the transmission member 640) as the transmission member 640 swings. A coil portion 651 wound around, an urging arm portion 652 extending along both side surfaces of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 in the swinging direction, an end portion of the coil portion 651 and an end portion of the urging arm portion 652. and a connecting arm portion 653 that connects between the tubular portion 642 and the swing shaft portion 626 .

The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter approximately three times as large as the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 . Therefore, when the urging arm portion 652 is swung and a load that causes the coil portion 651 to shrink in diameter is generated, the amount of deformation of the coil portion 651 can be secured, and the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 are deformed. can be suppressed from concentrating on

The urging arm portion 652 is surrounded by the body portion 641 , the contact portion 644 , the front arc plate portion 645 and the rear arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the biasing arm portion 652 from dropping (separating) from the transmission member 640 .

In addition, the biasing arm portion 652 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the plane on which the transmission member 640 swings. Therefore, a biasing force pushing back the transmission member 640 is generated from the biasing arm portion 652 arranged in the swinging direction of the transmission member 640, and the biasing arm portion arranged on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640 is generated. 652 is prevented from moving by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. Thereby, the torsion spring 650 is formed to be able to generate a biasing force in the direction of pushing back the transmission member 640 regardless of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640 .

A bent portion 653 a bent to the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed at the connecting portion of the biasing arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 . In this case, as will be described later, the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650, thereby extending the bent portion 653a (see FIG. 54(b)). As a result, the contact position between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes farther from the cylindrical portion 642, and the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 is increased. can be done.

Referring to FIG. 54, changes in the urging force generated by torsion spring 650 to push back transmission member 640 will be described. 54(a) and 54(b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 54(a) and 54(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIG. refer.

54A, the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 54(b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 54(a), and the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled. An extended state is illustrated.

In the state of FIG. 54( a ), a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated in the biasing arm 652 on the left side of the torsion spring 650 when viewed from the front. This biasing force is the sum of the biasing force originating from the coil portion 651 and the biasing force originating from the bent portion 653a.

That is, in the state of FIG. 53B, the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the left bent portion 653a in the front view of the pair of bent portions 653a. At the portion 652 , only the biasing force originating from the coil portion 651 is generated as the biasing force for pushing back the transmission member 640 .

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54(a), in addition to the biasing force originating from the coil portion 651, the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 originating from the bent portion 653a also generates a biasing force. Therefore, the spring constant of the biasing arm portion 652 can be increased. The deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a is shorter than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so that the unit deformation amount of the transmission member 640 is reduced. The urging force generated by hitting can be made larger.

In the state of FIG. 54(b), the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pushed by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640, so that the angle formed by the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 is widened. As a result, the contact position length L1, which is the distance between the contact position of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 and the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the cylindrical portion 642 in the state of FIG. 54(b), the contact position length L2 is separated from the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640, as compared with FIG. That is, the contact position length is extended. As a result, the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is lengthened, so that the moment loaded from the torsion spring 650 to the transmission member 640 can be increased.

Therefore, for example, when the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially the same between the state of FIG. 54(a) and the state of FIG. the moment applied can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to push back the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 .

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 pushing back the transmission member 640 is small as long as the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (effect member 620) from the retracted position is small, and is large when the swing angle is large. Indeed, it is elastically increased, and is increased more than the elastic increment from the state of FIG. 54(a). Therefore, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 required when the effect member 620 is set to the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54(b)) is determined, the torsion spring only elastically increases , the biasing force can be set smaller when the swing angle is small (a soft spring can be used).

As a result, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the operating speed of the production member 620 at the start of swinging is decelerated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 650, and it is possible to speed up the operating speed of the production member 620 at the start of the operation. .

54(a) as a boundary, the biasing force is increased by an amount equal to or more than the elastic increment. The deceleration acceleration of the production member 620 can be increased. As a result, the timing to start decelerating the production member 620 can be delayed between the swinging motions of the production member 620 . Therefore, it is possible to increase the swing angle at which the production member 620 is swung in a high-speed state, and the production effect of the tilting motion unit 600 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 56, the sliding motions of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700 will be described. 56 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. FIG. In FIG. 56, the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position is illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 56, a connecting member 740 connecting the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700, which are formed to be slidable in the vertical direction, is formed to be movable in the extension direction of the front rail portion 715. . Here, since the weight of the tilting motion unit 600 is applied to the connecting member 740, when the tilting motion unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position, the tilting motion unit 600 moves along the front rail portion 715 due to the force of gravity. urged in the direction of Therefore, it is conceivable to fix the driving device 750 in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 at the retracted position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be vertically swingable, and when the lever member 714 is swung downward, it engages with the locking portion 725 of the support member 720 to move the support member 720 left and right. Sliding movement in the direction is restricted.

As a result, it is possible to mechanically maintain the tilting motion unit 600 at the retracted position. It can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

By swinging the lever member 714 upward and operating the driving device 750 from the state in which the tilting motion unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position, the support member 720 can be moved, and the tilting motion unit 600 can move in the left-right direction. can be slid to

As shown in FIG. 56 , when the tilting motion unit 600 is placed at the retracted position in an inverted state, the shaft support portion 741 a of the connecting member 740 is placed vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting motion unit 600 .

Here, since the direction of sliding movement of the tilting motion unit 600 is along the front rail portion 715, in FIG. always has a vertical component.

Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting motion unit 600 and the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 are misaligned in the vertical direction, a load may be applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting motion unit 600 . This is the same when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid in the opposite direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the pivot 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied from the connecting member 740 to the tilting motion unit 600 and the center of gravity G Formed on the same line. As a result, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the coupling member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting motion unit 600 , and stabilize the posture of the tilting motion unit 600 .

Next, referring to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of tilting motion unit 600 on the sliding motion of sliding motion unit 700 will be described. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. FIG. Note that FIG. 57 illustrates a state in which the effect member 620 of the tilting motion unit 600 is swung to the state of FIG. 54(b).

As shown in FIG. 57 , when the effect member 620 is swung counterclockwise in front view, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged on the left side of the connecting member 740 in front view. Therefore, the leftward acceleration in the front view applied to the connecting member 740 is increased.

In this case, the drive force required to slide the tilting unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, so the drive motor 751 of the drive device 750 can be downsized.

Next, a tilting motion unit 2600 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the contact surface of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface. 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641a that abuts against the tip portion of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

58(a), 58(b) and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. 58(a), 58(b) and 59, the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 58(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 58(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 58(a). 59 shows a state in which the transmission member 2640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front, and the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip portion of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. In FIG. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise in front view from the state in FIG. 58(b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58(a)), the body portion 2641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, causing the body portion 2641 to move. A torsion spring 650 generates an urging force for swinging in the direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 swings and the urging arm portion 652 is deformed, the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced and deformed by the connecting arm portion 653 connected to the urging arm portion 652 on the deformed side. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the biasing force for swinging the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the contact position ( The tip position of the urging arm portion 652 ) is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 2640 . That is, the more the transmission member 2640 is oscillated, the more the distal end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 is moved toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641 (the side closer to the slide hole 643).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the distal end portion of the biasing arm portion 642, when the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise in the front view. , the urging arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the distal end side of the body portion 2641 by the abutting portion 2641a.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung in a state where the movement of the transfer arm portion 642 is restricted by the contact portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, the base side (bending portion 653a side) of the biasing arm portion 642 is moved downward by the amount that the biasing arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the tip side of the body portion 2641 . As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction of reducing the diameter of the coil portion 651 (the direction in which the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 increases).

That is, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state of FIG. 59 can be increased compared to the case without the abutting portion 2641a. As a result, the degree of change in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (increase rate of the biasing force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) can be increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 compared to the state shown in FIG. can be done. Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased. By increasing the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 non-linearly (more than the elastic change), it is possible to obtain a sufficient biasing force to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state.

Next, a tilting operation unit 3600 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In the first embodiment, the contact surface of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width. 3641 has an inclined side surface 3641a on the side surface that contacts the tip of the torsion spring 650 in such a manner that it becomes wider toward the tip side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

60(a) and 60(b) are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. 60(a) and 60(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 60(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 60(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 60(a). A state in which the transmission member 3640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)), the main body portion 3641 is pressed against the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is pushed. A torsion spring 650 generates an urging force for swinging in the direction of returning to the inverted state.

When the transmission member 3640 swings from the state shown in FIG. 60(a) to the state shown in FIG. , the contact position between the body portion 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the biasing arm portion 652 (the tip position of the biasing arm portion 652) is changed by the swinging motion of the transmission member 3640. FIG. That is, as the swinging angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)) increases, the tip of the biasing arm 652 moves toward the tip of the main body 3641 (the side closer to the slide hole 643). ).

Therefore, the tip portion of the biasing arm portion 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641 a of the main body portion 3641 . That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 undergoes deformation due to the width of the transmission member 3640 being expanded by the inclined side surface 3641a in addition to the deformation caused by the swing angle of the transmission member 3640. . In this case, since the width of the transmission member 3640 increases toward the distal end of the transmission member 3640, the greater the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)), the more the inclined side surface 3641a. The deformation of the torsion spring 650 due to the expansion of the width of the transmission member 3640 is increased. Therefore, as the swing angle of transmission member 3640 increases, the rate of increase in the biasing force generated by torsion spring 650 (change in biasing force of torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of transmission member 3640) can be increased.

Next, a tilting operation unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described. A moving abutment member 4647 having a width shorter than that of the portion 644 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 61(a) is a rear perspective view of a transmission member 4640 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61(b) is a rear perspective view of a moving contact member 4647. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 61(a), illustration of the moving contact member 4647 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the front circular arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645a which are arranged symmetrically at intervals shorter than the intervals at which the contact portions 644 are arranged and which are drilled in the front-rear direction. Prepare. The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of rear projections 4647b of the movable contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), the moving contact member 4647 includes a main body portion 4647a formed in a long plate shape, and a pair of rear projections protruding from both ends of the main body portion 4647a to the rear side. It mainly includes a portion 4647b and a front projection portion 4647c projecting from approximately the center of the main body portion 4647 toward the front side in a hemispherical shape.

One end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front projection 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (FIGS. 62(c) and 641b). See FIG. 62(d)). In order to facilitate understanding, illustration of the coil spring 4648 is omitted in FIGS. 61(a), 61(b), 62(a) and 62(b).

The rear protrusion 4647b is a portion that is inserted through the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640 from the front side. possible length) is projected. In addition, the rear protrusion 4647b is formed to be inclined at an angle that makes contact with the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 in a plane (line) (see FIG. 64(b)). As a result, the load applied to the biasing arm 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) compared to the case where the biasing arm 652 and the rear protrusion 4647b are in contact with each other at a point, and the biasing arm 652 durability can be improved.

The front protrusion 4647c is a portion of the production member 4620 that contacts the body member 4621 (see FIG. 63). It is moved away from the front circular arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62(c)), or the moving contact member 4647 approaches the front circular arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62(d)). Since the tip of the front protrusion 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, the front protrusion 4647c can be easily lifted onto the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

62(a) and 62(b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62(c) and 62(d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. FIG. 62(a) and 62(c), the state in which the moving contact member 4647 is separated from the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is shown in FIGS. 62(b) and 62(d). 4647 is shown in close proximity to the front arc plate portion 4645, respectively.

FIG. 63 is a schematic front view of the main body member 4621 of the production member 4620. FIG. The transmission member 4640 forming an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is in the center state 4640C. The clockwise rocking state 4640R as seen from the front is illustrated by imaginary lines. Also, in the center state 4640C, the counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and the clockwise swing state 4640R, the illustration of the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 4645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 is omitted for easy understanding. .

The body member 4621 has a clearance opening 4621a drilled in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the escape opening 4621a is a region where the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in a front view (center state 4640C and counterclockwise swing). 4640L).

When the front protrusion 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps the relief opening 4621a in a front view, the front protrusion 4647c is inserted into the relief opening 4621a, and the moving contact member 4647 is moved by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648 to move the transmission member 4640. body portion 641 (see FIG. 62(c)). On the other hand, when the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap with the relief opening 4621a (overlaps with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c contacts the side surface of the main body member 4621 of the production member 4620 on the back side, and the moving contact member 4647 is brought close to the body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62(d)).

That is, the rear protrusion 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the urging arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise in front view from the inverted state. be Therefore, when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the inverted state as viewed from the front, the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated more than when it is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It is possible to increase the rate of increase in the biasing force applied (the degree of increase in the biasing force with respect to the swing angle).

64(a) and 64(b) are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 64(a) and 64(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and for ease of understanding, the main body portion 4647a of the moving contact member 4647 is shown. Illustration is omitted. 64(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 64(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 64(a). A state is illustrated in which the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise by a predetermined amount from the front view, and the biasing arm 652 on the left side in the front view is in contact with the rear protrusion 4647b.

As shown in FIG. 64B, while the swinging angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, it is possible to contact the biasing arm portion 652 from the side opposite to the body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640 (contact portion 644 side). By doing so, it is possible to increase the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in front view.

As a result, the biasing force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front is improved while the starting speed when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front is increased. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect member 4620 from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210 .

That is, when the tilting operation unit 4600 is arranged at the retracted position and the effect member 4620 is turned upside down, the inner surface of the rear case 210 is brought close to the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, if the production member 4620 is vigorously swung from the counterclockwise swung state (see FIG. 57) toward the inverted state, the production member 4620 cannot be decelerated, and the back case 210 There is a risk that the effect member 4620 will collide with the inner surface of the.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear protrusion 4647b projects (see FIG. 62(d)) at the timing when the production member 4620 swings clockwise from the inverted state, and the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is released. can be increased. As a result, the effect member 4620 is sufficiently moved when the effect member 4620 is tilted clockwise when viewed from the inverted state while maintaining a high operating speed when the effect member 4620 is tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the inverted state. can be slowed down to

In addition, the rear projection 4647b is pushed back at the point of contact between the rear projection 4647b arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 4640 in the swinging direction and the biasing arm 652 (counterclockwise in FIG. 64(b) when viewed from the front). ) exerts a biasing force. As a result, compared to the case where the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 (the right side in FIG. 64(b)), the transmission member 4640 is pushed back with a greater biasing force. can be pushed back. On the other hand, it is also possible to improve the biasing force generated by the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the contact portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652, which are arranged on the side opposite to the side close to the transmission member 4640, abuts to the lower receiving plate portion 614a. , the distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is short. In this case, it is easy to move the bent portion 653a by the force from the contact portion 644 with the lower receiving plate portion 614 as the fulcrum, but the reverse is difficult (there is a difference in the distance from the fulcrum to the point of action). because there is).

Therefore, the biasing force generated by the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side in the front view caused by the contact between the contact portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652 is generated by the deformation of the torsion spring 650 as a whole. That is, when the urging arm portion 652 on the left side in front view and the rear projection portion 4647b are brought into contact with each other, the bending portion 653a on the left side in front view is bent to the left side in front view (the inner diameter of the coil portion 651) with the lower receiving plate portion 641a as a fulcrum. ) causes deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the biasing arm portion 652 on the right side in front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 is deformed to reduce the inner diameter, a biasing force is generated in the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 toward the side of increasing the inner diameter of the coil portion 651. The biasing force of the biasing arm portion 652 on the rocking direction side of 4640 to push back the transmission member 640 can be improved.

Next, a compound action unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. FIG.

In the first embodiment, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position, the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. However, in the rotating arm member 5550 of the fifth embodiment, the non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is provided with a recessed portion 5556 that is recessed in the direction away from the rotating crank member 570 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

65 to 68 are front views of a compound action unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. 65, the state in which the rotating arm member 5550 is arranged at the extended position and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged near the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is shown in FIG. 65, the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the first concave portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c. However, in FIG. 67, the state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state in FIG. A state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the two recessed portions 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is illustrated. be.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68 , the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c of the compound action unit 5550 has a recessed portion 5556 recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570. As shown in FIGS.

The recessed portion 5556 has an arc-shaped first wall portion 5556a (approximately 1/4 of the circular shape) formed on the left side when viewed from the front, and an arc-shaped (approximately 1/4 of the circular shape) formed on the right side when viewed from the front. and a second wall portion 5556b having a shape that allows the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 to slide. That is, the recessed depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is made equal to or less than the radius of the sliding protrusion 574, and the connecting portion between the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is smooth. Formed from a curved surface.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the turning crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the recessed portion 5556 that is the first from the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding projection portion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not rocked. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a. Crank member 570 creates a non-transmitting state.

66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved to the first recess from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c. It is pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the installation portion 5556, and the rotating arm member 5550 is again swung (pushed down) to the extended position. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the second wall portion 5556b is pushed and moved by the sliding projection portion 574, thereby swinging the rotating arm member 5550. The driving force of the second driving device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570 .

Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 Crank member 570 forms the transmission.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the turning crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the recessed portion 5556 second from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding projection portion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not rocked. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a. Crank member 570 creates a non-transmitting state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the sliding projection 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a in a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise. A non-transmitting state is formed between the moving crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550, and when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member are arranged. 5550 and a communication state is formed.

Note that if the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 are arranged to face each other. A non-transmitting state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b. be.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in this embodiment, the rotating arm member 5550 is moved between the retracted position (see FIG. 22) and the extended position without switching the swinging direction of the rotating crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion in which the swing arm member 5550 is swung between the two positions, the width of the swing arm member 5550 is small in the vicinity of the extended position (the lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between the position U1 and the position U2). A rocking rocking motion can be formed.

This makes it possible to cause the rotating arm member 5550 to swing, which is difficult to achieve by switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 . That is, it is also possible to cause the rotating arm member 5550 to perform a swing motion with a small width near the extended position by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the rocking motion depends on the switching speed of the driving direction of the driving device 560 . In addition, even if the driving direction of the driving device 560 is switched while the speed of the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the driving device 560 and the rotating arm member 5550 is large, and the driving direction cannot be switched instantaneously. , there is a possibility that the time required for switching the driving direction becomes long.

On the other hand, in the swinging operation of the rotating arm member 5550 in the vicinity of the protruded position in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, so the time required for switching the driving direction is unnecessary. can do.

Further, the operating speed of the clockwise swinging motion (upward swinging motion) of the rotating arm member 5550 depends on the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. The operating speed of the clockwise swinging motion (downward swinging motion) depends on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, by increasing the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570, the swinging speed of the rotating arm member 5550 near the extended position can be increased.

As a result, it is possible to achieve both an increase in the speed of the swing motion near the overhanging position of the swing arm member 5550 and a reduction in the switching time of the swing direction.

Next, a compound action unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the rotating arm member 550 of the compound action unit 500 is integrally molded, but the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting two members. . By relatively rocking the two members, the attitude of the arcuate hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

69(a) and 69(c) are partial front views of the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 6550 is a partial top view of arm member 6550. FIG. In addition, FIG. 69(a) illustrates a state in which the tip of the tip end swinging member 6556 is directed upward in the first posture, and FIG. The state in which the second orientation is formed is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to a main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end of the main body portion 6551. It mainly includes a tip end swinging member 6556 and a switching device 6590 that is fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the body portion 6551 and that switches the attitude of the tip end swinging member 6556 . An arc-shaped hole 6554 is formed in the tip end swinging member 6556 .

The main body portion 6551 has a pivot hole 6551 a drilled in the front-rear direction at the other end thereof and serving as the center of swing of the tip swing member 6556 .

The tip end swinging member 6556 is formed in such a manner that the end on the side connected to the main body portion 6551 sandwiches the main body portion 6551 in the front and rear, and a shaft support hole 6556a is drilled as the swing center of the tip end swinging member 6556. , a shaft support rod 6556b which is a bar material inserted through the shaft support hole 6556a thereof and the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip end swing member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arc-shaped hole 6554. and a sliding shaft 6556c that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the end of the part and is connected to the guide elongated hole 6591d of the switching device 6590.

The arcuate hole 6554 has a return portion 6554a projecting from the upper inner surface. The return portion 6554a is a portion that slides on the projection portion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect member 6540, and when sliding from the tip side of the arc-shaped hole 6554, resistance is suppressed, while sliding in the opposite direction. It is a left-right asymmetrical protrusion that increases the sliding resistance when it is moved.

70(a) and 70(b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. FIG. 70(a) shows a pushed-up state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70(b) shows a pushed-down state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down with respect to the switch member 6592. is illustrated. The pushed-up state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69(c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69(a).

The C-shaped member 6591 includes a long plate-shaped body portion 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which the moving columnar portion 6592a can be inserted is drilled in the center, and an inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the hole drilled in the body portion 6591a. A cylindrical guide portion 6591b, which protrudes in a cylindrical shape and has grooves formed on the inner peripheral surface thereof, extends downward from both ends of the main body portion 6591a in the longitudinal direction and is arranged to face the main body portion 6551 in the front-rear direction. and a guide elongated hole 6591d which is an elongated hole through which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip end swinging member 6556 is guided.

The grooving formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591b is for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the moving cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592. As shown in FIG. The C-shaped member 6591 is switched between a pushed-up state and a pushed-down state each time it is pushed in the direction of being pressed against the switch member 6592 by this groove processing. It should be noted that other members such as a spring member that forms the biasing force necessary to form the knock mechanism are not shown. 71).

The switch member 6592 includes a moving cylindrical portion 6592a having a protrusion protruding from the outer peripheral surface that is inserted into the cylindrical guiding portion 6591a and can move in a groove on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guiding portion 6591a. and a fixed plate portion 6592 b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 .

Here, in the knock mechanism, the relative positions in the axial direction are switched while the tubular member and the columnar member guided on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member rotate relative to each other. That is, if the cylindrical member and the columnar member do not rotate relative to each other, it becomes difficult to switch the relative positions in the axial direction.

On the other hand, the moving columnar portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is rotatably connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved toward the switch member 6592 (when pushed downward in FIG. 70(a)), the moving cylindrical portion 6592a can rotate relative to the cylindrical guide portion 6591b. and the knock mechanism works.

Therefore, the fixed plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591 can be switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state without relatively rotating. Therefore, it is possible to switch the state of the switching device 6590 between the push-up state and the push-down state while maintaining the state in which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip end swinging member 6556 is inserted through the guide elongated hole 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591. can.

71(a) and 71(b) are front views of the compound action unit 6500. FIG. FIG. 71(a) shows a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the extended position and the switching device 6590 is pushed up, and FIG. The device 6590 is shown depressed. In addition, in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is arranged at a position swung to the left end of the swingable range.

As shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), by switching the state of the switching device 6590 in a state where the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the extended position, the front view clock of the telescopic effect device 540 is changed. The maximum rotation angle can be switched.

That is, when the switching device 6590 forms the push-up state (see FIG. 71(a)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect member 6540 is brought into contact with the upper inner surface of the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 Swing angle is limited.

At this position, the inner side surface of the arc-shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as a stopper, and even when the swing speed of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be operated in the arrangement shown in FIG. 71(a). It can be stopped suddenly (the moving locus RI of the projecting portion 541b is brought into contact with the return portion 6554a).

On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms the depressed state (see FIG. 71(b)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arc-shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (the protrusion 541b The movement trajectory RI is not in contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the protrusion 541b is released from the tip 554a of the arc-shaped hole 6554 to the outside.

Therefore, the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 swings clockwise in front view until the rotary plate 520 contacts the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71(b)). At this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and even when the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 swings at a high speed, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be suddenly stopped.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) for effecting a sudden stop of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 by swinging the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 clockwise in a front view. variations can be increased. The state of the switching device 6590 is switched by swinging the expansion/contraction effect member 6540 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the tubular guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 moves from the upper right portion of the main body member 6541a to the right when viewed from the front. It is generated by being pushed by the push-in portion 6541a extending in the direction. Therefore, since the second driving device 560 that causes the expansion and contraction effect member 6540 to swing is also used as the driving device that swings the tip swinging member 6556, the number of driving devices to be provided can be reduced.

Further, in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the swinging range of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swinging member 6556. FIG. In this case, since the swing angle is slight, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change.

Here, when the rotating arm member 6550 can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 71), assuming that the swinging angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the rotating arm member 6550, Expectations for the operation of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 are diminished, and attention to the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the tip swing member 6556 swings at a small angle to change the swing angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540, making it difficult for the player to notice the change. can. As a result, expectations for the operation of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be enhanced, and the attention degree of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, an elongated slide hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640, and the effect member 620 is supported in the slide hole 643 so as to be guided. The tilting operation unit 7600 in the form has a shaft support hole 7643 formed at the end of the transmission member 7600 , and the effect member 620 is supported in the shaft support hole 7643 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

72(a) and 72(b) are front views of the tilting motion unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. 72(a) shows an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7643 of the transmission member 7640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. A state in which the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is illustrated. In FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the production member 620 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the rear side thereof are visible. , and the illustration of the torsion spring 650 and the pivotal support projection 612 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 72( a ), the base member 7610 has a slide hole 7613 drilled in the front-back direction vertically below the second pivot hole 614 of the main body 611 . The sliding hole 7613 is an elongated hole through which the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole is formed along the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is slidably supported in the slide hole 7613 .

The transmission member 7640 has a shaft support hole 7643 formed in the end opposite to the end of the main body 641 where the tubular portion 642 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a portion that swingably supports the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is drilled with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the slide shaft portion 621a.

The oscillating motion of the effect member 620 is caused by the transmission member 7640 oscillating about the second shaft support hole 614 due to the rotation of the driving motor 631 of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 51).

In this embodiment, the sliding shaft portion 621a is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 7643, so that when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 moves along the swing locus of the transmission member 7640. (the sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted through the slide hole 7613 , the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610 when the transmission member 7640 swings.

Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72(b), when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72<transmission swing angle φ72). dynamic angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is oscillated in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 , the oscillating angle of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than the oscillating angle of the transmission member 7640 . Thereby, the accuracy of adjustment of the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. explain.

A connecting line J1 illustrated in FIG. The imaginary connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and the swing shaft portion 626 is arranged above the slide hole 7613 from a line drawn in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641 through the tubular portion 642. This line is drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 72(a)). Note that the virtual angle φ73, which is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2, is the same as that of the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the slide hole 7613. This corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), the effect swing angle φ72 is smaller than the virtual angle φ73. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the amount of swinging of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be adjusted. can improve the accuracy of

<First control example>
Next, control examples in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 134. FIG. In the first control example, control processing (processing related to game control such as display effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described. In this control example, the display image that is used when the power is turned on is controlled so as to be corrected and used during normal presentation. As a result, since a common display image can be used when the power is turned on and when the normal presentation is performed, the capacity of the ROM can be saved.

In addition, in this control example, the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are used in the effect in which a specific role object (the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) and the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is moved. It is controlled to correct the contents of the production displayed in. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 becomes difficult to see, for example, the display content displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed on the sub-display device 690 in an effect in which a specific accessory moves. By doing so, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to visually recognize the display contents.

Furthermore, when the vertical movement unit 400 is moved and the door member 470 is opened, the opening/closing drive motor 466 that keeps the door member 470 closed is not excited when the door member 470 is dropped. It is controlled (energization stop control). Specifically, when excitation of all positions (A to D) of the opening/closing drive motor 466 is off (energization is stopped) (see FIG. 135(a)), the static torque of the opening/closing drive motor 466 (so-called , detent torque), that is, the torque for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized. In this case, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is moved in the falling direction, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force generated in the door member 470 . As a result, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force acting on the door member 470 when the door member 470 is dropped without driving the opening/closing drive motor, so power consumption can be reduced.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when a specific advance notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the winning hole during the time effect period which is periodically executed, the effect to be executed during the time effect period is restricted. controlled to do so. Thereby, when the countdown effect which is the specific advance notice effect is executed, the countdown effect executed during the time effect period can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is puzzled by the repeated countdown effect during the time effect period.

Further, the ball-entering effect displayed based on the ball entering the winning hole is displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the intervals at which game balls enter a winning hole are short, the period for displaying the ball-entering performance can be lengthened, and the player can easily visually recognize the ball-entering performance. be able to.

It should be noted that this control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of the above-described embodiments, or by combining the above-described embodiments. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example>
First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 73, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 102). Then, the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203 as appropriate. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In each of these areas, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is displayed in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. are stored respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 102).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and the RAM 203 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 75(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 If the value coincides with the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special It is divided into two types, one for the period when the pattern is in a high probability state. That is, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 75(a)) is composed of a first winning random number table for low probability and a first winning random number table for high probability. The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table 202a for special symbol low probability and the first winning random number table 202a for special symbol high probability are provided in ROM 202 of main controller 110. FIG.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there is one random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot when the probability of a special symbol is low. (See FIG. 75(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/400". In addition, since the total number of random numbers that become a small hit is 2, the probability that the first special symbol will become a small win is "2/400".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 10 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot. )). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 10 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/40". In addition, since the total number of random numbers that result in a small win is 1, the probability that the first special symbol will result in a small win is "1/400".

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the value provided in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75(b)). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39", the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) is selected, and when it is "40 to 79", the jackpot B (16R Time-saving jackpot) is selected, and when it is "80 to 99", jackpot C (2R probability variable with time-saving no jackpot) is selected.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot types set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75(b)) are set to three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, but not limited thereto, four types. The above jackpot types may be selected, or two types or less, for example, only one jackpot type may be selected. In addition, the types and ratios of the jackpot types selected for the special symbol 1 jackpot and the special symbol 2 jackpot may be set differently.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of reach, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. ” (for example, the range of 90-99) and “Completely out of reach” (for example, the range of 0-89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is used by the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is narrow, 0 to 79, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64. table is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 102), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 76) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. there is

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a large winning variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 76(b)) and a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 76(c)). and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 76(d)) are set at least. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a variation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

First, with reference to FIG. 76(b), the variation pattern table for big win 202d1 will be described. FIG. 76(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning is set. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as variation patterns of the jackpot. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value.

Specifically, for the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", for the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds ), “180 to 198” are set as determination values of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set is selected as a big hit. Select from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 76(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is loss is set. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", failure reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long failure (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, "0 to 149" for different normal reach (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for different super reach (60 seconds), and special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and obtains it from the lost (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 76(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be a deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description is continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. , is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 75(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is , If it matches the value of the random number set as the hit set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 75(d)), it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for when the probability of normal patterns is low (period in which normal patterns are normal), and when the probability of winning normal patterns is high than that of low probability (normal patterns) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 75(d), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and the opening period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the first winning hole 64 . A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 102).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, contents of ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 205c, and the variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

74, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. At least a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a variable probability flag 203g, a time saving medium counter 203h, a jackpot flag 203i, a counter buffer 203y, and other memory areas 203z. is doing.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is obtained in accordance with the starting winning, a jackpot lottery with original special symbols is started. Separately, from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3, various information obtained when the original lottery is conducted is predicted (estimated). In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) Prediction is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success/failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information to store the special symbol 1 or the Of the special symbols 2, the corresponding special symbols are stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins the starting prize, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning. , predict various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize. It should be noted that this prediction (prefetch) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the game state (normal game state or probability variable game state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . As a result, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbols corresponding to the starting prize.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a memory area dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), and the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1 ) is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203d reaches a maximum value of 4. are added (see S504 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 93).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 93 and S505 in FIG. 96). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the process of S510 in FIG. 96, and is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 93). In addition, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of holding variable display in special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 93, S511 in FIG. 96 reference).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See S804 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 98).

When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 99). S803: No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the variable probability flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). This variable probability flag 203g has an initial value set to off, and in the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R variable probability jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variable variable time short no jackpot) When it is determined that it is the end timing), it is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 95) and the special symbol 2 variation start processing (see FIG. 94) are referred to determine whether the game state is a variable state (S403 of FIG. 95, FIG. 94, S303), and is set to OFF when the next jackpot game is started (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 94, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 94, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the value is on, the second for high probability time Based on the per random number table 202a, while the special design lottery is performed, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, based on the first per random number table 202a for low probability time, the special design lottery is performed. will be

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern time saving state, and when the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols. This time-saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) is executed at the start timing of the ending effect (that is, the end timing of the jackpot game) by the jackpot control processing (of FIG. 103). S1215 reference). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is during the time saving in the normal symbol variation process (see S708 in FIG. 98), and in the special symbol variation process, it is decremented by one each time the variation time elapses. (See S222 in FIG. 93). In addition, when the value of the counter 203h during time saving is larger than 0 and the variable probability flag 203g is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state and time saving state of special symbols.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is turned on, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state by the jackpot control processing (FIG. 103, S1206) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. FIG.

The small hit flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit has occurred. When the small winning flag 203j is turned on, a small winning game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened by the big winning control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.例文帳に追加

The time saving flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state (ordinary symbol high probability state), and if the value of the time saving flag 203k is ON, the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol. If the value of the time saving flag 203k is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of normal symbols). The time saving flag 203g has an initial value set to OFF, and in the jackpot control process, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) (the end timing of the jackpot game) , is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, it is referred to determine whether the game state is a definite variable state in the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 95) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 94) (S403 in FIG. 95, FIG. 94, S303), and is set to OFF when the next jackpot game is started (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), both the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are set to ON, and the time saving game is given along with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the jackpot C (2R probability variable with short time no jackpot), although the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON, the time reduction flag 203k remains OFF, and only the probability variable game is given.

Here, in the probability variable game (variable probability state of special symbols), the probability that the lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 will be a big win is set to a high probability. Unless it is suggested that it is a probability variation game by changing the, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a probability variation game. On the other hand, in the time-saving game, since the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 are changed, it is easy to determine whether it is a normal game or a time-saving game. .

Therefore, if the player is given a time-saving game along with a probability-variable game based on the jackpot A (16R probability-variable big hit), it can easily recognize that it is a probability-variable game, but the player can easily recognize that it is a probability-variable game. Jackpot) when only the probability variation game is given based on, it becomes difficult to recognize that it is a probability variation game (so-called latent probability variation state). As a result, the player needs to guess whether the game state is normal game or variable probability game, and the interest of the player can be improved.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 102) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 100) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). The ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a ball-entering effect selection table 222b.

Since the variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, it will be briefly described. Based on the content (variation time, variation type (reach, loss, etc.)), more detailed variation contents are determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The ball-entering effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the effect contents of the ball-entering effect executed based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 during the time-saving game. This ball-entering effect selection table 222b defines the effect contents of the ball-entering effect to be executed based on the number of fluctuations until a big win is achieved. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the winning effect is selected based on the winning information and the winning effect selection table (see S2403 in FIG. 115).

As the types of ball entry effects, there are six types of ball entry effects from level 0 ball entry effects to level 5 ball entry effects. A performance is selected. As a result, the player can recognize the number of times until the big win (the degree of expectation of the big win) by determining the level of the ball-entering effect, and the player's interest can be improved.

The display image of the ball-entering effect in this control example includes a comment part (“Hurry up”, “Chance?”, etc.) and a level suggesting part (“star”) displayed corresponding to the level of the ball-entering effect. consists of In this comment section, a plurality of comments are defined corresponding to the level of the ball-entering effect, and are selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i. On the other hand, the level suggesting portion has a fixed number of "stars" corresponding to the level of the entering performance. For example, there are 0 "stars" in the level 0 notice effect (see FIG. 89(a)), 1 "star" in the level 1 notice effect, and 2 "stars" in the level 2 notice effect. is displayed (see FIG. 89(b)). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to determine the level of the ball-entering effect that is being executed for the player. On the other hand, in the comment part, comments selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i are displayed, so that the variation of the display image of the ball-entering effect can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. . It should be noted that the level suggesting part may not be provided, whereby the player needs to guess the level of the ball-entering effect from the display of the comment part, so it is possible to make the player interested in the ball-entering effect. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 78, detailed contents of the entering effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the entering effect selection table 222b. As described above, the entering effect selection table 222b defines the effect contents of the entering effect to be executed based on the number of fluctuations until a big win is achieved.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations to the big hit based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is greater than 4, that is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the level It is stipulated that the 0 ball entry effect is selected. In addition, when the number of fluctuations up to the big win based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is four times, that is, the lottery result of the big win of the second special symbol is stored in the fourth reserve of the winning information storage area 223a. In this case, it is stipulated that the level 1 ball-entering effect is selected.

Similarly, if the number of fluctuations up to the big win based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is 3 times, the level 2 ball entry effect is performed, and if it is 2 times, the level 3 ball entry effect is performed once. If , the level 4 ball entry effect is selected, and if it is 0 times (the variation results in a big win), the level 5 ball entry effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description is continued. FIG. 77(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a display area counter 223f, and an effect At least a time storage area 223g, an effect mode storage area 233h, an avoidance flag 233i, an effect counter 223j, a power-off flag 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1, first area to fourth area for special symbol 2), Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is the area number in the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 or the special pattern 2. The (first to fourth) areas are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) (variable display ), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 1 reserved in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 107). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 2 reserved in the main controller 110 is up to 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. With the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the number of reserved balls is added by entering the second winning hole 640, and the special symbol 1 different from the display of the reserved ball number pattern of the special symbol 1 on the third symbol display device 81 The only difference is that it is used to display the reserved ball number pattern of the pattern 2, and the other is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number counter 223 c in the small area Ds 1 of the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c synchronizes with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. , its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. It can be changed while Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on in the fluctuation pattern reception process executed when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 108), and the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 It is turned off when the setting is made (see S1802 in FIG. 109). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S1502) of the main processing (see FIG. 106), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 107), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S1807 in FIG. 109). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Also, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that the stop display of the variable effect is performed. is controlled.

The display area counter 223f selects the display area ( This is a counter used to determine the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d (see FIG. 89 or 90). This display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 when the sound lamp control device 113 is activated, and is repeatedly updated within the range of 1 to 4 in the ball-entering effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, but a ball-entering effect is displayed in the area of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the display area counter 223f. Specifically, when the display area counter 223f is 1, it is in the first area 81a of the third pattern display device 81, and when it is 2, it is 3 in the second area 81b of the third pattern display device 81. In the case of 4, control is performed so that the ball-entering effect is displayed in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and in the case of 4, in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81.

The presentation time storage area 223g is an area for storing the timing for performing time presentation, and based on the presentation time stored in the presentation time storage area 223g, the time presentation and the execution of the time presentation are performed at a specific time. A specific time production is executed. This effect time storage area 223g is set in the time setting process (see FIG. 105) of the start-up process executed when the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on. It is set for 24 hours.

The presentation mode storage area 223h is information for determining whether the current game state is a normal presentation period (presentation mode A), a time presentation period (presentation mode B), or an extended time presentation period (presentation mode C). is stored. As for the production mode, if the current production mode is the normal game period (outside the time production period), production mode A (normal production period) is stored, and if it is the time production period, production mode B (time production period) is stored. , if it is an extension time performance period, the performance mode C is stored.

The avoidance flag 223i is a flag used for determining whether or not the countdown time notice effect is executed in the time effect period (effect mode B). When the avoidance flag 223i is on, the time effect period (Production mode B) shows that the countdown notice production is executed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, and if it is off, the countdown time notice production is executed during the time production period (production mode B). is not executed. When the avoidance flag 223i is ON, the countdown notice effect is executed in the time effect period (effect mode B), so that the countdown effect of the specific time effect is controlled not to be executed. As a result, the countdown notice effect related to the second winning hole 640 and the countdown effect related to the specific time effect are not executed in duplicate, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

This avoidance flag 223i is set to ON when the advance notice effect is selected in the effect mode B (time effect period) in the advance notice selection process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109). (See S2007 in FIG. 111). And it is set to OFF when the variable production|presentation which performed the said announcement production|presentation is complete|finished.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selection of various effects (fluctuation patterns, advance notice effects, etc.), various lotteries, etc., in the sound lamp control device 113. to 198 (not shown).

When main controller 110 detects a power cutoff, a power cutoff command is sent to audio lamp control device 113, and when audio lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command, power cutoff flag 223y is turned on. The setting is made, and power-off processing is executed (S1519 in FIG. 106). Then, in the start-up processing (FIG. 104) of the audio lamp control device 113, if the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and data is read, and the power-off flag 223y is set off. (S1310 in FIG. 104). As a result, the game information saved by the data storage process at the time of power interruption can be reused by the data reading process in the start-up process at the time of power restoration, and the game information before the power interruption can be used again, and the game can be continued. can be done.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 107) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and the processing according to the command is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 79, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 116) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Furthermore, the NAND flash memory 234a is provided with a correction information table 234a3 (see FIG. 79). This correction information table 234a3 stores data for correcting the display coordinates of the main image, the variation image, and the title image when the power is turned on, which will be described later (see FIG. 80(b)). Although the details will be described later, at each effect timing of the game, the display position and the display magnification (enlargement rate) of the main image, the variable image, the title image, etc. at the time of power-on are corrected based on the information of this correction information table 234a3. will be displayed. As a result, it is possible to correct and use the main image, the variable image, the title image, etc. at the time of turning on the power at each effect timing. Therefore, the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

Here, the contents of the correction information table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the correction information table 234a3. The correction information table 234a3 is a table that stores correction information (display permission/inhibition, correction coordinates, enlargement ratio) of the power-on image in each effect.

Although the details will be described later, when the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example displays the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display image 81 and the sub-display device 690 as power-on images, respectively. , and the title image are displayed when the power is turned on. For these various power-on images, the display coordinates to be displayed when the power is turned on are determined. 690 (see FIG. 82).

Various power-on images displayed here are configured to be used (displayed) even in normal games after the power is turned on. The display coordinates and the like are set to be corrected and displayed based on the above. As for the information of the correction information table 234a3, when each effect is executed, the data of the correction information table 234a3 corresponding to the effect to be executed is stored in the correction information storage area 233m. The display control device 114 displays various power-on images based on the data stored in the correction information storage area 233m.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(b), various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) in each effect can be displayed (on or off). ), correction coordinates, and magnification information.

The correction information table 234a3 for normal effect is data stored in the correction information storage area 233m when the normal variable effect is executed. In this normal effect correction information table 234a3, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are set to OFF, and the power-on variation image is set to ON. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (-600, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to ×1 (same magnification). As a result, when the normal effect is executed, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed at the same size with the coordinates (0, 0) moved (-600, -450) from the initial position (600, 450) as the origin. The size is displayed (see FIGS. 82 and 83(a)). Note that the power-on main image and the power-on title image are not displayed because they are set to off.

The correction information table 234a3 for demonstration effect is data stored in the correction information storage area 233m when the demonstration effect is executed. In this demonstration effect correction information table 234a3, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are set to off, and the power-on title image is set to on. When the power is turned on, the correction amount of the coordinates of the title image is set to (-700, 0), and the enlargement ratio is set to x2 (two times). As a result, when the demonstration effect is executed, the title image at the time of power-on is doubled from the initial position (900, 100) with coordinates (200, 100) moved (-700, 0) as the origin. (See FIGS. 82 and 83(b)). Note that the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are not displayed because they are set to off.

The correction information table 234a3 for moving the stretchable role object is data stored in the correction information storage area 233m when the effect (stretchable role scenario) in which the stretchable effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves is executed. . In the correction information table 234a3 for moving the telescopic accessory, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are set to OFF, and the variation image at power-on is set to ON. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (200, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to ×1 (same magnification). As a result, when an effect in which the expandable accessory is movable is executed, the power-on variation image is moved from the initial position (600, 450) by (200, -450), with the coordinates (800, 0) as the origin. , are displayed in the same size (see FIG. 82). As a result, the power-on variation image is displayed on the sub-display device 690 . Note that the power-on main image and the power-on title image are not displayed because they are set to off.

The correction information table 234a3 for moving the tilting role object is data stored in the correction information storage area 233m when the effect (tilting role object scenario) in which the tilting effect device 540 is moved is executed. In the correction information table 234a3 for tilting accessory movement, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are set to OFF, and the power-on variation image is set to ON. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (-600, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to ×1 (same magnification). As a result, when an effect in which the stretchable accessory is movable is executed, the power-on variation image moves from the initial position (600, 450) to (-600, -450), and the coordinate (0, 0) is the origin. 82 and 83(a)). Note that the power-on main image and the power-on title image are not displayed because they are set to off.

In this way, it is possible to correct various power-on images and display them on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 according to the data of the correction information table 234a3 in accordance with various effects to be executed. As a result, it is possible to display a variable image or the like according to various effects without providing image data for displaying with various effects, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

It should be noted that corrections may be made such that the positions where various power-on images are displayed are moved in conjunction with the action of the character that is moved in each presentation. Specifically, the elapsed time in one presentation and the correction information for various power-on images are defined. As a result, for example, when an effect is executed in which the accessory moves from right to left, the moving image can be displayed while moving from left to right.

Also, when moving various power-on images, they may be moved back and forth between the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 . In this case, when an image is displayed across the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, the resolutions of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are different. is adjusted (converted) using a scaler (for example, a video scaler). This makes it possible to widen the range in which various power-on images can be moved.

Furthermore, correction information may be set so that various power-on images can be moved when the power is turned on. In this case, the correction information to be used when the power is turned on should be read together with the program in the first program storage area which is read first when the power is turned on. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on, a return-to-origin operation for moving various accessories to the origin position is executed. Therefore, there is a timing when the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 become difficult to see because various accessories are moved by the return-to-origin operation. Therefore, by correcting the display area of various power-on images according to the movable state of various roles, the game machine can be made such that various power-on images can be easily visually recognized even during the return-to-origin operation of various roles. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 87) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 118(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b, a third pattern area 235d, and a power-on title image area 235f.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by a player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image, and the power-on title image area 235f from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area. 235a, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 (see FIG. 116).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, the display areas of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 and the power-on image displayed in the display areas will be described. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display areas of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example includes a third symbol display device 81 and a sub-display device 690, and the display control device 114 performs control for displaying image data on these display devices.

Specifically, the display control device 114 handles image data having an area of 1200 horizontal pixels by 600 vertical pixels. Here, in the image data, the position of the upper left corner is (0, 0) and the position of the lower right corner is (1200, 600). In this case, the image data of the area from (0,0) to (800,600) is the area for the third pattern display device, and the image data of this area will be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Also, the image data in the area from (800, 0) to (1200, 300) is the sub-display device area, and the image data in this area will be displayed on the sub-display device 690. FIG. Furthermore, the image data of the remaining area from (800, 300) to (1200, 600) is an unused area, and the image data of this area is not used for display.

Thus, the display control device 114 in this control example treats the image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 as one image data, and according to the coordinates, the third pattern display device 81 It is changed whether to display on the sub-display device 690 or on the sub-display device 690 . This makes it easy to synchronize the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, and the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690. ) can be prevented from being misaligned. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 may be provided respectively.

Next, referring to FIG. 82, a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 by the display control device 114 when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on title image from the character 234 to the power-on title image area 235f. Next, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b, and then stored in the resident video RAM 235. The remaining image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . As a result, the display control device 114 first displays the power-on title image (see FIG. 82) on the sub display screen 690 using the image data stored in the power-on title image area 235g. Next, the third pattern display device 81 is caused to display the main image (see FIG. 82) when the power is turned on. While these displays are being performed, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Here, since the sub-display device 690 has a lower resolution than the third pattern display device 81, the data amount of the image displayed on the sub-display device 690 is the same as that of the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. less than the amount of data. Therefore, in the display control device 114, an image to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 with a small amount of image data (power-on title image) is first stored in the resident video RAM. to the image display can be shortened.

After that, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 receives the third symbol display device 81 The power-on fluctuation image with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen and the power-on fluctuation image with an "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are alternately repeated during the fluctuation period. is displayed (see FIGS. 82(b) and (c)). Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, and if it is ``a big hit with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is ``no special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed to stop the variable performance. It will be displayed for a certain period of time later.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Furthermore, by immediately displaying this power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display device 81, if the power supply is once cut off due to a power failure or the like during execution of the game and then restored, the game that was being executed before the power failure can be restored. Since the fluctuation or the result of the fluctuation can be immediately confirmed by a simple fluctuation performance, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

A simple character image or the like may be provided as the image displayed when the power is turned on, and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the performance even in the simple variable performance displayed when the power is turned on, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, the simple character image used here may be the character image used in the sub-display device 690 during normal rendering. As a result, character images with a small data capacity displayed on the sub-display device 690 can be shared and used without newly providing a simple character image. The transfer time of the image to the video RAM 235 for use can be shortened.

Furthermore, the images transferred to the resident video RAM 235 may be sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 . As a result, even in the simple performance executed from when the power is turned on until the normal game can be started, the variation of the performance can be sequentially increased, so that the player's interest can be improved. can be done.

Also, when transferring an image to the resident video RAM 235, the image is transferred so that the resolution is lowered by a known image compression technique, and then the image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is decompressed. may Then, when the compressed image is stored in the resident video RAM, the image may be displayed on the sub-display device 690 . As a result, even if the image is compressed to a low resolution, the sub-display device 690 with a low resolution can display the image without discomfort. can be shortened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, display screens during the normal effect and during the demonstration effect will be described. FIG. 83(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during a normal effect, and FIG. 83(b) is a display of the third symbol display device 81 during a demonstration effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed the screen typically.

During normal presentation, the display coordinates of the power-on fluctuation image are displayed with (-600, -450) based on a correction information table 234a3, which will be described later. Since the display coordinates of the power-on fluctuation image when the power is turned on are (600, 450), the power-on fluctuation image is displayed at the position (0, 0) during the normal effect (Fig. 83(a)). )reference). This power-on fluctuation image is used as an image showing the fluctuation result of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) during normal production.

Also, during the demonstration effect, the display coordinates of the title image at power-on are displayed with (-700, 0) based on a correction information table 234a3, which will be described later. Since the display position of the title image at power-on is (900, 100) when the power is turned on, the title image at power-on is displayed at the position (200, 100) during the demonstration effect (Fig. 83(b)). )reference).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device 81 changes. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by storing data corresponding to these characters in the character design area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing object buffer flag 233j, a correction information storage area 233m, a special effect correction flag 233n, a background image change flag 233p, and a effect mode flag 233r.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Or if it is one of the jackpot C, the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first prize winning port 64 is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is generated, and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second prize winning port. As it becomes easier to enter 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 85) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 87), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 86). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 86).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 86, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 86, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2505 in FIG. 116). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4805 in FIG. 132(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2801 in FIG. 118B). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2809 in FIG. 118(b) S2810) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S4701 in FIG. 132(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 132(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 57) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 87), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 87) describing image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 118(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 130) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 87), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing ( Each time step S2803 in FIG. 118B) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4307 in FIG. 128). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4913 in FIG. 133). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S4914 in FIG. 133). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 118B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The correction information storage area 233m is an area in which the information of the correction information table 234a3 described above is stored. The position information of the title image) is corrected and displayed. The value of the correction information storage area 233m is set to an initial value (no correction, each image type is ON) when the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on, and each power-on image is displayed at the initial position. Then, the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 is set according to the game state (displayed effect). For example, if the normal effect is being executed, the correction information table 234a3 for normal effect is set (see S4604 in FIG. 131).

The special effect correction flag 233n is a flag for determining whether or not it is time to execute the effect in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) and the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) are movable. When an effect in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) and the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is executed (when there is a telescopic role object scenario or a tilting object scenario), the corresponding role object The movable correction information (correction information for telescopic accessory movement, correction information for tilting accessory movement) is stored in the correction information storage area 233m and set to ON. Then, it is set to OFF when the effect in which the character object is movable is stopped. Here, since the front member 546 of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is moved to the front of the third pattern display device 81 when the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is moved, It becomes difficult to visually recognize the three-symbol display device 81 . In this case, by storing the correction information for moving the stretchable accessory in the correction information storage area 233m, the variation image can be displayed on the sub display device 690, so the above-described problem can be suppressed.

The back image change flag 233p is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. This back image change flag 233p is set to ON when a back image change command or an effect mode change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S4001 in FIG. 126(a)), and a normal image is transferred. It is referenced in the setting process (see S4909 in FIG. 133), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S4910 in FIG. 133). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The effect mode flag 233r is a flag that is set and referred to for determining the effect mode, and the rear image is changed based on the effect mode set in the effect mode flag 233r. This effect mode flag 233r is set based on the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4002 in FIG. 126(a)), based on the value of the set effect mode flag 233r, described later Back image data is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4911 in FIG. 133). Thereby, the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub display device 690 can be changed according to the effect mode set by the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90, the ball-entering effect executed during the time-saving game of this control example will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the ball-entering effect is executed. In the time-saving game in this control example, the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set to 0.125 seconds, and the symbol is stopped and displayed 0.475 seconds after the variation time elapses. That is, in the time-saving game in this control example, one variable effect executed based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole ends in 0.6 seconds. In this case, if the degree of expectation for the big win is displayed in one display area based on the execution of the variable performance, the variable performance will end in 0.6 seconds (that is, the degree of expectation for the big win will be displayed for 0.6 seconds). ), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win.

Therefore, in this control example, the ball-entering effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed in order in the four areas from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. While the ball-entering effect is displayed in the area 81a, the next ball-entering effect can be displayed in the second area 81b. This makes it possible to lengthen the display period of the ball-entering effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big win, and to provide a game machine that makes it easy for a player to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win, that is, to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

In addition, the ball-entering effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is also when the game ball enters the second winning hole 640 even when the holding of the second winning hole 640 is the upper limit (4 in this control example). (So-called, the ball-entering effect is displayed even at the time of overflow). As a result, even if the holding of the second winning hole 640 is the upper limit (4), it is possible to make the player want to continuously enter the game ball into the second winning hole 640, and the game is played. It can improve the interest of the person.

In addition, the ball entry performance that indicates the degree of expectation for a big hit is a performance corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit. Specifically, as will be described later, based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until a big win is achieved, control is performed so that a ball-entering effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win (a high-level ball-entering effect) is achieved. As a result, the level of the ball-entering effect gradually increases, so that the player can gradually have a premonition of the arrival of a big win, and the player's interest can be improved.

A specific description will be given with reference to FIG. First, after the jackpot game is over, the game state shifts to the time-saving game state, and if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4 during the jackpot game, the fluctuation is based on the oldest winning ball among the reserved balls. A variation 1 is initiated. Here, if the winning information of each reserved ball does not include the winning information of the jackpot, the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is greater than 4 (undecided). When there is a ball entry (lottery result is lost), a ball entry performance of level 0 is displayed in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4. (see FIG. 89(a)).

Then, when the variation 1 ends, the variation 2 based on the reserved balls is started, and the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3. When the second ball enters the second winning hole 640 (the lottery result is a big hit) during the execution of this variation 2, the number of remaining variations until the big win becomes 4, and the level 1 ball entry effect is the third. While being displayed in the second area 81b of the symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol changes to four.

Then, when the variation 2 is completed and the variation 3 based on the retained balls is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining variations until the big hit is reduced to 3. When the third ball enters the second winning hole 640 (the lottery result is lost) during the execution of variation 3, the level 2 ball entering effect is displayed in the third area 81c of the third pattern display device 81. (Refer to FIG. 89(b)), and the reserved design of the second special design changes to 4. Furthermore, when the fourth ball enters (overflows) into the second winning hole 640 during the execution of the variation 3, the level 2 ball entering effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d of the third display device 81. be.

Next, when the variation 3 ends and the variation 4 based on the retained balls is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining variations until the big hit decreases to 2. If no ball is entered into the second winning hole 640 during the execution of this variation 4, the variation 4 is finished as it is without displaying a new ball entry effect.

When the variation 4 ends, the variation 5 based on the retained balls is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the number of remaining variations until the big hit is reduced to 1. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 during execution of this variation 5, a level 4 ball entry effect is displayed in the first area 81a of the third display device 81 (see FIG. 90(a)). , The number of held balls of the second special symbol increases to 3.

When the variation 5 ends, the variation 6 based on the reserved ball of the winning prize information of the jackpot is started, the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is reduced to 0. do. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 during execution of this variation 6, a level 5 ball entry effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 90(b)). At the same time, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3. After that, when the fluctuation of the fluctuation 6 is completed, the jackpot game is executed.

Thus, in this control example, the type of ball-entering effect is changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations up to the big win. It is possible to recognize in advance that it will be, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, since the level of the ball-entering effect gradually increases based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until the big win, the player can gradually get a sense of the arrival of the big win, and the player's interest is enhanced. can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, since the effect period of one variable effect in the time saving game is set to 0.6 seconds (variation time 0.125 seconds, stop time 0.475 seconds), continuously to the second winning port 640 If the game ball is not entered, the variable presentation ends immediately, and the game becomes boring. On the other hand, based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, it is configured to display the degree of expectation for a big win. As a result, the player is made to want the game ball to enter the second prize winning port 640, and the game ball can be played so that the game ball continuously enters the second prize winning port 640, so that the variable effect can be achieved. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming boring due to an immediate end.

In this control example, the ball-entering effect is performed according to the number of remaining fluctuations up to the big win, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be executed, or the above-described ball-entering effect may be executed regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations up to the big win. As a result, it is possible to provide a case where a big win is achieved without foreseeing the arrival of the big win, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the above-described ball-entering effects are displayed in order from the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d of the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the ball-entering effect based on one ball-entering is continuously displayed until four game balls newly enter the second prize-winning hole 640, and the game balls enter the second prize-winning hole 640. Even if the ball-entering interval is very short, the time for displaying the ball-entering effect can be secured, and the problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the ball-entering effect can be suppressed. Note that it is also possible to determine an area where the ball-entering effect is not displayed, and preferentially use and display the area where the ball-entering effect is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to secure a longer time during which the ball-entering effect is displayed.

Furthermore, in this control example, the second winning port 640 is held as the upper limit, and furthermore, even when a game ball enters the second winning port 640 (so-called overflow), a ball entry effect is performed. ing. As a result, even if the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit, the ball entering effect is displayed based on the entry of the ball, so that the holding of the second winning opening 640 becomes the upper limit for the player. Even if the game is held, the player can be made to want to continuously enter the game ball into the second winning hole 640, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, since the ball-entering effect is displayed more than the number of time-saving games that have been provided, it is possible to make the player feel that many time-saving games are being provided.

In this control example, the ball-entering effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. They may be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or variation is executed, or when there is prize winning information for a big win. As a result, the order of displayed ball-entering effects can be changed, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the player can be prevented from becoming bored early.

Also, the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big win. For example, when the expectation of a big win is low, the ball-entering effects are displayed in order (clockwise) in each of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d. should be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation based on the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area). Since it is no longer necessary to see the details of the ball-entering effect displayed in , the burden on the player can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the time effect executed in this control example and the specific time effect executed during execution of the time effect will be described. The time production executed in this control example is, as described above, a production executed synchronously among a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the time set by the RTC 292 (clock means) provided in the pachinko machine 10. be.

FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time presentation period. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the current time information is acquired from the RTC 292 by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) in the start-up process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later. be. Based on the acquired time information, a time production period (production mode B) is set when 55 minutes have passed. It should be noted that, during the period until this time production period is set, the normal game machine period (production mode A) is set. The time presentation period is normally set to 5 minutes, and when this 5 minutes elapse, the normal game period is set. Since the normal game period (55 minutes) and the time production period (5 minutes) are repeatedly set, the time production period (production mode B) is set every hour.

Here, when 5 minutes of the time performance period elapses, it is determined whether or not the reserved memory stored at that point in time or the changing special pattern is set to give a big win as a result of winning/failure determination, and a big win is made. When one is set, a time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set with the time until the change ends.

Here, when the remaining time of the time effect period becomes 3 seconds or less (S2107 in FIG. 112: Yes), the actual third pattern is reduced and moved to the lower right of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. Is displayed. Then, a performance symbol similar to the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. In this case, the effect pattern is displayed with a slight sway to notify that it is not completely stopped and displayed. In this way, by switching to the production pattern and displaying it as if the third pattern were stopped and displayed, other pachinko machines 10 also seemed to stop and display the third pattern at the same timing. can let In addition, the production design is also displayed when the stop timing of the third design coincides with the time production period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the display mode from becoming constant at the end of the time presentation period and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the performance pattern is stopped and displayed 3 seconds before the remaining period, an omen display mode is displayed in which the performance pattern is slightly trembling and displayed for the remaining 3 seconds. Then, after the characters "Super school of fish time" indicating that it is the time rendering period, the notification mode "end?" After that, when the time presentation extension period is set, the characters "Super school of fish time extension!!" are displayed to notify that the time presentation period has been extended, and the background image of the school of fish is displayed again. In this case, at the same time as the start of the extension, the performance symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner, and the player is notified as if a new special symbol has started to vary. In addition, since the extension period is a period until the variable display for the big win ends, the remaining time (for example, 115 seconds) of the period is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the time production period is extended, the time production is extended because the reservation memory that becomes a big hit is set or the fluctuation has already started (during fluctuation). As a result, the player is notified of a big win. Here, in the time performance period, the same performance is executed synchronously between the same pachinko machines 10, and the performance whether or not the extension period is set is displayed at the same timing. As a result, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 to which the extended period is set will also win big from other players, and the gambling spirit of the other players can be aroused.

On the other hand, when the extension effect is not set, the text "Super Fish School Time End!!" is displayed to notify that the time effect period has ended. After that, when the third pattern is fluctuating, the performance pattern is stop-displayed after being fluctuated for the same time as the remaining fluctuation time of the third pattern. From the next variation, the reduced display of the third pattern is canceled and the third pattern is displayed in the normal size. By configuring in this way, even when the time presentation period ends, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the timing of the stop display of the third pattern coincides with the end timing of the time effect period, the reduced display of the third pattern is canceled and displayed from the start of the next variation. In addition, when the fluctuation has already ended at the end timing of the time effect period and the pending memory is not stored, the extension effect is not executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a condition for setting the extension, it was supposed to be a big hit, but not limited to that, it may be the case that a pending memory is set in which a variation pattern that becomes a super reach is selected, It may be configured to be set when a lottery is executed and a win is won.

Here, in the time presentation period (presentation mode B), time information is stored in the presentation time storage area 223g so that the specific time presentation of the countdown is performed periodically (every minute). As a result, during the time performance period, the same pachinko machines 10 installed (for example, next to each other) can perform the same countdown performance in synchronization with each other, and the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can perform the performance with a sense of unity. It is possible to further enhance the effect of time production aimed at providing

In addition, the particular time effect of the countdown is such that the content of the effect changes based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a variable probability state and is not a time-saving state (so-called variable latency state), the countdown characters displayed in the countdown effect (" 3, 2, 1...") will be displayed in red. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the game state is the variable probability state and not the time saving state (so-called latent variable probability state). Therefore, the player can be interested in the performance contents of the specific time performance, and the player's interest can be improved. Here, as a notification mode for notifying that the probability of latency is changed, the information read into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a when the power is turned on, and the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. It may be configured to use a part of the read initial image.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the countdown effect based on the specific time effect described above, the countdown effect is executed as one mode of the time advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect based on the variable display of the time effect period (effect mode B). is configured as follows. Here, a countdown is performed, a specific character is displayed, and the countdown is used for effects such as starting repeated hitting of the frame button 22 . As a result, the countdown effect may be executed at a timing different from the countdown effect that is periodically executed, and the countdown effect is executed at a timing different from that of the same pachinko machine 10 installed elsewhere (for example, next to it). By doing so, the game can be given a sense of surprise, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In this control example, it is conceivable that the performance timing of the specific time performance occurs during the execution of the countdown performance based on the time advance notice performance. In this case, there is a risk that the game machine will be difficult for the player to understand, for example, the countdown effect will be displayed redundantly, or the countdown effect that has been executed will be erased and the countdown effect will start again. In addition, if it is a countdown that is a signal to start repeated hits in the notice effect, there is a problem that the start timing is misunderstood as a countdown of the specific time effect, and the player misses it. Therefore, in this control example, during execution of the countdown effect based on the time notice effect, the avoidance flag 223i described above is set to ON (see S2007 in FIG. 111), and when the avoidance flag 223i is ON, It is configured so that the countdown effect based on the specific time effect is not executed (see S2306 in FIG. 114). As a result, the occurrence of the above-described problems can be suppressed, and the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player.

In this control example, in the time effect, it is arranged to avoid overlapping display of the countdown effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to avoid it.

Also, if the countdown effect or button operation effect overlaps, instead of not executing one of the effects, you can adjust (extend or shorten) the effect time or shift the start timing. good.

Furthermore, the specific time effect to be avoided may stop only the display of images and the output of sound, and the pointer updating process may be executed as the control process. Thus, when the avoidance of the specific time performance is finished, the specific time performance can be resumed at the same timing as the other pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 92 to 103. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 299, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 2203d (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variable display in the special symbol (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (that is, whether there is a reserved memory for the special symbol 2) (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 2) (S204: No), the special It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (that is, the reserved ball of special symbol 1 is stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved ball of special symbol 1 is not stored) (S209: No), special symbol 1, special symbol 2 Since there is no held ball in both cases, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203e are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

In the process of S208, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, this process ends.

In the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S213). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S213, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S213: Yes), stop setting processing is performed (S215), and this processing ends. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). A lottery ( It is a process for determining the performance pattern (variation performance pattern) of the variation performance performed by the first design display devices 37A, 37B and the third design display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , stop type selection counter C3, and stop type counter CN1 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability is changing (S302).

If it is in the probability variation (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. is obtained from the first winning random number table (see FIG. 75(a)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers set in the first winning random number table (see FIG. 75(a)). As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit, but not limited to this, different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is not during the probability change (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability game state) with special symbols, so the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75(a)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one "0" is set, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random number value for the special symbol match, the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a big win indicating a big win is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (one of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). Also, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined from the first winning type selection table (see FIG. 75(b)) (S307). Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table. In this first win type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random value is any of "0 to 39" is the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and the value is one of "40 to 79". The jackpot type in this case is the jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot), and the jackpot type in the case of any one of "80 to 99" is the jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined based on the current number of held balls (S309). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

In the processing of S310, set a variation pattern command for notifying the determined variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 (S310), set a stop type command (S311), and then end this processing special symbol Return to change processing.

Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92).

In the stop setting process (S215), first, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) of FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a big win A, a big win B, a big win C, a small win, or a loss.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LEDs are lighted in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lighted, resulting in the jackpot C. If so, turn on the yellow LED. In addition, when it is a small hit, the purple LED is lit, and when it is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped. It should be noted that the display color and lighting mode of the LEDs described above are not limited, and other lighting modes may be used as long as the types of each big win and small win and the variation state can be identified.

After the process of S261 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process. is a special symbol jackpot (S262). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S263), the start of the jackpot is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the lottery result of this time is not a big win (S262: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a small win (S266). If the current lottery result is a small win (S266: Yes), the small win flag 203j is set to ON (S267), the start of the small win is set (S268), and then the process proceeds to S265.

In the processing of S266, if the lottery result of this time is out (S266: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 1 or more (S269). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S269: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265.

In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process ends.

Next, the starting prize winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a process of holding the values when there is a

When the starting winning process (FIG. 96, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, there is no winning to the first winning hole 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning hole 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first winning hole 64 (S501: Yes) and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball 1 is added to the value (N1) of the number counter 203d (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (5405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S505, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S506) among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a. In the processing of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, in the processing from S507 to S512, the same processing as in the processing from S501 to S506 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 as well. The only difference is that the pending process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning hole 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 (S507: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S513).

In this look-ahead processing (FIG. 97, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601; No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of start of variation is definite change (S602), and the game state is variable (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 75(a)) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the game state is not probability change (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first per random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75 (a)) (S604), and S605 proceed to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the result of the big hit determination executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process ends. In addition, in this look-ahead processing (S513), not only this embodiment, but also the type of variation pattern to be selected (outlier reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated, and the winning information command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to notify

Next, referring to FIG. 98, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and includes the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the electric role associated with the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 98, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S701). During the win of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device displays the win, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. Including during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S701: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S702), and the second symbol display device is displayed. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbols are currently hitting the jackpot (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 75(c)).

In the process of S708, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 and the low Based on the second winning random number table for the time of probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S711). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 75(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711 is the normal symbol win (S712), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S712: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols (S714), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols (S714: Yes), the special symbols are currently hitting the jackpot. (S715). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible, even if the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the processing of S715, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, so the second winning port 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is set to 0. 2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S712: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S719, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S719), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S719: Yes), the fluctuation display on the second design display device. is set to 3 seconds (S720), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the release period of the second prize winning port 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the processing of S702, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has passed ( S722). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S722, if the variable time has not passed (S722: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 102) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 98, S106) is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S725), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S725, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1105) of the main processing (see FIG. 102) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 99, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S805), and the process ends. In the processing of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1012.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (FIG. 102), the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Here, if the special symbol that is changing is stored, the display control device 114 for the sound lamp control device 113 displays the power-on fluctuation image (see FIGS. 82(b) to (C)). instructed to do so. Note that this variation instruction may be executed, for example, in the initial setting (S1001) in the start-up process, or may be executed in another process. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 102), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) or the start winning process (see FIG. 96). Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 103) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). Details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S725 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S716 or S717 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Starting at devices 37A and 37B. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) has ended, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B ends the variation display being executed, in the display mode set by the processing of S306, S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B are stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "x" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device End the display, in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 98), stop design (second design) on the second design display device stop display (lighting display )do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main processing, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1108, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 100 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1112 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1112), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1113). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the stack pointer is set in the initial setting processing (S1001). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 103, S1104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1201, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1201: Yes), the variable probability flag 203g is turned off (S1202), the opening command is set (S1203), and the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1204). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1204: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1205). In the process of S1205, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206), A round number command indicating the number of rounds to be started is set (S1207), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1205, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is established. It discriminates (S1208). If the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1208, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is when 15 rounds are completed, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and the standby time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the time for throwing the ball, elapses. Determined as When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and an ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the processing of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set to the time saving counter (S1217), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is A or C (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the time saving flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 115. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 104, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1514 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (S1516 in FIG. 106: Yes), it executes power-off processing in S1519. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1519 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1514. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), it will transfer to S1304 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1519 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1519 is executed (see S1519 in FIG. 106). In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing of S1519 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and after the execution of the power-off process in S1519 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), and after the power off flag 223y is set to off (S1310). , the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S1311). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 . Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S1312), time setting processing is executed (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Details of the time setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1311, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1312), interrupt permission is set. (S1311), the time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process of S1308 is reached from S1304 via the process of S1306, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the time setting process (S1313) executed in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 described above will be described. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the time setting process (S1313). This time production setting process (S1313) is a process for calculating and setting a period (time production period) during which the time production (production mode B and production mode C) is executed.

In the time setting process (S1313), first, time information is obtained from the RTC 292 (S1401). As for the time information acquired here, the value of "hour, minute" is acquired. The RTC 292 is a clock means having an internal battery, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set to the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. In addition, the RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to distinguish "year, month and day". Therefore, for example, on Christmas Day, the background image can be changed to a Christmas-only background image, or a special character such as Santa can be displayed.

Then, based on the time information acquired in the process of S1401, the time presentation period and the specific time presentation timing are calculated and set in the presentation time storage area 223g (S1402). In this control example, a 24-hour preparation period and a time production period are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the production time storage area 223g. However, not limited to this, first, 55 minutes for normal execution of the game is set, the period is counted down or counted up, etc., and based on the lapse of 55 minutes, the time presentation period is set. It may be configured to set In addition to this, it is also possible to set the time after 55 minutes, determine whether or not the time has come, and set the time presentation period. By configuring in this way, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be constructed at a lower cost.

Furthermore, in this control example, the time presentation period is provided when a predetermined time has elapsed from the current time (at the time of execution of start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113), but this is not the only option. A time presentation period may be set by discriminating when it becomes (for example, 00 minutes every hour). As a result, each pachinko machine 10 executes the time performance at a specific time, so that even if the power-on timings of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are shifted, the time performance can be synchronously executed. .

Next, referring to FIG. 106, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S1501 was executed (S1501). If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1511, and S1512. By executing the process of S1511 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1512 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be

Also, at the time of recovery from a power failure due to a power failure or the like, an effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of the power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101). . In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the reception of the effect permission command including that the special symbol is being changed, the power-on notification processing (S1504) creates a display variation pattern command, and the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, the variation start command for the power-on varying image is determined by the simple command determination process (see FIG. 118(b)), and based on the variation pattern based on the received command, the power-on varying image is displayed. Performs variable display (see FIG. 82(b) or (c)). As described above, the display variation pattern command created here is for executing the variation display using the power-on variation image, which is a simple image. ) is simpler than the one selected by As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the power-on variation image can be displayed with good response when recovering from power failure.

Furthermore, after the effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 to stop the variable display. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a stop command for display to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. In the display control device 114, the reception of the display stop command is determined by the simple command determination process (see 118(b)), and the power-on fluctuation image (FIG. 82(b) or (c)) is stopped.

Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set for the display control device 114 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1509, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1509 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the variable display setting process (S1512) is finished, next, a synchronous effect management process for executing an effect based on the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 is executed (S1513), and a specific time is displayed in the time effect period (effect mode B). Specific time production processing for executing production is executed (S1514). Then, a ball-entering effect setting process for executing a ball-entering effect based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 is executed (S1515), and the process proceeds to S1516. For details of the synchronous effect management process (S1513), the specific time effect process (S1514), and the execution of the entering ball effect setting process (S1515), see FIGS. will be described later.

When the ball-entering effect setting process (S1515) ends, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1516). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1516 (S1516: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1518), and the power-off processing is executed (S1519). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1520), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1517), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1517: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1517: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S1511), first, from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read, analyzed, and the variation pattern from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation pattern reception process (S1602) is executed and the process returns to the main process.

Details of the variation pattern reception process (S1602) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern reception process (S1602). This variation pattern reception process (S1602) extracts a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and based on the extracted variation pattern scenario, various accessories (falling accessories, stretching This is a process for setting the operation of a character, a tilting character, etc.).

In the variation pattern reception process, first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1702). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a falling accessory scenario in the extracted variation pattern type (S1703). In the process of S1703, if it is determined that there is a falling accessory scenario (S1703: Yes), since it is a case where the vertical motion unit device (falling accessory) 400 is executed to move, the vertical motion unit device A falling role scenario for moving the (falling role) 400 is set (S1704). The falling role scenario set in the process of S1704 defines the operation of the vertical movement unit device (falling role) 400 for the same time as the variation time of the variation effect set based on the variation pattern type. be. By driving the vertical drive motor 431 based on this falling role scenario, the vertical movement unit device (falling role) 400 and the variable effect can be moved in synchronization (interlocking).

When the processing of S1704 is finished, it is then determined whether or not there is an opening setting for the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 (S1705). In the process of S1705, if it is determined that the door member 470 is set to be opened (S1705: Yes), the opening/closing drive motor 466 is not excited (turned off) so that the door member 470 is opened. set. As a result, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening/closing drive motor 466 for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized, and the inertial force that moves the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 in the falling direction. , the door member 470 is opened. Although not shown, when the door member 470 is not set to be opened, that is, when the door member 470 is kept closed, the excitation of the opening drive motor 466 is controlled so that the opening/closing drive motor 466 stops. . As a result, when the door member 470 is not set to open, even if the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 moves in the falling direction, the static torque of the opening drive motor 466, that is, the door member 470 is closed. The door member 470 is kept closed and is not opened because it is excited so that the torque for maintaining the state (so-called holding torque) is maximized. It should be noted that the torque (holding torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state does not have to be maximized. It is sufficient that the torque is such that the door member 470 is not opened by the inertial force generated in the opening. In this case, the current that excites the drive motor 466 for opening and closing can be made weak, so power consumption can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1705 that there is no setting for opening the falling accessory (S1705: No), the process of S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1707, and it is determined that there is no falling accessory scenario. If so (S1703: No), the process from S1704 to S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1707.

When the processing of S1703, S1705 or S1706 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is an expandable role scenario (S1707). In the processing of S1707, when it is determined that there is an expansion and contraction accessory scenario (S1707: Yes), the drive motor 561 is operated so that the front plate member 546 of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position. is set, and the process proceeds to S1709. On the other hand, in the process of S1707, if it is determined that there is no stretchable role scenario (S1707: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1709.

In the processing of S1709, it is determined whether or not there is a leaning accessory scenario (S1709). In the processing of S1709, when it is determined that there is a tilting accessory scenario (S1709: Yes), the drive motor 631 is controlled to be excited so that the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) moves to the extended position. A leaning accessory scenario is set (S1710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if it is determined that there is no leaning accessory scenario (S1709: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 107, the description continues. In the processing of S1601, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1603). When the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1606). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is the special figure 1 pending ball number command or the special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (number N2 of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1607). In addition, in the processing of S1608, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1607 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or when a special pattern lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1607. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol lottery is selected. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the processing of S1607 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S1606, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1606: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1608). In the process of S1608, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1608: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command (lottery results of special symbols, etc.) is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1609), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the winning information command has not been received (S1608: No), it is determined whether or not a command regarding a big win has been received (S1610). In the process of S1610, when a command related to the big win is received (S1610: Yes), the process corresponding to the received command related to the big win is executed (S1611), and this process ends. Commands related to big wins include, for example, an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. Further, processing corresponding to the received command related to the big win includes, for example, processing of setting an opening command for display, a command for the number of rounds for display, and an ending command for display.

In the process of S1610, when it is determined that the command regarding the big win has not been received (S1610: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S1612). In the process of S1612, if it is determined that the stop command has been received (S1612: Yes), the process of stopping the variable display being executed is executed (S1613), the avoidance flag 223i is set to OFF (S1614), A stop command for display is set (S1615), and this processing ends.

The display stop command set by the process of S1615 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 106). , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When receiving the display stop command, the display control device 114 stops the variable effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1612 that the stop command has not been received (S1612: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1616) and returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is sent to the display control device 114. Set the command to send to

Next, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1801). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S1806. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 Variation pattern selection processing for selection is executed (S1803).

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, details of the variation pattern selection process (S1803) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1803). In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 and the effect counter 223j counted by the sound lamp control device 113 are used to select the variation pattern type corresponding to the effect mode. be.

In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the production counter 223j is acquired (S1901), and it is determined whether or not the current production mode is production mode A (normal production period) (S1902). The performance mode is determined by referring to the value of the performance mode storage area 223h.

In the process of S1902, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is the effect mode A (normal effect period) (S1902: Yes), in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108), Based on the variation pattern type extracted from the received variation pattern command and the production counter 223j, the variation pattern of the corresponding normal production period (production mode A) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1903), and this processing is performed. finish. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a display variation pattern command in the variation display setting process described later (see S1804 in FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1902, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode A (normal production period) (S1902: No), then the current production mode is production mode B (time production period). (S1904).

In the processing of S1904, if it is determined that the value of the production mode storage area 223h is the production mode B (time production period) (S1904: Yes), based on the extracted variation pattern type and production counter 223j, correspondence The variation pattern of the time presentation period (drawing mode B) to be performed is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1905), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1904, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode B (time production period) (S1904: No), the current production mode is production mode C (extended time production period) Therefore, based on the extracted variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j, the variation pattern of the corresponding extended time effect period (result mode C) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1906), and the process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the process of the variation pattern selection process (S1803), it is possible to perform a variable display corresponding to each effect period (effect mode).

Returning to FIG. 109, the description continues. After completing the processing of S1803, based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1803, to generate a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 and to transmit the command to the display control device 114 Set (S1804). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started. When the processing of S1804 is completed, next, the announcement selection process for setting the announcement effect based on the success/failure determination result corresponding to the current effect mode is executed (S1805).

Here, details of the advance notice effect processing (S1805) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect processing (S1805). This notice effect processing (S1805) is executed in the above-described variable display setting processing (see FIG. 109), and is a process for setting the notice effect based on the result of determination according to the current effect mode.

In the notice effect processing (S1805), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal effect period) (S2002). In the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the current effect mode (value of the effect mode storage area 223h) is the effect mode A (normal effect period) (S2002: Yes), it is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Based on the determination result of each held ball and the value of the effect counter 223j, the normal notice effect, which is the notice effect of the normal effect period, is selected (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2011.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode A (normal production period) (S2002: No), then the current production mode is production mode B (time production period). (S2004).

In the process of S2004, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), the winning judgment result of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a and , and based on the value of the effect counter 223j, the time announcement effect, which is the announcement effect of the time effect period, is selected (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the time announcement effect selected in the process of S2005 is the countdown announcement effect (S2006). In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the selected time notice effect is the countdown notice effect (S2006: Yes), the countdown notice effect based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 is executed during the time effect period. Therefore, in order not to execute the countdown effect of the specific time effect, the avoidance flag 223i is turned on (S2007), and the process proceeds to S2011. By setting the avoidance flag 223i to ON in the process of S2007, it can be determined that the countdown notice effect is to be executed during execution of the time effect. In the specific time production process (see FIG. 114), control is performed so that the specific time production is not executed (S2305 in FIG. 114: Yes). As a result, the countdown effect related to the ball-entering effect and the countdown effect related to the specific time effect are not executed in duplicate, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In this embodiment, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON when the countdown notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, and control is performed so that the specific time effect is not executed. is not limited to For example, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the timing at which the countdown notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 is pre-read (guessed), and the countdown notice effect is executed. The avoidance flag 223i may be set to ON so that the specific time effect is not executed in the vicinity of the execution timing (for example, one minute before or after). As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for players to understand by suppressing the continuous execution of the countdown notice effect while minimizing the number of times that the specific time effect is avoided (not executed). can. In addition, the prevention of duplication is not limited to the display mode. You may make it prevent putting away. For example, it is possible to prevent the output of a voice saying "Please press the button" even though there is no indication to press the button.

By the processing of S1614, when the countdown notice effect, which is one aspect of the notice effect, is being executed, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON, and the specific time effect is not executed (avoided) during the time effect period. be. Execution of the countdown notice effect is ended when the variable display for performing the notice effect is stopped, so the countdown notice effect is ended by turning off the avoidance flag 223i when the stop command is received. A countdown specific time effect can be executed later. Alternatively, the avoidance flag 223i may be turned off after a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of the execution of the countdown notice effect, so that the specific time effect can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the countdown notice effect from being continuously executed, and to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the process of S2006, when it is determined that the selected time announcement effect is other than the countdown announcement effect (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the processing of S2004, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode B (time production period) (S2004: No), then whether the current production mode is production mode C (extended time production period) It is determined whether or not (S2008). If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the current effect mode is the effect mode C (extended time effect period) (S2008: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the result of the pertinence determination of the variation is a win. (S2009).

In the processing of S2009, when it is determined that the result of determination of whether or not the variation is a hit, the super school of fish announcement effect is selected (S2010), and the processing proceeds to S2011.

When the processing of S2003, S2006, S2007 or S2010 is completed, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2011), and this processing ends. The display notice command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1502) of the main processing (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display advance notice command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 the advance notice effect corresponding to the command.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current production mode is not the production mode C (extended time production period) in the processing of S2008 (S2008: No), or in the processing of S2009, the determination result of the variation is out. If it is determined that (S2009: No), there is no advance notice effect to be executed, so this process is terminated as it is. In the processing of S2003 and S2005, there is a case where the advance notice effect is not selected depending on the value of the effect counter 223j. In this case, similarly, the present processing ends without setting the advance notice command for display.

In addition, in this control example, in the extended time production period (production mode C), the specific time production that is periodically executed in the time production period (production mode B) is not executed, but it is not limited to this. A specific time effect may be executed in the same manner as the time effect period (production mode B), or an effect different in display mode from the specific time effect may be periodically performed. In this case, the above-described avoidance flag 223i may be used to control the effect so as not to be performed at the timing overlapping with the effect based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 . As a result, even in the extension time performance period (performance mode C), the continuous execution of the countdown notice performance or the like is suppressed, or the duplication of the performance is suppressed, thereby providing a game machine that is easy for the player to understand. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 109, the description continues. After completing the processing of S1805, it is then determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S1806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, is OFF) (S1806: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1807). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1808). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1810. In the process of S1810, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1810). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the synchronous effect management process (S1513), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1513). In this synchronous effect management process (S1513), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating it is displayed. Perform processing to set the mode.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 112, S1513), time information of "hour, minute" is first obtained from the RTC 292 (S2101). It is determined whether the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2102). If it is determined that the production mode A is set (S2102: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is the transition timing to the production mode B (time production period) (whether it is the period of the time production period) ) is determined (S2103). In the process of S2103, if it is determined that it is time to shift to the effect mode B (time effect period), that is, if it is determined that it is time to start the time effect (S2103: Yes), the effect mode storage area 223h (S2104), sets the display effect mode change command based on the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2105), and ends this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2103 that it is not the time effect period, the processing of S2104 and S2105 is skipped, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2102, if it is determined that the production mode A (normal production period) is not set (S2102: No), it is determined whether or not the production mode B (time production period) is set. (S2106). In the process of S2106, if it is determined that the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S2106: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is within 3 seconds from the end of the time effect, That is, it is determined whether it is three seconds before the end timing of the time effect period (S2107). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the re-variation production which is the production suggesting that the time production period ends and shifts to the extended time production period. By executing this performance, the player can be made aware of the transition to the extended time performance period, and the expectation of a big win can be heightened, so that the interest of the player can be improved. can be done.

When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S2107: Yes), an extension effect setting process is executed (S2108). After that, this process ends. This extension effect setting process (S2108) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 113, and the process of whether or not to set the time effect extension period is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2107, if it is determined that the acquired time data is not within 3 seconds from the end of the time effect, the process of S2108 is skipped because there are 3 seconds or more until the end timing of the time effect period. exit.

In the processing of S2106, if it is determined that it is not production mode B (time production period), that is, production mode C (time production extension period) (S2106: No), it is outside the time production extension period, that is, , It is determined whether it is the end timing of the extension time production period (S2109). In the process of S2109, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the extended time production period (S2109: Yes), the production mode storage area 223h is set to production mode A (normal production period) (S2110), production mode A A display effect mode change command based on (normal effect period) is set (S2111), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2109, if it is determined that the acquired time data is not the end timing of the extension time effect period (S2109: No), the processing of S2110 and S2111 is skipped, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the extension effect setting process (S2108), which is one process in the synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the contents of this extension effect setting process (S2108).

In the extension effect setting process (FIG. 113, S2108), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S2201). When it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S2201: Yes), the value of the performance mode storage area 223h is set to the performance mode A (normal game period) (S2202). Then, a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2203), and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the jackpot game is already executed during the time performance period, the extended performance is not executed after the jackpot game is finished, and control is made to shift to the normal game period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect mode A (normal effect period) may not be set until the time effect period or the extended time effect period ends. As a result, even when it is the time performance period at the end of the jackpot game, the extension performance can be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time presentation period (S2204). In the process of S2204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S2204: Yes), whether or not the re-variation effect set in the process of S2210 described later is set, that is, the extension effect It is determined whether or not it is determined to be set (S2205). When the re-variation production is set, that is, when it is determined that the extension production is set (S2205: Yes), the value of the production mode storage area 223h is set to production mode C (S2206 ), the display effect mode change command based on the effect mode C is set (S2207), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the re-variation effect is not set and it is determined that the extension effect is not set (S2205: No), then the process moves to the extension selection period. However, the process proceeds to S2202 because the process proceeds to the normal presentation period. Thereby, the production mode can be shifted to the production mode A (normal production period).

In addition, in the process of S2204, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the time effect period (S2204: No), it is determined whether the winning prize information is stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a, or whether the winning prize information during fluctuation is determined as winning. (S2208). In the process of S2208, if it is determined that winning prize information is stored, or if it is determined that the winning judgment during the change is a win (S2208: Yes), the time until the winning change ends It is calculated and set as the extension performance time (S2209). Then, a re-variation effect is set (S2210), and this process is terminated. Here, the re-fluctuation effect is a effect suggesting transition from the time effect period to the extended time effect period, and specifically, the display mode in which the fish school appears from the right is displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if it is determined that the winning prize information is not stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a and the winning/failure judgment result during fluctuation is out (S2208: No), S2209 and S2210 are executed. Skip the process and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the specific time rendering process (S1514), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific time effect process (S1514). This specific time production process (S1514) is a process for executing a specific time production during the time production period (production mode B).

In the specific time effect process, first, time information is obtained from the RTC 292 (S2301). Next, based on the acquired time information, it is determined whether or not the current production mode is production mode B (time production period) (S2302). In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: No), it is not the timing to execute the specific time effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: Yes), then based on the time information acquired in the process of S2301, the specific time It is determined whether or not it is the production timing (S2303). In the processing of S2303, if it is determined that it is not the specific time production timing (S2303: No), it is not the time to execute the specific time production, so this processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S2303, if it is determined that the effect is for a specific time (S2303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being executed (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed (S2304: Yes), this process ends. As a result, during execution of the demonstration effect, that is, when the player is not playing a game, the effect suggests whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the variable probability game state (variable latent probability state). It is possible to prevent the specific time performance from being displayed and prevent the game state from being suggested even to a player who is not playing the game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2304 that the demonstration effect is not being executed (S2304: No), then it is determined whether or not the avoidance flag 223i is ON (S2305). In the process of S2305, if it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is ON (S2305: Yes), the countdown ball entry effect is being executed among the ball entry effects based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640. Since this is the case, the processing is terminated as it is in order not to display the specific time effect.

In the process of S2305, if it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is off (S2305: No), a specific time effect command for display is set to execute the specific time effect, and this process ends.

By the processing of S2305, when the countdown notice effect based on the winning to the second winning opening 640 is executed during execution of the specific time effect, control is performed so that the countdown effect related to the specific time effect is not executed. As a result, since the countdown effect related to the ball-entering effect and the countdown effect related to the specific time effect are not executed in duplicate, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the ball entry effect setting process (S1515), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ball entry effect setting process (S1515). This ball-entering effect setting process (S1515) is a process for displaying a ball-entering effect based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 during the time-saving game. In this ball-entering effect, the type selected by the number of remaining fluctuations until a big hit is changed, and the displayed area is changed from the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 to the fourth area 81d. set in order.

In the entering effect setting process (S1515), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is a time-saving game (S2401). In the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the time-saving game is not being performed, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the time-saving game is in progress (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball entered the second winning hole 640 (S2402). In this control example, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 in the main controller 110, a ball entering command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (not shown). In the sound lamp control device 113, upon receiving the ball entry command, the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 stores that the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, and in the process of S2402, the second winning hole It is determined whether or not a ball has entered the 640.

In addition, not limited to this, by providing a ball entry detection switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the voice lamp control device that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 640 113, or by using the switch that detects the ball entering the second winning hole 640 with the main controller 110 also in the voice lamp control device 113, the second winning hole 640 It may be possible to detect that a game ball has entered.

In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 (S2402: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if the above-described ball entry command is received from the main control device 110 and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 640 (S2402: Yes), the winning information is stored. A ball-entering effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the area 223a and the ball-entering effect selection table 222b (S2403). Then, based on the ball-entering effect selected in the process of S2403 and the display area counter 223f, the ball-entering effect command for display is set (S2404). The display-purpose entering effect command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output processing (S1502) of the main processing (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . The display controller 114; When this display-purpose entering effect command is received, the entering effect is displayed in the display area corresponding to the command (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third pattern display device 81).

When the processing of S2404 is finished, the value of the display area counter 223f is incremented by 1 (S2405), and it is determined whether or not the added value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406). In the process of S2406, if it is determined that the value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406: Yes), the entering effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d (see FIG. 89 or 90) in the entering effect setting process. is set to be displayed, and the value of the display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 (S2407) so that the area where the ball-entering effect is displayed is the first area 81a (see FIG. 89 or 90). End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2406 that the display area counter 223f is not 5 (that is, it is any of 2 to 4) (S2406: No), it is necessary to initialize the value of the display area counter 223f. Therefore, the process of S2407 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, the processing of S2404 can display the ball-entering effect in the area of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the display area counter 223f. Specifically, when the display area counter 223f is 1, it is in the first area 81a of the third pattern display device 81, and when it is 2, it is 3 in the second area 81b of the third pattern display device 81. In the case of 4, the entering effect is displayed in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and in the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81 when the number is 4. Then, by the processing from S2405 to S2407, the winning effect setting process (S1515) is executed, and every time the entering ball effect command for display is set, the value of the display area counter 223 can be updated. The ball-entering effect can be displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the display device 81, and after the ball-entering effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d, the ball-entering effect can be displayed again from the first area 81a. can be displayed in order. As a result, the ball-entering effect based on one ball-entering is continuously displayed until four game balls newly enter the second prize-winning hole 640, and the game balls enter the second prize-winning hole 640. Even if the ball-entering interval is very short, the time for displaying the ball-entering effect can be secured, and the problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the ball-entering effect can be suppressed.

In this control example, the ball-entering effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. They may be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or variation is executed, or when there is prize winning information for a big win. As a result, the order of displayed ball-entering effects can be changed, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the player can be prevented from becoming bored early.

Also, the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big win. For example, when the expectation of a big win is low, the ball entry effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d. should be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation based on the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area). Since it is no longer necessary to see the details of the ball-entering effect displayed in , the burden on the player can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this control example, the ball-entering effect is displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display area of the third pattern display device may be further subdivided (for example, divided into six regions from the first region to the sixth region) and displayed in order, or the display region of the third pattern display device may be divided into six regions. The number of divisions may be reduced (for example, divided into two areas from the first area to the second area) and displayed.

In addition, in this control example, which of the display regions (first region 81a to fourth region 81d) of the third pattern display device 81 is to be displayed is configured to be selected by the sound lamp control device 113. , but not limited to this, and may be configured to be selected in the display control device 114, for example.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 134. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 116, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2501), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2501) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2501) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2601). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2602). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2602, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2602, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2603). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2604), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2501 in FIG. 116) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) (S2605), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2501) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 117, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2603 to S2605 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2601 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and then transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S2601. and the processing of S2602 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2603 to S2605 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2603 to S2605 without performing the processes of S2601 and S2602 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2502). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. Further, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2503). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2503, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction includes the starting address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2504, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2505). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4702 in FIG. 132(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 118(b)), the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (see FIG. 82), which are the images at the time of power-on, are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S2809 in FIG. 118B) and simple display setting processing (see S2810 in FIG. 118B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first winning hole 64 (start winning), and the instruction to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (see FIG. 82) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation is performed. can be done. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure recovery. Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2505, interrupt permission is set (S2506), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2506, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a). FIG. 118(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). FIG. 118(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 87) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 118(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801). If it is off (S2801: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2802) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2803) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2802), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2803), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2802), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2804). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2803) or the simple display setting processing (S2809). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

When the task processing is completed, effect information correction processing is executed (S2805). In this effect information correction processing (S2805), among the images for one frame determined in the task processing described above, various power-on images used for display at power-on (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation Image, title image at power-on) sprite, correct the display presence/absence, display coordinate position and enlargement ratio. Note that the effect information correction process (S2805) may be configured to be executed within the task process (S2804).

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2806). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. - 特許庁Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2807). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in task processing (S2804) and effect information correction processing (S2805), and transfer setting processing (S2806) 87 is generated from the transfer instruction set by , and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2808). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2808, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete A stop type table and a stop type counter corresponding to (loss, chance eye) are compared with each other, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2801: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2809) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2810) is executed, and then S2804. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127, the details of the command determination process (S2802), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 119, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2901). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2803) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S2902). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2903).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2904), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2904: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2905) and returns to the processing of S2901.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2905) will now be described with reference to FIG. 120(a). FIG. 120(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3001).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a distance of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. It could be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device actually produces a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third pattern display device 81 is displaying the variation performance according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for the next display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3001 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3003). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3003, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3005). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3006), and when the effect of moving the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is executed. A special effect correction process for correcting the effect screen is executed (S3007). When the processing of S3007 is completed, the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3005, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 121, details of the special effect correction processing (S3007) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing special effect correction processing (S3007). This special effect correction process (S3007) is a process for correcting the effect screen when an effect is executed in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) moves. .

In the special effect correction process (S3007), first, it is determined whether or not the effect based on the received variation pattern command is the effect of moving the telescopic effect device (elastic accessory) 540 (whether or not there is a telescopic accessory scenario). (S3201). In the processing of S3201, if it is determined that there is an expansion and contraction role scenario (S3201: Yes), in the change, the front member 546 of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position, and the third symbol This is the case where an effect that makes the display device 81 difficult to see is executed. In this case, from the correction information table 234a3 to the correction information storage area 233m is set the correction information for moving the stretchable accessory (S3202), and the process proceeds to S3205. By the processing of S3202, the variable image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 83(a)) is displayed on the sub display device 690, so that the telescopic device moves to the front side of the third pattern display device 81. Even when the front member 546 of 540 moves, the player can visually recognize the changing image by looking at the sub-display device 690 . Here, the variable image is the symbol "○" displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 83(a). In addition to the "○" symbol, the "X" symbol is also displayed as a variation image. This variable image notifies that the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is being variably displayed by alternately displaying the "O" symbol and the "X" symbol. Then, when the "O" symbol is stop-displayed, the winning of the special symbol is reported, and when the "X" symbol is stop-displayed, the loss of the special symbol is reported.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3201, if it is determined that there is no stretchable accessory scenario (S3201: No), then the effect based on the received variation pattern command is the effect of moving the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9). It is determined whether or not (whether or not there is a leaning accessory scenario) (S3203). In the processing of S3203, if it is determined that there is a tilting accessory scenario (S3203: Yes), the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub display device 690 moves in the variation, and the sub This is the case where an effect that makes the display device 690 difficult to see is executed. In this case, the tilting accessory movement correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205. By the processing of S3204, the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub-display device 690 is moved, and even when an effect is executed in which the sub-display device 690 is difficult to see, the player can move to the third position. By looking at the variable image displayed on the pattern display device 81, the variable image can be visually recognized.

Further, in the processing of S3202 and S3204 described above, by setting information for correcting the display position of the variable image in accordance with the effect to be executed, the display mode is controlled so that the player can easily view it. As a result, even if an image in a display mode that is easy for the player to visually recognize is not retained for each effect executed, the same image data is displayed for each effect executed, and the above-mentioned image data is corrected. The effect can be obtained, and the area of the ROM 234 can be saved.

After completing the processing of S3202 or S3204, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON (S3205), and this processing ends. The special effect correction flag 233n that is turned on in the process of S3205 indicates that information for correcting the image to be displayed has been set in the special effect correction process (S3007) with the execution of the stretchable accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario. flag to indicate By setting this special effect correction flag 233n to ON, in the effect information correction process to be described later, the correction information for normal effect is stored in the correction information storage area 233m.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that there is no leaning accessory scenario (S3203: No), this process ends.

As described above, the tilting motion unit (tilting accessory) 600 has the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 50). It is possible to switch between an open state in which the player can see the sub-display device 690 and a closed state in which the player cannot see the sub-display device 690 . Therefore, when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state, the image displayed on the sub display device 690 may be corrected to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Further, whether or not the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are closed depends on the role scenario in the production, as in the case of determining the movement of the telescopic role and the tilting role described above. Alternatively, an origin sensor that detects the origin positions of the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 determines that these curtain members are at the origin position (closed state). The display of the sub-display device 690 may be switched to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the sub-display device 690 is displayed.

Furthermore, in the above-described tilting motion unit (tilting accessory) 600 and elastic effect device (elastic accessory) 540, the correction information is similarly changed based on the determination result of the origin sensor that detects the origin position. good too. As a result, even if the action is different from the role product scenario due to the failure of the role product, etc., the state is accurately detected and various effects are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690. It can be displayed at a position where a person can visually recognize it.

In this embodiment, the case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves up and down and the case where the tilting motion unit 600 tilts have been described. The same processing as that executed in the special effect correction processing (S3007) may be executed when an action scenario to operate is set. Note that even when the tilting motion unit 600 slides, a series of motion scenarios for the sliding motion are set by the audio lamp control device 113 . In that case, since the sound lamp control device 113 notifies that the variation pattern is for executing the slide motion by the display variation pattern command, in that case, the slide motion correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233m. Here, the sliding motion correction information is the variable image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (“○” symbol (or “X” symbol shown in FIG. 83(a)) displayed in accordance with the sliding motion. ) moves to a position not on the back side of the tilting unit 600 that slides. In the present embodiment, the variation image (see FIG. 83(a)) is displayed on the upper left of the third pattern display device 81. However, if it is configured to be displayed on the lower right, the tilting operation unit 600 is on the right side. When it slides further to the left, it is gradually slid (moved) leftward in accordance with the motion of the tilting motion unit 600 and set to be displayed. Such coordinate information is set in the slide motion correction information. In addition, when the tilting operation unit 600 slides to the left according to the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and moves to the area where the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed, the tilting operation unit 600 The coordinates may be set so as to move to and display on the sub-display device 690 incorporated in the . With this configuration, it is possible to display the variation image (see FIG. 83(a)) showing that the special symbol is being varied by the player in an easy-to-see manner. In the present embodiment, the object to be moved and displayed is the moving image (see FIG. 83(a)), but the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be the third symbol or the reserved symbol. Alternatively, it may be a pattern such as a character. The slide motion correction information described above is set in advance in the display control device 114 corresponding to the operation scenario of the slide motion set in the sound lamp control device 113, and the coordinate information is adjusted according to the timing of the slide motion. is set so that is variably set.

In addition, in this control example, the display positions of various power-on images are corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this. Or, the display position of such as fluctuation pattern) may be corrected.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the process of S2904, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2904: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2906), If there is a display variation type command (S2906: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2907), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the stop type command process (S2907) will now be described with reference to FIG. 120(b). FIG. 120(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance) is handled. A stop type table is determined (S3101), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118(b)) is executed. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the pattern display device 81 is set (S3102).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S3103), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S3102. In the above-described task processing (S2804), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3102 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S3103, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed. Image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236 . Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S3101, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S3102.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the processing of S2906, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2906: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command in the unprocessed commands (S2908). In the process of S2908, when it is determined that there is a jackpot related command (S2908: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S2909), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S2909) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the jackpot-related command processing (S2909). This jackpot-related command processing (S2909) performs processing corresponding to various commands (opening command for display, number of rounds command for display, ending command for display) for executing the jackpot effect received from the sound lamp control device 113. It is a process for execution.

In the jackpot-related command process (S2909), first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among unprocessed commands (S3301). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that there is an opening command for display (S3301: Yes), the opening command process (S3302) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S3303.

Details of the opening command process (S3302) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In this opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3405), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3404, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S3402. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND-type flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 is finished, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the command for the number of rounds for display is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or to feel a sense of incompatibility.

In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 16 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the ending command for display, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the motion has stopped or to have a sense of incongruity.

Therefore, in this control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and until the variation display of the jackpot is completed on the third symbol display device 81 , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect on the third pattern display device 81 ends, the round effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect on the third pattern display device 81 is all (for 5 rounds). ) When the game ends, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player does not feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started, Control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect that becomes a big hit. As a result, the opening performance can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 when the variation performance for the big win is completed on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is worried whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 122, the description is continued. In the process of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S3303), and the If there is a round number command for use (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

Details of the round number command process (S3304) will now be described with reference to FIG. 123(b). FIG. 123(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing (S3304). This number-of-rounds command process (S3304) is to execute a process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3502).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3505), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 122 . In the processing of S3303, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3305). If there is an ending command (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if there is no display ending command (S3305: No), the process of S3306 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

Details of the ending command process (S3306) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124(a) is a flow chart showing the ending command process (S3306). This ending command process (S3306) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. (S3601). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3602).

Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3601, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2908, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S2908: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an advance notice command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2910), and the advance notice for display is determined. If there is a command (S2910: Yes), the notice command process is executed (S2911), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124(b), details of the advance notice command process (S2911) will be described. FIG. 124(b) is a flow chart showing the advance notice command process. This advance notice command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display advance notice command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the notice command process, first, the notice effect display data table indicated by the notice command for display is determined, and the decided notice effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S3701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3702).

Then, based on the advance notice effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the advance notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this notice command processing (S2911), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the notice effect display data table, so that the notice effect set corresponding to the effect mode in the sound lamp control device 113 is the third symbol. It will be displayed on the display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the processing of S2910, if it is determined that there is no advance notice command for display (S2910: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an entering ball effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2912), If there is an entering ball effect command for display (S2912: Yes), the entering ball effect command process is executed (S2913), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, with reference to FIG. 125(a), details of the entering ball effect command process (S2913) will be described. FIG. 125(a) is a flow chart showing the entering ball effect command process (S2913). This ball-entering effect command process (S2913) executes a process corresponding to the display-purpose entering-ball effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the notice command process, first, the ball-entering effect display data table indicated by the display-use ball-entering effect command is determined, the determined ball-entering effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. (S3801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3802).

Then, based on the ball-entering effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the entering-ball effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this entering-ball effect command processing (S2913), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the entering-ball effect display data table. 81.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the processing of S2912, if it is determined that there is no display-use entering-ball effect command (S2912: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display-specific time effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2914). ), if there is a specific time effect command for display (S2914: Yes), specific time effect command processing is executed (S2915), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the specific time effect command process (S2915) will now be described with reference to FIG. 125(b). FIG. 125(b) is a flow chart showing the specific time effect command process (S2915). This specific time effect command process (S2915) executes a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the specific time effect command process, first, the specific time effect display data table indicated by the display specific time effect command is determined, and the determined specific time effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S3902).

Then, based on the specific time effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3905), the entering-ball effect command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

By this specific time effect command processing (S2915), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the specific time effect display data table, so that the specific time effect selected in the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2914, if it is determined that there is no display specific time effect command (S2914: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect mode change command in the unprocessed commands (S2916 ), if there is an effect mode change command for display (S2916: Yes), effect mode change command processing is executed (S2917), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, the details of the effect mode change command process (S2917) will be described with reference to FIG. 126(a). FIG. 126(a) is a flow chart showing the effect mode change command process (S2917). This effect mode change command process (S2917) executes the process corresponding to the specific time effect command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the effect mode change command process, first, the back image change flag 233p is set to ON (S4001), the effect mode flag 233r corresponding to the effect mode type based on the received command is set to ON (S4002), and this process is performed. exit.

With the background image change flag 233p set to ON in the process of S4001, the processes (S4910 to S4915) for changing the background image are executed in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133), which will be described later. In addition, the effect mode flag 233r that is set to ON in S4002 is referred to in the processing for changing the background image in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4911 in FIG. 133), and is set to the effect mode flag 233r. The background image is changed based on the set production mode type. Thereby, the rear image can be changed according to the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 . As a result, the rear image can be changed based on the change of the effect mode, and the player can easily recognize that the effect mode has been changed.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2916, if it is determined that there is no display effect mode command (S2916: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop command in the unprocessed commands (S2918), and the If there is a stop command (S2918: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2919), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the stop command process (S2919) will now be described with reference to FIG. 126(b). FIG. 126(b) is a flow chart showing the stop command process (S2919). This stop command process (S2919) is to execute the process corresponding to the display stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the stop command process, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to OFF (S4101), and the process ends. The special effect correction flag 233n, which is set to OFF in the process of S4101, is set in the special effect correction process (S3007) executed when the variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 as described above. 540 (see FIG. 9), or if there is a tilting role scenario in which the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable, correction information corresponding to the correction information storage area 233m It stores the correction information of the table 234a3 and is set to ON.

This stop command process is a process executed based on a stop command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 when each variable effect is stopped. Therefore, when the variable performance based on the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario is stopped, the special effect correction flag 233n is turned off. As a result, in the effect information correction process (see S2804) executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118(b)), the correction information for the normal effect or the correction information for the demonstration effect is set in the correction information storage area 233m. As a result, an image whose coordinates and the like displayed based on the variable effect of the stretchable role scenario or the tilting role scenario is corrected to the original coordinates and the like is displayed.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 119 . In the process of S2918, if it is determined that there is no display stop command (S2918: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2920). If (S2920: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2921), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the error command processing (S2921) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4202, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 119 . If it is determined in the process of S2920 that there is no error command (S2920: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2922), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Other unprocessed commands include, for example, a back image change command. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

If the back image change command has been received, back image change command processing is executed (S2922). In this back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 223p for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4703) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 223p set by the back image change command process is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Also, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, from the set back face image discrimination flag, at that point specifies the type of the background image to be displayed in step 2, further specifies the range of the background image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and determines the RAM type (resident use) in which image data corresponding to the range of the background image is stored. video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the background image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more background image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the background image discrimination flag corresponding to the background image type indicated by the previously received background image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the process of S2901, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes ), and the processing of S2902 to S2922 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2901 to S2922 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2809) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only stop type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 120(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed, and other command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

In addition, when power failure occurs during the fluctuation of the special symbol and then recovers, the MPU 201 of the above-described main control unit 110 executes the startup process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the effect permission command including that the pattern is changing, the display control device 114 (received in S1616 of command determination processing (FIG. 107, S1511)), the display control device 114 receives a variation start command for the power-on variation image output to 114, and performs simple command determination processing (S2809). , and the start of the variable display (the display data table of the power-on variable image is set in the display data table buffer 233d) is set in the simple display setting processing (S2810) executed thereafter. It should be noted that at the timing when main controller 110 outputs an instruction to start varying the power-on varying image corresponding to the special symbol that was varying when power was turned off, the power-on varying image is displayed on the power supply of resident video RAM 235 . Since it has already been transferred to the input-time variation image area 235b, the variation display is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 (display is started). In this case, the power-on fluctuation images shown in FIGS. 82(b) to (c) are alternately displayed.

In addition, after the effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 to stop the variable display. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a stop command for display to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. In the display control device 114, the simple command determination processing (see 118(b)) determines that the stop command for display has been received, and the power-on fluctuation image (FIG. 82(b) or (c)) is stopped.

Note that if the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 has been completed in the display control device 114 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the power-on varying image, only the power-on varying image is displayed at the coordinate position for normal effect on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83(a)). This is because the stop mode of the power-on varying image is defined in the display stop command for stopping the power-on varying image, and therefore the stop mode for the normal effect cannot be selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may determine and display the stop mode based on the stop mode (jackpot or loss) of the power-on fluctuation image. As a result, even when the variation of the power-on variation image is executed, it is possible to switch to the normal presentation from the point of time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed, and the interest of the player can be improved. .

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S3001, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3002, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the details of the display setting process (S2803), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 128, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S4302), S4303-S4304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

Details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S4401).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4304), or if it is determined in the process of S4303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S4303: No), then the process proceeds to S4305.

In S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S4501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S4505), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4502: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 128, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S4306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S4309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S4310), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2804), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last time stop design determination flag set by S4315, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S4317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S4316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2810) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image by the power-on fluctuation image is over, for a predetermined time, the power-on fluctuation image (Fig. 82) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the details of the effect information correction process (S2805), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing effect information correction processing (S2805). This effect information correction processing (S2805) corrects the display positions of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) during normal effects and demonstration effects. It is a process for using.

In the effect information correction process (S2805), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4601: No), it means that the simple image is being displayed when the power is turned on. End the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is off (S4601: Yes), the transfer of the resident image is completed in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132(a)), which will be described later. Since the normal effect can be executed, it is then determined whether or not the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602).

In the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the special effect correction flag 233n is ON (S4602: No), the expansion/contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable in the above-described special effect correction process (see FIG. 121). or the tilting role scenario in which the tilting action unit 600 (see FIG. 9) moves is already stored in the correction information storage area 233m. This processing ends without setting the correction information.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602: Yes), the demonstration display flag is turned off in order to set the correction information according to the effect currently being executed. (S4603).

In the processing of S4603, if it is determined that the demonstration display flag is off (S4603: Yes), the demonstration effect is not being executed, that is, the normal effect is being executed, so the correction information storage area Correction information for normal effect is set to 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S4604), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, if it is determined that the demonstration display flag is ON (S4603: No), it means that the demonstration effect is being executed, so the demonstration display is stored in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3. The effect correction information is set (S4605), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the effect information correction process (S2805), correction information for correcting the display position of various power-on images according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power-on, normal effect, demonstration effect, etc.) making settings. As a result, in a plurality of states of the pachinko machine 10, since a common image can be used to produce an effect, the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since it is configured to correct the display mode such as the position to be displayed and the enlargement ratio, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to visually recognize according to each effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, the details of the transfer setting process (S2806), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 132(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S4702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S4701, that is, if it is turned off (S4701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S4702), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 132(b). FIG. 132(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S4801). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4802). In the processing of S4802, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of S4802 that the transfer processing has not ended (S4802: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to S4803. Also, as a result of the processing of S4801, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4801: No), the process proceeds to S4803.

In the process of S4803, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4803). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S4803, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S4803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4805), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 118B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2809 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4701: No in FIG. 132(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 stores data in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image, and the power-on title image, which have already been transferred in the main process. All resident object image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

In addition, in this control example, by correcting the display positions of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) that are displayed when the power is turned on, configured to be available. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare images to be used when the power is turned on and when performing normal effects, so the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

Furthermore, in this control example, the image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are treated as one image data, and depending on the coordinates, the third pattern display device 81 is displayed or the sub display device 690 is controlled. This eliminates the need to separately control (transfer, etc.) the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, thereby reducing the control load. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 may be provided respectively.

Further, since the sub-display device 690 has a resolution lower than that of the third pattern display device 81, the data amount of the image displayed on the sub-display device 690 is the same as the data of the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 less than quantity. Therefore, in the display control device 114, an image to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 with a small amount of image data (a title image when the power is turned on) is first stored in the resident video RAM. to the image display can be shortened.

Here, the image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 is composed of one image data as described above. Therefore, when the power is turned on, first, when the power-on title image (see FIG. 82(a)), which is the power-on image, is displayed on the sub display device 690, the area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 ( 81, 0 data may be set for the data of the area of 800 horizontal×600 vertical. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on, the image data to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 is set to match the resolution of the sub-display device 690 (see FIG. 81, image data of 400 horizontal×300 vertical). may be used to display on the sub-display device 690 . In this case, when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 690 (the main image when the power is turned on, the variation image when the power is turned on, etc.) is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 and the Using the image data (see FIG. 81, horizontal 1200×vertical 600) for display on the sub-display device 690, switching is performed between the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 for display. As a result, the amount of image data to be set to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the power is turned on can be reduced. can shorten the time to

Next, referring to FIG. 133, the normal image transfer setting process (S4703), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the previously executed display setting process (S2803) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4902). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4903), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905.

Also, in the process of S4902, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4902: No), the process of S4903 and S4904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4905. In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4906).

In the process of S4906, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4906 that the transfer process has not ended (S4906: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4906: Yes), the process proceeds to S4907. Also, as a result of the process of S4905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4907.

In the process of S4907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4907). is turned off (S4908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S4913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S4907: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 223p is ON (S4909). Then, if the back image change flag 223p is not on but off (S4909: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 223r is on (S4909: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag that is in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S4911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S4909, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated.

In the process of S4913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913). The determination in the process of S4913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S4913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4913 (S4913: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4914). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S4914, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4915), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing the normal image transfer processing, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the rear image is changed. Of the image data used in , image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, details of the drawing process (S2807), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2804) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated (S5001). That is, in the processing of S5001, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S2804). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the drawing process, after the process of S5002, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S5003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 118(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the first control example, the display image that is used when the power is turned on is corrected and used during normal presentation. As a result, since a common display image can be used when the power is turned on and when the normal presentation is performed, the capacity of the ROM can be saved.

In addition, in this control example, the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are used in the effect in which a specific role object (the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) and the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is moved. It is controlled to correct the contents of the production displayed on. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 becomes difficult to see, for example, the display content displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed on the sub-display device 690 in an effect in which a specific accessory moves. By doing so, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to visually recognize the display contents.

Furthermore, when the vertical movement unit 400 is moved and the door member 470 is opened, the opening/closing drive motor 466 for keeping the door member 470 closed is not excited when the door member 470 is dropped. It is controlled (energization stop control). As a result, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force acting on the door member 470 when the door member 470 is dropped without driving the opening/closing drive motor 466, so that power consumption can be reduced.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when a specific advance notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the winning hole during the time effect period which is periodically executed, the effect to be executed during the time effect period is restricted. controlled to do so. Thereby, when the countdown effect which is the specific advance notice effect is executed, the countdown effect executed during the time effect period can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is puzzled by the repeated countdown effect during the time effect period.

Further, the ball-entering effect displayed based on the ball entering the winning hole is displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the intervals at which game balls enter a winning hole are short, the period for displaying the ball-entering performance can be lengthened, and the player can easily visually recognize the ball-entering performance. be able to.

It should be noted that this control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of the above-described embodiments, or by combining the above-described embodiments. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the embodiments described above, the front rail portion 715 is formed in a single arc shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed from a plurality of circular arcs, and the direction of adjacent circular arcs may be reversed (wavy shape). In this case, the slide movement speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed, and the attitude of the effect member 620 is made unstable, so that the effect of rattling the effect member 620 can be performed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the effect member 620 forms an inverted state, the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is vertically above the first shaft support portion 613, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity may be arranged obliquely above the first pivot 613 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 of the left lower plate member 320 has been described as being horizontal in the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the widthwise outer side. In this case, the speed of the ball flowing into the upper surface of the left lower plate member 320 from the outside in the width direction of the board can be reduced by the acceleration in the direction of gravity, and the deceleration time of the ball can be shortened.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed as an elongated hole has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the positional deviation between the slide hole 643 and the slide shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by expanding and contracting the transmission member 640. FIG. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the position of the contact portion 644 can be switched between two positions has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously variable (movable). In this case, the change rate of the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the case where the attitude of the tip end swinging member 6556 changes between two positions has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the posture of the tip end swinging member 6556 may be changed in multiple steps. In this case, the amount of swinging of the expansion and contraction production device 6540 can be formed in a plurality of types, and the variation of production can be increased.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Of course, each of the above-described embodiments and control examples, or a combination thereof, may be used. Furthermore, although it is composed of a plurality of controllers, it may be composed of one integrated controller or several integrated controllers.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Example of Technical Concept for Changing Driving Force Transmission with Deformed Long Hole 553 of Rotating Arm Member 550>
A crank member that rotates about a first shaft and has a protrusion protruding at a position eccentric to the first shaft, and an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted are provided at a first position and separated from the first position. an arm member movably formed between a second position and a driving device for generating a driving force for rotating the crank member about the first shaft; The driving force is transmitted to the arm member when the protrusion is brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protrusion, and the arm member is moved from the first position to the second position. and a non-transmission area connected to the transmission area and blocking the transmission of the driving force. A1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a crank member provided with a projection projecting at a position eccentric from a rotating shaft, and an arm member provided with an insertion portion through which the projection of the crank member is inserted. , there is a gaming machine in which an arm member operates in conjunction with rotation of a crank member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-000306). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked. Therefore, the arm member is driven from the start of the crank member, and the timing of starting the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member cannot be shifted. In this case, when starting the crank member, a large force is required to overcome the inertia of the crank member and the arm member, and there is a problem that the size of the driving device is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes the transmission area and the non-transmission area connected to the transmission area, the crank can be rotated while the protrusion is inserted into the non-transmission area. By starting the member, the timing for driving the arm member and the timing for starting the crank member can be shifted. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission area from the non-transmission area. As a result, the driving force required for starting the crank member can be suppressed, and the size of the driving device can be reduced.

The arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves through the non-transmission area. For example, when the arm member is moved, it is exemplified by a case where it is moved by gravity or elastic force generated by an elastic spring for assistance.

Examples of the insertion portion include a recess having a bottomed recess shape and an elongated through hole.

In the game machine A1, the crank member is formed to be capable of rotating one or more rotations, and the insertion portion serves as the transmission area when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction. A gaming machine A2 comprising a selection area that becomes the non-transmitting area when the game machine is rotated in another rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, it is possible to change the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member according to the rotation direction of the crank member. As a result, by reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device without changing the rotation speed of the crank member, it is possible to form two speed modes of the arm member when the crank members are arranged in the same phase. can increase the variation in speed of the arm members.

In the game machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the protrusion and an inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion that faces the movement direction of the protrusion when the crank member is rotated in the one rotation direction. A game machine A3 characterized in that the selection area is formed by providing a margin portion that is filled with the selected area.

In addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is formed by providing the insertion portion with a margin, so that the game machine A3 has other functions for changing the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member. A member can be made unnecessary, and the material cost can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position and the second position is formed as a terminal position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the terminal position formed as the terminal position When the arm member is arranged at either one of the second positions, the arm member directed to the other opposite to either the first position or the second position formed as the terminal position A gaming machine A4 characterized in that a bounce suppression mechanism for suppressing movement is formed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, when the arm member is arranged at either the first position or the second position formed as the end position of the movable range of the arm member, It is possible to suppress the driving force that the driving device needs to generate in order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other side of the opposite side. Therefore, the durability of the driving device can be improved.

As the bounce suppression mechanism, when using the attractive force of a magnet, when suppressing the movement with a claw-shaped member, and when the load received by the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member, the arm A case where an insertion portion of a member is formed is exemplified.

In the case of attracting with a magnet, the magnet is required as a separate member, but it is possible to generate different magnitudes of attracting force depending on the internal composition of the magnet, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the claw-shaped member is used to suppress the movement, a driving device for operating the claw-shaped member is required, but the movement of the arm member can be mechanically blocked by the claw-shaped member.

When the insertion portion of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received by the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed toward the shaft of the crank member, there is no need to dispose a separate member for suppressing the movement of the arm member, Bouncing of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

In the gaming machine A4, when the arm member is arranged at least one of the first position and the second position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position where the non-transmission area is connected to the transmission area is the A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by making the circumscribed circle of the protrusion about the rotation axis of the crank member substantially the same.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the bounce suppression mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is arranged at the first position or the second position. As a result, the arm member can be smoothly changed from the moving state to the stopped state.

In addition, in the bounce suppression mechanism, the load applied from the insertion portion to the protrusion is directed toward the rotating shaft of the crank member, so it is possible to suppress the load applied in the rotation direction of the crank member, thereby suppressing the load on the drive device. can do.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position where the non-transmission region is connected to the transmission region is the same as that of the crank member. The circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis is substantially the same, and a biasing force is applied to move the arm member from the first position toward the second position, and the non-transmission region of the insertion portion is applied. At least one of an inner recess portion protruding inside the insertion portion and an outer recess portion projecting outside the insertion portion and having a size capable of accommodating the projection portion is formed on the side surface on the first position side. A gaming machine A6, characterized in that:

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission area is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member, and a biasing force is applied to the arm member to move the arm member from the first position toward the second position. In this case, the protrusion of the crank member is arranged in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, so that the arm member is prevented from moving by the protrusion and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved through the non-transmitting region so that the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, the arm member is moved. That is, when the protrusion is arranged to face the inner recess, the protrusion pushes the inner recess and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. Further, when the protrusion is arranged to face the outer recess, the protrusion is accommodated in the outer recess and the arm member is moved toward the crank member.

As a result, the projection of the crank member moves in the non-transmission region, and the movement of the arm member differs in movement width from the movement of the arm member that occurs when the projection moves in the transmission region due to the rotation of the crank member. can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving device and change the movement width of the arm member.

That is, in order to change the movement width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the driving device according to the movement width of the arm member. In this case, the control load on the driving device increases, and it is difficult to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, the movement of the arm member with different movement widths is formed by moving the protrusion of the crank member in the non-transmission area and arranging the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess so as to face each other. be. Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. Further, by narrowing the formation interval between adjacent inner recessed portions or outer recessed portions, the arm member can be caused to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

The mode in which the protrusion can be accommodated may be a mode in which the entire protrusion is included in the recess, or a mode in which a part of the protrusion is included in the recess.

<An example of the technical concept of limiting the swing width of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 by the arc-shaped hole 554>
A movable member that can move along a predetermined movement trajectory and can be arranged at a first position and a second position that are different from each other; a stopper member that limits the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or at the second position; A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine provided with a movable member that is formed to be movable and a stopper member that limits the movement width of the movable member (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the stopper member is immovably fixed, separate stopper members are prepared for the case where the movable member is arranged at the first position and the case where the movable member is arranged at the second position. Therefore, there is a problem that the space for arranging the stopper member becomes wide.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the stopper member moves corresponding to the movable member, the stopper member when the movable member is arranged at the first position is arranged at the second position. It can also be used as a stopper member in the case. Thereby, the space for arranging the stopper member can be suppressed.

Further, the stopper member changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or at the second position, so that variations in the movement width of the movable member are increased. be able to.

Examples of the stopper member include a projecting portion that protrudes from the transmission member and abuts against the movable member, and an inner wall portion of a recess that is recessed in the transmission member and accommodates a part of the movable member.

Examples of modes of movement include linear movement, curvilinear movement, meandering movement, vibration, rocking movement, rotational movement, and the like. Further, the width of movement in each mode of movement means, for example, in the case of linear movement, curvilinear movement, meandering movement, vibration, etc., the actual movement distance or the linear distance between two points. In the case of , etc., it means the actual movement distance, movement angle, and the like.

In the game machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is pivotally supported on a first shaft and that expands and contracts in the radial direction of the first shaft, , the extension length of the intermediate member is different, the predetermined movement trajectory is formed in an arc shape centering on the first axis, and the stopper member is provided when the intermediate member is in a predetermined extension state. A gaming machine B2, wherein the movable member extends along the predetermined movement locus.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the movable member is pivotally supported so as to be able to swing about the first axis and is formed to be able to expand and contract in the radial direction of the first axis. Equipped with members. Therefore, the radius of curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member about the first axis can be changed by the length of the intermediate member in the expansion/contraction direction.

Here, the stopper member extends along a predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member when the intermediate member is in a predetermined elastic state (the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member in the predetermined elastic state). is assumed to be the same as the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member in the case of . In this case, the movable member is moved along the stopper member when the intermediate member is brought into a predetermined expansion/contraction state, and the movable member can be moved in the extension direction of the stopper member. Therefore, the movement width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

On the other hand, if the intermediate member is set to a different expansion/contraction state than the predetermined expansion/contraction state, the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be made different from the curvature of the stopper member in the extending direction. The trajectory and the extension direction of the stopper member can be crossed. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, by changing the expansion/contraction state of the intermediate member, it is possible to change the movement width of the movable member.

In the game machine B2, the movable member includes a projection projecting toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the projection is inserted, and the projection is inserted into the insertion portion. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the movable member and the stopper member interlock with each other in an extending/contracting direction of the intermediate member in an inserted state, and the movable member abuts against the insertion portion.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the protrusion of the movable member is inserted into the insertion portion of the stopper member, so that the movable member and the stopper member interlock in the expansion and contraction direction of the intermediate member. , the driving device for expanding and contracting the movable member and the driving device for moving the stopper member can be used together. Further, the insertion portion restricts the movement of the movable member by coming into contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper that restricts movement of the movable member and a function that interlocks the movable member and the stopper member. As a result, it is possible to consolidate functions.

A game machine B4 characterized in that, in the game machine B3, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side by the expansion and contraction of the intermediate member.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side due to the expansion and contraction of the intermediate member. Thereby, the moving width of the movable member can be changed between when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion and when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion.

That is, when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along a predetermined movement locus follows the shape of the insertion portion), The movement trajectory and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement trajectory of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along a predetermined movement trajectory is substantially reversed from the shape of the insertion portion), the protrusion The angle formed by the movement trajectory of the movable member and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion becomes large, and the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be narrowed.

In the game machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so as to be able to change its posture while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. is changed, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member is changed.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3 or B4, the position of contact between the movable member and the insertion part is changed by changing the posture of the insertion part while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. In this case, it is possible to change the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member.

In any one of game machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion includes a groove portion that allows the projection portion to enter and exit along the movement trajectory, and the projection portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that a state can be formed, and the movable member includes a positioning assisting portion that engages with the stopper member in the separated state.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B5, it is possible to form a separated state in which the protrusion is separated from the insertion portion through the groove, and the movable member can be moved in the separated state. A positioning aid is provided for engagement with the stop member. Therefore, the formation range of the stopper member can be made smaller than the movement range of the movable member, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the positional deviation between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be reduced. can be prevented. That is, even if the projecting portion is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member is suppressed by the positioning assistance portion, so that the projection portion can be returned to the insertion portion.

<An example of the technical concept of supporting two points of the production member 620 that is supported in an inverted position>
a base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member and moves upward from a predetermined position, a driving device that generates a driving force for displacing the movable member, and is connected to the movable member. and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member, wherein the transmission member is swingably supported by a shaft support portion formed in the base member, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the length from the pivotal support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the support portion to the connection position of the movable member and the transmission member. .

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed in a base member and moves upward from a predetermined position is driven by transmission of a driving force through a gear (for example, See JP-A-2011-120640). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the driving device is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution of the driving device (for example, one step in a stepping motor) is determined by the support portion of the movable member. to the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, the positional adjustment of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes more difficult as the center of gravity of the movable member moves away from the supporting portion in the radial direction.

Further, when the center of gravity of the movable member deviates to one side from the inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion, a driving force is generated to displace the movable member in the opposite direction, thereby causing the movable member to stand upside down. Even if an attempt is made to maintain the state, if the driving force causes the center of gravity to shift to the other side, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity will coincide, resulting in a large displacement of the movable member.

Therefore, as the movable member becomes longer in the radial direction of the supporting portion, it becomes more difficult to stop the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the supporting portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device to the movable member to move the movable member upward is supported by the shaft support portion of the base member and connected to the movable member, The length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the pivot portion is formed shorter than the length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the supporting portion. Therefore, even if the movable member is elongated in the radial direction of the supporting portion, it is possible to suppress the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the driving device is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution of the driving device. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

The manner in which the movable member is supported by the base member includes a manner in which the movable member is pivotably supported by the base member, a manner in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, and others. A combined aspect and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine C1, a game characterized in that the length of an arm of the transmission member from the pivotal support portion to a connection position with the movable member is shortened as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the more the movable member displaced about the support part moves upward from the predetermined position, the more the transmission member from the shaft support part to the connection position with the movable member. Arm length is shortened. Therefore, compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved.

For example, when the number of revolutions of the driving device that rotates the transmission member is constant, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is the first length. A description will be made assuming that the second length is fixed at a second length shorter than the length of . At a constant number of rotations of the drive device, the transmission is better when the transmission member is fixed at the first length than when the transmission member arm length is fixed at the second length. The movement speed of the center of gravity of the movable member increases when the member is arranged in a predetermined phase.

Here, in the vicinity of the predetermined position, the movable member is quickly operated at the speed generated when the transmission member is set to the first arm length, and near the inverted state, the speed generated when the transmission member is set to the second arm length Consider a case where it is desired to move the movable member slowly at . As a method for that purpose, it is conceivable to change the rotation speed of the driving device in the middle, but this method cannot be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotation speed of the driving device. Further, even if the number of revolutions of the driving device can be changed, if the number of revolutions is to be changed midway, a detection sensor is required to detect the timing of the change, which increases the cost. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the arm length from the shaft support portion where the transmission member is supported to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is such that the transmission member is at a predetermined position. It is formed in such a manner that it is shortened as it moves upward from . Therefore, the transmission member can be set to have the first arm length near the predetermined position, and the transmission member can be set to have the second arm length near the inverted state, so that the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. .

As a configuration in which the length of the arm from the shaft support portion to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is fixed, a case where a projection projecting from the transmission member is inserted into and connected to the movable member is exemplified. be. In addition, as a configuration in which the arm length can be changed, a long hole is formed in the transmission member, and a projection projecting from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member, For example, the member is provided with an elongated hole in a portion supported by the support portion, and an insertion shaft is formed through the elongated hole from the base member.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the movable member has a protrusion projecting in a direction parallel to the support, and the transmission member is an elongated hole extending in a radial direction of the shaft support. A gaming machine C3 comprising an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted.

In the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion extends in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the projection portion of the transmission member is inserted through the insertion portion, thereby connecting the transmission member and the movable member. are connected, the moving direction of the connecting position is restricted to the radial direction of the pivot portion. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically change the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the transmission member with the movable member as the transmission arm swings.

Examples of the insertion portion include elongated holes that are formed through the hole, recessed portions that are formed as bottomed recesses, and the like.

A gaming machine C4 in the gaming machine C3, wherein the pivotal support is arranged vertically above the support, and the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged on a straight line connecting the support and the projection.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, when the movable member takes a posture in which the projection is arranged vertically above the support, the center of gravity of the support, the pivot, the projection and the movable member is Formed on a vertical line. In this case, the gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is applied vertically downward to the support portion and the pivot portion. As a result, no rotational force is applied to the movable member, so that the posture of the movable member can be maintained even if the power of the driving device is cut off. Thereby, the load on the driving device can be reduced.

A game machine C5 is characterized in that, in the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and rotation of the driving device is reduced by the worm gear.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and the worm gear slows down the rotation of the driving device, thereby controlling the driving device. The movement width of the movable member can be greatly reduced when operating with the minimum unit of resolution of . In addition, since the direction of transmission of force via the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive device side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to the load from the transmission member side, thereby improving the drive device. It is possible to reduce the load on the driving device when the motor is stopped.

In any one of game machines C1 to C5, an urging device is provided in which an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member above the supporting portion is generated in both directions of displacement of the movable member, and the urging force is A game machine C6 characterized in that the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the direction of displacement in an inverted state arranged vertically above the support portion, and increases as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

According to the game machine C6, in any one of the game machines C1 to C5, the biasing device generates a biasing force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the supporting portion, and the biasing force is such that the center of gravity of the movable member It increases as the movable member is displaced from the state (inverted state) arranged vertically above the support portion. That is, the urging force can be minimized in the inverted state.

Therefore, by increasing the urging force when moving the movable member upward from the predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the burden on the driving device that moves the movable member upward from the state in which the movable member is arranged at the predetermined position.

Further, the biasing force is generated in both directions of displacement of the movable member, and is balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved upward from a predetermined position and the drive device is controlled to stop, even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes the inverted state, the posture of the movable member is changed to the inverted state by the biasing force. can be directed to This makes it easy to stop the movable member in an inverted state.

In the gaming machine C6, the movable member can form a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount from vertically above the support portion, and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by the predetermined amount or more. The game machine C7 is characterized in that the rate of change in the biasing force when the displacement is the same is greater in the second state than in the first state.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6, the movable member is larger than the predetermined amount from the inverted state than the first state on the inverted state side in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support portion. In the second state of being displaced, the rate of change in biasing force for the same displacement is greater. In this case, when starting the movable member from the state in which the movable member is arranged in the second state, it is possible to reduce the load on the driving device at the time of starting. Moreover, since the acceleration of the movable member can be reduced when the movable member is arranged near the inverted state, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in the inverted state.

<An example of the technical concept in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during oscillation>
a movable member movably formed between a first position and a second position; a driving device for generating a driving force for moving the movable member; and an urging force for returning the movable member to the first position. and an urging device that generates an urging force in response to a rate of change in the urging force generated when the movable member is arranged in a first urging region from the first position to a predetermined position. When the member is arranged in a second urging region that is connected to the first urging region and is separated from the first position, the rate of change in the urging force is formed to be large. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that uses an urging force from an urging device such as an elastic spring as an auxiliary force when moving a movable member with a driving force generated by a driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011. -120640). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the biasing force of the biasing device is proportionally increased according to the amount of displacement of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the biasing device by changing the arrangement of the movable member. There was a problem that That is, it has been difficult to make the movement of the movable member smoother by suppressing the biasing force in one region, and to increase the biasing force to make the movement of the movable member more rapid in another region.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rate of change in the biasing force biased toward the first position is higher than that in the case where the movable member is disposed in the first biasing region. It is made larger when placed in the active region. That is, for example, when starting the movable member stopped at the second position toward the first position (second biasing region), a sufficient biasing force can be obtained from the biasing device, while the movable member is moved to the first position. When arranged in the urging region, the change in urging force is suppressed, and the movable member can be operated supplely (slowly).

In addition, as a mode in which the rate of change in the biasing force of the biasing device is changed by the arrangement of the movable members, the number of biasing devices that generate a biasing amount on the movable member increases in the middle, or the number of biasing devices increases. A case where the elastic spring is formed from an elastic spring and the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed by the arrangement of the movable member is exemplified.

In the game machine D1, the urging device is a pair of long members arranged on a pair of surfaces intersecting the moving direction of the movable member and sandwiching the movable member in the moving direction. are arranged on both sides of the movable member so as to face each other, and the other end, which is the end opposite to the one end, is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed; a main body sandwiched between the pair of elongated members, and a main body formed on the opposite side of the main body with respect to the pair of elongated members and contacting at least one of the pair of elongated members in the movement direction of the main body. a contact portion formed to be able to contact, the contact portion being connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is arranged in the first urging region, the movable member engages the pair Among the elongated members, one of the elongated members on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member is abutted and biased, and the movable member contacts the other elongated member. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the abutting portion abuts and is given an urging force.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the change in the rate of change in the biasing force of the biasing device is achieved by shifting the contact timing between the movable member and the pair of long members for each long member. can be formed by Therefore, it is not necessary to change the biasing force of the biasing device by control or prepare a separate member for improving the biasing force.

That is, since the movement of the pair of long members is restricted at the other end, one of the long members on the side closer to the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moves. The other elongated member on the opposite side receives no force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first urging region, when the movable member moves, the other elongated member arranged on the opposite side of the moving direction of the movable member stays in place.

On the other hand, in the second urging region, the other elongated member is brought into contact with the contact portion by moving the movable member. As a result, a biasing force is also generated from the other elongated member. Therefore, it is possible to increase the biasing force applied to the movable member in the second biasing region.

Examples of elastic springs include coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, and the like.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the urging device is a pair of long members arranged on a pair of surfaces intersecting the moving direction of the movable member and sandwiching the movable member in the moving direction. are arranged opposite to both side surfaces of the movable member, and the other end opposite to the one end is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is a main body sandwiched between the pair of elongated members; and at least one of the pair of elongated members formed on the opposite side of the main body with respect to the pair of elongated members in the moving direction of the main body. and an abutment portion formed so as to be able to abut on the movable member, the abutment portion being connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is arranged in the first urging region, the movable member Of the pair of elongated members, one of the elongated members on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member abuts and is applied with a biasing force, and the movable member is subjected to the second biasing force. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that, when arranged in the area, the intermediate portion of the one long member is pressed against the abutment portion arranged on the side of the one long member with respect to the body portion.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, the change in the rate of change in the biasing force is formed by pressing the intermediate portion of one of the long members against the contact portion. That is, one of the long members already deformed by the movement of the movable member is further deformed starting from the intermediate portion pressed against the contact portion, thereby causing a change in the rate of change in the biasing force. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subjected to deformation is shorter than in the deformation starting from the other end, so the rate of change in the biasing force with respect to the amount of movement of the movable member is reduced. increase. This makes it possible to increase the change in the biasing force with respect to the amount of movement of the movable member in the second biasing region. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate of change in the biasing force.

In the gaming machine D3, the one elongated member has a first bending point that is bent toward the contact portion side that is arranged oppositely, and the one elongated member is bent at the first bending point. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being pressed against a contact portion.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, one of the elongated members abuts against the abutting portion arranged opposite to the first bending point, so that the one of the elongated members abuts. It is stretched by contact with the part. Therefore, the tip portion of the biasing device that applies the biasing force to the movable member can be separated from the other end of the elongated member or the first bending point, which is the starting point of the biasing force. Therefore, the moment applied to the movable member from the biasing device can be increased in the second biasing region.

In the gaming machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged area that is enlarged in the movement direction as it separates from the other end of the elongated member, and one of the movable member and the elongated member is expanded in the tip enlarged area. A game machine D5 characterized in that the end of the game machine D5 is abutted against.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged area, and the movable member and one end of the long member are brought into contact with each other in the tip enlarged area. Therefore, when one elongated member is stretched by being pressed against the contact portion, the contact position between the movable member and the elongated member separates from the other end of the elongated member. direction to increase the amount of deformation of the elongated member. Therefore, the biasing force applied from the biasing device to the movable member can be increased.

A gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D2 to D5, variations in the change in the biasing force generated by the long member can be increased. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the biasing force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<An example of technical concept in which a plurality of outlets are provided and the buffer ribs 322 are formed on the lower plate 320>
Inside a game area formed so that a ball can flow down, a board accessory placed in contact with the lower edge of the game area and a ball formed on one side in the width direction of the board accessory are played. A first out port that is an opening for discharging from the area, and a second out port that is an opening formed on the other side in the width direction of the inner-board accessory that is opposite to the one side in the width direction and is an opening for discharging the ball from the game area. , wherein the first out port and the second out port include a lower plate portion extending from the lower side surface of the opening to the front and having a guide surface on the upper surface, and the guide surface of the lower plate portion The surface includes cushioning ribs extending in the direction of the opening of the corresponding side of the first outlet or the second outlet, and is raised from the guide surface on the outside in the width direction. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the aspect ratio of the cushioning ribs is formed to decrease toward the outer side in the width direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a plurality of outlets are provided (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 9-192301). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is preferable to reduce the size of each outlet to the extent that the number of outlets increases, because it is preferable to secure the space for arranging attackers, etc., but if the outlets are made too small, There is a problem that the discharge of game balls may be delayed.

For example, if the height at which the ball bounces up and down on the front side of the out port is equal to or greater than the vertical width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port. Also, for example, when the side surface of the accessory is arranged on the side surface in the width direction of the out port and becomes a wall, the ball flowing into the front side of the out port from the width direction collides with the side surface of the accessory and rebounds in the width direction. At this time, if the amount of rebound in the width direction becomes equal to or greater than the width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the cushioning ribs are formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate portion, so that the bounce of the ball can be suppressed and the ball can be decelerated. That is, when a ball collides from above and below, the cushioning ribs bend and deform, so that the cushioning ribs act as a cushion to suppress the bouncing of the ball. Also, when the ball collides from the left and right, the ball is damped by being stuck in the buffer ribs.

Here, the cushioning ribs extending in the opening direction are weak against loads from the left and right directions, and may be damaged by collision with balls from the left and right directions.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the guide surface has a stepped portion on the outside in the width direction, the ball flowing down from the left and right toward the buffer rib falls from above the stepped portion to the buffer rib. . In this case, it is possible to increase the vertical component of the direction in which the ball collides with the buffer ribs, thereby suppressing damage to the buffer ribs.

In addition, since the stepped portion has a function of blocking the ball moving in the lateral direction on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the ball moving on the guide surface from rebounding beyond the lateral width of the out port.

Since the buffer ribs are formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to obtain a large rebound suppressing effect in the vicinity of the center in the width direction of the game area where the falling balls tend to concentrate. As a result, the ball can be discharged smoothly from the out port. In addition, by aligning the curve of the lower side of the game area with the lower surface of the buffer rib, the arrangement position of the out port can be downwardly corrected.

Here, the reason why the effect of suppressing the bounce of the ball increases as the height of the cushioning rib increases is that the amount of deflection of the cushioning rib increases. In other words, the greater the amount of deflection of the buffer ribs, the more the cushioning effect works and the more easily the rebound can be suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable to keep the aspect ratio of the buffer rib constant in the left-right direction (the length in the vertical direction is constant) for the effect of suppressing rebound.

On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs is fixed (the length in the vertical direction is fixed), it is necessary to increase the formation height of the stepped portion, and the path of the sphere to the stepped portion is also upward. As a result, the game area is narrowed, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the aspect ratio (longitudinal length) of the buffer ribs is reduced at the widthwise outer side of the game area where the falling balls are difficult to concentrate, and the widthwise center of the game area where the falling balls are easy to concentrate. In , the aspect ratio (longitudinal length) of the buffer rib is increased. As a result, it is possible to achieve both improvement in ball ejection efficiency and securing of a game area.

Extending in the direction of the opening is not particularly limited, and means extending along the direction of the opening in a shape such as a straight line, a waveform, or a chevron.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the guide surface has an outer inclined portion that is downwardly inclined to the outside in the width direction of the game area.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, since the guide surface is provided with the outer inclined portion, the speed of the ball flowing into the guide surface from the outside in the width direction can be reduced by the gravitational acceleration, and the ball can be moved. Deceleration time can be shortened.

A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1 or E2, a non-flowing region is formed obliquely above at least one of the first out port and the second out port, in which balls cannot flow down.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1 or E2, since the ball flowing obliquely downward from the non-flowing area toward the guide surface is restricted, the ball does not flow down to the guide surface. The number of paths can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to narrow the direction in which the falling ball rebounds. Thereby, the outer shape of at least one of the first out port and the second out port can be narrowed.

In the gaming machine E3, the non-downflow area is provided with an opening/closing device that is arranged in the game area and that can be opened and closed to the front side, and is arranged above at least one of the first outlet and the second outlet. , a game machine E4 formed on the front side of the opening/closing device.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the non-flow region is formed by the opening/closing device. As a result, the space generated by suppressing the opening dimension of the first outlet or the second outlet in the direction toward the non-downstream area can be used as the installation space for the opening/closing device.

When the opening/closing device is in the closed state, the ball flowing down in front of the opening/closing device is caused to flow downward in the game area. It has a function to flow down. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form a non-flowing area, as compared with the case where the balls flow down irregularly by colliding with a nail or the like.

A gaming machine E5 in any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, wherein a direction adjusting rib extending in the opening direction is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first outlet or the second outlet.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port is provided with a direction adjusting rib extending in the opening direction in a rib shape. , the resistance to the ball flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed.

<Feature F group> (Use the image at power-on even during normal operation)
display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and storage means for storing display data corresponding to the display mode displayed by the display control means and setting means for reading out the display data from the storage means and setting the data as display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, wherein initial settings of a game are executed in the storage means. Initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed when the image is displayed is stored, and the setting means reads the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and sets it as display data to be displayed on the display means. The game machine F1 is characterized in that the initial display data read in the initial setting is used as display data to be displayed on the display means in an effect executed after the completion of the initial setting.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine, various effects images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to enhance the interest of the game. In such a game machine, generally, image information of an image to be displayed on the display device is stored in advance in a storage means, and when the image is displayed, the corresponding image information is read out from the storage means and image processing is performed. After applying, the image is displayed on the display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598). However, as the amount of image information increases in the gaming machine described above, the amount of image data used in the gaming machine increases, increasing the capacity of storage means for storing data, and increasing the load due to the process of reading the data. There was a problem. Due to such problems, an improvement in image display control has been demanded.

According to the game machine F1, since the initial display data displayed at the time of initial setting is also used for effects after the completion of the initial setting, the display data can be shared, the amount of display data can be reduced, and the image display There is an effect that control can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the display means is composed of first display means and second display means different from the first display means, and the display control means is the first display means or the second display means. and the setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and uses it as display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means. In the effect executed after the initial setting, the initial display data read out in the initial setting is set as display data for displaying on either one of the first display means and the second display means. The game machine F2 is characterized by:

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, it is possible to share the display data for the display means composed of the first display means and the second display means, and display control can be performed. This has the effect of reducing the load.

In the game machine F2, the initial display data is set such that the display areas of the first display means and the second display means are set as one display area.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the first display means and the second display means can be set as one display data, so there is an effect that the display control can be simplified.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a determination means for determining the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination result determined by the determination means are shown. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information, wherein the identification information is displayed in the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and in the dynamic display after completion of the initial setting. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is composed of normal identification information.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and the normal identification information. Since it is configured, there is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that it is the initial setting.

In the gaming machine F4, the initial image is a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a display including a game information image showing game content displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by comprising at least an image.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, the initial image is composed of the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and the display image including the game information image displayed on the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be notified of the contents of the game and the results of determination at the same time even during initial setting.

In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the initial identification information displayed on the first display means during the initial setting consists of a smaller amount of data than the normal identification information. F6.

According to the game machine F6, since the initial identification information is composed of less display data than the normal identification information, the control load at the time of initial setting can be reduced, and the initial identification information can be read and displayed quickly. effective.

In any one of the game machines F4 to F6, the second display means has a smaller display area than the first display means, and when no game is played for a predetermined period of time, the second display means displays , a game machine F7, wherein a display image including the game information image displayed in the initial image is displayed.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F4 to F6, when the game is not played for a predetermined period, the initial display data is used to display the game information image on the second display means. Since the image is displayed, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced and the content of the game can be notified.

In the gaming machine F7, when the game is not played for the predetermined period, the display data corresponding to the display image displayed on the first display means among the initial images is set to non-display. A gaming machine F8 characterized by:

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, the initial image displayed on the first display means is set to non-display, so that the first display means can display a different image. be.

In any one of the game machines F2 to F8, when the setting means sets the initial display data read out in the initial setting to the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting, The display data corresponding to the second display means is set to non-display, and when setting the second display means, the display data corresponding to the first display means is set to non-display. A game machine F9 characterized by.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F2 to F8, the first display means and the second display means can independently perform display using the initial display data. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine F9, the setting means sets the initial display data read out in the initial setting to the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting. A game machine F10 characterized in that it is set to be displayed in different display positions.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F9, it is possible to show to the player as if the display is different from the display displayed in the initial setting, and the initial display data can be used in a wide variety of ways. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic group G> (Positions of ○ and × are changed depending on the content of fluctuation between the shutter and the main liquid crystal)
a first display means capable of displaying identification information; a second display means different from the first display means; and dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the first display means or the second display means dynamic display means for displaying; privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the specific identification information is displayed on the first display means or the second display means; A game machine G1, further comprising switching display means for switching between the first display means and the second display means for displaying the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means.

Here, for example, by providing a plurality of display means for performing the production of the game machine and performing a variable production or a jackpot production on each display means, a synergistic production using the plurality of display means can be performed. There is known a gaming machine intended to enhance the interest of players (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-081256). However, in the gaming machine described above, there has been a demand for improved convenience using a plurality of display devices. Due to such problems, there has been a demand for an improvement in convenience.

According to the game machine G1, the effect (dynamic display of the identification information) displayed on the first display means or the second display means is switched between the first display means and the second display means by the switching display means. It can be displayed by switching. As a result, the identification information can be displayed at a position where the player can easily see it according to the state of the game, and there is an effect that convenience can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, a first drive means capable of driving to a first position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information dynamically displayed on the first display means, and a dynamic display on the second display means. and a second driving means drivable to a second position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information, and the switching display means is provided when the first driving means is at the first position. the identification information is displayed on the second display means, and when the second driving means is at the second position, the identification information is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by:

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the first drive means and the second drive means can suppress the problem of obstructing the recognition of the identification information.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second display means has moving means capable of moving on the front side of the first display means, and the switching display means moves the second display means by the moving means. The game machine G3 is characterized in that, when the identification information is displayed on the second display means, the game machine G3 is characterized in that it is switched so that the identification information is displayed on the second display means.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the identification information is prevented from being visually recognized by the second display means.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the display data of the display modes displayed on the first display means and the second display means are displayed in one display area. A gaming machine G4, characterized in that the gaming machine G4 is composed of synthetic display data corresponding to the second display means.

According to the game machine G4, the display data of the first display means and the second display means can be set by combined display data in any one of the game machines G1 to G3, thereby reducing the control load. be.

In the gaming machine G4, coordinate information is set for setting the respective display areas of the first display means and the second display means as one display area, and the combined display data is the The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that it is composed of display data for displaying respective coordinates corresponding to the coordinate information.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, there is an effect that the display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means can be easily set.

<Characteristic group H> (fall control)
A game machine comprising: a movable member having a movable portion movable at least between a first position and a second position; and driving means for driving the movable member to a third position and a fourth position, wherein: a regulating means for regulating the movement from the position to the second position; and the movable from the third position to the fourth position in a state in which the regulation by the regulating means is released based on the establishment of a first condition. The member is driven by the driving means, and the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position while being regulated by the regulating means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. A game machine H1 characterized by having drive control means for driving by means.

Here, for example, by moving a movable accessory provided in the gaming machine, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested. In such a gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the player by increasing the number of movable patterns of movable accessories (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-079687). In this case, it is necessary to use many driving devices (for example, motors) in order to increase the number of movable patterns of the movable accessory, resulting in an increase in power consumption. Due to such problems, suppression of power consumption has been demanded.

According to the game machine H1, by driving the driving means, the movable part can be moved by the drive vibration or the like, so power consumption is increased compared to the case where the movable part is electrically moved. has the effect of suppressing

The game machine H2 is characterized in that, in the game machine H1, it has a movable means for moving the movable portion from the second position to the first position.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the driving means drives the movable member to the fourth position, so that even when the movable part moves to the second position, the movable means moves the movable member to the fourth position. There is an effect that it can be returned to the 1 position. In this case, the movable portion may be moved to the first position by an inertial force (acceleration) that drives the movable member from the fourth position to the third position without providing the movable means.

In the game machine H1 or H2, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player and a predetermined effect indicating whether or not the privilege is given by the privilege giving means are provided. effect execution means for executing during a performance period, and the drive control means moves the movable member to the third position when a movable condition is satisfied during the period during which the effect is executed by the effect execution means. to the fourth position, and when an effect indicating that the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means is executed, it is easy to drive in a state in which the regulation by the regulation means is released. A gaming machine H3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the movable member is likely to be driven to the fourth position in a state in which the regulation is released in the effect that the privilege is likely to be provided. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that a privilege will be granted when the movable position is reached.

In any one of game machines H1 to H3, the drive control means moves the movable member in the same operation in a state in which regulation by the regulation means is released and in a state in which regulation is regulated. Gaming machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination of whether or not the movable member is restricted due to the difference in the operation of driving the movable member. Here, the operation means a difference in speed, a driving pattern, a difference in driving direction, and the like.

In any one of game machines H1 to H4, the drive control means is positioned between the third position and the fourth position when driving the movable member from the third position to the fourth position. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position for a predetermined period.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H4, by temporarily stopping, the effect that the movable part can be easily moved to the second position by inertia force etc. when it is not excited. There is

In any one of game machines H1 to H5, the fourth position is located below the third position, and the drive means reciprocates between the third position and the fourth position. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being configured to be able to

According to the game machine H6, one of the effects of the game machines H1 to H5 is that the movable part can be easily moved by the downward gravity.

The game machine H7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the moving means is composed of a stepping motor, and the regulating means energizes the stepping motor in a stopped state.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the moving means and the regulating means can be configured by stepping motors, and there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

<Feature Group I> (Avoids execution of similar effects)
an effect execution means capable of executing an effect; a specific period setting means for setting a specific period during which the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means; and a specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition that can be executed by the execution period of the effect is satisfied when executing the effect, and the effect executing means is determined by the specific condition determining means. The game machine I1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on determination that the specific condition is established.

Here, for example, when a certain amount of time has passed since the power of the gaming machine was turned on, by shifting to a specific effect different from the normal general effect and displaying the regular effect that is executed periodically, Gaming machines have been proposed for the purpose of increasing the interest of players (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252534). In this case, in the regular performance that is executed periodically, when the performance with sound and image similar to the regular performance is executed, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the regular performance is being executed. There was a problem that the player was confused. Due to such problems, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

According to the gaming machine I1, during the period in which the specific effect is executed, whether or not the specific effect can be executed is determined before the execution, so that the confusion of the player due to the malfunction of the execution timing of the effect can be suppressed, and the game can be easily understood by the player. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine I1 has a clock means capable of clocking clock information, and the specific period setting means starts the specific period based on the timing of the predetermined clock information by the clock means. A gaming machine I2 characterized by at least setting.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the start of the specific period is set based on the clocking of the predetermined clock information, so the specific period is set at the same time in the other game machines. There is an effect that it can be easily configured.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the effect executing means executes a normal effect other than the specific effect during the specific period, and the specific condition determination means performs the normal effect based on the normal effect being executed. A game machine I3 characterized in that it determines whether or not a specific condition is established.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, establishment of the specific condition is determined based on the normal effect, so the specific effect is determined in consideration of the relationship between the specific effect and the normal effect. There is an effect that it can be executed.

The gaming machine I3 has operation means that can be operated by a player and detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated, and at least one of the specific effect and the normal effect includes and an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means, and the specific condition is satisfied when the operation effect of the specific effect and the normal effect are not synchronized. Game machine I4 to play.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, it is possible to suppress the problem that the specific presentation and the normal presentation are executed at the same time, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand. effective.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I4, a dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on establishment of a start condition, and a specific identification that gives advantageous benefits to the player. special game state setting means for setting a special game state, which is a game state in which information is likely to be displayed, and the specific effect includes a suggestive effect indicating whether or not the special game state is set. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines I1 to I4, it is possible to recognize that a special game state is set by a specific performance, and to make the player interested in the specific performance. has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the specific period setting means sets the specific period for a predetermined period each time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. The execution means executes the specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied for each predetermined period based on the setting of the specific period, and the specific condition determination means determines the specific condition A gaming machine I6 characterized by comprising a delay means for delaying the specific effect and causing the effect executing means to execute the specific effect when it is determined that the condition is not established.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines I2 to I5, even when the specific condition is not established, the specific performance is delayed and executed, thereby giving more confusion to the player. It has the effect of suppressing the

<Feature J group> (0.125 second production)
information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; discrimination means for discriminating stored information; display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result discriminated by the discrimination means; and when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means , privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player; performance mode output means for outputting a predetermined performance; pre-discrimination means for discriminating the acquired information; and effect execution means for outputting a effect based on the result of discrimination by the pre-discrimination means to the effect mode output means; The output means has a plurality of output areas in which the output of the effect is set, and the effect executing means, when executing the output of the new effect, the output area in which the effect was previously output. A game machine J1 characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output area different from the output area.

Here, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting hole and the number of reserved memories increases, the reserved random number information is determined in advance (read ahead), and the determination result is a predetermined result (jackpot). etc.), the game machine aims to increase the player's expectation of whether or not the variable display corresponding to the hold will be a big win by executing an effect that suggests that the For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-16499). In such a game machine, if the efficiency of the game is improved by shortening the variable time, the period of presentation of the lottery results, etc. is also shortened, which makes it difficult for the player to understand. To solve this problem, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that is easy for a player to understand even when the fluctuation time is shortened.

According to the gaming machine J1, a plurality of output areas are set in which an effect based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means (an effect suggesting the determination result of suspension) is output. The next effect is output to an output area different from the output area where the effect was output. As a result, even if the determination result of the preliminary determination means is newly acquired during execution of the performance, the performance being executed can be reproduced by displaying the performance based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means in a different output area. It is possible to execute an effect based on a new determination result of the preliminary determination means without terminating the process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the gaming machine J1, a predetermined order is set for the plurality of output areas, and the effect executing means, when executing a new effect, outputs the output area next to the output area that previously output the effect. The game machine J2 is characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output areas in the order corresponding to .

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine J1, the effects are sequentially output according to the order set in the output areas, so that the problem that the output areas of the latest effects and the new effects overlap is eliminated. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect mode output means is composed of display means for displaying a predetermined display mode that is the predetermined effect, and the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of small areas as the output areas. A gaming machine J3 characterized by having a set area.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of effects can be displayed at the same time by effectively using the display area. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance period can be set longer.

In the game machine J2 or J3, the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to a predetermined number, and the information acquisition means stores information stored in the storage means when the acquisition condition is satisfied. If the information is less than the predetermined number, the information is acquired. Even if the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquisition means, the effect execution means The game machine J4 is characterized in that the output of the performance is executed to the output area corresponding to the next order of the output area.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of the game machine J2 or J3, there is an effect that the player can feel as if more information has been acquired.

In the gaming machine J3 or J4, when the information is acquired by the acquisition means, the effect content to be executed by the effect execution means is determined based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means for the information, and When the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquiring means, the effect content determination for determining the effect contents to be executed by the effect executing means based on the determination result other than the specific determination result. A game machine J5 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of the game machine J3, there is an effect that the player can play the game as if the information has been acquired.

In the gaming machine J5, the effect content determination means determines the effect period together with the effect content, and the determined effect period elapses in the output area where the effect output is executed by the effect execution means. A game machine J6 characterized in that it has end means for forcibly ending the performance being executed when the performance that is not executed is being executed.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effects of the game machine J5, it is possible to suppress the problem that different effects are output to the same output area, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine J5, the effect content determination means determines the effect period together with the effect content, and the effect execution means places the effect period in the output area for executing the output of the newly determined effect. The game machine J7 is characterized in that, when the performance that has not elapsed is being executed, the performance being executed is overwritten and the newly determined performance is executed.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effects of the game machine J5, it is possible to suppress the problem that different effects are output to the same output area, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In any one of game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, and J1 to J7, the game machine is A gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, it is provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displaying the identification information in a fixed manner, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, and J1 to J7, the game machine is A gaming machine Z2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, and J1 to J7, the game machine is A game machine Z3 characterized by being a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in game machines, display devices such as liquid crystal display devices display various effect images to increase the interest in games (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598).
However, the gaming machine described above is required to further reduce the control load.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and further aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the control load.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1 comprises display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and display by the display control means. and setting means for reading out the display data from the storage means and setting the display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means. wherein the storage means stores initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed when initial settings of the game are executed, and the setting means stores the initial display data in the initial settings. The data is read out from the means and set as display data to be displayed on the display means. In the effect executed after the completion of the initial setting, the initial display data read by the initial setting is displayed on the display means. It is used as data.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the display means comprises a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means, and the display control is performed. means for displaying the display mode on the first display means or the second display means; and the setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting, and displays the first display. display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means. It is set as display data to be displayed on either one of the display means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the initial display data is set such that the display areas of the first display means and the second display means are set as one display area. It is.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein an acquiring means for acquiring information and the information acquired by the acquiring means are distinguished based on the establishment of an acquisition condition. and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating a result of discrimination determined by the determination means, wherein the identification information is the initial identification displayed in the initial image. It consists of information and normal identification information that is displayed dynamically after the completion of the initial setting.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, wherein the initial image is a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the second display means. and a display image including a game information image showing game content displayed by pressing the button.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 6 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4 or 5, wherein the initial identification information displayed on the first display means during the initial setting has a data amount smaller than that of the normal identification information. It is configured.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and the display mode displayed by the display control means and setting means for reading out the display data from the storage means and setting the display data as display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, wherein The storage means stores initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed when initial settings of the game are executed, and the setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial settings. and setting the display data to be displayed on the display means, and using the initial display data read out in the initial setting as the display data to be displayed on the display means in an effect executed after the completion of the initial setting. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the display means includes first display means and second display means different from the first display means. The display control means causes the first display means or the second display means to display the display mode, and the setting means stores the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting. The display data is read out and set as display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Since it is set as display data to be displayed on either one of the first display means and the second display means, the control load can be suppressed even when displaying on the first display means and the second display means. There is
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the initial display data is such that the display areas of the first display means and the second display means are combined into one display area. Since it is set as a display area, there is an effect that display data can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition determining means for determining information acquired by the means; and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determining means, wherein the identification information is the initial Since it consists of the initial identification information displayed as an image and the normal identification information displayed dynamically after the initial setting is completed, the initial setting can also be recognized by the initial identification information. effective.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, the initial image is a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means. Since it is composed of at least the display image including the game information image showing the game content displayed on the second display means, there is an effect that the game content can be notified at the time of initial setting.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 4 or 5, the initial identification information displayed on the first display means during the initial setting is the normal Since it is configured with a data amount smaller than that of the identification information, there is an effect that the control load at the time of initial setting can be suppressed.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 Third pattern display device (part of display means)
114 display control device (part of display control means)
234 character ROM (part of storage means)
237 image controller (part of setting means)

Claims (6)

display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode;
display control means for displaying the display mode on the display means;
storage means for storing display data corresponding to the display mode displayed by the display control means;
setting means for reading the display data from the storage means and setting the display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means;
The storage means stores initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed when game initialization is performed,
The setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and sets it as display data to be displayed on the display means. A gaming machine, wherein the initial display data read out by setting is used as display data to be displayed on the display means. The display means is composed of a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
The display control means causes the first display means or the second display means to display the display mode,
The setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and sets it as display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means, and is executed after the initial setting. 3. In the rendering performed, the initial display data read out in the initial setting is set as display data to be displayed on either one of the first display means and the second display means. 1. The gaming machine according to 1. 3. A game machine according to claim 2, wherein said initial display data is set such that the display areas of said first display means and said second display means are set as one display area. Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition;
a determination means for determining information acquired by the acquisition means;
dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the result of discrimination determined by the discrimination means;
2. The identification information comprises initial identification information displayed in the initial image and normal identification information displayed in dynamic display after completion of the initialization. 4. The gaming machine according to any one of 3. The initial image comprises at least a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a display image including a game information image indicating game content displayed on the second display means. 5. The game machine according to claim 4, wherein the game machine is a 6. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein said initial identification information displayed on said first display means during said initial setting consists of a smaller amount of data than said normal identification information. .

Images